Southern Branch ;,
of the
University of California
Los Angeles
Form L I
z
This book is DUE on the last date stamped below
^ JAN 9 1358
UAH 1
jUN 9 ^^^> i^ i
! DISCHARGE4JRI,
I AUG 16 1978
^eit
3 IdZf
AUG 1 0 :si B
2 9 ^951
^jope? I
.S:^^
THE WILEY TECHNICAL SERIES
FOR
VOCATIONAL AND INDUSTRIAL SCHOOLS
EDITED BY
JOSEPH AI. JAMESON
GIRARD COLLEGE
PRINTING
FOR SCHOOL AND SHOP
A TEXTBOOK FOR PRINTERS' APPRENTICES,
CONTINUATION CLASSES, AND FOR
GENERAL USE IN SCHOOLS
BY
FRANK S. HENRY
Central High School, Philadklphia, Pa.
FoRMERiv Instructor in Printing, Philadklphia Trades School
FIRST EDITION, CORRECTED
TOTAL ISSUE, TWK.NT V-TllRKK TIlOfSAXD
XEW YORK
JOHN WILEY & SONS, Inc.
London: CHAPMAN & HALL, Limited
Co[)\ri,t^lit, lyiy
BY
rk.WK S. JIIAKY
PREFACE
According to the Census of 1910, printing ranked sixth
among the important industries of the United States, with an
invested capital of $588,000,000, and offering employment to
over 258,000 persons. Since that time it has been steadily
advancing. The ])rinting business today is replete with labor-
and time-saving dexices, and is l.)eing conducted on the basis
of both expediency and efficiency. All well-equip}~)ed and
properly conducted printing establishments have installed
cost systems, and, by the use of time-stamping devices, are
keeping accurate account of the time that employees spend
on their jobs.
While, in many respects, these changes have been of advan-
tage to the emi)lover, they have been to the detriment of the
apprentice. Formerly it was the custom to put an a})prentice
in the care of some competent workman. In the course of
four years the journeynian was sup])oscd to imjxirt to the
ap})rcn1ice a full, working knowledge of the trade. Today
the journeyman is ])racti:ally working against time; he cannot
train an apprentice and still make a creditable showing, con-
sequently the a\-erage ap])rentice is sim])ly drifting along,
picking up what knowledge he can. If he is a])t, he may learn
to perform certain operations of the trade by imitation, usually
without knowing why. This lamentable condition does not
exist in every office, it is true, l)ut it is ] prevalent enough to
demand attention. Employers arc l)cginning to realize that
in stri\-ing for efficiency in ]>roducti(')n thcv have been neg-
lecting a still more vital factor — that of training efficien':
help.
iv PREFACE
With the idea of formulating some definite plan for the
training of ap])renticcs, the United T^pothetie of America in
1911 a])])()inted an a])prenticeship conimittee to investigate the
matter. This resulted in the establishment of a permanent
committee. It was realized that if apprentices were to be uni-
formly trained a series of textbooks was necessary. The com-
mittee has in preparation sixty-four books, fully covering every
phase of printing. This will undoubtedly be a valuable library
of technology. The price of the complete series, however,
will debar it from everyday use in the schoolroom.
When the author first undertook the teaching of printing
at the Philadelphia Trades School, he was handicapped by the
lack of a textbook. There were many excellent books on the
subject of printing, but none, so far as he knew, compiled
especially for school use. At the juesent time the local unions
throughout the jurisdiction of the International Typographical
Union are collaborating with the various local t\-pothetae,
and endeavoring to establish continuation schools for printers'
apprentices in all the large centers throughout the United
States. This means, naturally, an increasing demand for a
practicable medium of instruction in the trade, and relying
u])on an experience of twcnty-fi\"e years of actual practice
in the shop, in every position from, apprentice to superin-
tendent, cou])Ied with hvQ years of teaching, the author has
attempted to supply this need.
In the preparation of the manuscri])t, the author has kept
in mind the fact that he is addressing the l)oy who knows noth-
ing of the subject. The aim has been to explain fully, yet
succinctly, the fundamental principles underlying the various
processes. To the initiated the attention given to details at
times may seem unnecessary. In the more advanced processes,
howe\'er, it is hoped that even the practical man may find
helpful suggestions.
It is manifestly im])0ssible in a book of this size to co\-er
exerv ])oint and ])hase of ])riiiting. An attempt has been made,
therefore, to present clearly and simj)ly only those essentials
PREFACE V
of the subject on which both teacher and student may build,
and in this way to keep the book brief enough to meet the
requirements of a practicable text and of a size conveniently
to be carried in the pocket.
It has been an inspiration to the author in his work as a
teacher to look back to his apprenticeship days, when he was
singularly fortunate in being trained by a skilled workman,
and he takes this opportunity of expressing his gratitude to
Mr. James H. Sterrett for guidance during that formative period.
Acknowledgment is also due to Mr. T. Grow Taylor for kind
advice and helpful suggestion when the author took up the
study of proofreading, and also for his kindness in critically
reading the manuscript of the chapter on Proofreading.
The author acknowledges his indebtedness to Mr. Frederic
\V. Goudy and Mr. Frank J. Milon for revision of some of the
text and to the following firms for the loan of cuts and other
material used in illustrating the book: American Type Founders
Co., Bullock Manufacturing Assoc, Challenge Machinery Co.,
Chandler & Price Co., Golding Manufacturing Co., Hamilton
Manufacturing Co., Horace Hacker & Co., H. A. Hempel,
Keystone Type Foundry, Lanston Monotype Machine Co.,
Mergenthaler Linotype Co., Miller Saw-Trimmer Co., Morgan
& Wilcox Mfg. Co., H. B. Rouse & Co., Star Tool Manufac-
turing Co., Wm. H. Sylvester & Son, John Thomson Press
Co., \'andercook Press, and Wickersham Quoin Co.
Frank S. Henry.
Philadelphia,
April, 1917.
CONTENTS
PAGE
rKKFACK
iXTRODrCTIOX
CIIAPTKR 1
Composition — Tvi'i:, Si'ai'ks, and Lkads i
Lay of till' case— riu' b, d, ([, ami p. — Keriicd letters. — The point
SNStem.- i'hc lu-w and tlu' oKl system. — Tabic I. — The em of tlic
bod\-. — Tlie i)i(a em. — Sizt's of spaces. — Thickness of sf)aces. —
Table H. -The three-point space of eij,dit-point. — Point-thick
spaces.- I'oinl line.— Point -set. — bet:;il)ilit\'. — Leading. — Linotype
slugs as spacing material.
CHAJ'TKR II
("oMPosrrrox — Skttixc, Plain M \tti;r 13
.Making up a stick. — The composing-rule. — Setting type. —
Justifying a line.— Lniform sjiacing. — Rules for sjxicing. — Empty-
ing the stiik. — How to use the galley. — Tying up a job.
CIL\PriT-l ill
T.\KiX(; .\ Proof. Cokrkctixo rm; Job. axd Rkturxixg Typk to Case 23
I'lacing a job on the stone. — Pulling a ])roof. — Proofs in colors. —
( ialle\ -press. l'ress-j)roofs. — Tln' A\'ashington 1 land-press.-- The
Poio Proof-press. — Ihe Potter Proof-press. — The X'andercook Proof-
press. — Correcting the job. — Pullinii; a re\ise. — Saxing cord for
future use. Making up pages. ---Cleaning l\'lic.- Cleaning rules.
— Distributing type. — Pilling a\va_\- leads and furniture.
CIL\PTi:R IV
Type CAi.cn. .\rioxs 36
How much will it make ?-— What .-i/.e type shall I use ?"— Deter-
niininir the number of cms in composed matter.- - I )eterminin,<j; the
^■alue of composed type.- Table III. Determining weight of t_\-pe
by measurement. — Determining the amount of leads to a page.
CONTENTS
CHAPTER V
PAGE
Proofreading 44
Requirements for proofreudinK- — Proofreuders' marks. — Tal)le
IV. — Order of ])roee(lure in proofreading,'.— PuncUialion. — Marks
of inmctuatioii.- Use of the eonima. — Tlie dash. — Tlie semicolon.
— The colon. --'I'he jieriod. — The h\i)hen. — The apostrophe. —
Quotation murks. --'J'he interrogation mark. — The exclamation
mark. — Parentheses. — Brackets. — l.)i\'ision of words. — Compound
words. — Capitalization. — Printing-office stj-le.
ch.\]'tj:r \t
Type E.\ci:s 73
General classification. — Text. — (jothic. — Roman. — Italic. —
Scri[)t. — Old-style. — Modern. — 'Phe serif. — Old-style and modern
serifs. — Other ji;roups. — Cheltenham Oldstyle. — Clearface. — Tx'pe
families. — " Pi " as an aid to t_\pe study. — Comparison of serifs. —
Swash letters.
cPL\prj:R \ir
Job Composition 84
General sur\-e\- of the field. — The layout man. — Fundamental
princif)les. — 0{)tical center. — Palance. — IIarmon\-. — Tone. --Con-
trast.— .\j>propriateness. — (Jroujjin^. — Mass grouping'. — Panel
^'roui)in^'.-- Pro{)ortion. — Table of ])roi)orlions. — Table V.— Stand-
ardizing' j)roportioiis.— Borders and ornaments. — Initials. — Shajx-
harmonw— Selecting the salient features of a job. — Impro\in^ a
job. — Spacing job tyjie. — Letter-spacing'. — The sc|uare effect. —
Selection of rule for a job. — .MiKninp rule with t_\-pe.- -Side-face or
chamfered rule.— .Miiered corners. — To obtain perfect joints in
tables. — Skeletonizing'.— Setting a register job. — .Mlowing for
squeeze. — Concluding hints.
ciiAPri;K \ii[
SirTi.xc, A Jon 116
'Ihc order-blank. \nal_\-i- of < opy. Size l\pe to be u^ed.- -
position on tlie hlieet.- Lavout.'-. - .^pei im(;ns.
CONTENTS ix
CHAPTER IX
PAGE
Setting Tables and Otiikr Intricate ^Matter 141
Ability required. — Jobs containing rules. — The Typof-nbular
System. — Iland-set ruled blanks. — Wa.x-engraving. — Monot3-{)c
method of setting rule work. — Casting off a table. — Three-point
spaces of eight-point. — Point-thick spaces. — Line-up of figures. —
Setting more than one column in a single measure. — Plank-book
headings. — Setting and registering type to horizontal lines. — ■
Running type around cuts. — Setting t^'pe in circles. — Algebra,
genealogies, and pedigrees.
CHAPTER X
Locking Cp Forms 163
General princij)les. — Quoins. — Locking up a form. — Bearers. —
Gudgeons. — Locking up register jobs. — Locking-quoins. — Jobs
with rules. — Allowance for squeeze. — Troublesome corners. —
Squaring the form. — Wooden furniture. — Riding of forms.
CHAPTER XI
Imposition 176
Placing pages on the imposing-stone. — Hand- and machine-
folding. — Margins. — Determining margins. — Determining the lay
of a form. — Various parts of a form. — Imposing the form. — I'ages
out of center. — Making u}.) to the paper. — La\' of forms: the four;
the eight; the twelve; the si.xteen; the twentj-; the twenty-four. —
Folders. — Machine-fold. — Signatures. — Insetting. — Press-points. —
Other forms. — Proper lay of lengthwise forms. — Folding heavy
paper. — Chases.
CHAPTER XII
Cutting-tools for Printers 197
Miller Saw-Trimmer. — The lead-cutter. — Alitering-machines. —
The upright machine. — Trimming material. — The burr on rule. —
Trimming to gauge. — Cutting to multiples of a point. — Cutting
very small pieces of rule. — Type " htting " on a mitering-ma-
chine. — Type-high machines. — Care of machines,
COXTi:XTS
ciiAri'i;k XIII
i'A(.i;
CoMPOSIN(;-M \(1IIN"L> JC()
Iu;or.oni\' nf niacliiiK- i iinii)(i.-ili(ir.."-'riK- Linotype. --Tlu' .Moni)-
typc, — MountinL' illu>tration> fh machiiir-M-l cnrnjxtr-iiion, — Xon^
distribution. — TIk- Intcrtypr.- '!"> pr-i a.-iinL' machines.
ellAPTilR XIV
]'ki;s.-^\\' irk :;o
riatiTi pi\-M-.- Tlu- bill.- -Till.- iiiaiLii. — Tlie clraw-slu-et.— Tin-
,i:ri[>pi-'i-s.-- i\(ilk'r-lK-ariT>.--l\i)lk-i>.- -Oi'.inu' t!;L- pr^■^^.- Shrinl^ini,'
nf furnitui-c- InipiT.-r-iun.- Tlu' ixaiipan.- -InscrtiuL: tlic furm.—
.Makf-rc-acw- ( )\\rla_\"iiiL'.-- (aii(lt>. — In-rdinu a pr\~>.— 1 irxinir
tlu' slu-ft.-;. -."^Hp.-lK't-tin'j. — r'.:i\ fliijx.'-, — OpL-niiiLr and ilDsine i-n-
^^•ll)fK■.-.- I-'ri-kct. — 'icL'isU-rinL:.— Slurrinu' nf ruk- job:;. — I'.niljo--;-
itiu.-— IV-rfiiratinu'. — Scoring'. — C'ultinL' and slittin'_'. — I'.i-intint:,
cuttini:. .-coring', and fierforatin^' r.u one (i[>(.Tati()n. — I'riritinL' a
two-color rcLristcT job by tlu- aid of a friskct. — \\ asliin;:; u{). —
Kemo\-in2 hard ink from roller? and [)re5s. — Safety devices.
cii.\rTi:R x\'
PkIXTIXC-IXK 2^2
('ompo^iti()n. — Piemen t~. — The whicle. — The drier. — Prt.T->room
tt'mperature anrl himiiditw — .Xilaptini: ink lo -took. — How to
rmiedx' ink trouble-.- - 1 )upr-.— Mixim: i:ik.— .Mixiivj tini^ an.d
r-liade~.--l )uutone ink.-. — Halfloncr-.— 'i'hree-color jirociss work. —
Proce-> inks.
CH.M'ri.K X\T
P.\Pi:R 2<'2
Oriudn. — The liber.- -Pulp. --Tr.e lieati-r.— Tlie riilninL'-enudnt.-.
-- Tlu; {lajier-makir.LT mach.ine.— Ilar.d-niade paper.— Hook jiapers.
--Ida' paper-.- ^i/.r- <,i p'apir. d'i:r nam.- W'liLdits of paper.- -
kclali'.a- ■.veiL'iit.-. - ri:r Laki-i-io .'^y-tom. I )e-iL:naLin'j; paper
a.<.'rdin- lo a -ub-tam e ivamlnr.- -d'.ablr \d .— Idr.'elMiH- -i/e.-. —
d'aldr \-II.— Id-urimr and ,^:-\\n- -:n, k.
INTRODUCTION
A PRIZE was recently offered by "The Inland Printer"
for the best answer to the question, "What is a Printer?"
Anyone who has made a study of printing will realize how diffi-
cult it is to define the term. Printing, as a process of making
impressions in or leaving marks upon a surface, is of great
anticjuity. There are still extant many clay tablets, waxed
surfaces, scratched leaves, engraved wood-blocks, and other
devices that serve as guideposts to mark the advance of print-
ing from hum]:)le beginnings to the numerous and complex
methods of today.
The average la\'man has but little idea of the immensity of
the field of i)rinting and of its importance to modern civilization,
including, as it properly does, not only the printed word, and
the illustrations that are the necessary adjuncts, but also the
textile field — the printing of cloth for garments, of floor cover-
ings, wall-paper, tapestries, etc. The average typographic
printer also has but a faint concej)tion of the numerous ways in
which his texts are illustrated.
In general, there are three fundamental j^rinciples involved
in printing: from raised surfaces (letter})ress), from plane
surfaces (lithographic), and from sunken or engraved surfaces
(intaglio). Taking them in the inverse order, intaglio printing
emijraces steelplate, copperplate, and ])hotogravure; litho-
graphic printing covers all those processes based on the selective
properties of a prei)ared surface for greasy ink and water, and
includes lith()gra])hy, zincography, and coUotyp-y; letter])res3
is the f)rinting done from raised surfaces, such as L}'pe, halftone
plates, zinc-etchings, woodcuts, etc.
xi
xii INTRODUCTION
Ivich of these methods has its own special sphere, but there
are numerous points of contact. Letterpress is l)y far the most
important; and the most important Ijranch of letterpress is
t\i)o<^raphy. This treatise is de\-oted to t\-|)ographic printing,
but, as stated in the i)reface, it makes no pretense of fully
covering the subject. The student of typography is urged
to acquire at least a smattering of the \-arious other ways in
which things are printed. He will certainly ha^'e a broader
and better conception of his own branch of the work. He
should also ha\-e a general knowledge of all the trades allied to
his own, such as typefounding, electrot^ping, paper-making, etc.
Teachers of |)rinting should take their students on shop visits,
and see that they get first-hand information on these topics.
To the uninitiated, the setting of type seems the simplest
of mechanical operations. Apparently, all that is necessary is
for one to know the lay of the case; the operation of ])lacing
the t\'])e in the stick is assumed to be so simple that e\-en a
child should do it. If this were all there is to t\'])esetting,
there would be no need for schools of printing. The student
soon learns, however, that he must possess considerable special
knowledge and skill before he can be considered a good com-
[)ositor.
The boy who makes the greatest strides in printing is he
who has attained at least the eighth grade in public school,
and has a fair knowledge of punctuation, capitalization, spelling,
and the division of words. If he is to be a job compositor he
should ha\e a j)redilecti()n toward art. He should possess
mechanical ability. Abcnx' all, he should l)e studious, for he
\\\\\ fmd that if he is to adx'ance in his chosen field he must be
continually studying to keep ])ace with ]>rogress.
A bo\' who does not ])ossess these recjuisites had better
not undertake the \v()rk. 'fhere are entirely too many n:en of
inedioc re altility in the busine.-s now. much to the annoyance of
tni])loyer<. It is to be regretted that such men do not strive
to impro\e their earning ca])acity by judicious study. There
i> constant demanrl for men of abilitv.
INTRODUCTION XUI
The student who takes up printing as his life's work is
strongly urged to make a study of every branch of the craft.
He will find much valuable material in the various books on
printing to be found in the public libraries. He is especially
urged to consult the current numbers of the various magazines
devoted to printing and make a special study of the reset speci-
mens, and also follow the department in "The Inland Printer"
devoted to apprentices. He should also gather together those
pieces of printed matter that impress him as being either very
good or very bad, and take up with his instructor the question
why they appear good or bad. Much useful information may
be acquired in this way.
The instructor should show samples of good and bad print-
ing and tell why they are good or bad.
Layout work should be a strong feature of the course of
instruction, as it oft'ers the instructor endless opportunity to
criticise, and point the right road. It also aft'ords the student
excellent ])ractice.
As an aid to the study of t\pe faces, the student should
carefully read the specimen-books issued by the various type-
founders. He should also take up hand-lettering, and make a
studv of historic ornament.
PRINTING
CHAPTER I
COMPOSITION— TYPE, SPACES, AND LEADS
1. Lay of the Case.— Owing to the general use of type-
setting machines, very little plain or straight matter is now set
by hand. For this reason the pair of cases, formerly very much
in vogue, is now seldom used. Nearly all job t\pe is kept in
dust-proof cabinets (Fig. i), and the California job case is
nipidly supplanting other forms. In Fig. 2 is shown the lay
of the two styles of cases. The arrangement of the capitals
and of the lower-case letters is the same for all styles of cases.
A study of the figure shows that the lower-case letters most
frequently used are grouped about the center of the case. The
capitals run alphabetically, with the exception of the J and
the U.
The quickest way for a student to familiarize himself with
the lay of the case is to draw a diagram of it and locate on the
diagram all letters in their proper places. A printed diagram
carried in the pocket and studied at odd moments, is also a
splendid aid. Setting the following sentence, which contains
every one of the letters of the alphabet, will give practice in
locating the boxes:
"The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog."
2. The b, d, q, and p. — Inasmuch as type is cast in reverse,
students have trouble at first in readini^; tvi)c and in distin-
PRTXriXG
("ornposiiig-fra:i
TYT^F., SPACES, AXI) LEADS
Upper
Lov,er (\.~l.
A Pa Hi oi' (\\si-.
Fk;.. 2. — Slio\vin,L( Lav of Cases.
4 PRlXriXG
guishing certain K)V,-cr-case letters. In reading type, the stick
should not be turned upside cIdwh, l)Ut stiould l^e held just as in
setting t\-j)e. To distinguisli Ijetwcen the b and d, and the j)
and (j, oljserve tliat the rt)und parts of the I) and d face each other
when held o\-er their respective bo.xes, and that the round parts
of the (| and p face the opposite wa\-, or toward their respective
boxes.
3. Kerned Letters. — When a letter is cast in such position
that the face projects o\'er the side of the body, it is said to be
kerned. The lower-case f and j are Ijoth kerned. With some
faces of t\'pe, if we \\'ere to ])lace an i, 1, or f beside the f, the
projecting jiart of tlie letter would \-ery likely be broken off.
To prevent this, such conildnations of letters are cast on one
bod\-, and these are known to ])rinters as lo-^otypcs. The correct
name for them, liowex'er, is li'^dtiires. We have the following
combinations: fi, fl, ff, fli, and hi. Some roman letters are
cast without kerns. Nearly all italic fonts have some kerned
letters. The characters (5t and it, found in some fonts, are
ligatures.
4. The Point System. — Some time prior to the year 1450
Gutenberg inx'cnted the casting of metal t\'pe in molds. As
the art of printing adwmced. r.iany new sizes were cast, but no
attempt was made tt* cast them with a uniform gradation in
size, and it v/as di:Vu;ult to build up one size of Ijody to ecpial
another; that i^.jasliiy tricni.
To obviate tliis, Tournicr, in 17,57, advocated a method of
casting tvpe according to soiue unit, 'bhe si/e l.;nown as pica
was in use in wiriotis roimtrits in luu'o])e, and A\'a- con>idere(l a
standard size. Tahin;: the ])ica as a base he diNided it into
twcl\-e erjual pvirts, eacli oi vdiich he ca.lled a point. He chose
one-tux'lfth of a. pit a a- the v.nit brc;iu-e tliere existed hx'c sizes
of t\],ie between j'iea ,ind UMnjiareil. A- luvipiircil was just
half tiie .-ize of ])!;■:!, tlii-, :iiad.e the sueees-ion of sizes sewn,
e'glit, nint", ten, :\\\i\ ele^"en pnint, an\' one of whicli couhl be
ji!-tiiied with another I-y th.e u.-e of material made to tlie same
unit.
TYi'i;, SPACES, Axij lj:aijs 5
This plan of Fournier's was an excellent one, but it involved
so much exj-jcnse in the chan.i^nn:,^ of t}-pe molds that iy])c-
founders hesitated to ado})t it. In the }'ear 1878 the foundry
of Marder, Luse & Co., of Chicago, was destroyed l,i\- fire.
When it was rebuilt the firm chan,L!:ed o\xt to the point s}'stem.
This was the beginning of the point s}'steni in America. The
L'nited States Typefounders' Association Imally adopted it in
1887. It is the only system in use in llrst-class offices today.
While pica has alwa}"s been considered a standard size, it
has never been of a uniform size. It has varied in different
countries, and even among typefounders in the same country.
Tests of pica sizes haive demonstrated that they varied from
702 to 75 picas to the English foot of tweh'e inches. The
American pica runs about three ]:>oints over 72 lines to the foot.
Its actual measurenKmt is 0.16608 of an inch. One-twelfth of
this, or one point, is, therefore, 0.01384 of an inch.
It is popularly su])posed that six ])icas equal one inch. This
is approximately so, but not aljsolutely, for six ipicas measure
but .99648 of an inch.
Fig. 3 shows the increase in thickness, by points, from one to
twelve.
I point = o.oi,';S4 inch.
I pica = 0.1660S incli.
Fig. 3. — Showing Increase in Tiiickne.~s, by Points, from One to Twelve.
5. The New and the Old System. — In Tal.ne I is given
the name of each ty{)e size tmder tlie old s_\-steni of nomenclature
and the size nearest to it under the PoliU Sx'stem. Xonpareil,
brevier, and pica, and their multiples, are tlie only ones that
remained the same size under the nev; svstem.
PRTXTIXG
TABLE I.— TYPE SYSTE^MS
Size.
New System
Name, Old System.
3 -point — Excelsior
3 2-point — Brilliant"
4 -point — Semi- Hrc\ier
42-point — Diamond
5 -point — Pearl
Sj-{ioint — A.^att'
6 -point — Xonpareil
7 -point— .Minion
8 -point — Hre\icr
9 -point — Honr^eois
10 -point — i>on^ Primer
11 -jjoint — Small Pica
12 -point — Pica
14 -point — 2-line ^linion, or Eng-
lish
16 -point — 2-linc Brc\icr, or Co-
lumbian
Sizp.
New System.
iS-jJoint— 3"
20-point — 2
22-point — 2
24-{)oint — 2-
28 point — 2
3o-i)()int— 5
36-point— 3
4 2-point — 7
48-point — 4
54-point— 9
60-point — 5
7 2-point — 6
Name, Old System.
line X'onpareil, or
(jrcat Primer
line Long I'rimer, or
Paragon
line Small Pica
line Pica
line I'^nglish
line Nonpareil
line Pica, or Double
Great Primer
line Nonpareil
line Pica, or Canon
•line Nonpareil
line Pica
■line Pica
6. The Em of the Body. — When calculating the amount of
type contained in any ])iece of com])osc(l matter, it is measured
up in ems, and this cm, or tmit, is the cm of the body. The
sciuare of each size of type is called the em of that l)ody.
Thus, the cm of six-i)oint is six ])oints square; the em of eight-
])oint is eight ])oints scjuare; and so on. In Fig. 4 is shown
the actual size of the em in the various points.
Six-Pt. Scvcn-Pt. Kight-Pt. Nine-Pt. Ten-Pt. Eleven-Pt. Twelve-Pt,
Fig. 4. — Actual Sizes of the Em.
7. The Pica Em.^ 'hhe size known ;;s ])ica had been in usu
in \-arii)us I-^uropean countries for man\' }-ears prior to the inven-
'' 'I'luTc seems to be a (li\ci'sily of ()|)inion regarding the i)()int si/.e of
biilliant . I )e X'iniu- gi\(s il as 4 i>()inl. liiilliant a(tii:ill_\' nu-asured
ali'iiit _•;.; ])(>iiit<. When the .MacKellai-, Smiths \- Jordan Company
adnpted the i'oiiit System I hey east JJrilliant on a ,^J4)oint body. I'our-
]joint they (ailed Semi- l»i'e\ici'.
TYPi:, SPACES, AXD LEADS 7
tion of the point system, and its size varieil slii^htly in different
countries. It has, however, always been considered the unit
of length.
In order to facilitate the work in a composing-room, leads,
slugs, ruk-s, and furniture are used in standard lengths. These
lengths are designated in ems, and the em is the pica em. Thus,
when a lead twenty-four ems long is spoken of, twenty-four
pica ems is meant. If furniture is spoken of as four by
twenty, what is meant is that its width is equal to four pica
ems, and its length is equal to twenty pica ems.
If a pica-gauge is not at hand when measuring material, we
may approximate its size by measuring it in inches, and assuming
that there are six picas to an inch.
It is very essential for the apprentice to remember that all
accessory material in a printing-office is graduated in pica ems.
When material is either cast or cut to even multiples of pica
it is called labor-saving, and should never be cut or altered in any
manner.
8. Sizes of Spaces. — The spacing material that usually
accompanies a font of ty[)c consists of one-, two-, and three-em
quads, an en quad, three-, four-, and five-em spaces, and a hair-
space. Tlie em quad is tlie square of the body of the type:
that is, it is just as wide as it is thick. Tlie tuo- and three-em
quads are respccti\x'ly two and three times as wide as they are
thick. An en quad is one-half of an em, a thxee-em space (fre-
quently called a thick-space) is one-third of an em, a four-em
space is one-fourth of an em, and Vi fivc-em space is one-fifth of
an em in tliickncss. Tlie hair-space varies in the number to
an rm. It is approximately one ])oint thick for the smaller
sizes of ty])c and two ])oints tliick for the larger sizes. In ten-
])oiut it is one-ninth of an em. Fig. 5 shows the different sizes
of (juads and spaces of ten-point type.
JHH 1^ ■ II III Mil nil! I! Ill I
:;-riii ^'-cin i-ein l',n ;^-eiu 4-eiii 5-em Hair-
(juad (Jiuid ijiiad Ouads. Spacer Spaces Spaces spaces
Ero. 5. — Quads and Spaces of Ten-point T^'pe.
8 PRI.XTIXG
9. Thickness of Spaces. — Table II shows the actual thick-
ness of all the \-arious spaces and comlnnations of spaces, ia
sizes from tweh'e-point to si.x-point. Be.irinnin'^r with a h\-e-e:n
space and runnin,Lr down a column, we fmd that certain coml)ina-
tions show a f,Tailual increase in thickness. It is hy comliining
spaces of different thicknc.-ses that the s])ace between words is
incre;ised or decreased. It is, therefore, important that the
student memorize the lirst five combinations, as they are con-
tinually being used when justifying lines.
T.lBLl-: II.— TIUCKXESS OF SPACES
Fraction.
of an en-..
CV):n!.ina-
Sixile;.
I 2-pt.
I i-;jt.
I.,-p-.
</ - p ". .
8-pt,
6-p:.
Variation
7.e--.veen
Sizes.
1
6
5
2'r;
^ 1
;
I ;'
I :!
i.^
I *,
i;
1
*
4
3
^'l
2I
-i
2
1 ■'
I i
1
*
1
3
3
4
3'
, I
I
2'
:.';
2
1
■s
2
5
5) 5
4^
4 ■"'
4
3:.
., 1
^■i
27
5
5. 4
; ?
4M-:
4-
, 1
3^
3J-.
2:3
_&.
1
en 4,4
6
. 1
5
4 1
4
, 1
3
_i
1 1 1
ft-Ta
5- 3
('^
5 ^ •
;;.
-t -'"'
4;'-,
3-?:
37
*i
•4 1 a
4. 3
7
(' .■"■_
5^
5 i
4.;
4.b
, 1
,5-
;V
3
5
5, 5. 5
_ 1
1^:!
6
,--;^
T .*'
. 1
■+..
3 •".
_3
2 • 1
i.-r4
5- 5. 4
7-.
7i/'
( . \
'i'
5-.
4^.^
3;'''
1 n
i
3. 3
.S
_ 1
( ^ '^
'J
. 1
4/
4
"5
i-fi
en, 5
Sr
7;"..
7
':;'■,
5;!
*f ; "
, 1
1 ' 2
3 ' " • 3
>.'
s '■-
_ 1
^::
5: :-
5 7-.
t ■'>
1 1
l + i
C". 4
')
S :
7:
f , .'
f'~
5:
4:
4
l-ri-ri
3 ' 4 ■ 5
itl
S !' /,
7::
_ 1
(. -*-_
5 '■ '
47
4
5, ;. 5, 5
(/l
,S,-'
S
7 1
C r
5::
4^
*
1 _^ 1
en. ,s
10
'-> •'■
S:
_ 1
fr.
5.:
5
;, T i
,^ ■ 5 • 5 ■ 4
I c -■
f;_,',,
S:
7:::
t *
5^-
5 . ' ■
y'j
i^l
3. 3- '
I : ."
'k':.
s ■■'
7-'
'■: :'
''.'■:.
57
'. 0
i-rl
en, 5. 5
1':'
w ■
g
> ■
7',
(> '7
5'
.■',
3 ^ ■
,^■ 3- 4
I I
t-.'.
'j,-
> ;
_ 1
'■' .^
5^
; 1
?^'
-■ -. -. ,^
I 1 ',
i; *
',■
X -
7 ;,
t, '.
5:i
■ *
i -r ■ — i
i-n. ", .i
I I i
[ Z 3
>i ■
7.:
f , .• 7
5:'
:: *- ; - -
{■m
I I '
I I
I z
---
.s
' ' 7 "
,^
cm
'•
I
TVl'K, STACKS, AND l.I.ADS g
10, The Three-point Space of Eight-point. By reference
to Table II it will be seen that the en cjuad of eic;hl-point is
four points thick and the four-em space two points thick.
Typefounders are now casting an eight-point space that is
three points thick. This size is midway between the en quad
and the four-em space. It is extremely useful in tabular mat-
ter, as all columns can be made up to multiples of })oints. In
columns of ])ica widths the lines become self-justifying; i.e.,
always take a certain number of figures and certain even si)aces
to till the line. For example, suppose a table with columns
two picas wide, four tigures in each column. An en cjuad
each side of the figures will just till the measure. If there are
six figures in a column and the column is three picas wide,
twelve points will be required to liU tlie measure. Four three-
point spaces, two on each side of the figures, will make up the
recjuired tweh'e ])oints. If the measure is two and one-half
picas wide, one three-point space on each side of the six figures
will justify the line.
11. Point-thick Spaces. — A sur\ey of Talkie II also reveals
the fact that certain spaces are exact multiples of points in
thickness. That is, some are one jioint thick, some two ])oints,
some three ])oints, etc. These spaces can frequently be used
when justifying one size of t}'pe with another. Fig. 6 illus-
trates the method.
yCi-.-.r .i-em space of twelve-jjoint.
DlT WILLIAM J. SMITH
N ! -A-'j .5-e;ri S]):ices ot s:x-p'j;:il.
Fig. 6. — Showing Method of Justifying T3-i)e by the Use of Point-thick
Spaces.
12. Point-line. — Tk-fore the ad\-ent of the point system,
tvpe sizes were not e\-en multiples of eacli other. If it v.as
desired to justilA' one size of l\'pe willi another it ^vas some-
times nect'>sar\' to use cardboard or thick paper as well as leads.
lo ]'Ri\ri.\(;
Nowadays, all sizes are multiples of each other, and can readily
he justified hy the u>e of materials based on points. Moreover,
the face of type is cast in such position on the hody that it can
l)e lined up by tlie use of maierial Inised on points. This is
known as poiiil-liiic.
13. Point-set. - One ty])efoundr}- made the e.\])erimenl of
caslin,!^ tvpe so that eacli letter or cliaratler was some nuillii)le
of a point, the idea bein<j; that after the line was compo>ed a
certain number of ])(MiU:- in thiclxiiess would be necessar\- to fill
the line. The s])aces ^\■ere cast in multiples of [)oints so as
to readily till tlie line. This plan was an excellent one so lon,!^ as
the type was new, but just as soon as the t\pe .t^ot dirty the lines
were no longer self-just ifyini/;. Tlie i\lon()ty])e S\'stem is based
on a unit system, but. it is a ])erfect success because the com-
posed t}-})e is always new.
14. Legibility. One of the essential thin,y;s in ])rinted
matter is that it be lei^ib'le. This re(|uires that the space
between words l)e moditie(l to suit certain conditions. Widelv
leaded matter re(|uii"es more s])ace between \\'ords than solid
matter. When matter is opened uj) between lines by the inser-
tion of stri])S of metal, Cidlinl leads, il is said to be leaded. When
the leads are omillcvl tlie matter is said, to l)e solid.
If strai,L!;lit matter, either solid or >in.ii;le-leaded, is beiitii; >et ,
three-em S])aces should be ])ut l)etween words: if tlie matter
is double-h'aded, en (|uads should be used belwet'n ^\•or(h.
To ha\-e much s])ac(.' bi'tween liiU'S and \-er\' little 1)etwei'n
words makes the line' look like a >ti-eak across the paLje. When
setlin,L!; (lis])la\' lines, or lino that stanri alone, the space be-
tween words sh(/uld be i;;o\'eriie(l b\- the width of 1 lu' t\-i)e face.
Ikxtended l\'pe reijuire- wider .-paciu'j; ikian condt'nsed t \-pe.
Lines in ca]>ilah re(|uire widei- >pa( iiiu than th()>e in lower-
case. In f;iel, e\ i'|-y line >hould be si)aced with the idea of
rendering!,- it le'_;-ible.
15. Leading. When .-etliiiL;: leaded mat 1 er alwaxs put the
lead- ill while -etkniL:. If tin- mailer i- beim:; set in ;i wide
measure and there are no lead> wick' enough for the ]>urpo>e, it
TYPE, SPACES, AND EIvVDS II
becomes necessary to double-up leads — that is, to use two pieces
that will just fill the measure. In doing this do not use pieces
of equal length; if this is done, the halves of the jol) may slide
on one another. The })roper way is to use a long and a short
piece, alternating them in the stick as in Fig. 7.
EiG. 7. — The Proper A\'ay to Double-up Leads.
If compelled to double-up leads, do not take from the lead-
rack all the leads there are of any one size. Remember that
various combinations of sizes will equal the length that you need.
Do not rob the lead-rack; you may need the material on your
next job.
16. Linotype Slugs as Spacing Material. — If linotype slugs
are used as spacing material, be careful not to place the side
with the ribs on against the type, or the type will be loose and
drop out.
QUESTIONS ON CHAPTER I
1. Why are lower-case letters scallered about the case instead of being
placed in alphabetical order ?
2. Name a sentence containinjj; e\-cry letter in the English alphabet.
3. How can you differentiate between /; and d, and between p and q ?
4. What is a ligature ? Why is it necessary to have them ?
5. What is a kerned letter ?
6. What is the Point System ?
7. Who invented the Point System ?
8. Hx)w many years elapsed before the Point System was tmally
adopted ?
9. ^\'hat decimal jKirt of an inch is one point ?
10. How many [)icas to one inch (approximately)?
11. How many picas to one foot fapproximatel_\')?
12. Name the type sizes under the old system that correspond with
the point sizes of the new system, beginning with 5-point and ending with
i2-point.
13. What is an em quad ?
12 PRIXTIXG
I ;. TIow do \vc measure composed tyj^e -'
15. What size em is used as a unil for measurement of lent^th ?
lO. What is labor-sa\inf material 'i
\.~. Name the different sizes of spaces that accompany the average
font of type.
18. What is a thick-s[)ace ?
i;;. How many sizes of (juads accompany a font of 12-point type ?
20. I-'igure out the actual thickness, in points, of the following spaces:
a three-em space of ij-;)oint; two l"i\-e-em spaces of lo-point; an en rjuad
(if S-point; two three-em spaces of ()-point.
21. Which is the thicker, an en rjuad and a three-em space of 12-point
or an en ((uad and two li\-e-em spaces of 10-point ?
22. If \-ou needed an en (juad of tlie size of t_\'pe \"0U were setting, and
tlu're was none in the case, \\'hat combination of spaces would you sub-
stitute ?
23. I'lxplain the ach'antages of ha\dng an S-point three-point space
instead of the ordinary thick-space.
24. What do you imderstand b_\- " point-line '' ?
25. I'.xplain '■ point-set."
26. I'".xplain '■ legibility " as applied to composed type, and tell what
we should do to conser\'e it.
27. l'',xplain '■ leaded matter '" and " solid matter."
I'iy. How should leads be placed when doubling-up ?
CHAPTER II
COMPOSITIOX— SKTTIXG PLAIN MATTER
17. Making up a Stick.— Having learned the lay of the
case and the fundamental principles of spacing and leading, the
student is now prepared to take up the actual setting of type.
The first step is to set the stick to a measure. This is technically
known as 7naking up a stick.
Several different kinds of composing-sticks are illustrated
in Fig. 8. If one of the graduated kinds is used, it is simply
The first composing-sticks were one-measure, and made of wood. The illustra-
tirjH shows a stick about four hundreii years old, now in the Typographic Library
and -Museum in Jersey City.
Yankee.
I
Standard.
Fig. S. — Compu.~ing-sticks.
13
14
T'RIMIXO
necessary to set the measure desired to the size indicated on the
stick and clamp the knee in position. If the stick Ije one of
the older forms, and not j.'-raduated, it is necessary to make it
up to some ahsolute unit. Students are i)rone to ])ick u]) leads,
rules, furniture, or whalewr may be at hand, and use them as
units of lenfi;th for makin<r up the slick. This is a \-ery un-
thin paper
Vie. Q. — Proper Method (jf Makinir Up a Xon-^^raduated Composinj^-stick.
certain method, anrl should not be allowed. The iK'st method
is to use capital letters of some twenty-four-point or thirty-six-
point t}7)e, ])lacin,L{ then~i bodywise in the stick (see Fi(£. oi, and
insertin,<i; a ])iece of ////;? paper at the end of the line so that if
leads are used thev will not bind.
I''i(,. [o. — A Set (if ('oiiipii^inL,' rules.
i8. The Composing-rule. .\<it i<alnio<t im])o^sible to set
one line ol t\pe (in In]) ol anollicr in a C()m])(i>iii^-st ic k, ((nn-
SETTINC. PLATN MATTER 1 5
])ositors provide themselves with composiiii^-rules, shown in
Fig. lo. These may be purchased in sets, varyini^ in len<^th
from four to fort}'-live j^icas. 'Hicy are ])rovided with Uttle
ears at each end so as to ])e readily lifted out of the stick after
each line is set.
lujually efficient ones ntay be made from odds and ends of
discarded brass rule by cutting and tiling to the forms shown in
Fig. ir.
Fk;. II. — Coniposing-rulcs Made from Brass Rule.
Tire form shown at (/;) is more easih' removed from the stick,
but cannot be used in sizes much below nine ems of pica.
19. Setting Type. — With the copy on the stand before him,
and with his slick and rule in hand, the student should read his
copy carefully, noting jiarticularly the capitalization, spelling,
and i)unctuation. Read a few words at a time, and set up the
letters in proper order, beginning at the left-hand side of the
stick. Ty])e is to be set nick up in the stick. When setting
ty{)e look at the lelttM" as it lies in the case, noting the ])Osition
()f the nick, and in j)icking it u]) turn it so that it comes nick up
in the stick. Do not look at the Idler after you have pieked it up,
but look for the nick of the next letter while }'()u are placing
the iirst one in llie stick. (''ulli\'aLe this habit from the start,
for on it dei)ends \-our future si)eed as a typesetter. No atten-
tion need be ])aid to ])lacing spaces and quads nick up. Some
spaces are cast without nicks.
In order to keep the iiiu under ])erfect control while being
com]-)Osed, the thumb of the; left hand is always held against
the last letter of the nne (Fig, a?.), the end of tlie tluimb being
slightly raised as eacli letter is put into the stick. If the ty|3e
]')
I'ki.X] i.\(i
i? lic'iii.e: >et solid (^r sin.crlc-lcaded. u<c a 3-em space between the
v."(ir(!-. Continue setliii.L^ uiilil \'ou ha\-e jijaced in ilu- line all
the words po-.-ilde. If the final word on the line camiot he
gotten in, and it i> a word of niorc than one .-x'llalik'. it ma\' he
di\-ided. If the lino doe.- not e.xat tl\- fill the mea-ure, it i< nec-
essary to increa-e tlie .-iKicin.ii; hetweeii \\-orfl-- until the line is
ti,L:ht enou,L!:h to >tand alor.e wlien i)U>hed ujj from the bottom of
the stick. Tin- is called /».v//'"v/;/;' the line. Pjofore doin'_r thi-.
liowex'er. tlu- line ^h(luld lie read for error-, aiu! ;;ny found cor-
rected. At tlu- .-anu' time the thumb shouh! be ])assed a few
\\<.. I.:.— c;,,rrr^i Wky .,1 Il./dii.- ( ^,nv.M-inl:-^til■k in the H;ai'l W !iil
time- a( ro-- the bod}' of the I\"jie to a.-terl;dn if tx'jie of a laru'er
or -nadler -i/e !ia- heen Jiiaced ill the iiue.
20. Justifying a Line. .\i:vv .,11 ourrection- are made the
line >houid i)e -j);aed to nil llu; n:ea-ure. Ivn ery Hne mu-t he
accurately -pciced. If oiu- line i- lom^'er than the riz-l. il will
1 'ar off ;h.' furiulure u-ed in io-bxinLi uy the form, ciiid l!ie t\"i)e
will lie liio-f. in '.',hi( !i ewni il -.'.iii droy out. or. wor-e >till. \'.ill
jiuil out on the Jire-- and e,;U-e -nme damaye. .Ice/^;-,;// ,/;;,./
i!}::\o->;: /'..v/;:;' ;'- .;''' e/;//./'.' i <i:l!'i!. Wlieii ju-tifyiny. the
e.\; -ert ( 1 ani ^ i-it or iioi i - h. iv.
]{■. .: no. 1 ri '111 e\i lerieia e
( n -i >aee i- reyuirei I to hii I lie
", - liow nnuh to out hetweeii
sirnixc I'LAix M.vrriiR 17
words. The sludenl can ai.(|iiiri' the same skill by measurin<^
liow niurh ihe line is short, then count iii,<i; the number of places
re(|uirinL;' s])aces, and putting in cnou.idi to till the line. For
example, suppose thai a line is short ■'a])parently two cms.
W'l' iiiea.sure the space A\ith a two- em (piad and hnd that it
iu>t fills the line. We then count the number of })laces between
words and tind that we ha\(.' ten ])laces. The ten spaces must
I)e increased ])V a. total amount cfjual to a two-em quad. A
t'i\e-em s])ace is one-lifth of an em. Ten hve-enr spaces equal
two ems. Therefore.' one ti\-e-em si)ace added to each space in
tlu' line will just till the measure. A,<2;ain, suppose that the line
onl}" lacks one-half or one-third of an em of being full. In this
e\-ent, we must tind some (.ombination of thin spaces that we
ma}' substitute for tlie tlu"ee-em spaces ordinarily used between
words. We look along the line and note where the combination
of two tall, straight letters come together in the line. This is
where we should always begin to increase the spacing in the
line.
21. Uniform Spacing.-df a line has spaces of uniform thick-
ness between word^. it will not api)ear to be unih)rmly spaced.
If it contains words i)eginni!ig or ending in tall, straight letters,
there will ap[)e:;r to be les> space Isetween them than between
rounded letters like o, c, and e, or after slo])ing letters like v,
y. w. or a comina. it -^houkl aluiixs be our ol>ject to make the
line iippfiir uiiiformK s])aced. To ;iccomph.~h this we should,
if possil)le, ha\e a. little more -pace between the high letters
lh;in at other ]>l:Kes. Tlie ru.le, thereh)re, is: '"// necessary to
inerrdse spiid/!'^ lo ',■'// (/ lim'. do so l>v incrrasiiii^ tlie space along-
>idr of slraiiih! hitirs- n lu'crw^uirv to decrease the space to get a
irord i)i a Ii}ic. decretive the ■<pace alter sloping letters or betiveoi
rounded letters." Of coui'se, if nec'essar}- to increase or decrease
at e\-er\- place througiKuit t!ie line, we must do so, but in doing
so we must endea\-or to iia\-( the spacing appear uniform.
22. Rules for Spacing. We siiould endeavor at all times
to h.ive t'nougli wdrd- in t lie i;>t iiiie of a paragraph to more than
coxir the iiuleiition of liie n.e\i i)aragra])li. If tlu> last line of a
iS i'ki.\'i"i\(;
]);irau;r;i])]i lacks one cm of l)einij; full, sjkicc the Im ■ to full Icn^t^lh
Xcx'cr ha\c less than one cm as a Mauk or ([uad Hue at the eiul
ol a |)ara,Li;ra|)h. if llu- la-t line of a i)ara,L!;ra])h is short one en.i
or more, do nol s])acc il out lo full Icn^lh; l\v.' ])ar;'.,^ra])h will
he juore disliiict if the line i^ >hort. IIo\vc\er, do not sacrilice
the appearance of the >pacinL:; in order to make a line shorter
If pos>il)le, ha\e the >pace I'clwi'en words in the last line of a
l)ara,L,M"a])h the .-:jrie as in the line ])recedin,Li; it.
When >pacin,ij; a line eudeax'or to hax'i' e(iual sjjace each side
of small words.
I'ut a thin space (usually a ti\e-em space) before a colon,
a semit'olon. an interrogation mark, and an exclamation mark.
riacc an en (piad alter these marks if they occur in a sentence.
If the interrogation mark or the exclamation mark ends a
sentence, ])hu'e an em (|uad after it.
In all line> of ty])e that contain fjuads and spaces, ])lace
the spaces alonii;>i(K' of the ty])e, where the\' mav readik- he
found. St'att I'rinij; s])aces amonu the (|uads in a line is a fruitful
soiu'ce of dirl\' (piaddjoxes.
While >pacinLi: i> :ni t'xlremel}- important matter, and ma\"
make or mar the printed ]yd'j:c, it is in;i(l\isal)!e to !i'a\t' out
marks of punctuation oi to make imjiroper di\ isions of words
to obtain uniform -paeiuL;'.
23. Emptying the Stick. Continut' >ettin,u until the -tick
i- neai'ly tilled with t\'])e Place the coniposin^^-rule between
the bottom of the niattei" and the <tick, and ha\"e a lead or two
at the top. -o a- lo obtain a tiriii ^rip on the matter I'lace tlu'
<tiek on the ca-e i'V on a u'adlex' and remoNi' the t\'pe with a
rolliuLi; motion. 1"\<j:. i :; il!u>trate< thi- better than words can
de-criiie it . ( 'a!\- mu<1 1k' taken I o place t he ball- -f 1 he thumbs,
and not t he 1 ip-. at t he 1 op of t he 1 \-pe or t he mat t er wilU'rumple
up and LHi to ' |)i.'" .\< the matter i- wilhdi'awn Irom the bot-
tom of the -1 ii k. ;:raduall\' -lide the balb of the t hunibs down on
the t\pe, thu- oblaiiiiiiL;- a In-nier hold, ;.t th ■ -ame time phuini^
the MiidiJIe liUL^'er 1 ea. h hand lirmU' a^'aiu-t the end- of the
mat!t-r. P. . "l I'liii^hii 'hi- :':■ I.: lo rfiuaif llu liiu^.
SK'rrixo I'l.Aix mattiir
19
24, How to Use the Galley. - Ha\in,fr removed the [\pe
from the stick, ])hu-e it on the galley as sliown in Vh:. 14. Xexcr
Fig. 13. — Emptying a Stickful of Type.
place it on a galle\- in an}- other way. Always stand as shown
in Fig. 15 when correcting or making up a job.
Fig. 14. — Prui)cr W; y to rhice a Job on a Galley,
25. Tying up a Job. — When ilie t}-pe is set anci placed
on the galley, the next step is to tie u]) the jol). The \ery best
cord for this purpose is that known to the twine trade as Seine
No. 12 When t\ing u]) a job, begin at the upper left-hand
corner, and, holding about one-half inch of the cord between
the thumb and index-tinL'er of the left hand, pass the cord once
PRlMlXc;
ardund the jol) and (
10 ((/J. This will Ik
>!>.- llu- cord (ALT ihi' fir^t lax't-r as in Fiiz.
d it la-l to till- ronirr. W'inil on two or
1 -''X
-^-
> - "^^^^0^:':: /'Y
Fig. 15. — Currd W":;}- to Work at thu C()ir,{)o>ini:-.-tand.
Li" p t-ii !;■■■! ' ■
M/(.'d
Fi
Il^..v :: r
lie Tu-.i Up.
tlircr i;iyrr-. then iiiov-c tlu-
cr.ilk-y and. ; i';-!; iln- ~; ririL^ di
liillx" Cnn; uvw windinL: nnl :
[1 a\\";!\- from the corntT of the
.'M I in tin- t \-iic. 1 >i I 1 hi- r.irr-
i;\"f or -i\ la\\-r- haw hern ]iut
SKTTIXC; PLAIN" .MATIER
21
on. If the coni is of sullRicnl Ifiii^^lh, finish the windinij; at che
u])])er ri,^ht-hcin(l corner, and luck it in. as ^hown in ¥\<^. i() (/;).
keep a lirni hold on tlie joh wliile lyinL( it u]), and be sure tliat
tiie cord is taut a1 all times. ])o not cro-s one kiver of cord
Fig. 17.— .Su-.w-i'ii- IIuw a Bulky Job Shi uld He Plamlled.
over the other, as it will catch under the other lawyers when
kein'j; remo\'ed and \-ery likei\- put the job ''off its feet."'
li the job is too k.ulk\- to be ])U>hed away from the corner of
the .L^alley while bein.LT tied, it should t)e arranu^d as shown in
Fig. 17, using two-em furniture turned sidewise.
QUI•.'^^TI()X.S OX CIIAPTi: t< II
1. What is a composing-tick :•' How siioukl it l.c- lick] in the hand?
2. How siioulii a com[)(wiivz--tick \>v set to measure?
3. What is a eomposin.ir-rule ? \\h_\- i.-. it neeessar\- to use one ?
4. W liat is the ])urpo.-e of liaxiiiL: a '■ nick " on one side of a t\-pe ?
5. How siloulij tx-pe he plared in the stick ?
(>. ^\"hat r-peeial hakit should you cultivate as an aid to rapid lv[)e-
settin ':'
7. What name is Ld\x'n to tlie act of spaeini: a line to full len-ah '^
S. Wliat metliod Ivdvc \du foi- d(;ter;iiiiii:i; w luu a line is aeeuratvh.
set '-0 I he measui'e ■'
i'KL\ ri.xc;
(). \\'hat trouljlc is apt to he causcc' if one line is lonf^cr tjian its neif^h-
hors?
t:„ W'lial nictiiod lia\c _\ou for tletcrniinini,' how much additional space
to put hetwi'cn words when you arc justif_\i'i,L; a line '•'
I [. If you were settiiii; douhle lea(k:d oi" triple leaded matter would >()U
use a siuLjle thick space hi'twecn words? (ii\'e ri-asous for \'our answer.
[2. Should woids that stand alone on a paire ha\'e more or less space
lutwecn them than when run in with other matter?
1,^. Why is accurate spacinii more desirable than uniform spacinfi; ?
14. \\'h\- is accurate justification so essential ?
15 How should a stick he emi)tied ?
iti. i)escril)e how you would proceed to tie up a medium-si/e T)a^'e.
If the pa<i;e \wre a lar^'e imv how would you [)rocee(i ?
CIIAPTKR ITT
TAKING A PROOF, CORRKCriNG THE JOB, AND RETURNING
'I \PI': TO CASE
26. Placing a Job on the Stone. It is ()l)vious tluit if any
grit should get beneath the iy\^v it will cause it to punch through
the paper when pulling a proof. l%\'ery effort should be made
to ])revent such an occurrence. Before sliding the type from
the gallev to the stone, be sure that the stone is clean.
27. Pulling a Proof. - Ik'fore pulling a proof, the job should
be made level by tlie use of the for))i-plaiier (I'^ig. 18), which is
])laced on the job and gi\-en a few light ta})s with a mallet.
Ink the job with a hand-roller or brayer, being careful not to
have too much ink on the roller. Then take a sheet of ])roof-
pai)er,* hold it at diametrically opposite corners, allowing
it to sag slightly in the middle, and place it carefull}- on the job.
Do this bv allowing the middle to touch the form hrst, gradualh'
lowering the corners. Do not let the paper sli]) or drag o\er
the form, or the sheet will be smeared. Now take the proof-
planer (whicii IS the same as i i"orm-])laner, but with the face
co\-ered with 1 \Q v.\ the left hand, ])lace it s/iadily and _//;;;//y,
face down^ y,n ih ' ]);iper, and strike it a fairK" shar]) ta^) with the
mallet. Raist liie proof-planer slow ly and with a tilting motit)n.
and mo\'e it t a new position, (io ox'er the job in this way until
e\-er_\' ])art has been imiiressed on the pa])er. \\"hether or not
the ])ro()f is likely to be a good one can be judged from the im-
])ression in the ])aper. If it ai)pears weak at any ])oint, go o\'er
that part again. Remove the sheet by raising it at opjxjsite
corners.
* A paper known as Errnck Eolio is froqnonlly used, tliouc;]i tlie author
prefers " Dry Proof l'a[K'r." Tlu' laller lias a ,ij;loss\- side that is espceiall)
adaj)te(-l for llie work.
23
-H
I'lMX! i\(;
The sccrcl of (il)(,i!!un;i :i ,ir<)<)i! Iic:i1ct! iiroof i- in tin- manner
of ;)i;uinL' ilu- nroof-plancr on iIm- form, anil in !"cn!o\inL:; ii
If llie phuK-r -lii!(_>, -iij)-. or juinj).- wiun it i~ -tiaicis. ii i- a])t
to mo\X' tlic ])aii(;r and -Doii th- jironi. Iloiil it dowai iirinlw
If it in rai-rd .-iidijrniy lo n;o\'c i' to a ni-\'.- po-ilion. it will
create a suctioai and rai-e liie oaon- o-ora the t\'])e, lim- -poilinLr
the ])r()of. Tilt inL' the ]ilaner \vh',-!i rai-in.LT it helpn to a\-oid t!u>.
]■"](,. !>.- Ah
ir;i.-])iari(T.
28. Proofs in Colors. If ;. [iro'if of a joh h- ref;i!irt<! to
be ,-uliniitted in ( oiop--, -la h. proof w.wx iie -r( i.red with (oir.-
paratix'e ec:>e jir('\ided tlieia- i~ \a> oxcriai :; iha: 01 the eoiiii--,
Su])po-ia for exaniple, t liat ;. i ir-c ,[ ;- it, he ] )i;iled in t ■.'."o eoio'v-
the main ]iod\- of tr;e oi, in hlai a wi'h a few loiahe- ol red.
Ink the \'dlolt jo[) -.'.nil aiaei.; ,ai, \\\\\\ a (lo,.n I'a:: \'.ij'e oi;
the hiaeh irih fioia lli^i-e pa!';- !!a.' [.xv to Im- iii red and. \'d!i!
the aid of a -aa.dl i ■!> > > <-! I'l ■lio! ( o; ■'„,■:' i' ,r'. re ':d, I la-;":: .>. i'ii
red ink. II ;
lira! re i'da-d
.d-htlv a!.-w
\" ( ,, nia it 1 ,e ele,.!a
a ! ,■>■- Pr', ■ .
d(,dkin
l'R()\ IN'C, CORRI'CTlXd, 1 )TS'lk! lU" TlXd
2C
After the wliole iol) is ])r()i)erly inked, tlie i^roof may he ])ulle(l
as ah"ea(l_\- expiainech
29. Galley-press. Straight niatter i^ usually placed on
U)nf^ ,^alle\ s and |)i(H)fs pulled on a '^dUry-prrss. This is a frame-
worh siiiTiiounted l)\' a tlal hed, on the sides of which are raised
tracks on which rolls a sohd iron roller co\-;;red witli fell. The
frame contains a hin or cuphoard for the accomniodation "f
proof-papt'r. I''i,u'. M).
To obtain a. proof on a t:;ailey-press the ,u;alle\' containing tlie
t^-'])e is placed on tlie !lat ])vi.\. the type is inked with a bra}'er.
4:
a >h.eet of paper is ])laced on the t>'[)e, and the roller is run o\'er
the face (^\ the t\-pe. Owin^ to the fact that the roller fre-
quentl}- spui'c/es the t\-]>e into the i)a])er, the ])a])er is apt. to
shp o\er the face of the t\'pe and sinear the ])roof. This can
be ax'oided 1)\' holding the ]);i])er tiLrlitly a!j:ainst the roUer and
roUing Uirr;-i {(\La'tlier ox'er the face of tlie ty])e. Care shouhi he
taken to see tliat the galle\' lias i^ot toc^ tlu'ck a l)ottom, for if
tlie impre->!on is loo kea\-\' there is no wax' of altering it.
Il tlu' !ir,])i-es-jon is loo ligfit^ a thin ciirdhoardi or a s.ieet or two
of ni;;niia jiajxT ur,;La- tfie galle_\- will correct ihe fault. The
'■ri_-:- !- inleiTcu-'d ...iil\' for ':;!Lys of tx'jte. not for small jobs,
;6
PRIXTIXG
30. Press-proofs. — In Idvjc offices proofs of jobs are usuallv
pulled 0,1 prooj-pns^t s 'J'h^re ai\, mail}' (le\'ice-' lor this pur-
])ose. Soire are \v(a-kL-<t on the j)lan ;>! a cylinder ])ress. inkinsj;
the form and i-arr\in,iz the sh.et tlirou^^li aLUonnaicalha In
others, the funn 1.- r;r>i inked and then the mechaniam set in
111.. JO. — \\'a.-i!in'jaMi II. mi^. ,irr-~.
iniitii.n tn ()hi:;in the inipres-ion. \\'p.en joii.~ are too lanre to ,'j:>.
on a ],rooi'-; ire-~, iIha' .,re jika ed on tlie .-lone and ]a-o<)f- healen
off with a proof-])!.. I. el". \\ lien jiroxiiiL:; i.oi,k forir,-. where llie
p; I'e- ;.re i:.id ill ]i:.;'V-, ll;e t 'a o p>-.,L:e.- wiiich are h.iek to havk
.-lioiild he iiro\a-d oil olie .-heel, and the >heets illen folded into
l'(.ok form.
rRCVlXG. CORRKCTIXC, DISTRI P.UJ1X(; '
-/
31. The Washington Hand-press. — Tliis is u familiar type
of ])roof-pre.ss, wherein tlie form is inked, c vererl with a sheet
of pr()of-])a{)er, the t}'m[)an lowered, and the bed mo\-ed under
the impression-plaLe. A hand-le\er exerts a downward motion
and ,^i\'es the im])res:'ion. The hefl is tlien wiilidrawn, the
tym})an lifted, and the sheet remox'ed. (Fi.t^'. 20.)
32. The Poco Proof-press. — This press consists of a bed
and a cx'linder racked to mo\-e in unison. Tlie form is placed
on the bed, inked with a braxxT, a sheet of proof-])a])er placed
on the form, and the c\"linder and form rolled into contact by
Fig. 21. — The Poco Proof-press.
tln' ai'l of a cra.nk. 'I'lie bed need not Ije returned for the ne.\t
proof, as it can be worked from botli ends. (Fi<^. 21.) It desired,
tlie slieet may i)e slipped under a rod that acts as a gripper, and
the sheet run around the cx-linder.
33. The Potter Proof-press. — There are several types of
this press on tlie market, some of tliem ha\'in'i automatic inking
de\ices. Tn this ])ress th.e cylinder rotates in stationar}- liear-
ings, tlie befl nio\ing forward and backwarcb ;is in an ordinar\'
c\"linder ])ress. (bippers hold the slieet to tlK c\"lin(ler \\liile
the impres>ion is being taken. An impression-trip is ])ro\-ided
so that the c\-linder mav lie raised and the bed returned to ii.-
original i)o,-itii)n without touching the cx'Iinder. (Fig. 22.)
2S
I'RJX'JIXG
34. The Vandercook Proof-press. — Tliis is an automatic,
self-inking, cx-lindcr proof-] )ress (I'ig. 23). The slieet may be
Fk;. 22. — The Poller I^-oof press.
laid on the tyi)e and the cylinder run oxer it, or the sheet niay l)e
fed to the i/rinnt'rs on tlie c\'linder. In this make of ))resslhe
fK
■I'he \
I'liii.i glo-
bed 1- ,-lHt i()iiar\' and the c\linder roils o\ cr the form At the
end of the >iioke ihe cviiiHU'i- i> ;iulomat ically raised so that it
ma\- be rt'luriu'd wilhoul Miiliim ihv' txanpan.
PROVING, CORRKCTIXC;, DISTRIHUTIXG 29
35. Correcting the Job. — Wlicn ;i ,l,^oo(1 ])rool is secured, it
is sent to tlie proofreader to he read, after whicli it is returned
to the compositor for correction. If tliere are but few errors,
and i]ie letters to l)e substituted for those in the job are of the
same tiiickness, tlie job may ])e corrected on the stone. If
they are not of the same thickness — and this is usuaUy the case —
the job must l)e p'l^iced on a .^ahey, the string removed, each
line taken up again in the stick, the error corrected, and the line
accurately respaced.
If it is necessar\' to o\-crrun a few lines in making corrections,
turn the:u around on the galley, so that the l)eginnings of the
I-'k;. J4.— -Oxirrunniim T\-[)c.
lines are away from tlie edge oi the galley. It is then possible
to take otT a few words at a tin^e from the beginning of a line
and reassemble the matter m the stick. See Fig. 24. It is
verv much easier and quicker to o\'errun maitter in this way than
to put down the stick and take up each line individually.
Another, and perhaps eciually good way, is to spread the
lines out on a long g;ii!e\', so that the t}'pe matter reads con-
secuti\'elv, being sure to place a space at the end of each line
unless the ki^l woi-(l ]i;;s been di\'ided, in which case the
h\-phrn should be rciiiowd. The matter niay now be meas-
urcMJ otT wuh the comi'-osip.g-rule into line lengths, and each line
taken u[) indi\-i(lualh' and rejustilied.
-;0 I'Rl.Ml.W;
Always hold the stu'k In th.e hand while S])acin,<;; lines.
Ne\a'r try to lorrect one line in a stiek after }'()U have started
to set another. Uonol place the stick on the stand an.d attempt
to pull out the spaces with tweezers. Hold the stick in the hand,
remove the last letter in the line so as to loosen it, then proceed
with the correction.
It is absolutely ini'possible to accurately space a line imless
it is placed in a stick. Attem])ts to correct jobs on a galley or
stone ha\'e entailed a <,n-cater loss of time in lockin_i,f u]) than any
other one thin<i;. If a sint^le line l)e lon^i^er than its fellows, it
will ])re\ent them from bein,t( locked ti.ghth". K\'ery line should
be of uniform length. Time will be sax'ed Ijy doing the work
right in the lirst ])lace.
36. Pulling a Revise. — After the job is corrected, another
proof, called a rei'isr, is pulled. This is sent to the ])roof-
reader along with the first proof. If the corrections ha^"e not
all been made, it is again returned to the compositor. If
the\' have been pro])erly made, the last proof is sent to the
author.
37. Saving Cord for Future Use. — W'lien a job is untied,
the cord should be carefully folded for future use. This should
be done as illu>trated in l''ig. 25.
38. Making Up Pages.- Straight matter, whether it be
hand-set , monoly] )ed, or liiioty])ed, is assembled on long galleys.
After proofs are ])ulled and the ty])e corrected, the matter is
read\- to le ma(U' U]) into i)ages. In this ])r()ceed as follows:
make a gauge of a pieci' of cardboaid, lead, or reglet b\' niarking
the exact length the tyi)e-faci,' of the [)age is to be. With this
gauge idsl oil the matter into ])ages, inserting a small ])iece ot
cardboai'd or lead to show the siparation of the ])ages. \n
\W\< WAV go o\er all the maltcT. I1 will \cry likelx' hai)pen that
the matter dm'S not sep;irate nicely into l)ages, and it may
'nave to \>c I'cca^l into bellei" form.
'i'luTc .ire man\' things to be kepi in mind wlu'U making up
page-. Xe\'er ha\i' a single iireak line a1 the top of a ])age 01
beneath a cut. If po>-^iljle, ne\-er ha\i-a paragraph with a side
PROVING, CORRIX riMi, hlSTRILLriXG
31
Last \vru[) nf I iinilinK-l;iyi'r looiicd nvcr left iniU'X-fii
Lodp in struii'i slifipi-d !h' 1 'h ' i-. 'ji In t,'-loop
Loop slipi'icil :>,r.ju ;h '.a 1 r m ' ri 1 tifchtly.
Fic. 25.-- llhi>tratinL; AK-iIkkI of 'I'yiiiL; Conl for I-'utun- U.~l.
3^ ]>RL\T1XG
headin-- on t!ic i:.sl liiic ol a paL'r - carry it o\-(.'r to the top of
1!k' iu-\t pai^aa 'J'ry to a'aoiil b.axan'j; hra(!in'j;< near the Ixittom;
]rc-( jia-n; ly a little rc-arran'/ciiifiit of tiif mailer will olniate this.
If the la-t part of tlie irailter doe.- not fill a l)a.L'e. 1 lie l.akmte of
the |)agi' shouhl he left hlank. If jio-.-ihle. haw the la>t pa^e at
lea.-t one-third full of type. If tlie cast-oij lea\e- hut t\".-o or
three line- on tiie la.-L ])aLre, it is Ijetter to haxe tlie few ])re\'ious
])a^es each a line lon;^ than to ])Ut the-e few lines in a j)a,!ie hy
llieinsel\"e-. If there is a runnin'^ heaal v/ilh a folio, the folio
should he placed on the outsirle of tlie \)V.'j.v\ i.r., to tlie left of
a leftdiand pa.^e, to the ri,ii;ht of a ri.iriudiand pa'j;e. If the
folio lie sini])l\'a ti,ii;ure or numeral, it may he either at the h.ead
or looi of tlie paiie. A folio at tlie foot, howe\'er. pre-ents
the helter appearance.
39. Cleaning Type. -After the t\pe lia.. Ijeei: ]>rinted
from, and hef.)re it is di-lrihuted it .:lior he thorouL,^-lily
cleaned, li this i- not done the t\'jie v.id. in time, hecome so
dirt}' that it is cdmo.-t im])0--ih;e to keep a h e on it- feet.
This condition should iioi he ]»ermitted. to ceiir. If a form
C(jme- from pre<^ in a djirlv conditiiiii. it ^!^ollld he taken aj>ari,
eaLch ]Ki,i:e tiedi up lu-ly, and tlieii tjie- txpeput to -oak o\rr-
ni;i;ht in a itan of lye-wader of medium -t reni:th. Jn ihe nn irniiiL:
it should lie remoxT 1 and r-eruhhed w'vh a hru-h, thru ti;orci( :J:Iy
rinsril under a tai). d"o accoini )ii-h ihi- il n^ay ]v nece--ary
to ])ut the i)a'ies on a niotai not A'.oodru ,u..!h\-. untie tliem,
and let the water 'Jx\ in hMdweeii the le'ler-.
40. Cleaning Rules. -Tht- (dreciio';!- i^-i\-en aho\c for dean-
\ws t\'j)e al-o ap )!\' ' 1 (h-aihn.i iu'a-- ruh^-. If dirt\- rule- are
-oaked o\'jrni'i!il in -.'.eak Uf-vaior. in tin- morning llieyiriay
he riii-ed under a lap [-W'] -.-d; >■ 0 ( iraim\ i' 1) a \\:'S. ll irepuoul ly
hijjptai-, liowe\-er. that ruK - :-re noi projiorK' carrO tor. and it
I'ccome- neco--ar\' for llu: v-ompo-Uor to eh-a n a piecr iiUoia-
il can ijC U-ed. 'hhe U-ual Iticl h^'d in -uch ca-r- i- lO ik ■■: the
rule willi kou/ine or I'lht-r d,ol i-rLim! and ruk it on t'c ^'oue.
A mu(di koi li-r w.w :- lo j iro\i dr a pieoi^ of ^l ra ■.'.■! 'o:;rd and -al u-
ratc it wath the delerL'eiit and ru'o the ndo on il. ]\ulikin,Lr
PROVING, CORRECTING, DISTRIBUTING
2,3
the rule on the stone is very apt to round off the ends or face o|
the rule; with the stra\vl)oar(l this will be obviated. Eordei-
units that have become encrusted with ink can be cleaned in th(
same wa}'.
41. Distributing Type. — Returning the letters to their
proper places is called distribution. If the type is all of one size
and kind, place it on a metal (not wooden) galley and wet it
with clean water, using a sponge for the ])ur]:)Ose. Wetting
type accomplishes two a])j)arentlv o])]iosite things: it causes
it to come a]);irt and also to stick together. If the type is
gvnnmed fast from an aggregation of ink, dirt, etc., the water
Fig. 2().-- HowTypt- Should \W llilil In tin- II:in<l wliile Distributing
will loosen it; if it has a tendency to fall apart it will cause it
to adhere.
Fig. 2i) showf, how tyjie should be held in the hand while
distributing it. The novice is advised to begin by taking a
few lines at a time, for if he should drop any t\'[)e, as frequently
Iia])pens. he will ha\-e less t\-pe to ])ick out of the case. As he
incrcasv's in skill lie may take larger amounts.
Hold llie t}'i)e nick up, and Ijegin at the right-hand end of
the line. Ta.ke off a whole word,, se])arate the letters, one by
v)ne, ;ind pku:e them in their res]>ecti\e boxes. The method of
separating the letters is shown in I'1g. 27. The t}-])C is held
against t!ie thumb by the index-finger, and the middle tuiger
lihs the letter from beneath tlu' index-tlnger. At the same tinie,
the two lingers are mo\ed backward and forward over the thumb,
34
rixi^siixG
thus constantly advancinu; the first letter so that it will escape
from beneath tlie index-tinm'i-. I'roceed in this manner until
all the type has been returned lo llie case.
Fig. 27.--St'paratin,i^ Individual LrUcrs Wliilc Distributing^.
If the matter to be distributed is a job cont;iinin,t^ dis])lay
lines, all the Hnes of the same si/.c and kind of l\'pe should l)e
iln
UJi liil
llll
L.-a.is u:i i r.hn'". as ],larr.! ,,i; the ralk'V.
i'"i<;, ..'S. -Sorliim l.rad- and SIul
^roujK'd toirether mi tht ,i_:al!i'y and carried to the cabinet where
they l)elon<^^ d'lii^' aNoids use-less uuIl^in,^ back and forth, jcl
PKOVIXC;, CORRIX'TTXC;. DIS'lRlIiUTlXG 35
t\'])e should he held in the hand and distrihuted as described
under plain matler.
Do )iot drop or l/.roci' type inlo llie rase; place it in carcfiiU}
(;v // /,v casilx hdiUycd.
42. Putting Away Leads and Furniture. — After all the
t\-]>e in a Jul) has l)een distributed, return the furniture and
leads to their ])ro})er places. If there is more than one size of
leads used in the job, or if it is }-our duty in the office to i)Ut
a\va_\" leads, ])r()ceed a- in V'v^. 2<S. Stand them on end, as shown,
then ,Li;o through the lot. ])ickin,<r out lirst the lar^^est size, and
rearrange thrm as <ho\\ii. The}' are now graduated as to sizi.
Take u]) each lot of like size and measiu'e It with a ,<i;au<{e. if
it is of a lab()r-sa\-in,<i; leniith |)Ut it in its pro])er box. All bas-
tard len,L!;ths should be kept in a separate ])lacc. Consult ihc
ft)renian and ascertain his wishes re.ua.rdini; iliem.
ni:i;sri()xs (jx cilm'tkr hi
1. W'liat special tare should you L-\(_-rcise when [)lacin<:! a job on the
im[)osinLr stone ? \\'liy ?
2. l)eS(Til)e the pulliniz of a lianfk{)roof.
,5. How would }-ou avoid the tendency of the proof-planer to lift the
sheet \'.'hik' piillini: a hand-jjroof ?
4. Dest'ribe the method of inkiny a job when a procjf is to be pulled in
two colors.
5. Is it ad\'isabk' to make corrections in lines of t\-pe without placing
tliem in a >tick ?
f'. W hat ir- a rt\-ise ?
7, Demonstrate the {)roj)er methofl of t\dn,L; up striri: for future u e
,s. How -hould strai.Ldit matter he ca>t ot'f p.rior to beiuL; n:ade up
into paLM> ?
(). Xame some thini:-; that art- to be a\'oided when making' up i;a,L'(-s
10. How should i\pe be cleaned ? W'iiat happens when l\'pe bec(jmes
\"ery dirt}' 'f
I 1. Hiw; >hould brass rule l)e ck-aned ? Wdiy is it so es^ential ?
I J. Ho',',- r-iiould t_\-pe he held in the hand wiiile distril)ulinLr ?
IS- W ii>" do '.\e -^N-t-t t\-pe before (Hr-t ributiuL' ?
14. Siiow !iy the use of N'our llnu'ers Just how llie types ar., se[)arateci
during: tlie act of dist rib'iilin,L:.
15. How should leads and slugs be sorted ?
CHAPTKR IV
TVPI'; C-Al.C'ULAriCJXS
43. How Much Will It Make?— Ti is frcfjuently necessary
to (K-kTnimt; how much iiialtiT a ciTlain ])iece of cup\' \viU
make when it i- -el in txpe. ■rhi> ma\- readil}' he calculated,
i'lie tir.-t step is to a[)|)ro\imate the n.uml)er of words in the
cop}'. Tliis is accom])li-hL-d l)\- mult ipl\'in^ the number of
liiie> in tlie copy Ijy tlie ;i\-cra,u'e numl)er of words in a line.
In averau'inLT the number of word> in a line assume that a word
ot sewn letters i- a normal word; call two sm.all words one and
a \ery larire word two. If it he manu>cript copy wc may ha\'e
to m) o\-L-r it all. unles> it runs fairly luiiform. With tyi)e-
written ('o]))-. which is more imiform, and easier to calculate,
find the awra^e mnnhrr of words i)er line. multi])!\' 1)\- the
luimlu'r of lim-s to ux-t the number of words ]>er ])a,Lre, then
nuiltiply this by tlu' number of paL(e> to ,iret the tt)tal number of
word- in cop\'.
i-Ia\-inuf determined the number of words in copy, set a line
of tlu' t\'pe to ln' u-r(h and fmd the awraire number ot words
to a liiK-. I )i\idin,L' tlie number of word> in cop\' by the number
in one t\'pe line v/ill '_ri\-e the number of lines the matter will
makt' in t\"i)e. h'or ■■xample. if the co])\' contains io.05() words
and the t\'pe run- eiLdit words to a line, then
io.f):;() , ....
■- "i-;-;.2, the number ol Ime- oi tvt)e.
8 -
If we \vi>h to determine how man\' inche- the matter will
mais;e lifter it i- -el . \' e i an do -;, 1 b\' chaULTin^ the dimeri-ion< from
em- to lioini-, .md then lo ini'he-. Count 72 ])oiin- to the
iiah. .Muhi])i\- bue -i/e of ih.e bod\- .if the type b\- the number
TYPE CALCULATIOXS
37
of lines to chan.s^c the dimensions to ])oinls, then di\'i(le by 72
to chan<re to inches. In the example given above, if the type
were ten-point, there would be
— = i8^ niches.
If the job were set in eight-point, and contamed 1200 lines,
then the matter would be 1333 inches long. Thus,
8X1200 , . ,
= 13,^3 inches.
If the matter is to be monoty])ed, and the copy is type-
written, it ma\- be easily calculated. It has been found that
hftv-three typewriter characters always equal twent\'-li\e set
ems. Therefore, a])])r<)ximate the number of characters in the
tvpewritten copy, counting >])ace.> between words as characters,
divide by lifty-three and multiph' by twenty-hve. Thus, if the
copy contains 10,722 characters, it will make 5058 set ems.
10,722X25
—^ =505'^ set ems.
The same result may be obtained by multiplying the number
of ty])ewriter characters by the constant .4717. This constant
is obtained by dividing 2^ by 53.
I- ==-47 1 7
.4717X10,722 = 5058 set ems.
•4717
10,722X^5
'-' =5058 set ems.
44. What Size Type Shall I Use? -If it is de.-ired to fill a
certain s])ace with a certain ])iece of C(j])y, the si/e t\'pe to be
38 PRINTIXG
used ma\' 'he detiTniincd as follows: lirsl calculate the number
of words iu the co])_\'. as ex]ilaiiied in the i)recedin<^ section.
Next t r\- a line of th.e -i/e 1}'i>e estimated to he of the i)r()])er
size. Then I'ounl the nuniher of words to one line of t\'|)e,
determine how inan\- line,- may he .gotten into the allotted s])ace
and multi])l\' lhe>e two factors to,m-lher to ohtain the total
numljer of word.-. If the luimher i< sli,L'htl\' .greater than the
number in tlie cop}', the ri^hl size of type ha.s Ijcen chosen.
If the number of word- in the co])y is irreater than the t\"pe
will accommodate, a smaller size t\"i)e nni.-t be used. If tlie
number of words in the copy be le>-, use a larLrer -ize tv])e.
If the calculation^ -how that one size of type is too small
and tlie n.exl .-ize larger i> too larLre. the matter may freC|uentl\'
be made to lit the space l)\' >ettinii: it in lh_e >maller size ly])C
and leadiuLT with either one-])oint or Iwo-]M)im leads.
To determini' how ma.n\' line- of an\' -ize t\'])e ma\' be uotten
iiUo a ,ii'i\-en spact', determine th.e -ize of the s])act" in inches,
multiply b\' 7.2 to chauL^e dimension.- to ])oint-, and dixide by
the size of the l)od\' of the ty])e. Ibir example, the number of
lines of ten-])oint t}^])e that can be ^u'otten into six inches is
found thus;
6X72 ,.
= 4^.2 imes.
10
Ignore tlie two-tenth-, C;nd count iin fort\--three lines. If ten-
])oint run- ten words to a line, 4;^ word- ma\' be ])laced in the
sixdiuii -pate: it it run- -ix word- to a line. onK" J5S words will
1:0 in 1 lie >ix in.clu-.
45. Determining the Number of Ems in Composed Mat-
ter.- ■ When I>a ie i- -et w it boat di-pla\' line-, a- in book-, ma!_'a-
zine-. and !iew-] taper-, it i- f;nown as slrdi'^/.'l })uittiy. If tiie
coiirpo-itor i- worlsin^" ]i\' the ])iece he i.- paid for hi- work
aicordini: to ihe number of cm- that it coma:n>. To deter-
mine the (opirnt- in em- it i-- cH-toniar\' to mea.-uri- the n^.alter
with a, l\-[>c-L!MU,L^r. and thu- tind it- width and Kn^th in em>
of tlie t\])f ill which it i- -et . .M ult ipKini; tile number of em-
T^'Pi; CALCi'LA'rroxs 39
in widtli by the number of ems in length \vill show the total
numl)er of ems.
If a tNpe-giiuge is not at hand, the same resuh. may be
secured by using a rule graduated in inches. Count se\-enty-
two ]H)ints to an inch. To determine the numbc of ems mul-
ti[)l\- the number of inches b\' se\"enty-t\vo and divide by the
em of the body. Do this both for the width and the length,
and then inultii)ly the one by the other.
/u-(/;;//i/c.— ' Su])i)ose a piece of matter set in eight-point is
four inches wide b_\' twent\- inches long. Then,
4X72 288
— 7, — = — ^ - = ;6 ems wide,
8 S '
20X72 1440
— ~ = --^— = iSo ems long,
,^6X180 = 6480 ems.
Sometimes the length of a line of type will exceerl an even
number of cn:s of the size in which it is set. If this excess be
less than half an em, it is not considered; if it be half an em or
more, it is counted as a full em. Xe\er make calculations in
fractions of an em.
When lines of t}-])e ha\e leads between them the matter is
said to be leaded, when leads are omitted it is said to be solid.
I'icce-workers prefer to >et leaded matter, because they get
paid for the arcd that the matter co^■ers, and not for the actual
number of lines set.
46. Determining the Value of Composed Type. — To de-
termine the \"alue of com]")0>ed t\'pe, point otT the number of
ems into thousandths, and multiply b\' the rate per thousand.
For exam])le, to lind how much the matter of the jireced-
ing problem would be worth at forty cents per thousand,
6.4S0X40 cenls = S3.5g.
Some ])rinter> sell composition on a scjuare-inch basis. That
is, thev measure the area of the conipose(l matter and charge
40 PRIXTIXC;
for it at so much per square inch. Table III shows the selhnc^
rate per square inch lor various sizes of type at \-ariou5 rates
per thousand.
TABLE III.— RATKS I'KR SOfARK INCH TOR COMPUJ'IXG
VARi't: (ji- coMi'osia) tvpk
Thff value of (r,mi-n'itinyi fer ^qunrr inch in all sizes oi typi-. from 4]; p^.in*. *o
i2-point, at C)Oc.. '15c., 70c., 7.tC., Soc, R.sc., -oc. 0,5".. Sr.oo. Si. 05. arri Si. 10 per
1000 ems. .1 tyfe-^iiusf is not al-xay. at h'lr.d, hut fo'J-rults 'ire pienir'ul.
Price per
1000 cms.
65c. . 70c. 75c. Roc. R.i''. i 00 ■. ';5c. Si.ooSi,
4i-poirit. . . , I3,i'') .1^^4.1702 .102 .204^ .2176 . 2,s'>.; .2432 .256 ,26>;,-;'.2m6
5 -point... .1244 .134.-. .i.;.52 .I5.S,5 .1^50 .I7''.i .i^'^'' .107 -2074 .2177 22-r
5 i -point. . . I . 102-- .1114 .12 . I2.S,T .137 , I4=;6 . I ,S42 ,162^ - i 7 l .; . I 700 : . I S^5
6 -point... .o.^'■)4 .'i'iY> . lOoS . loS .1152 ,122; ,120'. .13''.^ .'-w .15:2 .i.tS4
7 -point.., ,0^.,^,=; .o'.^.S ,0741 .0704 .o>4'i .o-./; 'i^.sj ,lf>r),s .10,5.'^ ,1111, ,1164
8 -point.,, ,04--',. ,0527 ,0,567 ,o')0> .064^ ,'i',-~s 0-2'; ,077 ,r.^( .o'^^ .os'/i
g -point., ,',o,5.s.t .i)\\fi , 044.S .o,;,S ,0,512 ,05,;,; ,'57', ,060^ .0'',',; ,'"i072 ,0704
10 -point.. , - o.i I I .0,537 .0363 .o,5So .0415 .'•■..11 .o,;'.7 ,0402 ,051^ ,054; ,057
11 -point.. , .0257 .027^ ,0,5 ,0,521 .034,5 ,0,504 ,o,5.^0 ,0407 ,ri,;2S .045 ,047^)
12 -point... ,o2io .02.5.; ,02,52 ,027 ,02.s.s .o,5.jO .0,524 ,0342 .030 .0,57^ .Ool,}
Ex,-\MPi.E. .\ patre meas-jrin:r 4? YJ) would contain 27 STuare in-rhes. if set in S-
point type and figured at oo^-. per loO'i ems. ::iuiti;/.y \,y .0720, as per table, an'i the
correct result is Sl.vV- If a.ny otl;er rate is re'iuired, u;e the correspondin;; fti;;ures.
This square-inch methorl is based on the rate jier thousanrl
ems. To tniri the co-t nf one square inch of any size t\-i)e,
divide the price ])er thou-and by looo to tind the co>t of one em,
then multiply b\' the number of em,- in one -fjiiare inch. .\--
there are se\"ent\'-t\vo jjoints in one linear inch there are 5 '.'^4
square points (~2y.~2'' in one ^(juare inch. l)i\d(le ihi- factor
by the number of square points "'n the >ize of the bod\' of the
t\i)e bein,L( mea>ured..
Example I. What i- the ,-i-piarc-inch late for eip;ht-i)oint
type at si,\t\- cenls ])er thou-and ?
.An eiL:ht-])oint em i.> sfjuare, liierraiiT i; (onlain,-^ si.xtx'dour
sfiuare ])oint.- \Sy.S'. 5iS4~f)4— Si em- to the sfjuare inch.
.At ,-i,\ty cent,- ])er thou>and 0oX8i-^ 1 000 = .'^0.048') ])er ■-ovKire
inc h.
TM'l': CALCUI>ATI()XS 41
Example 2. What is the sciuarc-inch rate for ten-point type
at seventy-two cents per tliousand?
loX 10=^ 100 square points in one em;
5184-:- 100= 51.84 ems ])er square inch.
72X5r.84~ looo^- So.o_:;7,:; per sfjuare inch.
47. Determining Weight of Type by Measurement. —
One square inch of type wei.iijhs, ai^proximatei}', one-Cjuarter of
a i^ound. To find the weii^ht of any coniposcd page of type
either muUip.ly the number of scjuare inches by one-fourth or
di\ide by four.
Type matter is usually set to some measure in picas. To
avoid calcuhiting in fractions of an inch, it is sometimes easier
to determine the size of the ]xige in ])icas. There are thirty-
six ]iica ems in one scpaare inch, or 144 in four square inches.
Picas may therefore be changed to pounds by dividing by
144.
lixaniplc. How many i)ounds of type in one page of this
book?* Size of i)age. 22X38 ])icas. If Vv'orked on the square-
inch basis, change the picas to inches, thus: 22 picas = 3|] inches;
38 picas- o^j inches. Then i^Xt\^2T,l.
23;-; -f 4=-- 5.S pounds.
On tlie ])ica basis, 22X38-.- 144= 5.8 pounds.
48. Determining the Amount of Leads to a Page. —Two-
])oint leads run about 144 inches to the pound; three-point
leads, ()6 inclu's , aiid one-point, 288 inches. As there are six
i)icas to the inch, if each, of these factors be nuiltiplied 1)}' six.
new divisors arc obtained based on i)icas. To a\-oi(] fractions
it is easier to work on a ])ica basis. I-'or two-point leads divide
by 864 ; for three-point, 570 ; for one-point, 172S,
42 PRIXTIXG
Example. How m;iny jiounds of 1\vo-])()int leads in a page of
this hook? Twenty-two ])icas wide, thin \-se\-en leads to the
page; 22X37-; ^<>4'' -04 pound, or about 15 ounces.
II
22X37 ^u 22X37X-x6 2
54
27
pr()blf:ms o\ ciiaptkr iv
1. If copy contains 10,000 words, and we can <;ct eijrht words in a line
of t\'f)c, ho'.v nian\' lines will it make ?
2. ('o])_\- consists of ten [)a;;es of tnanuscript avei'a.^ing thirty lines to a
pa<j;e and ei.idit words to a line, how many hnes of t\pe will it make if we can
,_;et ten words in a line ?
i,. If we wish to prei)are copy so that it will fill a certain space, and we
determine tliat the si/e t_\'pe we wish to use runs nine wcjrds to a line, how
many words should we wriU' lo liU ninety lines ?
4. How !nan\- lines ol each of the foUowiiiL,' sizes of tyj>e can he ;,'0tten
into a pa,L,'e six inches loni;: d-point, r-point, 8-point, g-poinl, lo-poinl,
I i-poinl , I 2-point .■'
5. IIo'.v man_\' ems of o-[;oint in a i)ap:e 4X7 incdies ?
6. How man_\- ems of lo-poiiU in a line 25 picas Ioul; ?
7. A paL^e set in 8 point, solid, contains 54 lines, if it is 24 picas wide
liow man_\- ems docs if contain ?
8. What decim.al part ot an inch is six picas?
(), If _\-ou incasiu'ed a piece <ii' furniture with a foot-ruk: and foumi it to
he 0' inclu-s !onL,^ 'Airat ■,'.■), ild \(>u sa>- its K-n^tli was in ])icas ?
I o. i low main' [)icas in ; ::u h .-^
11. How maii\" ^■I^^ ul (,-p(iin! in , incli ?
12. !i cop_\- (onlains '.",0 \'.iird<, '.■.hat >i/e type would yon use to hll a
.-pace 4X7 inches, il Nnn lound on ti'ial that lo-point a\era.L;eil se\en words
to a Hue, ()-[)oint axrra'jid nini' words, and S-point cKAen words?
i,v If the cojiy in I'l-ohli-m 12 contains hut 'lOo words what size type
could you use, and how ,\-onld >'on make it lit the ^j>ace ?
14, How rnan\' jiounds ot type- in ;: [)a'_:e .I-X7 inclu-s?
1;. It a t>-pr paLTc i- .'0 pica- wide and ,^o pica> ion.ij; how nnich does it
wiXrii ?
r'l. It' .a [)a'-:e of -^ point t\i)e is ,yO j)icas wide and d.; line^ long, how
much doe:i it ",'. eiL,dl ?
TYPK CVLCULA'lIOxVS 43
17. If we were to lead the page in Problem 16 with 2-point leads how
much, would it wci<i;li ?
iS. I'wo-point leads are put up at the typefoundry in packages contain-
ing ten [)()unds. If the stri[)s are twenty-four inches long, how many are
there in a package ?
iq. Determine the number of ems per square inch for each of the follow-
ing sizes of type: 6-point, 7-[)oint, S-point, o-point, lo-point, ii-point,
and i2-pi)int.
20. ilow many strips in a pound of 3-point leads ?
2r. How man>' pounds of 2-point leads will be required to lead a piece
of lo-point matter, if the latter is 23 picas wide and 20 inches long ?
22. W'liat is the selling rate per square inch for 6-point type, if it is based
on fort_\' cents ])er thousand ?
23. Some monotyped matter was found to contain 12,675 ems, how many
ty[)ewritten characters were tliere in the cop_\' .-'
24. If the carr_\'ing caf)acit_\- of a lloor in a j)rinting office is looS pounds
per square foot, how many pages 3X6 inches in size can be piled on a space
1 2 inches sciuare ?
25. T>-])e is frequently stacked in layers with cardboard between each
la_\-er. If we ignore the weight of the cardboard, v/hat will be the weight on
a square foot of lloor space if we ha\-e eighteen layers of type ?
CHAPTER V
PROOlRilADlXG *
4Q. Requirements for Proofreading.— It has been sairl
that an\-()nt' who pM^-~^;<^e- a thorouLrh knowledge of grammar,
ctymoloLTv, r-\-nta\. and orthographx' i> qualitied to read ])r<)()f.
Thi- ma\' co\x-r .■~e\'enl\'-fi\'c ])er CL'iit of the knou'ledge reciuired
of a ])ro()freader: the other t\vent\'-f!\'e jK-r cent con.-i.-ling of a
knowledge of indention-, make-np. wrong fonts, and numerous
other things embraced undi-r the trrm "rt;cie of th.e ofhcc."
hmplo\-ers much |)rcfer to ha\-e a> ]iro<)freader< men Avho ha\'e
* X')TF,. — 7\-arher> are ur,£:c'] to iiKiki- pniDfrciuiini: a stronL^ feature of
their courses in iiriuliiii:. The author lias luen liiiinu' tliis e\'er since lie
took charire of tlie jirintinL: course at the IMhlaneiiih.ia 'I'ra'ies Si hool. and
he hnds tiiat it aiTords abiunlant opportun.il}- to -peal: on inan\' topics
connected '.vith the trade. All of liie U.>^ons iia\"e soir.e hearinu on printin'j;
or an allied suijject, and tiureh\- ^er■. e a t.'.oioid purj-o.-e. Jfrrors are
purpoicl)' introduced and t;:en i otnmei;ted i;j)on. d'i;i>c ir;i lude 5iiel!in2r,
punetuation. syntax, ^^ranonadeal construction, improprr di\i-;on;. trans-
posed lines. t\-po<:ra[)iiie;d errors, had iruikc-up. had r-pa^ :!:j. e'v.
The author's plan of iiandhuL: tid- r-uhject is to ui'.e eai i; hoy in tlie cla-s
a printed cojw of the IcSson and iia.w him marh sui h error.- ;c; he ( an iletect.
.\fter cacli bo}' has coniphUod t:.r readircj of ;d~ p'-oof. th.e boys cxchanc:.
papers and prepare to citei l-: upi ra. :; odr.rr's i oia'o.. ; ions. Ifach bo\' then
reads a paraL'ra[i!i aloud. \- i e ]<■:•'< v<. •':-. tiu- err^c"- a!-e t.dr-.en u[) in turn
and commented on. and prop.-r ti-.^ire (i:— -abr d. Tiie p; by , t matter of
the text frerjue:itl\- ionics in !■■- ixp'atuit^c: ar.ii oi-'U—i ;,. In this v,:!}'
mui :i \':iluable information is iiuparted th.at '.vould not otlierwise come before
the c!a-s.
l-'.rrors of (o;umd--ion in punctu.at'on are ]-cid ay'a.i:i-t tlu: bo\- just tlie
same a~ e-ror- oi orr;!--ion, for ii i;a- 1 i < :• ;o;:nd that stucfiits mark in and
m.irk o;t. :■: .;■■/■ ^;c, in the h^iOr ' .. ■ roddn:: is beiuL: o\-(.-r!ooked. A
stud>a:; dors it^a iiM-.. an;, k ic; fr-':. -d ■• an indi-criminate placing of
punciuaiiou niaik-. II. skoid'; ije t.iu^ut to u-e tl.rui i orrcctly.
44
PROOFREADING 45
had considerable experience at tlie case. These men, being
familiar with the methods of the trade, are more apt to detect
errors than those whose training has been in language con-
struction alone.
Proofreaders should keep in mind that each author has his
own style of v/riting, and that, if the author has made his
meaning clear without violating the rules of grammar, it is not
their province to alter the construction. If, h()we\-cr, an author
lias disarranged his words, and befogged, rather than claritied,
his exposition, it is clearly the proofreader's duty to suggest
change.
50. Proofreaders' Marks. — The marks commonly used
in proofreading are shown in Table I\'. These should be
"Studied until their meaning and u>e are clearh' understood.
Page 48 shows a marked })roof and page 49 the same cor-
rected.
The llrst few marks in Table I\', showing underlining of
words, are used ])arlicularl\- in the ])reparation of copy. Three
llne> drawn beneatlr a word signif\" that it is to be set in cai)itals;
two lines, tliat it i> to l)e set in small capitals; one straight line,
in itrilic; one w;i\-\' line, in boldface. Useof otlier proofreaders'
marks will usuall}- l)e clear from a careful examination of the
table and of the acconi])an\'ing samide of corrected proof.
Particular attention is called, lTowe\'er, to the use of the dele
mark, o^. This mark is encountered in \-arious forms, for proof-
readers do not all make it alike. All forms, however, have
the same meajiing; that is, take out, or remove, whatever has
been marked. Its use should be restricted to the marking out
of words or characters that are to be taken out entirely. When
one character is to be substituterl for another there is no need
to use the dele mark. If the character to be remo\-ed is a hyj)hen
in a eom])oiind word, and the two }:'arts are to be iniited, use a
ligature ab()\-e and below the dele to show that the words are
\o be brought together. If the hy])hen is to be taken out of a
coinpound \\'ord and two separate words used, substitute a
space mark (,-^ ) for tlie hx'phen.
4() I'RI.MIXC
r.viii.K iv.-sv.Miu)Ls l•:^^'L()^•l•:!) ix i'roofreadtng
Put infapitHlsJ
Put inCSMAl.L C.M'1T.M,S.'^
Put i»^ir«a>7)ty|x'
Put uiCitaliQivpe.
Put in(Tyil<r fiti-^tvpr.
Wrong f(Qt: character of wrong size or
style.
lA. TransjQ'.
^ Dele: take(ij}out.
0 Letter ^■ersed— turn.
[2 &^ ^iu-vls. jjCarry to the left.
3 f>^ '}lM.tl^ rajry to the rit^ht.
X l^xrfcct letter— correct.
vi, Space show^etween words— shove down
G ^ ^ ^ndent
:^ Cut iij^space.
^'^ Cl^je up— no space.
Sfftf o'l^i^ "■■««■ *i* '-•*- Bad/spacing: space more/evenly.
-;3:S=*' <yi stCa^ -^Wai^^t£n crixjked line.
- - " o^ st'e.-t Restoro^or rctninAvords crossed out.
^[i. -l^ ^ Ltt^. Print (ae, fi, etc.) as a logotype.
GJ Periixl. Always make a circle around the
dot, so that the period will not be mis-
taken (or a comma or a blemish in th'
paper.
fi^ Signifies comma.
v^ Signifies apostrophe.
H;y vy Quotation marks. ,
W Signifies hyphen.
/n Signifies colon.
j/ Signifies semicolon.
\-}^\ Signifies one em dash.
Uf^ Signifies two em dash.
?/ Signifies intiTrogation |K)int.
1/ Signifies exclamation mark.
\?V Signifies :.U|)erior charactei.
/^ Signifies inferior character.
Inclose in bra( kets.
Ini lose in parentheses
I'se character(ttT^
Make a new paragrapli.
Not a paragraph; run in.
Words are oimtte<l from, or in^opy
Query K.autlior. Aild e.\ plan ji ion
^1'
(Tok)
I'Roci Ri:.\i)i\(.; 47
Another particularly important mark is ". . . ." or '' stet."
Stet is derived from the Latin, and means "let it stand"; that
is, do not remove the part marked out. Authors frequently
mark out passages from their manuscripts by drawing lines
through them. If they decide later to retain the passages
thus marked out, they do not attem})t to erase the marks, but
sim])ly mark the passage ''stet." Proofreaders also use this
mark when they have inad\'erlenlly marked out the wrong
word.
The comma and the apostroT)he should be ditTerently desig-
nated on j)ro()f, for, if no distinction is made, an error may
result. A mark over a comma signifies that a comma is in-
tended; if the mark is beneath, it signities an apostrophe.
As other rules of good })ractice, attention is called to the
following:
Always make a h}'])hen with a double stroke, thus, =, so
that every slip of ttic pencil will not be mistaken for a
h\-phen.
Always use a caret (A) when anything is to be inserted in a
line, and alwa^'s make the mark at the bottom of the line.
A line drawn through a capital letter in co[)\' means that it
is to l)e set in lower-case.
A ring drawn around a. contraction, an abl)re\-iation, or an
ampersand (&) means "s])ell it out."
When marking a ])roof ])ut all the errors that are to the left
of the center in the left-hand margin and all to tl^e right of the
center in the right-hand margin. F!;ice them directl_\- op])Osite
the line in which they occur ;ind in the order in \\ldch they
occur. To be sure of ha\ing room for this ])urp()se, the llrst
error on the left oi the line s!:oul(i be placed some littlc> distance
from the text, the tu'st one on the right sliould be close to the
text. Do not Jraiv lines from the errors to the eorreetioiis, for
that would entail a useless \\aste of time in tracing the correc-
tions, and there is likelihood of error if the lines cross or touch
each other. Moreover, such lines mar the appearance of the
proof.
48 i'RlMl.NU ^^
<egarain^; < -
Apprentices
Views and Practices Regarding ^>.
Apprentices -Z>Jt^'
C\/Aj. ff / Q, No. 4— By WILLIAM H. SEED '
tf/V^/t-A-*^ •/ t/ Prom /The Inl.ind Print orS for April, 1916
y^. C. ' ' B^ y^ arc a nuisance," were his first words, and it was
perfectly clear that the remarks apply here which I have
made about other offices where no aca/j/mic training is re-^^UB'
ceived by the apprentices.
"How would you regard a proposal," I said, "to send
\\j boys^io school half a day in order to have them instructed
^ in those subjects which would be calculated to give them «
V more interest in their work/ I mean such subjects as ^/ »^
grammar and composition, arithmetic, with special reference
^ to casting up and sgpn, designing the history and theory of '^
printing, and so forth."
"Would the courses be arranged so that some boys could
'— V attend in themorning and some in the afternoon, so as not
y^^' to leave the*o^|^ce without boys?" he asked. J. have al- C
ways noticed that foremen do not want to be short of boys, .
much as they proclaim them to be a nuisance// OJ
A^j Q "I suposeso," I replicd^^The foreman pondered for a few ^
/ / moments over what v/r,j '^evidently a^new idea to him, and
at length he'said, " I think it v/ould be an excellent idea."
O >v^^^' ^^y to^his sudden con\ersion to'an idea which I ex-
^X'Cted him to oppose was clearly to be seen. It would make y
the boys interested in their work/ J'^hat was everything to \ J \
him, and it is a valuable point to be kept in mind by the L
yd\ocates of academic irainiiig for apprentices. Put the (!p Jk
idea forward witliout explanation and you arouse a storm of
^/LA . oi:)I)osition, or at,^lTr>c'f^4ii^'^'*'>'>'th indifference; .but make it
, clear that you are really siting to make better boys, because
1^ they will^be moi-e iiUeresled in their work, and thcy^bow- ^
wows" are changed !o "hear-hcars." One might tlnnk it
sufliciently clear that tin's is ilie object of all sJiKjgested A-Oyt
acadenu"c training for printers, but it is not clear t<; those
"t/^. /Mnerely to make the trr.dc more exclusive; to "do something o .
^Qvho have not thought of it. V(ni are supposed to desire q
l)p>'s" out of pure nhiiantTO[n', as one niight clothe xf-v
tlmm were it necessary, or as one might gi\-e them
ftri fpi*^ out of i)ure good nature.
PROOlkKADlXG 49
VIEWS AND PRACTICES REGARDING
APPRENTICES
No. 4 By WILLIAM H. SEED
From Tin: Inland I'nnlir for April, itjiO
'" liOYS are a nuisance," were his first words, and it was
perfectly clear thai the remarks apply here which I have
made about other offices where no academic training is re-
cei\-ed by the apprenlices.
"How would you regard a ])roposal," I said, "to send
'bo}'s to school half a day in order to have them instructed
in those subjects which would be calculated to give them
more interest in their work ? I mean such subjects as gram-
mar and com])osition, arithmetic, with special reference to
casting u\) and so on, designing, the history and theory of
printing, and so forth."
"Would the courses l)e arr;inged so that some boys could
attend in the morning and some in the afternoon, so as not
to leaA'C the ofiice without bo\'s?"' he asked. (I have al-
\va_\-s PiOtice;! thut foremen do not want to be short of boys,
much as the_\- proclaim th.em to be a nuisance.)
"1 suppose so," I replied.
The foreni'in ipondered for a. few moments over what was
c\idenlly a new idea to liim, and at length he said, 'T think
it would be an excellent ide;i."
The key to his sudden con\ersion to an idea which I ex-
pected him to oppo.-e was clearl\- to be seen. It would make
the boys interested in their work I d'hat was everything to
him, and it is a valuable -point to be ke])t in mind by the
ad\()cates of aCiuiemic tr;iining I'or a])prentices. I'ut the
idea forward without explaiiiition and you arouse a storm of
oppo.-ition, or iit Ica-t meet with inditYerence; Init make it
clear th;it you are rial!}- going to make better boys, because
lhe_\' will be more interested in their work, and the "Ijow-
wows" are changed to 'dieardiears." One might think it
surticieiitl}- clear that this is the object of all suggested aca-
diariic training for printers, l)i.ii it is not clear to those
who have not thought of it. ^'ou are su])])ose(l to desire
aierel}- to make the trade more exclusi\-e; to "do something
!or tlie hoys" out of ])ure ])hilanlhropy, as one might clothe
and teed them were it necessary, or as one might gi\'e ihem
be.-in teists out of pure good nature.
50 PRIMING
51. Order of Procedure in Proofreading.- As a first step
in reading a ])r()()f, it is athisable to line up the paraf^raphs. To
do this draw a faint ])cncil-]inc down the ])r()()f, usin<i; the first
lines of the i)aragraj)hs as a ,t,niide. Any inequalit}' of indention
wili be detected at once. Next iso down the ends of aU llie lines
and verify the (li\-isions of words; that is, make sure that thev
have Ijeen j)roperly di\ide(l and that the remainder of each
word is at the be,;j:inninrr of tlie next line. See that all headinji^s
and suljheads (aho running titles, folios, and signatures of
})aged proofs) are correct. See that the nuniherings of chapters,
sections, etc., are consistent and consecutixx'. Glance o\er the
j)roof to see if any glaring errors are noticeal'le. 1'hcse things
ha\ing been di>])osed of, tlie mind is free for (concentration on
the text. Read and anaKv.e each statement made by the author.
Kndea\or to gras]) liis full nieaning. If he or the com])ositor
has failed to put in the necessar\- n^arks of ])i;nctuation, it is
the proofreader's dut}' to do so. I'liis is \\here the com])ositor
has a chance to show his kno\\ledge and skill. ]f the com-
positor understanrls ])unct nation he will ha\-e inserted the pro])er
marks. True, the ])roofrea(ler may not agree with him, and
some ma\' be altered or removed.
Now that the bulk of straight matter is set on machines,
em})loyers hnd it to tlii'ir ad\antage to h;iAe cojjy re\ ised ])y
the ])ro()freader before setting. This ob\iates resetting matter
for corrections.
52. Punctuation. — Tb.e f|uestion of ])unctuati(~)n is one on
which there is great (!i\'er-ity of ()])inion. Some authors ;ind
proofreaders cut tlu-ir >cnlcnces up into short, jerky clauses:
otluTS omit all ])oints so long as the words are logicalh" (on-
nected. The author ])refers llie latter jiractice, and would here
call attention to the iiicreasinLf extent to \\hich it is 1 ecoiring
esta!)li-hed. Just a> a clear, llowinLi; >treani is tl'e iro>t re-
freshing from which to (h'iiik. sd i- clear, llowing language the
mo>t refreshing to the mind, whether it be written or spoken.
I'root readers -hotild ].v vrrv can-fi:! not to alter an author'^
s/\7r of wriliuLr. .\ii\' sentence that u'i\es t|;c reader a correct
i'k()()iki:.\i)i\(; 51
concej)tion of the author's meaning may be said to l)e properly
punctuated. Words which do not give the correct sense when
read are either wrongly used or im])ro[)crly punctuated, and
some change should be made. Usually, it is not the proof-
reader's j)rivilege to alter copy; it is his duty, however, to call
attention to an^-thing that may seeni to him to be wrong.
Such a notation on a ])r()of is called a query.
53. Marks of Punctuation. — The following are the usual
marks of ])unctuation: the comma (,) the dash ( — ), the
semicolon ( ; ). the colon ( : ), the period or full-})oinl ( . ), the
hy])hen ( - ), the apostrophe ( ' ), the interrogation mark ( ? ),
the exclamation mark ( ! ), brackets [ ], and parentheses ( ).
54. Use of the Comma ( , ). — The Century Dictionary states
that the comma is "used to indicate the smallest interruption
in continuity of thought or grammatical construction, the
marking of which contributes to clearness." The following
examples show some uses of the comma:
1. Before a conjunction introducing an antithetical clause.
Aiu' man can Ijc a printer mt-rcly !>>• callinu; himsL-lf one, and tliere is no
one who would dare cliailenL^e liis assertion.
2. After a ])articipial clause, especially if it explains the main
clause.
!!einu: out of " sorts." we were unable to finish tlic job.
i''i^urati\el>- si)eakin,^, tliis man combines two or more indi\'iduals
workint;; in iiarmou}'.
3. Wheii the conjunction is omitted between words, ])hrases,
or clauses.
That job is fearfully, \von(k'rfull_\- put togetlier.
4. After a word or clause inde})endently beginning a sen-
tence.
I'ortunately, some Ijos's who start out to become j)rinters soon reaHze
their mistake.
Shorn of all its Acrbia^e, eriicit-nc\' is nothin,!:; more than getting a tiling
done with die least possible fri<'tion in the least possible limi".
r,2 PRLXJl.XC;
5. Atlrr each of a scric'^ of words c^r clauses, and when
\\drd- ;:iT u-rd ill jiaii'-.
Tiiin!. ll'c oi-iliii:i!-y iM-.itinc (>\ l)iisi;u-s ;iiiil siK-irty has (li'\-C'lope(! a
iii\ri:i'l I)!' form-. m|:|i a< tin- Ic! U-riii'ad and wnldinLr announrt'mfnt, the
.-']\\\ tar trai!-!'i!- aiul hniiiih->- h-t. ihi- lihuik form, the lime-tabk', and the
trlrplaui!- dire U-v\ .
'•. 'i o -r-pai-aic proncT nouns i)i'lon,<j;ing to ditlerent individ-
i;a.i> or i;iat\s.
To f ,i_:irjv'. lli/ary ^i-i-nu'd a in_\'sler_\".
Til A.Mi-'-iia. iMiroMf look- for pi-ace projw^als.
7. .\\\rf a \o(ali\"c cxjji'c'ssion.
Mr. l'ri-d>li-nt, 1 frrl liiydily lioiiorcd, etc.
y^. i)cl\\(fn two independent clauses joined with a con-
"unct ion.
Man;.' '<\ 1:- arr {ironc to '/wv ad\art- as to what not to do, and \"et v,t
f,()l \:i oiua- a oo:;-t ruiii\ c id. 'a of what should Ik- done.
'). .\il;'r adjcc'i i\ cs w liere two or more coniinc; to'zether
fjiialifx llie same noun, liul not hetween the last ;idjecti\-e and
i he noun.,
d'hf (j;'-.--tion of ton^ \-;uue? is entirely in the hands of the photocn,L:ravcr,
v'.iio caai !d^\■ you a iioni:, solid impression, or a L,"ra\-, weak, iminterestin},'
!o. \\'ia';i a,ii adiwii-.f (juahrie- llu' succeedin,^,^ adjective do
iiol li-r I he w muna.
i -ir !)• a ;-. -ah- a-e a a ron;.' hri-ht red.
llr i:- ,1 v.ra!. uld liiaa,
1 1 . I'll- i r^i live ( !aiwe> do no( l::ke 1 he coTuma, l)ecatisc the
-lalrJiaait ir- rr-irirird to ilia! j )a rl i'lila 1" suhji'ct. 'i'here is
ifceat iHfltawaie ol niranlia; heiween tlie follow iuLi; statements:
! t.. eoior, .'.iii-:! !- I .■i:;p!i'i)i( Warw dio'iid he preferred.
'!'!■,'■ eiiloi" wki' !i I.- I oiiipK.'iiieatary .-liould he preferred.
rKC)()FRi;Ai)[.\(; 53
12. Ahva}-.s use a comma before the conjiinction that joins
the last of a series of nouns, a(ljecli\-es, or [>artieiples to the
j)rece(Iin,^' ones.
Mi'anwliile, in addition to GutL-nI)er'^''.s sin'j;lc [)roce?3, two others have
dewloped. L;i\'iiiL; us three fundamental pnx'es.seri: l\-[)o,t:ra})h\- irelitf,),
intat;lio i incised], and litlioLrra[)h}' (plane], besides die-stami)in!j; and em-
bossing'.
Tom, Dick, and Ilarry have ^one to scliool.
If we omit the comma after Dielv, the sentence reads as if
\vc are telling Tom that Dicl^ and Harry liave gone to school.
Here is a sentence that recently apj^eared in ])i'int;
I tliink it is hi^h time we realized that there are other orcupations for
the blind besides makinL; l)r(M)nis, eanim; eliairs, we;i\inL' and tiinini; pianos.
Of course, the idea of \vea\-ing a piano is so ridiculous that
the meaning cannot be misconstrued, but the sentence is \-ery
apt to be misread.
Here is another: ''Seashore ch:urs, in\-a]id:>' cliairs and go-
carts." Of course, it does not mean inx'alid--' go-carts, e\-en
though it says so. A comma after '"chairs"" v.'ould ]ia\"e a\-oided
all likelihood of mistalxc.
Man\- educators ])ersist in teacliing tlie omis-ion of tlie
comma before the conjtmction, contending tliat tlie conjtmc-
tion take- the place of the comma, dlie ftniclion of [< cc>mnia.
is to srparn!i' words or ])hrases, vhile tliat of thi: coi;itmction
is to jo'ui them together. It i- obxious th;it the- coniimction
cannot fulfill this dual role. If tliosf wlio ;'.d\-()cate the omission
of the comma were to spend a year or two at tlie proof-desk
and had occasion to tiote how freciuenth' tlie sense of an article
may be misconstrued when the comma is omitted, tlie author
is confident that the\- would in.-ist on its w,.,-. When it is
used there is ne\'er tin\- doubt cis to the meanin.g of the sen-
tence: if omitted, the sentence is somenmes aTiibiguous.
A (le])art ment-store ad\"erti-ing n^anagir win; al^va\s in-i-ied.
on the omis-ion of the comma fre'|uenil\' went iiito ])rini wiih
54 rRiN'nw}
monstrosities in his endcax'ors to makt' hi- i!K\.ninu: (liar. At
onr tinu' h.t' was ^i\-in^ a Hst of the coh)r eonihinations thiat were
to he !:;;(! in h;in(H-:ei\;]hL !<. He stated thiat they were in "eon^-
hination> of hlack-and-w hite, hlue-and-white and pink-and-
whiie." Owini' to the faet tliat he on itted the comma before
tlie hist ^ronp in. tk.e series, hv resorted to the use of the h\"])hens.
Had he used th.e conuna, the hxphens would not liax'e Ijeen
necessary.
Of cour.-e, ihi-; was not so ])a(h His me;ininLj was cdear.
Ikit one (hi_\" h.i' ran into a new coml)ination of ('(jjors. and this
was the re-uh : "We Iiaxe th.em in hihi(k-and-\\liite, hhie-anch
white, ])ink-and-wliile and naxy Idue-and-nile ^rt'en-and-wliite."
Another noteworthy shortcoming of this ])articular man
was that h.t' usuaUy knew when to join two words together as a
compound a.djecti\e, hut he did not know tliat at otlier times
the\" could he used as sej>arate words. ("onse(|uentiy. Ire had
gotten into the hahit of usim: certain combinations of words
ahvays in the com])ound form.
55. The Dash 1. -A dasli incHcates a ])ause sH,<:ht'iy
lonL:;er than that called for b\' a comma. Its xairious uses are
co\-ered ii~i t he followini::
1. To indicate a sudden chan,ue in thou^L!;ht.
Tf ]uy juiL'iiirnt i- 111 error — well, " tlicrc's no nioiiL'v in llic priiitiiiL^
l)l:^iIU>^, ;iiiy\\a_\' !
2. 'I'o denote faherin',4 speech.
I --all -wfll -111); I don't think so.
;;. 'I"o point ■~n'l a parep.t liet ical clau:-e.
'I'lir \i\:\\v i,- [H'l'i-iialilr-- >rn~ili\ r lo at mo-^plKrir idmiitioiis — but the
ro-;l of making; il i- nol ureal .
4. Til -eparate an e\pl;inator\- wiird or clause from the
oriLrinai -tateinenl .
i'roni liir !i;;ir ihal M-iiiiiiii: \'..i- ':i\-enUil lluro l;a~ Incn a iK-iline of
lla- |i;-inlci-'- n-aril ior tliat lor wliirli iiiaiil i:i.: v,'.,.- ile-iuiiril— lanL'u.i-:!'.
PROOFRKADTXC, 55
5. Between a sideliead and the text, and after the word
"Note" in a footnote.
Sec .ueneral use throu^t;liout this book.)
XuTL. — U.SL- a (lash aflcr tlic word "' Xotc.''
6. Before the words '■Contuiued" and '"Concluded."
" How ^^'t■ (lot Our Alf)hal)et." — C'mtinued.
" Printing as a I'ine .\rt."' — Concluded.
7. To rc]~)eat by way of emphasis.
Your catalogue takes the [ilacc of \'our salesman — \'our catalogue is
3'Our salesman.
8. Before a credit at the end of a quoted article.
'■ Here we are face to face with a new and dillicult problem — -new and
difhcult, that i-. in the sense that . . . '" — M iniu<il of Style, Unhcrsily of
Cliidr^^o J'rcss.
9. Writer- who tire not confident of the proper marks of
punctuation ir ike frequent use of the dash. Advertisers some-
times use tilt d;isli to strint^ to,<i;ether a series of disjointed,
forceful phra;-js that are logicall}- but not s\'ntacticall\' con-
nected.
10. Do not use a dash after a fornitil tiddress to a letter;
a colon is tlie proper mark. (See under "Colon.'") The fre-
quenc}' with \-,hich steno,^ra])hers use both the colon ;ind the
dash leads oin' to sui)pose thtit suclr is the i)ractice taught in
business coUe', js.
11. Be>i(le- the one-em dtish, whose uses hax'C been exem-
plified, en d'.s e> and two-em dtishes are al>() used.
Use an en Ltsh to stand for "to" in words or numbers.
January- March, 1017. Pages ^o--i'^. Winter of 1915-16.
A com]iou (1 word set in ctipitals shoukl ha\-e an en dash
instetid of ti li .'pheii.
'IdlF. ADLKR-JOXE-S COXTROVF.RSY.
Use a two- .-m (kislt to shovi' omission of part of a name.
^Irs. Iv - v..''ll soon return.
56 I'RIMINC
56. The Semicolon ( ; !. The i);iii-^t' iiuliratrd 1)}- ;i semi-
colon is sliulith' loii^T tlKiii ihal after a eomina or a dash
The semicolon finds its u<e mo-tly in compk'x >ciUences.
1. When a sentence opens with an introductory clause, the
succeeclini^ clauses sliould be si'i)arate(l with seiiiicolons, espe-
ciall\" if the latter contain lommas.
The followinu: arc tlic olVirrrs foi- thr ciiiuinL'; war: ^^'i]bur Sniilli,
I'rcsiili-nt, of I'liihuk Ipliia. I'a,; '['lu'odorf .Mal>ii,\ \"irrd'rc.~i(ltnl, of Newark,
N. J.; Harold I'ar>c\al. SrcrctarN-Trca-urer, uf Hli.--\ill(.'. X. ^■.
2. When successi\e clauses of a compound sentence are not
joined by conjunctions, use the semicolon.
Standinir matter is Job insurance; it is tlu' cure for that ^^rcat c\al, the
transient customer; it is tlie ])rinter's t)e-l ai'.u'unienl for repeat oi'ders.
3. In Scripture references, to separate passages containing
chapters.
Gen. 4:6-1^^. 15. 19; 5:18.
4. The semicolon should be j^laced outside of tlie C|Uotation
marks, uriless a part of the (juotation.
'■ If ;i task is once bcLrun. newr ieax'c il lil! ii's done"; writes riitelje
Carey.
57. The Colon i : '. -The colon denote- a lonL'"er ])ause
than that after a .-emicolon. Its u-e> are illu.-trated below.
1. .\fter the .-alut;ition of ;i letlca".
\\'illiam I-'. Smith cv Co.,
(irxii.i M! \:
W'c- are in i-eceipt of youi- lette'r of tjie ei;rhlh instant, etc.
Mv JM AK Ml;. W il-mn:
2. On t it le-])aLre:-. where the location ])i'ecedes the name of
the publi.-^her in the >ame line.
\cw ^•,,rk: lolm \\ii.;.- ,S- Sn:,... I;;,.
i'K()(iiRi;.\i)rx(i 57
3. After llie introductory clause of a complex sentence.
Mdwanl I., 'riiorndikr, 01" 'I'racivv'rs ('olu's^i.-. Cnlunibia l'ni\ crsit}-, says.
"To llu' fi\a--ycar-ul(l a pa,uc of jii'iiit is an iiKlcliniU' snirai' of black
spixks on a white i^round; to liis tcarluT it is a dclinilc st-rics of letters and
words; to tlie printer it is not onl\' that, hut also ten -point type."'
4. He-tween minutes and seconds in time desiunations, and
between cha])ter and xerse in .Scri])ture i)assages.
He is in the : : 10 elass. (See " Period " for time-tables, etc.)
St. Jolm 10:1,^-15; ij :()-)<).
If a colon and the closing; marks of a (juotation sliould come
to,<2;ether, ])lace the colon inside oi the ({uolation marks if it is a
part of the (juouition; if it is jjart of the sentence in which the
quotation occurs, place it outside of the (|Uotation marks.
58. The Period ( . \ --'.Fhe |)eriod denotes a full pause, and
is u>e(l at tlie end of ex'ery sentence unless the sentence be in
the form of an exclantation or an interrogation. Other uses of
tlie |)eriod are;
1. 'I'o denote tin ad)bre\i;it!on or a contraction. A contrac-
tion is sometimes denoted b\' the use of an ti])Ostrophe. (See
Ajjo.-^trophe, ) Xe\'er use l)oth niarks at the stime time.
Dr. (l)o;',or'; Wnt. AViHiam); Pa. id'ennsyK^aniai; Co. (,Compan\-);
Inc. i Incoi-porali'd K
2. After Roman mnr'.ertds ;ind Arabic ligtires when used in
indexes or in the ntunbering t)f ])ara,izra])lis throughotit the text,
but not if st;iiidin_<: tdone.
See Tuimhered, [);;ragraplis throiiu'hoiit this book.
I. Composition . 13
T [. Pr!.■ss\v^)^k , . 40
111. Color work . . , , , - ... , . . , - 1 2,3
LKSSO.X XIV
58 FRINTIXC
3. To separate dollars frcMU cents.
Si-79 Si7-25 $y7S-6o
4. In tinie-Lables to separate hours Ironi minutes.
9.12 A.M. 12.49 ''■ '*'•
(Tn time-tables p. m. hours are usualK- designated in hea\-ier
type.)
5. To indicate that wiiat follows the ])oint is expressed deci-
mally.
,^1416 .7S54 .s't,
6. Names which have been sliortened and which are used as
nicknames do not take the period.
Sam, Ik-n, Rob, Will, l-rcd, Phil, etc.
7. To show an omission of words in an extract, use three
or four periods with en (|uads between theni.
Sonu' one lias lu'id that " 'l'\p()m'a[)hy .... ou.^ht to he like a slicet
of tlawk-ss crystal, so clear lliat you can ^^azi' ihrou.t^h it without e\'er being
conscious that it is there; ... ''
59. The Hyphen ( - ). Tlie use of the hyphen is illus-
trated below.
I. In dictionaries, to separate words into syllables.
in (oni pat i hie i'e\-o iu t ion
:. To show thai the word al the end of the line has been
di\ided.
(See the \'arious <li\isioiis throu;j;hout the te\t.)
i,. To show thai two or more words are to be ioined together
and used as a single term.
Sii calleij printiT
Tliree yeai'-oid cliild.
Aliideni ):riiil iiiu presses.
(See also under "Compound Words."')
TROOFRKADIXG 59
60. The Apostrophe ( ' ). -The ajiostrophe wus primarily
used to indicate the omission of one or more letters from a word.
It is no lont^^er restricted to such use, but is now employed for
other ])urposes.
1. To denote the omission of letters.
I'll, for I will.
Don't, for do not
It's, for it is.
2. To denote possessixe case.
William's hat.
Adams's bakery.
3. To indicate the [)lural of ligures or letters.
lie had ten 3's and tweh'c A's.
4. To dent)te a contraction.
Dep't, for Jepiuimoil. Sec'y, for secretary,
61. Quotation Marks ( " " ). -The usual method of
cjuotint: is to use two in\-erted commas at the beginnin,^ of a
citation and two apostro])hcs at the end. Some latter-day
fonts, of which Hodoni is a type, hax'C a character si)ecially
cast for the opening mark of c[Uotation. (See ])age 60.)
When one quotation includes another, the second one should
ha\-c single marks instead of double. If still a third occurs,
this should be double.
When a copied article consists of more than one paragraph,
the closing quotation mark should be placed at the end of the
last paragraj)h only. The opening c[uotation mark, however,
should be used at the beginning of each Cjuoted paragra])h to
show that it is a continuation of the citation. Do not close the
quotation at the end of each paragraph.
Periods and commas alwa\'s go inside of the quotation marks;
the other marks of punctuation go inside if the marks are a
6o I'Rixrixi;
l)arL of the (|aolaUon, outskle if they are used as puncLualion
of the sentence.
1. To show the exat't words used iiv ;;U author.
Il i~ liiiili time thai a |iiintrr ~li(iiiM lie alilc to mc iiimi' lliaii
"a (Irliiiilc -eric-- ol Iclhis and wiiiii-.""
(Tlu's ])ara,<j;rai)h is set in liodoni to show the special quota-
tion marks.)
2. Douhk' and single quotations.
F.xcrott R. CurriiT, in sprakini: ol' Will Hra(]K->' and his influence on
mciilern t_\i)<>Ln-a[)h_\-, lias llii-^ In say: " His i-e\i\al of tin- forgotten practice
of Icttcr-spatinii; has proved a waslelul and pernicious iiniovation— wasteful
on account (if the time consumed in inscrlinu spac^' between letters 'where
it is not needed), pei'nicious because it ,i,^a\e 'art ' conijxisitors a new play-
thiiiLr. and only ser\t'd to enlai'.ue the hole throuLrh which, as emploxdne,
printers unanimousl\- agreed, the prollts from the other departments leaked."
3. Names of hooks, ma,u;azines, i)()ems, and \\orks of art,
also the titles of pa])ers, articles, etc.
IIa\e you read dress's "Art and Practice of T_\'po'j:rap]iy " ?
He read an interesting^ j)aper on " Present -da_\' Tendencies in Typo.y-
raphy."
4. To flesi^nate unti^tiiil, ti'chnic;d, or ironical words or
pli rases.
If the layout of the job doesn't look ■• r\'j,\\\ " -why doesn't it :■'
When. j)rintini,' one ink o\er anotliei' we -onulinies ha\"( trouble because
the si'cond ink rtduses to •■|at;e" o\er tlie lu'-t.
(hitenbiM':,' would ha\-e been mort' tlia.n iunnan to haw foreseen the
e\-olution of his little " cider -press " into I he ,L,'i'j:ant ic rotary of the twentieth
eentury.
62. Interrogation Mark ' ? '. The interroLratioii mark is
said to i)(> a corruption of the lir>l and la>t Icllrrs of 1 lie Latin
word (ht(rstii>, a (lueslion, i)hucd (Uie ahoxe the other;
thu^, 'i
pr(Xjiri;aij{X(, 6i
1. It is used in askini^ a direct question.
lUit why is this a pleusiii"^ division ? \\'hy not some other distribution
of space ?
How much of this wasted time do you think is cliarged under the head
of " distribution " ?
2. After each ciuestion in a com]K)und sentence.
How much would it make if set in eiyht-point type 'i in nine-point ?
in t('n-[)oint ?
3. As a cjuery, exj^ressing douljt.
Gutenberg invented [)rinting from moN'able tj-pes at Alentz (?) about
1440.
63. Exclamation Mark ( ! ). This mark probably owes
i:s oriirin to the Latin word h\ jo}'. one letter being written
o\-er tl:e oIIkt; as ,,.
1. It is used to denote surprise, emotion, or an outcry.
()li! Ho-,v \-ou startled me!
'■ Hel;)! help!" he cried.
All, what a tangled web we wea\"el
() that I had the wings of an eagle!
2. After inierjections, used independent!}' or in sentences.
Oh! Ah! Ouch.:
Before the li\x' and the strong llies an angel, crying, "On! On!"
3. After an in\-()cat ion or contniatuL
Speed C)ur reputjlic. O ['at her on high!
Still, () niy ('(Hintr}-, while we may, look back!
Halt! Who goes tliere ?
'" forward, th.e I.iLrlit Hriirade!
CdiarL'e for llie uauis!' lie s;dd:"
62 PRIXTIXC;
64. Parentheses (' ). — When an author wishes to offer an
explanation of somethin^i; wliich has been said but whieh is not
an essential part of the text, the words are enclosed in ])aren-
theses.
The Romans wrote '.vith an iron pen or stylus (wlu-rxc i,ur w.r^l st\"le)
on waxen surface> .-nioothcd o\'er ■.vo(j(l.
The lower-case letter^, or minuscules 'this word, like majuscules, is
accented on the sec(jnd s_\-ilahlei. and the scri{)t we use now demand atten-
tion.
65. Brackets [ ]. — When one parenthesis occurs in-ide of
another, brackets are used to desi,ii;nate the inner one. This
frerjuently occurs in legal citations, but, inasmuch as nearly
ever\- office has its own style, no exam])les will be ,i:i\"en.
1. Matter that is introduced into the text by some one other
than the writer should l)e enclosed with Ijrackets.
As an example of the misuse of the term complementary. I cjuote from
an otherwise excellent article on the use of ccjlor on co\'er stocKS : "As
tiie lowerin'i of all colors results in black, and the liLrhteninu' of ail colors
results in wliite. then black and white are the two friendly mediums for
purposes of separation 'so far. so ^'oofl: but he adds], as tr,L_\- are < omple
mentar\' 'sic; to all cohjrs.'"
It will he observed that the hyphen 'meaninir the hyphen in com{)ounds;
is less frecjuend}' used than in former editions.
2. In reports of s])ceches, to enclose words ex])lanator\' of
the emotions of the audience.
While woman ma>- nex'er he elected to C'ontrrcss. she '.\dll continue to l;e
the "speaker of the house." |b'i-^i-li^er.'
V I'or folios and to enclose line.- dcsi,irnatin,L: where articles
:ire continued on or from.
[32]
[Continued on pafrc 132]
[Continued frcjm [)a;.'e 76]
iTii he ( nntinuedl
l'R()()IRi:.\l)lXG 63
66. Division of Words. — There is j^rcat diversity of opinion
an"n)n^ authors and ])roofreaders regardin.c; the di\'ision of
words. Some foUow the American ])hin of di\-idin,if according
to pronunciation, some the Kn_!^Iish plan of di\'idin<=j according
to derivation. It is a matter of extreme regret that gram-
marians ha\'e not agreed on some definite pkm, so that the
ordinary l:iyman might feel assured that he is following good
usage.
In offering the following rules the author is well aware that
the matter is but briefly covered. When in doubt, consult a
good dictionar}'.
1. Words should be (U\-ided according to syllables; a sylla-
ble being a succession of letters to re])resent one sound.
con-ster-na-tion s\'l-lal)-i-ca-tion
2. If the word is one containing a single-\'Owel syllable pre-
ceding the last s\-llable, di\-ide the word ])referably on the
\-o\vel, carrying over the last syllable. If it has two \'Owels,
retain both.
nierliani-ial. no! iiiechan-ical.
aj)f)r()xi-matf, >iot approximate.
clilTercntia-tioii, >tot dilTerfnti-ation.
3. If the last syllable of- a word contains but two letters,
do not carry it to the next line. If there is room for the hyphen
there is usually room for the last two letters.
\'orifcr-()Lisly, )wt Nocifcroiis-ly.
4. In di\-iding present ])artici])les the /;/_<,' should l)e carried
ov'er. If the C()n>onanl is doubled on adding the sulTix, carrv
over the second consonant.
?mok in,!,' din-ing drum-niinu
drink-in.L' sit-ting swim-mint,'
expiTss-iniz- (iiere the consonant has not \)vi-\\ doulilcd: it is part
of th.c oriudnai word).
64
]'RI\T[\(,
5. Dix'idc a compound word into its elc-nicntal words ratlier
than on s\llal)les. inilL\-> -pacing!; would he -acrilu'cd to accom-
plish it.
comiMisiri'i-rixiin. iioi v^)tri]>^,<'\n■s-y^u)n^.
(). Word- wliicli ha\a- hi-cn compiiundrd 01" twn word-, and
which, from u-aL't'. haxo coalc-ccd into one. >hould j)rclcral)l\'
be di\ddcd into their ori'iinal element-.
sclM(il-ni;t~U-r /i li<!t--r t/i-ni ->hi.Hilnia- lur.
Semi-annual .'^ I" ii' r tlii)} >ciiiian-nual.
unik-r-L-jtimatc .'n' h.::.r limi umUix^-limale.
7. Able and ihle are always to lie con-idered as the final
;\dlalde. and carried o\"er.
consiilcr-alik-
mdcrt ria. t-iblc
8. Words of one -x'llalile cannot ])v dixided. nor cari the
plurals r)f ^in,^u!ar noun- ex'en thouifh ]ironounced as if the\'
were words of two -\'llaide-.
horif. hor<es
mi a. inen
Q. The addition of the jia-t tense 1o 'cerh- of one >\'ilal)le
doe- not add a -xalahle. Sut h word- cann.ot oe di\udied.
(.li'o'.vn, di'o'.'.Tic
lap
'I pU-ll. JiU^iuM
lo. Xo Ihiu'li-h woi'd r'cer licrin- with an x oi' end- witli a j;
therefore, in di\ idinu: word- eoiu.didni: the-e letti/r- alway- keep
the A on the Upper lini' a.nd i o;: \\\v lower.
'I'he Word prtjU'Urr i- an cxiiiifa.n to the ruh; of d,i\-idi;iL.^
aoi ordini'- to promineiat ion. Tlie aeeent i- on the prrj. 'I'he
Word i- from llie Latin '^n jn-iy,. lo judij-o in ail\'aner. ..nd
i- ii-rd in ihi- foriii ill ai; loLTal docaimeut-.
I'KOOFRKADLNG 65
11. If the first syllable of a word conUiins hut one letter,
do not di\-ide it on the lirst syllable; carr\' o\'er the letter.
I!-L'>'pt ;i-nion:^ ;i-lloat a-shore
12. When there is a distinction made in the i)ronunciation
of a word to den(.)te its part of s])cech, the word should be
dix'ided accordin,!,^ to ])ronunciation.
pro-,L;re3s (\".) pro,t,'-ress (n.)
pro-duce Iv.) prod-uce (n.)
13. Xe\-er ha\-e more than two divisions of words at the
vn(l< of C()nti,L{U(.)U< lines.
67. Compound Words. —A com])ound word is one that is
Composed of two or more words joined to,ii;etlier to express a
single idea. The word indicatinir the idea may be a noun, as
in namin^ti; a thino'. or an adjecli\-e, (le<cribin,ir the thing named.
Sometimes the words are joined together as one word with a
hy])hen, sometimes without. Just when to use the hyphen and
when not is one of the battling Cjuestions for both com})Ositor
and ])roofreader.
Much has Ijeen written on this subject, l)Ut there is no
unaninn't}- of o])inion, e\"en among ex])erts. The mos^ com-
prehensi\-e article that the author has read is embodied in
the .Standard Did ionar\', and is printed on pages 30 and 31
(edition of rorv'. It is from the pen of V. Horace Teall, who
has also written a book entitled ""The Compounding of luiglish
Words."
While rules may \-ary slightl}- in i)rinting offices, the follow-
ing may be said to ])re\'ail.
I. When joining two nouns togc'ther to name an object,
and the idea expres-ed by the object is in the nature of a con-
tainer, use the h\-phen.
hat-I)ox pat'er-l)ox (a box to IidI-I jiapers)
pill-l)i>x (lil-can
66
I'kixiixc,
2. Wlien two words are arbitrarily joiiH'd together to name
an object, tliey no I<)nLi;er si and in their ori^Lrina! relation. Such
nouns do not take the liy])hen.
bluel)ell
blacktjird
lighthouse
bhickbLTr\-
(irumi'i-li
bcdronni
lioiiilniaii
headache
turiike\-
R-.lo.al
railroad
sailboat
steamboat
draltsiiian
goldsmith
bathtub
3. When joininiz a |)artici])le to a noun to make a new noun,
use the hx'phen.
sitlinu-room firinting-ijress
smoking-room sewimr- machine
gambling-h(juse boiling-point
4. Wdien two words are joined toizether to form an adjective
precedin^L!; a notm. tise the h\'])}-ien.
still-life studies so-called magician
high-grade go()(is abo\'e-named rules
week-old bal)y much-used jdirase
5. Ad\'erbs that qualif}' adject i\'cs ])recedinii; nouns do not
take the hyi)hen. The}' do not become ]>art of tlie adjective,
but retain their use as ad\"erbs.
ri(dii\" dre^sed woman
newly marriol coujile
freshl\- picked bou(}uet
highl>' prized b(jok
6. Usuall}' (btit not in\-ariably '. conrwumd notms are
wrilti-n without th.r ]i\-phen if either of ihe word- coiUaius btit
one- -\dlable. with the hyphen if it e'onlain> two. a> >ei)arate
words if it contain- three or more.
inkman
sa'.'.tiiill
notebM,,k
ii eliou-e
Iire~-l'iinm
mat.er
-111
p,,,l:et bn,,k
piiWrl' l|nU^e
( omi" i-iniz room
ink manul'a< luriT
(h.iculale tuill
relrreli.e book
busilie-.- i!(al^e
ret italion rnom
7. Tlic ])re-eiit-da\- Uai(!ei!C\' i< to oniit the hyjihen in
liida\' lunicht ti.nn.rrow
PROOJ-RF.ADIXG 67
8. Vice, ex, elect, and general, when ])arl of a title, slioulcl
l)e joined to the chief noun with a hyphen.
\'ifc-Pr(.'si(li'nt Marshall the IVcsidciit-elccl
cx-Prcsident Koosexclt the {xistmastt-r-^cneral
9. It fre(|uently ha])pens that after words lia\-e been in use
for some time, and we ha\-e l)ecome fairly familiar with their
construction, they change in form, the hyi)hen llnally being
dro])ped.
bookkeeper proofreader earmark
newspaper bloodshed nniskmelon
keyboard saleslady shipmate
typewriter whalebone yardstick
10. Latin and Greek j^rcpositions ])rehxed to a word do not
usually take the hyphen.
antedate international postscript
antisei)tic subcutaneous superfine
11. When two or more compound words have one part in
common, that ])art is omitted from all but the last word, the
omission in each case being designated by a hy])hen.
The boxes were full of one-, two-, and three-em quads.
Those tools are used by j^old- and sihersmiths.
68. Capitalization. -While there are some slight differ-
ences of o])iiiion among [jroofreaders regarding ca|)italizati()n,
the following rules may be considered as meeting the re()uire-
ments of the axerage office.
1. K\ery sentence should begin with a capital.
(See sentences throughout this book.)
2. Every line of ])oetr\- should begin with a ca])ital.
^\:s, words ma_\' sound alike, yet ha\e
Dissimilar nu'anin^s, maybe:
How different is a weak old miin
l*"roui just a \seek old !)ab\-I
68
\1 i.\(,
:;. All ])r()])LT iioun^ and most adjcclix'es derixx-d from ])ro])er
noun< >hould licirin with a cai)ital.
Anii-rit a
Atnrrii ail
I'.iiL'land
i:ii-li>h
I'rancL'
I- rciu h
4. Wt1)S dcri\"rd from proper nouns should hci^in with a
lower-case letter.
aiiuriraiiizi'il
llrtrilrri/A'il
t)o_\-c()tt
niaradaniizt.'d
;. Nouns or ])ronouns that designate an\' memher of the
Chri.-tian Trinit}' -hould he capitalized.
I'roxidiinr llu- I)Lit\-i
Ifiiii (xkI or Chri-t
IL.ly (ihost
Sun of RiLrhtfnusiH'Ss
'). Capitalize the names of >tate:i, counties, cities, -.treel.
and park-.
I'cnn-yhania Si-cniid Street ZonlnLrical Clanlcis
.\e'.\' \'nrk I'airmouul I'at'k Cciitral I'ar'k
\\'ilkes-l5arrc TniitDii .Munroi- ( 'ouiit \'
7. Capitalize the names of churche-. organization'-, cluh-
ociel ie-. and luiiidinir-.
ir-t llapti-t Chunii T\-nii-yl\"ania Railroad
lairjiarr- ,ii' i!;c K,>. . ilut i. in WM^l.'.Mrl li liiiildiivj;
'i,i!>.i,ii,liMn Chii, IfMirl M.-irnpolr
',< K!'-( 1 ( li l':;l jii> I ',! itic alii 111 ( iii'ai'i i ( '' mKltc
"lii>.M l.ra'jiK- i'ldladc l[ii!ia Rapid I'ran-it ( 'n.
iS. (/apitalize aU u'ci lUM'aj )hical name- and di\'i-ion-
A;k
!,-d. ( 1. ra:i
;;;.
ll.a-a
( .a;
' -;■ Mr-.l..,
\\r-;
K.>
-^|[1^ -lat-
( ),
idi la
( ^li
r M;,\
( )r
I III
( .ikr.dlar X.aaa \'.,\,
R.M k\- M.iiMtaiii-
Rio (,iandr
l)o]av.:na- River
llir I'eiiin-uhi
We-teril lleliliM'lierc
rKO()iki;Ai)i\(i 69
g. Capitalize the \ arious epochs, iniportaiU events, lioHdays,
treaties, acts, and bills.
Middle A,i;es Declaration of Independence Hay tR'aty
Ri'iiaissance l''ifteenth Amendment Stamp Act
Re\-olution the C'ivil War Ma)j:na Charta
Memorial Day thanksgiving Day Fourth of July
10. Capitalize titles and academic degrees.
I'residenl Wilson I'rincr of Wales
tile President lof the U. S.) Joseph Smilli, \)A)., l.L.D.
Rear-Admiral Dewey ['hilij) (iuernsew M.l).. Ph.D.
11. Capitalize the word "cit_\'" only when part of the cor-
porate title.
'twin C"it_\' Jersi'\- City
I shall sue the Cit\- of Philadelpliia.
The city of i'hiladelphia eo\'ers an are-a of 1,^2. j scjuare miles.
12. Capitalize the titles ot" ]);)ok.>, pajters, niagazines,
articles, etc.
The Inland Printer Tlu' American Printer
The House of the Seven C.ahks.
The (iraphic Arts and Crafts \ ear-Hook.
Pholograx'ures and Their X'alue to the ( 'onum-rcial World.
Printing Instruction in the Puhlic Schools.
13. Capitalize the seasons onlx' when tln'v are personified.
the poet s|)rak> of Wintei', wilh hi> ic_\" blasts,
'then (.'omes Summei-. clad in her garli ol green.
We ha\(' had a severe winter.
I mi't hiiu last summer.
14. .Mways ca])italize the pronotui " I '" and the interjection
-().■■
69. Printing-office Style. — 'Flu- jonrneynian ])rinter who
inigratfs from one othce to another soon learns that there is no
imiform st\-le existinii; in all otTuH's. In olTerinir the folio\\in<_j
KIXl I\(,
\\>l tl'.i' aullior U'fl- ihat he is present iiiL;; tlic usa.iie of the
he.-t priiii iiiu' hou.-es.
Omit period- from heading--- aiul at the ends ot' displa\' line-.
unle-> denoting: an alil)re\aation.
l)o not u-e period- al'ter Koman numerals. Thex' are not
ahhreN'iation-.
The al)l(i'e\'iation 11). for pound- eomes from the Latin lihra,
the ])lural of \vlii( h i- li'nic. 'Idie-refore. lb. -hould ,-land as the
projjer ahhreviation for hoth -inii;ular and plural.
Do not u-e -jiaee^ between inilicd.^ in ahhrex'iated tjtles.
M.l)., I'll. I)., A.i;.. I.L.I).
Xe\"er u.-e the word "ri\'(.r" in names containing the \\dr<l
Rio; Rio mean- ii\er. Rio (irande. not Rio (irande Ri\er.
Xe\x'r u-e the word '"mountains" ir, words eontaip.inii; the
word .^ierra; Sierra mean- a >awdike rcin'.ie of mountains,
."-^ierra Xex'ada. not ."^ierra Xewida .Mountain.-.
The word S.niimr. meaning je-u.- (diri-t, -hould he sjjelled
with a "u": if it ha.- any other meaniuLr. make it lower-ease
and do not u-e the "" u."
.\il >in'j;ular noun- in the ])o--e.->i\-e ca.-e take the a.])o^tro])he
and .-: Jone-'.- wa^ron. Smith's store. .\ll])lural noun- endin,!: in
s take the aj)o-tro])he after the -: hoy.-' elothinLT, Lrirl-' shoes.
If the plural i- not made 1)\- addim: <. hut 1)\' ihanizini: tlie form,
tlien add the a.po-trophe and .-: men'- hat-, children'- toy-. If
tlif -in'iular p!)--t'--i\-c end- in -. and the -ucci-edin^' word
hcLun- with -. or -.'.Tei'e 1 lie re i- a -ucrL---i(in 1 )f - -dund-, t hen the
])o--e--i\-e (!oc- Mot take the -: for con-cience' -ake. for je-u-'
-ake. fi >r 'S^ 'i 'due--' -ake.
Xe\rr allow a -U( ((•--ion of 'lu' >ame word at the end of
rr:i'i\- ili,;n two line-. If a .-erie- m| -m;dl word- occur- at tlie
end- of -ucer,--i\a- line-, and <ii\-e- the effect of the word- -tand-
inu' a]i;irt from the text, break uj) tlii- -ucce--ion by di-i\-in'4 o\"er
an oi ca-ional \\-ord. In some otVice- t he rule i- to [ ire\"ent more
tha.n two punclualiiin mark- of an\- f.ind from cominu in -uc-
ce--i(.n. If iiiuch 1 in;e and Lib. ir \'.ould br entailed in ] >re\ent inu'
thi.-. it i- bc"e|- '." -:o/r t!:e time and i.a— llie mark-.
PRooi Ri:.\i)i.\(; 71
A.M. and P.M. look l)csl wlicn set in small capitals. If
tluTc are no small capitals to the font, put them in capitals
if the line is ca])italize(l, in lower-case if the line is in lower-case.
If the abhrexiutions are in capitals do not use a space between
the A. and the AL, but use a thin sjxice between the P. and the
M. 'I'his latter is to keej) the ])eri()d closer to the P than to the
M. If the abbre\-iations are in lower-case, leave out the space.
Per cent, the contraction for the Latin per centum, \?, now
a full}' anglicized term. The modern tendency is to leave off
the period, .\notlicr decade may witness the full coalescence
of the two words, for the be^inninu; is already in evidence.
I'ercent is just as ,L,food a ^vord as percentajre, and is frequently
found in ])rint.
The short "and,"" or ampersand, had its ori,L^in in the old
Latin manustripts. The Latin for ''and'" is et, an early form
bein,Lj written £1. Py a ])rocess of ex'olution, the early scribes
de\'ek)])ed it into the li,L,^iture 1S . To-day we have many
beautiful forms of this character, but the}' are only suited to
job. composition, and should not be used in ordinary book work.
The ampersand should l)e userl only in lirm names, as Straw-
brid,m: & ('k)lhicr, W'anamaker & Prown.
U is the rule in man}' offices to sj)ell out all numbers under
one lumdred, and put in li,u;ures all oxer one hutidred. If the
text is full of numbers it is better to put them all in li,<fures.
.\mount> ot li\e or more h^ures take the comma: 12,622,
2-2.i)~(). Amounts of four liiiiures do not take the comma,
unless in column forniation, when the comma should be used
to keep them uniforni with amounts of li\"e ligures.
When usin,L( a, <lollar mark at the head of a column of amounts
l)lacc the mark aloii'-rside of the fiuure oil the first line in the
dollar column. If there is no li'j;ure in the dollar column, use a
cipher. When the column lias been totaled, add the dollar
mark lo the total limounl. Do }iot use l/ir mark on each line.
While rules for indent inLi: i)araLrraphs ma\' differ in i)rinting
ottfces, it is conceded that indent inij; accordiuL' to the following
will produce a i)leasing a.i)])earatice: for measures up to ancl
72 PR I Nil. XC,
incIuclin,L,f ci.t^hteen ems of i)ica, indciil one cm of the hod}- in
which the tN'pe is set; for nineteen to t\vent\'-lour enis j)ie;i, one
and a half ems of the body; fiMm twenty-live to tl'^irty ems pica,
two ems of the hod}-. This ai>j)!ies to si/es from ei^lit- to
tweh'e-point. Larger sizes talce less space, smaller sizes take
more.
Indent ])octry aecorcUnc; to rhyme. If a few short line?
occur, they should hang in a])out three ems.
jM_\- count r_\! "lis of tlicc,
SwLX-l land of lihiity,
Of tluT I sinol
Land where my fathei's died!
Land of I he pili^rinis' pride!
I'rom c\'ery mountain side
Let freedom ring!
BlHLlOCiRAl'lIY
Punclualion, hy F. Horace TealL
The Compound !>ii^ of l-'.n^HsJ/ W'onls, 1)\- I". Horace Teall.
Correct Composition. 1)_\- Lheodore L. I )e Xiniie.
Proofread in;^ and Punclualion, 1)\' A. 3,L Smith.
Manutd of Style, The l'niversit_\' of Cdiicai^o I'ress.
Article on compounding of words, Slaudard Dictionary (igij ed.i
rin. x.'vx. xxxL
CHAl'TKR VI
'I"S'PI-: FACES
70. General Classification. — Before proceeding to a study
of job coniposiiion, it is xery essential that the student learn
sonicthinii; of the general characteristics of job faces. The lirst
iin])ressit)n that one recei\"es when set adrift in a large ])rinting
office is that he will never be able to differentiate the various
ty})e faces. The task is really not such a difficult one, after all.
As a matter of fact, e\'ery type face comes under one of live
general headings — text, gothic, roman, italic, or script.
71. Text. — At the time of the in\-ention of printing from
movable types, the tirst letters cast were imitations of the hand-
lettering then prevalent in the monasteries. This style of type
is now known as text or black-letter. ]\Iost authorities agree
that it really should be called i^othic, doubtless owing to its
This is
24^^3otnt Cloister M>M\
p'.-issessinr those i)oiiUed characteristics so pre\'alent in (lothic
architecture. Tiie same authorities also contend that the t_\-|)e
f ici' known as gothic should be called block letter. It is called
''.ans-serif " by some I'"nglish founders.
The term Idack-letter is derived from the fact that when the
letter is printed in mass formation, the whole tone is black.
The early manuscripts were not set olT in ])aragra]:)hs, but the
break in tlmught was designated bv an ornament. There were
no bre;ik-lines throughout the text.
As the text letter hiis come to us from ecclesiastical sources,
it seems to be the most logical letter to use for such ])ur].)oses.
73
74 prix'IIXt;
72. Gothic. — Our ])re.-LiU-fla\' irDtliic hears a wrv >{rim<^
ru-enililaiu L' to the Icttrr u-cd li\" the ancient. Konian.-- on their
stan-ij)S and coin-. Such letter- are (le\-oi(l of -erifs.
This i?
12-PT. LINING GOTHIC No. 45
73. Roman. -The Roman al])ha])et was evolx-ed froni the
I'hieniiiaii and (ireek al] )}ial)et -. and oriudnali}- con-i-tecl ot
capital letter- onlw The -nia.ll or lowc'r-ca-e letters are cor-
ruption- ol" the capital-, and came into u-e duriiiL; the ei<i;hth
cent ur\-.
The Roman style of lelterin^L!; was u>ed 1)\- th(.' Latin scrihes
in prepariiiL: manu-crijit >. and by the >tone-cut ter> for inscrip-
tions on huildiiiL''- and taMet-. It i> much u>ed in pre>ent-da\'
architecture, and the \'. the old form of the capital U, is still in
e\idencc.
This is
2 2-Point Old-Style
lliis if
2 I -Pi. Bodoni
Tile lir-t -ucie--l';l roman tx'jte face wa- (Ul hy Xicola-
Jen-on, at \'eni( e. in 1471. Thi- ha- -er\"e(l a- a model for later
produ<tion-. iJoi.h- prin'ed ]>v jt-!!-on in 1470 do not contain
till- letter- J, r. and W. ihe-i- ('laracter- hein.u added to the
aiphaliet -e\ era] \ea,r- lal cr. Where t hr lorce of w wa- reouiri-d.
two \'- •.■.(■rr -et -ide \)V -ide. Thi- doe- Hot often occur in
Latin. Thr '<\i\ forin of the ( ap L' wa- \'. aiifi from thi- wa-
deri\ed llir d.aiJM,- [' , ,y \\' .
TVPIO FACES 75
The fact that the letters J and U are not alphabetically
arranj^ed in our cap cases would seem to signify that the cay)
case has undergone no change in arrangement since the days of
Jenson. Also that the W was added l)efore the J and U.
74. Italic. — The slanting or italic letter (so named in honor
of Italy) was introduced by Aldus Manutius. It was patterned
after the handwriting of Petrarch, an Italian poet.
When italic type was tirst made there were no capitals to
the fonts, so roman capitals were used with italic lower-case.
This is
18-Poirit Old-Style Italic
75. Script. -—Script t}'pcs also owe their origin to imitations
of handwriting. This st}'le of letter is restricted to printing
that is of a social nature.
This is
76. Old-style. — Roman ty])e faces are subdix'ided into
olti'St\'lc and ))iodeni. Old-style faces were in \-ogue from 1469
until lyS^^, their strong, bold, rugged characteristics being
especially adapted to the rough, hand-made ])apers then in use.
The\' were dis])laced in public fa\-or for awhile, but have grad-
ualh' come l)ack. At the ])resent tune they are again in de-
mand, and the major portion of our most artistic ])roducti()ns
are in this face of ty])e.
Not only are old-style faces in fa\-or among t^fiographers,
but a.rtists in hand-lettering are ])r()ducing many beautiful
examples to grace our typographical journals. Frederic W.
(loud\', of New \'ork, has designed many noteworthy faces,
and (|uit(.' a few of them ha\'e been cast in type. Mr. Goutly
has made a si)ecial stutH' of the old masters.
76 rivlMl\(,
SENATUS ' POPULUSQUE'
ROMANUS ' DIVO - TITO-
DIVI ' VESPASIANI - F- VES-
1 8 POINT FORUM TITLE |^PATENTEd1
WHEN THE DECLARATION
of Independence was under consid-
eration by Congress, there were two
1 8 POINT NO 2. KENNERLEY
FOURSCORE & SEVE?i Years
ago our fathers brought forth on this
continent a new nation, conceived in
1 8 POINT NO. 2 KENNERLEY ITALIC
'R-pc J-a. vr- lA-i-iK.! hy Vtv^IltI \V. i.nvAy.
Where niaxinuim of k-LMlnlil}- i~ re'iuired. ()l('--l\-le faces \\-il!
\ir fniiiul -uperior In iinu'erii. 'I'hi- i- d'.ie In ihe fact ihat "the
iiiinnr elerneiil- iiair-Miie-. -' > called . are h''a\ier in tlie old-
-1 v\v de-iizn.
The I hief (nrfereiier in rniidem a!id <iid->tyle or ■' (i|( 1-fa.ce."
a> il i- (linimonly laiied in l-in'^htnd lie- in the matter of /vii-
portiiDi. doth deini: -ud-tant iaIK' ihe -air.e in forn.i. In o|d-
-tele there i- unaater \ariely iri tile width- of iralixidual letter-,
the thickeninL' of tin- cur\a-- in the round letter- not iieirai in
the center of the i iirxe- a- in the rn.odern. dul adow and delow
the center aiaoriniia^ a- it oiem'- on ihe ri'j;lit or left. Tlie-e
(uree- are not Lfeona-t ri( -I. jra.t e-refulU' con-idereil (juantitie-.
i:i\ inii a (haracter to liu- letter- \vhi( h no mechanical con.-truc-
t ion can ] )0--idl\- impart .
TVI'K I A(,m;s
77
77. Modern. — In 1783 Jkxloni desi.^ned the modern ronian.
It was welcomed by i)n'nters as an imiO\-ation, and it marked
the end of three centuries of old-stx'Ie monotony. While old-
style has re.^aiiied fa\-or for dis])lay work, the modern roman
is still used for newsi>apers, dictionaries, encyclopaedias, and
scientitic books.
This line is set in Bodoni
This hue is set in Scc^tch-face Roman
Spi'cinicns of .Modmi r>pi-' Faces.
78. The Serif.- It will be observed that the letters in tliree
of the ti\-e groups into which t}-i)e faces have l)een divided have
small ])rojections at the to]) iind bottom of the letters. These
projections are known as serifs. See Fig. 29, which also shows
X,.,.k, ,.,• fe.nl
Piri-inaik
Imc. .'(). SlMiwiiii; llir N'arimi- I'arls of a 'I'\'l)t',
the \-arious parts of a ty])e. Authorities claim that the serif
])rol)ablv h.ad its origin in the necessit ies of the old stone-cutters,
who could not cut a \'-shaped letti'r in stone and still ha^■e the
ends clearlv delined. To admit light into the dark recesses, a
slo])ing cliisel-cut was made, thus adding the serif. This addi-
78 PRIXTIXG
cion of the serif not only made the letter more readable, but
ga\-e a distinct characteristic to it. A stiuly of t\i)e faces
re\-eals the fact that the serif is really the dominatin,^' feature of
the letter, and that one tyj)e face can be turned into another,
simply by altering the >hape of the serif.
In an extreme!}' ma.-terful article, ])rinted in "The Graphic
Arts'" for March, igii. Henry Lewis Jkillen shcjwed how he had
set a line of nothic ty])e of normal wei,i,^ht of line and width of
bod\- and had it photographed. He had ten ])rints made froni
this model. To each o{ these models a dilTerent serif was added,
thereby ])roducing ten entirely different faces of ty])e. The
student is urged to read this article, for the auth(jr beliex'es it to
be a mo^t xaluable contributi(jn toward the stud}' of ty})e faces.
79. Old-style and Modern Serifs. — That the student ma}-
readil}' ])ercei\'e the difference in the two forms, the old-st}'lL
and modern serifs are here com])ared.
ABCDEFGHIJK
LMNOPQRST
U \^ W X Y Z
abcdefghijklm
n o p q r s t u V
vv X y z
A ?» r: 1) K F C H T J K
L M \ 0 V () K S T
I \ ^^ \ Y /
a h (• (1 ♦' 1 g li i j k 1 m
11 o p (f r > t u V
\\ \ \ z
Vl>K lACKS
79
app
Bodoni Modern,
i8iS
Caslon Old-stylu
J 7-7
I''[('.. 30. — Showiiiij- DitTc-reiicfs in
Old-StvlL- and Modern Serifs
()l)ser\-(.' that in ihc old-style the serifs are all ohliciue or
slopin<^, whereas in tlie modi'rn lhe\- are all straight and li,L!;hter
in \vei_Li;ht. Note that all terminations are o\al in the old-style
and round in the modern. It will be seen that the llnials of
the a"s and t's of the old-style turn out, while the modern ones
turn up. The capita! I^'s and T's of these grouj)s are radically
dilTerent. These are but
a few of the distinguishing
features. The student should
critically contrast these two
faces and note their ditTer-
ences. See also I'djf. :,o.
OwiuL,' to the fact that
these two roman letters ha\-e
radically different character-
istics, it is considered Ijad
t\-po,u:rai)]n- to u>e them both in one t_\'])e composition.
Old-style and modern letters are cut in both roman anrl italic.
80. Other Groups. — Mr. Ikillen further subdi\ides roman
letters into two ,uM-oups — Display Types and wliat he calls Pub-
licitv Tvpcs. The first include- all so-called fancy or ornamental
letters and such faces as anti(iues, ionics, latins, job faces, etc.,
which are im-uited for settin.ir in pia.ire form. The second in-
cludes Ch.eltenham, Delia Robbia, l'al)st Oldstyle*, and Bewick
Roman, and are those letters unsuited l"or book work, but \ery
appro])riate for books of luxury and for commercial publicity.
81. Cheltenham Oldstyle. — .\t this writiuLr, txpefounders
seem to be xwinii; with each other in the ])r(')(luction of letters
of till' j)ublicil\- L'roup. Clieltenliam ()l(bt\'le was one of the
tirst to be produced. Ju>t why the word Oldstyle was added
to the nanu' i> conjectural, for the letti-r i< kickin;j; in the stront^-
(■>t of tlu' old.->tyk' characteristic- it has >traiLi;ht instead of
'' Tlu- hriii " old-style " i- ii-ed in three dilTeren! w;iy- ])y 1>'I>e-
fniinder< Old Style. ()ld>t>le. and Old-lxle. 'i'iic American Tv'pe
luunder- C'liinpaiu u-e- ()l(bl\le a- one word, coii-ei jn.eiit l\- in nainiiv^
their i)rudiicb the name is -o u;i\-e-n. The author jireiers old s:\le.
8o I'RIXJIXG
sl()])inp; serifs. The form of llic serif is well worthy of study.
¥\ii. ,^i shows ;i c;q)ital R. Xolice the rounded ends and also
the rounded brackets of the --erifs.
R
Fig. 31. — A Capital R of I'liirty-six-point riiellenliam.
This paragraph has been set in Cheltenham to show the long
ascenders so characteristic of this family group.
82. Clearface. From time to time experimer.ts ha\-e been
made to ascertain just what features of a ty])e face were stronu;U'
conducix'e to legibility the object of these experiments beinii; to
incorporate these features in one type face and ])roduce a letter
of maximum le,L,dbility.
Such an attempt on the i>arl of 1.. B. Henton and his s(>n
Morris has resulted in the ])roduction of the t_\"pe face known as
Clearl'ace. A conijiarison of this letter, which is an old-st\-le,
with other old-styk' tx'pes shows man}' ad\'anta,i!;es in its fa\-o.".
In so kir as possible, each. lo\\'er-case letter has been cast so as
to ])resent an e(|ual amount of while s])at'e on each side, and the
letters a and s ha\'e bt'cn opened up so as to introdu.ce \\iiite
S])ace and make them more leL^bk-. The Ljeneral effect of
Clearku'c is that it prest-nls a uniform amount of wliitt' lhrou,u;li-
out tlu' line. The rcsullaiU le^ibilit \' is pari icularly noll(t'ablo
in 1 he ^-malK-r si/.(>s.
This line ks set in Tei point Cleat face
83. Type Families. -It h:;^ nol been man_\- years since the
a\craL!;e \)\vrc of job co!iipo>il ion cciilaineil a mulliludc ol in-
harmonious l\pe faces. 'Hiis wa> dut', in ])art, to i!ie lact lliat
a .i^iven t\[)e face <lid nol run the whole t^anuU of form from an
extremeK' condensed IcIUt up to an cxlremeK' extended one.
The nece^-il\ for 1 \ [)o;rra[)hi( al ■'ha-li" no longer exisl>, fi)V
{\\)c faces ai'e now ca^l in "lamilies." Thai i^. ihe fa( iai (liar-
TYPE FACES
8i
R R R R R
De Vinne Lining Entjravers
Xo. 2 Ronaldson No. 2 Bold
Heavy Strathmore
Caslon Oldstvle
R R R R R
Scotch Century Lininc; Caslon Clearface Bodoni
Roman Expanded Oldst vie Xo. 540
R R R R R
Bodoni Clieltenham Cheltenham
Bold Uldstyle Bold
Litho Camelot
Roman Oldstyle
R R R R
Clearface Lining OMst vie LininKjenson Lining Antique
Bold Anliciue Xo. 5')0 (Jldstyle .Xo. 2 Xo. 525
Specimens of type faces cast by American Type Founders Company.
R
R
R
R
R
Harris
Roman
Lowell
Cardinal
Paul
Revere
Laureate
R
R
R
R
R
French
Old Style
Latin
Anti iue
Old Style
Title
Salem
John
Hancock
R
R
R
R
R
John
Hancock
Poor
Richard
Ivanhoe
Stuyvesant
Vanden
Houten
Specimens of type faces cast by Keystone Type Foundry.
I'lc. 32. — Conipurison of Tvpe Peaces.
82 l'RI\TIX(;
acteristics of the Icller ]>i\'\;iil lIirouL^houl all the different
sizes and forms. Consuh any txpefounder's spechnen-ljook
and exaniine the faniil}' groups.
84. " Pi " as an Aid to Type Study. The averaire com-
positor is rather [)r()ne lo lo-s inlo the (juad-hox the occasional
ivroiig font that he ^1I](1^ mi-placed in a case. Not only does
this litter the case, but it kee[)S that i)articular sort out oi its
useful and ])r()])er ])lace. The sortinjj; of pi is a viduable aid
to the study of ty])e faces, for in the process of locating the
letters the student ma\- ha\-e lo analyze e\ery ty])e face in the
ofhce. Do not lea\-e wrong fonts in a case; put them where
they belong.
85. Comparison of Serifs. — On page Si, Fig. 32, will be
found a number of letters showing different forms of serifs.
Make a comparison of them, and endeavor to pick out those
possessing old-st}'le features. Note that it is the formation of
the serif, the sliape and inclination of the hnal stroke, and
the relative thickness of the major and minor elements that
give eaclr letter its distinct i\e characteristics.
Pick out those of modern form.
86. Swash Letter. Cjuitt' a n:iml)er of the latter-day
fonts of italic t\pe lia\'e letter- with ornamental projections.
'J'hese are known a< s:ciis// letters.
(Hi:>Iin\- ()\ ( il \l' ri.K \ 1
1. X;inu- the fi\c iliiYrrmt hciiliiiL' ■ uii'Icr mir u{ which each typeface
must l^'.n.
2. i)c-iril)c the main i hafai I eri-! ii r- ni' eat ii uf the ii\a' ^i^Toups.
,i. ill)'.',- can yiiu iji.-l iii'-Tiii^ii nhi -i\le I'l-oni iiuKJern ?
4. W h_\- was ilaiii 1 \ pe mi i alleii .-'
^. 1> L'lit iiii I \ III- iiru! iiii\- iiaiiie^ I ?
TYPE FACES 83
6. Why was script type so called ?
7. When and by whom was modern roman first cut ?
8. What noteworthy features can you point out in the specimens of
Bodoni and Scotch Roman shown on paj^c 77 ?
Q. Is your favorite newspaper printed in old-style or modern ?
10. Is the text of this book printed in old-style or modern ?
11. What is a serif ?
12. What influence has a serif on the appearance of a type face ?
13. What is the supposed ori^nn of the serif ?
14. What are the predominating;; features of Cheltenham Oldstyle?
15. Why is Clearface so called, and what object did its inventors hope to
attain ?
16. What do you understand by a type " family" ?
17. What advantages are to be derived from sorting '' pi " ?
18. Set up a line of cap I^'s of 24-point light-face gothic, spacing the
letters I inch apart. Add serifs of different kinds to these samples and
note how ditTerent faces are produced.
CIIAPri'R VTI
JUI! COAII'OSirfON
87. General Survey of the Field. — J0I) composition is that
branch of lypc-ctting wliicli cn-il)raccs tlie ussenil)Hn,<j and
arran,!j;in,L!; of displav' letters. It calls for C()nsi(lcral)Ie knowledge
and skill on the })art of t'ne c()m])osit,or, and in return offers
^I)leIldid opporiunities to [)err.ons of artistic temjierament . I'here
is a slron.Li: fascination about tiie work, and tlie acconiphshment
ui a ])erfect ])iece of print iiii,^ affords much satisfaction.
Skill of no mean order is ri'quired to anadyze a piece of manu-
scri])t and from such analysis to ])lan and work u]) into t\'pe a
l)iece of conijxjsit ion plea>in;;' in form, niceh' i^rou])cd, properly
s])aced, and witli all its elements in jx-rfect liarmony as re,y;ards
t\-pe, color, mass, and ap])ro])riateness. lliis is the ability
that e\-ery com])ositor should ])ossess. Tliat e\'ery com})Ositor
does not ])()ssess it, howe\er, is exidenced 1))' the fact that in
many lart^n' i)riiuimi- ollices an e\])ert known as a layout Juan is
empl()_\-ed to do all t he ])la!miu,i^% lea\in^ the actual settin,!i; of the
type to tlie ordinary workman.
88. The Layout Man.— It is tlie duty of the layout man^
or "t}-potec1'" ft\'po,:ria;)liical architect), to prepare a plan of
the job (known as a layout"), and show tiiereon just what ,ii:rou])-
\\v^> are to l)e made, and what kin;! auvl sizes of t\-])e are to be
u^ed. The Ixpotecl is usually the bi'st-])aid man in the office^
and the stualent is uri^a'd to try to measure u]) to the re((uire-
ments of tlu' 1\potect"s job, and not be satisfied with beinu;
siniplx' a woi'kman of mediocre ability. Of course, this means
co:i-lant r^ludw but it al;-.o mean- time well -^pent, for increased
oj)portunil \' and better riaiumeral ion are bound to toUow.
S4
JOB COMPOSITION 85
89. Fundamental Principles.- Before proceeding with the
actual setting of a job, it is essential that the student should
have some knowledge of the fundamental |.)rinciples under-
lying correct com])osition. These i)rinciples are discussed
under these subject-headings: Optical Center, Balance, Har-
mony, Tone, Contrast, Approi)riateness, Grouping, and Pro-
portion.
90. Optical Center. — It is conceded by all artists that the
optical center of a com]X)sition is not at the geometrical center,
but is slightly a])o\x' it. Anytliing placed in the exact center
of a page has the apj^earance of being l^elow the center. This is
an optical illusion. A familiar example of optical illusion is
seen in the letter s. The upper ])owl of the letter is smaller
than the lower, yet they a])])ear to be the same size. If the s is
inverted so that the larger part is on top, the discrepancy is
Cjuickly noted.
Two eminent typogra])hers are at variance regarding the
optical center of a page. Cress says it is three-ninths of the dis-
tance from the top, I'rezise says three-eighths. The author
favors three-eighths. (See Panel Grouping.)
91. Balance. -According to the law of levers, a heavy
weight on a short arm can be balanced by a light weight on a
long arm. The balancing of t}i)e groui)s on a page or in a ])iece
of composition follows the same law. If the groups around the
optical center of the page are arranged in such manner that the
size or apparent mass-weight of each group is inverse!}- propor-
tional to the distance from the optical center, the com|)osition
will be properly balanced. Figs. :^ :^ and 34 show two pages,
one i)roperly the other impro])erly balanced.
It will be observed that the u])])er group in Fig. 33 is appar-
ently about five times as liea\-y as the loAvcr group, there-
fore the lower grouj) is i)laced five times as far away from the
optical center. This same ])rinciple of l)alance pre\'ails in
every piece of composition reg;irdle>s of size or shape. When
a mass is placed out of the center it recjuires something di;i-
metricalK' o]iposite to l)alanc(,' it.
86
PRJXTIXG
QCQ
4_)
.^
ZD
< J
bJO
icnts
lie even
^ u
1) ^
1— I
c^ -
efres
durir
y^ inv
Zu
CO
Music and R
Club House
Everybod
o<
ci
o
2>^
<
4-1
Q CQ
c
MltS
;ie even
•freshnK
luring t
invitee
ua
July 8,
c and R(
House c
verybody
z u
5 -^ UJ
la
o <
<
2 >H
-
J0I5 COMPOSITIOX 87
92. Harmony. — The Century Dictionary defines harmony
as ''any arrangement or combination of related parts or ele-
ments that is consistent or is esthetically pleasing; agreement of
particulars according to some standard of consistency or of the
esthetic judgment; an accordant, agreeable, or suitable con-
junction or assemblage of details." All the various harmonies
(shape, tone, color, etc.) spoken of in printing conform to these
definitions. When there are no discordant elements in a piece
of comi)osition there is ])erfect harmony. Harmony should be
uppermost in the mind when planning a job.
Owing to the radical difference in the characteristics of old-
style and modern roman ty])e faces, these two styles should
ne\'er be used in one ])iece of ty})e composition. They do not
harmonize. If a compositor adheres to one type family in
setting a job, he is l)ound to have i)erfect harmony in type faces.
While text letters and gothics are of radically different cut,
they may frequently be used together in a pleasing manner;
especially if the text letter l)e used as the main, strong line of the
jol>, and the gothic be sulxlued.
93. Tone. — All ty])e, rules, border, and ornamentation in a
job should be uniform in tone. That is, if the general effect of
the job is hea\y in ton.e, then the rules, border, and ornaments
should be hea\'y ; if the general effect is gray, then the rules, etc.,
should l)e gray; if very light in tone, then c\'ery thing should
be light. Figs. 35 and 36 illustrate this ])oint. In Figs. 37 and
38 the tyi)c lines ha\'e been trans])osed, thus showing how a
job may be spoiled Ijy a lack of tone harniony.
94. Contrast. — The major ])ortion of present-day printing
has to do with advertising. In all advertising the object is to
call attention to certain articles which are for sale. Each
advertiser has his own idea as to how the subject matter should
be placed before the reader in order to influence the sale. Many
advertising camj^aigns ha\-e l)een dismal failures because the
advertising matter has not been pro]ierly i^iresented. All large
business concerns em])loy ad\ertising men who |)lan and pre-
pare copy for the printer. In numerous cases, howe\"er, adver-
PRIXTIXG
^ a
a o
ristm
ebrati
«^*=^
ohn's Chur
nd Walnut S
-Philadelphia
St. J
Broad a
a. rt
^
s <^
,Cv <-. ■ —
^
Ul VJ i/ M & -a J/ 3 1 >J iy 3 i/\i 1/ 3 >/ ^ 1/-S i/3 1/3 1 3 1/ a i/ 3 ly 3 1,3 & 3 1/ 3 63 £■ 3 1 3 1 3 ly 3 03 £ 3 03 fc"3 t'Jf
JOB COMPOSITION
89
1
^ ^
s
« 0
•c' is
3,^
0 a^
1 n S ■^
w ^
,_> £f^i»^>|
J >S /o ^
>^:^ <^
4fe ^
y ^
0
. J
^
cd
a
o
-r:
a>
0
en
3
_c
t^
U
c
cfl
c
^
-C
-n
0
c
<J^
CQ
go PRIXTIXG
tisin<^ matter reaches the printer in maniiscri])t form, and he
must analyze and ])lan his own jol).
Tn e\'ery well-chsplayed ])iece of ])rintinfT there is one item
that stands out a])ove all others. This is the main dis]:)lay line.
It stands out b}' virtue of rontnist. Tt is either bi.t^ger or Ijolder
than the rest of the job; sometimes it is both. Compositors
frequently make the mist>ike of hax'injj; their lines too nearly
uniform in size to obtain contrast. A sin,Lde line standing alone
in a lari^e, while s])ace is \'ery obtrusive. If surrounded with
type matter of its own size it becomes lost. Display matter is
usually at ils best when surrounded by white space. Do not
croicd the mutter.
When ])lannin,ti; a jo1), the com])ositor should endeavor to
display it in ty])e sizes that, bear a true relation to the im])()rtance
of the matter. In Fij^. 33, which is a well-balanced job, it will
be seen that the relative im])ortance of the parts of the subject
matter has been broui^ht out in this way.
Black ink on white ])ai)cr affords the strongest possible con-
trast. If contrast is desired with colored ink on colored paper,
heavier faced tyi)e must fre(|uently be used to obtain it. The
compositor should consider stock and ink when planning his jol).
95. Appropriateness. — A])])ropriateness is the sine qua nan
of correct comi)Osition. No matter how well grou])ed or well
balanced the job, no matter how ])erfect it may be in all its
other elements, if it is not ap])ro])riate to the subject it is a
failure for the ])urpose intended. Hiere are certain things in
typography that ma\- be c;dled unwritten laws. One of the
most important of these is that the t>'])e used in a job should be
approi)riate to the subject. Heavy-faced tyi)es are a])])ro])riate
in printed matter for the iron and steel industry, but extremely
out of place in miilinery adx'crt ising. The latter requires
dainty, light -faced tyjjcs.
There is a series of display hices, called by Bullen "I'ublicity
T\-])es," that are exlrcniely useful for advertising ])urj)oses.
There is also iinother groii]> ada])ted to editions de luxe. (Si'e
Sec! ion ^o, ])age yg.)
JOB COMPOSITION 9 1
Inasmuch as text letters are of ecclesiastical origin, they are
always appropriate in printing that is to be used for church
purposes.
96. Grouping. — Many compositors make the mistake of
sj^rawling their jol)s all over the page, the subject matter
thereby lacking cohesion. This is radically wrong. In plan-
ning a piece of composition the copy should be analyzed and
the various elements separated into units or groups. Figs. 39
and 40 show two examples of grouping; they require no com-
ment.
97. Panel Grouping. — According to Trezise, in planning a
panel grouping consisting of two parts the page should be
divided into eighths, ai)])ortioning three-eighths to the upper
panel and five-eighths to the lower panel (see Fig. 41), because,
as he says, "the small part is to the large part as the large part
is to the whole; thus producing an exact ratio."*
The ratio three to five does not fulfil the rule given. Three
is not to five as five is to eight; but
3 : 5-5 : 83L
In fact, the factors of a Inic ])roportion are incommensurable.
A close approximation, howe\'er may })e had by assuming high
factors for the ratio.
a : h :: h: a + h a+b=8
assume, 89 : 144 :: .v : 8
soh'ing, ' =4^-% 'ds x = h, b — 4Y^
144 ^'" '^'^
therefore 3_'., : 4'i.'; :: 4*J^ : 8
* See '■ The Oraphic Arts ami Crafts \'car-Book. for 1913-1914,"
T\])osraphy, page :!,■,.
92 PRIXTIXG
o
l-H
H
PL,
o
S 2 ^:5 >1 -^
< Q O & xf -^
Z
9 :z;
^^ S < g w .. ,
8 g S S K --i
H
en
■/,
1/1
w
VJ
Pi
<
a,
J
<
U
/,
f/;
a;
0
w
H
H
<-
/I
D
ni
•/,
cw
H
l> 1^ ^ •-" (£1
X ci^ J V) f^
^ 5 :s
c
HH
iT,
G
'^z;
0
Pi
cyj
0
>-
^
^
w
Z
^
d
^
0
r-
0
'A
0
0
0
l—H
H
Z:
1— 1
0
g
H
X
w
H
<
U
0
y.
<
tu
U
H
>^
ix;
a;
<
ci
w
H
0
Q
<
UJ
f/V
<
P
<:
hJ
0
0
X
'J
•r,
'A
UJ
■/,
<
w
V.
UJ
>•
W
1
H
15
_a
"0
-3
_c
c-
M
c
c
ci!
c
NEW YORK
■)hii Wiley 5^ Sons, Inc
1
!
0
a(
P
0
0
0
3
1 — >
u.
c
JOB COMPOSITION 93
PRINTING as a
Means 6>/Education
Excerpts from a copyrighted article by
Miss Katharine IVI . S t i l l w e l l , in
"The Inland Printer" for June, 1916.
FOUR and a half years ago there were in
use only fifty-seven school printing out-
fits in the United States. Today over
nine hundred teachers are teaching printing in
as many schools and shops. The value of their
equipment runs into thousands of dollars, and
the marvelous response, both in numbers and
in enthusiasm, which greeted the call for this
organization testifies, as nothing else could, to
the educational interest in this subject.
It is well, I think, that we should pause in this
point in our progress, for this occasion marks a
stage in our history, and consider what this
phenomenal growth means. How much of it
is the result of the popular cry for trade schools,
vocational training, and industrial education ?
What part, if any, is due to the inherent educa-
tional value that lies in the subject itself ?
l''ic,. 41. — Panel (iroupln^'.
Showing use of ,i-point bevel-face rule. The bevels have been placed toward each
other, leaving the i-point face outward in each case. Inside and outside miters liave
been used in making the corners. The upper panel is appro.xiniately three-eigliths
of the length of the paye.
94 PRIXTIXC
This ^'ive? T,^\y parts to the u])1)ct ])anel and 4?^ to the lower.
If the (Hniensions were in inches this would place the dividinff-
line four })oints lower than three inches.
Inasmuch as true art is not based on mathematical accuracy,
the dimensions gi\en h\- Trezise are suillciently close, Ijut they
are not in cxacl pro])ortion.
This ratio is the so-called '\ffolden ratio" of Greek art.
98. Mass Grouping. — In ])lannin,fr ^roupinf^s it is sometimes
found that a small, dark mass must be balanced aj:;;ainst a lar<j;e,
gray mass. In such cases, the placing of these masses should
follow the law of le\'ers, each grou]) being considered according
to its apparent mass-weight, and correspondingly Ijalanced
around the optical center.
99. Proportion. -There is a \"ariance of ()])inion among
typographer- a- to what constitutes a true })ro])orti()n in a type
])age; that i>, what relation the width of the ty])e -hould bear to
the length. .Some say that the width should be to the length as
eight is to tweh'e. Others say that the diag(jnal should be
twice the width. The ])ages of this book follow the last named.
They are twenty-two ])icas wide and forty-four picas diagonally
from the folio to the other corner. If it is desired to determine
how long any ])age should be to conform to the diagonal method,
the length may be found by multi])l\'ing the width in picas by
1.7^21. 22X 1.7,^-M =.yS.i ])ic;i-, the length of this })age.
A di<])lay of high-clas.-- ])rinted matter was made in Phila-
delphia recently at which the sam])les were all chosen as models
of their kind. The author made fjuite an extended -earch to
tlnd whether any uniformity of relation Ijetwcen width and
length of the ])rinted area was -liown. l)Ul could find none. A
Search tlirough the I'hiladelphia Public Lil)rar\' re\"ealefl the
same lack of uniformitv. It i- undoubtedlv true that art can
ne\"er be reduced to mathematical ] )r()port ion-. There are
some -hape- and form-. howe\-er. that alwa\-s afford plea.-ing
pro;)i)rtion-. and tlie more ne,irl\- we conform to tho>e >hai)es
tlie more certain we are of -uct e->. Occa.-ionall}' .-ome expert
typographer will ap])arenlly \'iolate all the rules of art and
JOB COAIPOSriTON'
95
produce a pleasinf^ result. No one l)ul a true artist can do it,
and the avera.^e man is advised not to attemj)t it.
100. Table of Proportions. — It is e\ident from a study of
the su])ject of ty])e proportions just i^i\en that t\'])o<i;raphers
have not ;!,<j;reed on any standard. I'his l)rin^s up the ciuestion,
Is it possible io fonuulate a table of ,^ood pr()])ortions ?
It is conceded that when a page is narrow its length can bear
a greater ratio to its width than when the page is broad. This
being the case, why not arrange proportion's according to a
gradualh' varying ratio — say in multiples of five ? Taking this
as a basis, and using mukiplying factors that decrease for each
hve picas increase in width, and arranging them in quarter ems
of ])ica, Table \' is obtained.
'i\H\A-. \
;i..\ri()X Of WIDTHS and i;kx(;tiis
Mulli-
M
ulti-
Mu'iti-
Multi-
Multi-
Midti-
Multi-
Multi-
plyiiiK
pl
•iiiK
I)lyin(.;
pb'inK
plying
plyin^;
plying
plying,'
Fautur
Fuolor
Far I or
Factor
Factor
Factor
Factor
Factor
1.8
I
75
I . 7
i ^
I .6
I . 5
1 .4
I .3
1 . 2
.
jj
iS . oil
1 5
^
'•fi.
^
40.0.1
■^
^
~
%
^
^
i
0
lo
-f..J5
2 0
■M.od
,lo
.(5. 00
,15 40.00
40
5_> . 00
45
54.00
I 1
10.75
If',
-'75"
J I
,i5.on
jO
.JI .00
,; 1
.}5. 75
,iO 40.75
41
52.50
40
SA-i-,
12
- I • 5 ■ >
17
-<).i»>
22 \,\h . Ol,
27
4_'.oo
,5-' ;.;'). 50
,J7
50 . 50
4-'
5.5 ■ 00
47
54.4s
I J
-\i.ix,
IS
JO. 5')
-\i i7.-'5
JS
4,5.00
?,.\ 47. -'5
,^s
5 r . 00
43
53.50
48
54 .''5
M
-'4.75
i'J
J-'- -'5
-'4 -S^-'-T,
JO
44.00
34 -l^i.oo
,50
51 . 50
44
40
54- «5
In the ])re])arati()n of tliis tiibie the length at the head of each
column \vas determined by multi])l_\-ing its width by the mul-
tipl}ing factor, then the intermediate length ])etween that and
the .succeeding coluiun was di\ided into !i\e parts, in the nearest
measure to quarter ems. This was done for all coknuns e.\cei)t
I he last, where a slight x-ariation was made in order that a
'.ifty-j)ica width would come out fifty-fixe ])icas long. 'J'his
should ])ro\'e close enough, for all jjractical })uri)oses.
06
PRIXTI.NG
Fi,f^. 42 is a graphic representation of the resultant propor-
tions. The dimensions are in picas, but the dia<,rram is slightly
less than half size. The figures down the left-hand side show the
differences in j)icas between the different lengths.
Fir,.
-(iraphir I\('prr.~i'nl;Uii)ii of I'rMjx irt ions.
loi. Standardizing Proportions. .Mr. W, R. ("olton, in
t!;e Jamuiry jo, k^iO, is-ue of "Tlie .\n)(Tic:iii I'rinUT." has an
inlcre>ting article on slaiidardi/ing pr()])()rl ion- for the >i/,e of
the paptr (not t\'pei u>e(l in itooks and o'duT i>rin.tcd matter.
JOB COMPOSITION 97
He points out the fact that four different oblongs have, from
time to time, been in use by printers. He ])resents them mathe-
matically and algebraically as follows:
Printers' Oblong, 57.73%, or T,a^ — b'^;
Regular Oblong, 663%, or i\a=b\
Golden Oblong, 61.8%, or a : h :: b : a-\-b;
Hypotenuse Oblong, 70.71%, or 2a^ = b^.
The percentage given with each means that the width is to
the length as the percentage given is to 100.
He calls attention to the fact that with the Hypotenuse
Oblong the ratio is not changed by folding. That is, if we take
a sheet of paper of any size whatever and have its width 70.71
per cent of its length, and fold the sheet in half, its dimensions
still bear the same ratio — 70.71 to 100. No matter how many
times the sheet is folded, the same ratio of width to length
remains.
While the folding of the sheet does not affect the proportion,
just as soon as the i)age is uniformly trimmed (say :} or | inch all
around), it no longer possesses the same proportion. If it is
desired to retain the proportion 70.71 to 100, the page must be
specially trimmed to ])roperly computed amounts for the width
and length res]>ectively.
The process of determining the percentages given above or of
determining actual diniensions when percentages are not known,
all involve extraction of square root. This process frequently
consumes consideral)le time, and is not to be recommended for
shop ])ractice. The giving of the iiro|)ortions on a percentage
l)asis is a step in advance, but even percentage is confusing to
some people.
In the teacliing of mathematics to printers' apprentices, the
author has worked out many problems involving well-])ropor-
tioncd pages, and has evolved a simple method of determining
g8 i'Ri.\r]\(;
them. Tf it is once (letcrminccl wluii Icn,(fth any ol)lon,£; should
ha\'e in relation to its width, the len.i;;th divided by tlie width
gi\"es a nii{ltiplyi>i{i factor, or constant, from which the correct
length for any .gi\en width is quickly found l)y simply multi-
plyinLT the width hy the multipl_\-in,L,r factor to obtain the length.
The following are the muki])l\-ing factors for the different
oblongs:
Printer.-^' Oldong, 1.7^21:
Regular Oblong, r.5;
Golden Oblong. 1.61S1;
IT\'[)otenu-e Oblong. 1.4142.
With a width of >ix inches the length- are therefore:
Printers" Oblong, 6"X 1.7,^^1 = ic.,^(j20" long;
Regular Oblong. 6" X 1.5 = 9" lo'l-'-
Golden Oldong. ()"X 1.6181 = o-7oS^)" long;
H\'potenu-e Oblon'j. ^''X r.4142 = S.4S52" long.
See also Section 251. page 277.
102. Borders and Ornaments. — There ir, di\ersity of
o])inion regarding the use of a border on a page. Sonic contend
that printed niatter requires no embellishment; th.at the text.
be it body t\'])e ov display, >er\-es its purpose better if unor-
namented. The extreme simplicit}' of some jobs gi\-es lliem a
dignity that would be marred 1)\' embelli>hment . .Again, there
are others that, have been made beautiful. a])])ealing, and force-
ful \>y judicious ornamentation. lUit, beware of o\"er-elabora-
tion. .A title-])age or booldut co\a-r containing but ivw lines
u>uall\' look< better if jjlacrd within a border, which >er\"es, in a
sen^e, to hold the jo'h together.
Our ideas of orn:im('iU:it ion are e\'identl\' a heritage, for the
hand-writ ten books of the carh' scrilics were ])rofust'lv orna-
mented. The tcaidcncx- towarii ornamrntat ion seems to l)ccome
JOH COMI'OSITION 99
marked at recurring periods of varying lenglh, each of which
reaches a ])erio(l of delirium, only to be followed by a decadence
until a point of extreme simplicity is reached. The keynote of
modern conT])osition is sim])licily; the day of over-elaborate
ornanientation has undoubtedly passed.
Ornamentation to be eilective niust be in perfect harmony
with the rest of the jol). It must match the job in tone and
shape, and be aj'ipropriate to the subject. If the general con-
tiguration (tyi)e, spacing, grouping) of the job is square, a
scjuare ornament offers the best shape harmony; if it be irregu-
lar in outline, a rounded or pyramid form is better. Pyramid
ornaments usually look better if inverted.
103. Initials. — An initial may be considered as part of tlie
ornamentation of a job, and should conform to all the rules
given under that subject. If the text and initial are in one color,
they should harmonize in tone and general conformation. If
the initial is to be printed in a dilYerent color, it may advan-
tageously be a little heavier; the tone, however, being con-
served by a judicious use of color.
The word of which the initial is a part should be set in capi-
tals. If it is a word of less than three letters, the next word
should also be in caps. If the lirst word is })art of a name or
title, the wliole name or title should ])e in. caps.
If the initial is the article A or the interjection O, the second
word should be in caps, and there should be a space between
the words.
It is customary to have the same amount of white space
along the side of an initial as at the bottom. In order to accom-
plish this the text must be set to conform to the shape or outline
of the letter. The sut)joined examples and exi)lanations co\-er
the matter in detail.
ETTERS like the capital A and the cai^ital E should be
mortised to accommodate the balance of the word
so that there will not be an unsigl^t ly ga]) between the
initial letter and the balance of the wt)rd.
lOO
PRINTING
Although the capital a is mortised when It is a
yr~% ])art of the first word of the ])ara,<,n-a])h, iIutc Is nu
occasion for doiiij^ so if the [jaragraph begins with
the article A.
ATARAGRAPH that ])egins with the single letter A
re(|ulres s])ace between the initial and the siu'cccding
word; moreoxer, the second \\c)rd should be all in
capitals. This i)aragra])h shows how the matter shoidd l)e set.
WUI'^N the letter W is used as an initial there is no need
to indent the lines that run beside it, because the
slope of the letter affords sufficient white space to
present a ])leasing appearance.
IF THE paragraph begins with a two-letter word, it is cus-
tomary in most ofhces to capitalize the second word.
If the first word is a [)roper noun, cai)itali7.e the whole
name.
FOR initial letters that contain enough white space on tlie
IkxIv of the type there is no need to allot an\' extra
space when running lines around them. There should
always be enough matter to surroimd the initial.
NDJ^A\'OR at all times to ha\-e an e(|ual amount of white
space around an initial. Ju>t how nuich will (kpend on
the amount of spa'C U>fl beneath thi' initial. The letter
T contains enough white ^pace on the body to a\x)id an\' neces-
sity for additional space in the line.
TI i M initial >hou Id line up wit h the to]) of the balance of the
■\\(ird. If possible, u-e an initial that is a nuiltiple of
tlu' body size, so as to a\"oid too great an amount of
white >pace beneath tlu' letter.
JOB COMPOSITION
loi
^^iHIS initial occupies the full body of the letter.
/MF| It i^^ therefore, necessary to indent the lines that
^^f run around it so as to i)resent a uniform amount
Pj^^liy^l of white space. When the initialis an even mul-
tiple of the body size, the right amount of space
is easily determined.
'IIO.SE initials that are surrounded with filigree
work sliould be so placed that the balance of the
word lines up with the top of the initial. Just
how much indention should be given to the type
lines will de])en(l entireh' on the ap])earance of the back-
ground. In general, dark backgrounds reciuire more space
than liLdit ones.
104. Shape Harmony. — The exigencies of the work and
the office eciui[)ment sometimes compel a compositor to use type
that is luisuitable. When he is unrestricted, however, he
should cndea\"or to ha\'e the shape of his t\'])e harmonize with
the shape of his jo]). A long, narrow job looks well if set in
condensed t\-{)e; a broad job can stand an extended letter.
Xe\-er use extended t\'})e in narrow measures, or condensed
t\-})e in. ANide measures, unless compelled to do so to make the
matter fit the sj)ace.
105. Selecting the Salient Features of a Job. If the copy
comes in the form of manuscri])t, and no la}'out is gi\'en, the
compositor should go o\-er it and })ick out those features admit-
ting of best displa}'. In i)]annimr the work he should have in
mind the fa.ct that the job must i)o<sess all the recjuisites of bal-
ance, harmon\'. a.nd appr()])riatenc>s. It should be pleasing in
all its groups, and each, item sh(.>uld be gi\'en the prominence due
its im])ortance.
For office stationer}', the usual order of importance is first
the name, then the bu>iness. then tlie addre.-^s. This order does
not alwa\'s ])re\-ail, howe\er; some cu>toniers ])referring to ha\"e
otlier item- of imi^ortance giwu more i)rominent display.
I02 PRi\ri\(;
If the jol) he adx'crli-iii'j; iiiattiT. the main features for dis-
|)la_\' are u>ually (le>i,miate<l hy the customer, the ^f'upinLjs and
the >eleetion of l_\'l>e l.ieiim left to the compositor. Successful
treatment oi >ucli a j oh i< the crucial test of his skill. There
may he a do/en different \va_\"S in \\hich the joh could he set.
nearl\- all ui tlu'm Naeldin.Li; plea.-in.sj; re.-ults. If the joh is to he a
complete success, howewr, its \"arious elements must harmonize
in tone, he well halanced, nicel}' ^rou|)ed, and the displa\' must
ha\-e enou.Lrh white space around it to cau^e it to stand out dis-
tinctly.
io6. Improving a Job. It fre(|uently Irappens that, after a
con\i)o>itor has pulled the proof of a joh, the result fall> sliort of
his expectations. In such case he ma\' lind on careful study of
the proof that a chanL,^' (sometimes a \ery slii;tit one' in the
spacin.u: will .irreatly imiprox-e its apptearance. The insertion
or remo\-al of e\'en one ])oint het\\'een lines will sometimes
imp)ro\-e the work. Cultix'ate the liahit of anal}'zing }"our
work with a \'iew to impro\ing it.
Occasionally a joh that is extremely ordmary looking in
black ink on white })ai)er can he impro\"ed h}' printing it on
colored paper with sonie harmonizing ink.
107. Spacing Job Type. -The -pacing of lines in solid
matter ha- heen pre!t\' thoroughl}' treated under Si)acing,
[)age 17. In S[)acing joh type each line is a [)rol)lem hy it>eh.
Lines standing alone, with ])lenty of while space ai'ound them,
need more space helween word- tlum when ,-ui-roundedi h\' other
matter. I:^\tended letters require more space than normal or
condensed ones. Lines in ca])ital> I'eCjuire more space hetween
word- tlian do line.- -et in lower-ca-e.
When ^paciuL: lines in capitals, where the letters are strcUghl,
like M and X. more -pai'c -hould he u-ed than when the letters
aiT -liijiinir nr o])en. like A. L. W, and \'. Such letters -how
sonii.' white -i)ace. and tlii- -Imuld he con-idered when s})acinLi
the line.
108. Letter-spacing. -It frc(|uenll_\- hai)i)en< in -ettiuLr
line- in ca;iital.^ that certain ctMnhination- of letters, like A and
JOIJ CO.MI'tJSITIOX 103
l\ A and V, etc., occur, and the space between the letters lacks
unilOrn.iit}'. To ohxiate this, letter-spacin.t^ may he employed
to improxe the ai)pearance, or the letters may be sha\'ed and
'"htted" t(),i;ether. 'I'lie I'ollowin,!^^ examples will illustrate:
This line shows the tx'pe just as set from the case.
HIGHLAND AVALON
Here is shown the same line letter-spaced to make the space
between the letters uniform with the si)ace between the \' and
A in '■ Axalon.""
HIGHLAND AVALON
In the following: line the \' and the A"s in " A\-alon"' have been
sha\-ed off and closed u}) and the balance of the line letter-spaced
to sliow uniformity in '"fit.""
HIGHLAND AVALON
At different times t}'pefoun(lers ha\-e cast type with mortices
so that when certain letters come to,^;ether they will dovetail.
The line below shows how this is done.
Unmortised
AVAAn^:JiLFA^ TALES
109. The Square Effect. Sometimes in settin,2; a job the
line- are >o nccirl}' of imiform lenunh that there is not enough
wirialion to L,d\'e a pleasini; groui)in<;. In this e\'ent it is ad\'is-
I04 PKIMIXG
al)le to letter-space the lines and niake them all of the same
len^4h, thus producing a sciuare elTi'Ct. Some con"ii)ositors,
actuated solely by artistic motix'es, leave off all marks of
[HUictuation and make im])r()i)er divisions of words to accom-
plish this purpose, but such ])ractice is not to l)e commended.
1 10. Selection of Rule for a Job. — Inasmuch as rule may
be considered as part of the ornamentation of a job, all that has
been said about harmony, tone, ap})roi)riateness, etc., ])revails
in the selection of rule for a job.
Rule is the name <i;iven to the material used for printing
lines of various lengths and widths. It is ty])e-higli, and comes
in a variety of faces. It \'aries in width of face from a. hair-line
to upward of a pica. For man}' years it was obtainable only
in brass, but of late both the Linotv'pe and Monotype compa-
nies have added to their machines attachments for producing
leads and slugs and also rules of \-arious kinds. The i)roduct of
the linotype machine is restricted to six-inch lengths. If longer
lengths are needed, two or more ])ieces must ])e [)laced end to
end. The monoty])e machine can produce leads, slugs, and
rule of any length. .\ tw()-i)oint rule six hundred feet long
has been cast. The latest de\-ice on the machine will cut
the material to any length from one inch to twenty-live
inches.
As may be inferred from, a consideration of the alloy of
which it is comi)osed, lead rule is not as serxiceable as brass.
If rule is to be in constant use, it should be of brass. If it is
to be thrown invdy, and new and perfect material used on e\ery
job, lead rule answers the pur])()se.
Brass rule is made from slri])s of metal rolled to absolute
thickness between agate rolliTs. These strips come to the tyi^e-
founder a little ox'cr txpe-high. To ])ri'pare tliem for use the
bottom of the stri]) is first dressed off with a ])laiu' and made
smooth and le\el. Before tlie face is ])ut on the rule a line is
scratched along its side near oiu' edgi' m order to designate
which (-■(Ige is to l)e tlic io]). W'lu'U using face-rule (the same
on both edges), always kee]) it face side up. I'sing it indis-
JOB COMPOSITION
105
criniiiKitely will finally result in the rule l)cin,<:; battered on both
sides.
By far the .greater [)art of the rule in use today is of brass.
A study of a t}'])efounder"s spe'cinien-book will re\-eal an infinite
variet}- of sizes and kinds. A few faces are shown in Fig. 43.
Ik;. 43. — Specimens of Brass Rule.
III. Aligning Rules with Type. — When using rule and
t^'pe in couTbination, it is important to have the rule in perfect
alignment with the bottom of the type face. The face of the
rule should also harmonize; that is, a light-face rule should be
used with light-face t}'pe, and a heavier rule with heavy-face
type.
Section .
f Proper way)
Section^
Section.
IniI)ropcr way)
Section.
Fic. 44. — Showin.tj Proper and lm[)r(jpL'r Way of L'sing Rule with Type
When rules are run the full wichh of the job the type lines
are freciuently ])rinted aljove them instead of Ijeing justitied
with them. This results in a great sa\'ing of time, and a\-oids
the frecjuent necessity of cutting rules to fit the S})ace.
Io6 TRIMIXG
Xair.r
A(l(lr(-.
l-'ic. 45. ---A.-Ml'iLT Mrllioil (if I'siim kulr- v:\\\-\ I'ypv.
Wlu-n u-inL!; two nr niorc jiicci'- of riiK' -iilc by -idc, and the
k'nL[th< arc made u]) of more than one ])iece. ne\"er ha\-e lire
ioint < all in line. See below.
I'k;. 4'' — Pm;KT mi.l InipmiMT \\:!\- (M I Jouhliiu: la. Rule.
112. Side-face or Chamfered Rule. An extremely useful
rulr. but iiiie lli;;l -vtiv- to jia/./'r -onu' enni] K.-ii(»r~, i- ihe
tlua-e-] loia.t -idr-faiT riiir -laiwn in I-'ia. 47. Ilu- faer n\ b-u-
rule i- nut i:i tin- tv'i.trr bm alnn^ one -ide of ilu- rnir. Wlnu-
ifi-ide and nul-idr miier- uaiie \\ H ii a lull IniH di i lie rule, tia-\
are rmt nerdnl to m;ii-;r a ])(4-fte! eMrU'/r. Tlie ruh- i- r-jirei.Jiy
a(l:ii)U'di lo pauri v.au'k. r!i hrr .-ui-ali.- t ir d' lublc. In-ine: ' "1 1 Mri/c-
Ijuint luid,e. it makr- u]* to rxrn ina,il a ilr- of piea. !f. for ,ai\
re'a-on, it i- dt-iraiile to lia\a- a pieir thm.' point- Ui' rr or
JOH compositkjx
lox
less than an even eni, ])uttinf;j an inside and an oulside miLel
to,i;ether will produce it. (Fig. 48.)
Fic. 47. — Showing Il<r,v Three-point Side-face Rule Should be Butted
to Make a Perfect Joint.
Placing one end of a piece of rule against the side of another
piece produces a perfect joint. The face shown is adapted
I-'k;. 4S. — Method of J(jining an Inside and (Xitside Miter.
to many uses in job work. An example of its use is shown in
Fig. 41.
113. Mitered Corners. — When using ])arallel rule or a center-
face rule, it is necessary to miter it to i)roduce a perfect joint at a
corner. If the rule be a full-face rule, it is not necessary to
miter it, for the C(^rner can l)e "butted."
()cca>ionally a job comes into the office and the >ize specified
for the rule is not a regular mutti[)le of picas. If the job is to
be printed from ty})e, it is necessary to cut the rule to tlie size
designated. Xe\-er cut labor-saving rule for thi- ])tirpose. If
the jijb is to be electroty])ed, labor-saving rules may be used
with the corner- lapped as shown in Fig. 4(), and the electrotx'per
can cut off the projections after the plate is made. I'hther
io8
i'RL\'jj.\(;
side-face or fuU-face rule can be used for this ]nir])ose, hut not
cenler-face, for tlie face of tlie latter cannot he hrout^dit ajrainst
the end of the rule.
Mitered Corner. Butted f'orner. Lajiped Corner.
Corners liavo been lefl open a litUe to sliow how they are joined.
Imc. 4g. — Showin,!^ Three; .Methods of Joining Rule.
Instructions for miterin,<,f rule are f^iven under "How to
Use the Miterin,u;-niachine," pa.ge 2o_^.
114. To Obtain Perfect Joints in Tables. — Fi^s. 50 and 51
show two tables, the fn-st with imperfect joints the other with
perfect joints. '.Fhe hrst one was set in columns and the rules
inserted while settin,L,^ Owin^i.,' to the fact that tlie column rules
have shoulders on each side, the cross-rules cannot (it up aj.^ainst
them. The second was made up into two sections and both
Fk
No.
1 i 2
A
4 ,S
(.
7
s 1 0
10
I I
1 2
^
-
"'~
- --
-
l'.-iii:il I'orin ol Hand set I'ahle, showini; Imperleet JuiuUon of
Rules.
JOB COIMPOSTTION
109
No.
^ \ - \ 3
4 5
6
7 1 >S 1 9
10 II
12
Fig. 51.— Showint,' Same Job as Fig. 50, but as it Appears when Printed
in Two Impressions. See Fig. 98.
printed at the same time. The sheet was turned end for end
and printed a second time. This printed one section over the
other, thus producin^i; perfect joints. Inasmuch as both sections
are printed at the- same time the procedure does not entail any
extra time in running the job, but it does produce perfect joints.
Moreover, there is a great saving in time when setting the
job, for the lines are all set full width instead of in narrow
columns.
If the job is so large that both sections cannot be worked
in the same form, it is still advisable to set the job in this way
and make two forms of it, esi)ecially if there are but few im-
pressions needed, for the saving in composition will usually
offset the cost of the extra presswork. This is sometimes called
the wax-engraving effect.
115. Skeletonizing. — When a job is to be printed in more
than one color, and there is no overlapping of the colors, it
should first be set uj) complete, and then taken apart and made
up into separate forms. If any of the colors overlap, it is
physically imijossible to put both colors in one form, so the
overlap})ing color is made u[) into another form. The taking
a|)art and making up into separate forms for colors is known as
eio prixtint;
The customary way of lumdlinL!: a two-color forni i> to set
tlic job as if it were tr) Ijc all in one color and ha\X' the proof
a|)i)ro\-L-(i. When ready to >keleloni/.e, ])ull a ])roof on dry
pa])er to be u-ed as a craucre for deterniininiz the correct po>iti()n
of the lines, then ])Ut the jol) on a Lralley and proceed to make it
into two parts of enual -i/.e. How thi< is to he done will dei)end
entireh" on hnw the -econd color was ori,Ldnallv ])laced. If a
few line< are to be in a separate color, take out the line-, one at a
time, beudnnin.LT with the one neare>t thj top, and put in its
l)lace material of the >ame body >ize. Put the line on a .^alley,
and [)lace eiinuirh material abu)\-e it to make it come in exactly
the <ame po-ition that it occupied in the ori,i:inal i)a2'e. Go down
the paL,^- to the next line, doinL'' the same as before. In thir^
way take out all the lines sub-titutin,^ material of the ])ro])er
:^ize. If this has been. ])roperl\' do;; j, the >izj of the oriudnal f)a^e
will nol have Ijeen altered. The )ther paire should now be
s])acedi so that the lines come in the same position as in the orig-
inal job. Use the dry ])ro()f as a guide for determining this.
If the job is a com])licated one, and has words scattered
throughout the text, it will be necessar\" to proceed in a ditTer-
ent manner. For exaniple, suippose the jol) is to be ])rinted
in red and black, and that the words in red are -cattered amon-i
the lines of t\'])e. It doe- not make any difference how many
separate word- or items are to be remo\"ed from an\' one line,
the method i- ulwa\'- the same. Place the line in a composing-
stick, remo\-e the tir-t word in red and -ub-titute r|uads and
space- for the word. thu> ju-tif\'ing the line. Then take out
the next word in red, and reju-tify the line, continuing in this
wa\- to the end.
The fmal re-ult will be a line with material substituted for
tlie \'."ord..-^ that are to go in red,. It is now necessary to get
the-e \'.ord- in a >e])arate line by them-eh'es and in the same
jio-ition tiiat the\" occu])ied in the oriirinal line. To accoir.pli-h
tin- ':ai-e the naiterkd that ha- been -ub-tituted for the lu'-t
word -o that '|U,;d- max' be ])laced between tile left-lialid >id;e
of the -tie'.v and thi' -p>ai ing m.^terial. l'i;t in (juad.- .cad .-jtace.s,
(OK CO.Ml'OSI riON III
and justify tlicm ;iccura1el}-. Now put in tlic word. Next
raise the material substituted for tlie second word, and fill
in the S})ace between tlie fn-st word and the second s])acinff
material. Ju.^lify this. Now put in the second word, and fill
U]i tlie badance of tlic line with cju.'ujs and si)accs, and justify
accurately. If this has been i:»roperly done, the result is a line
contamin,<2; the wortls in red, each of which will be in the same
position that it occu])ied in the ori.^inal line. Fig. 52 illustrates
?.. '^ ^ iXtQi":!;^'i^sU.wl--'---^^ |9;uq|i;Brri ViCjK
(Juacls. justilifd to take
l!iL' place ot the word Red.
I'lC: S-- — Sliowinu Aiclhod of .SkL'let(>ni/,iii<r a T.itic for Two Colors.
the method e\'en better than words can describe it. If desired^
the tirst word could be justified in position before the second is
remoxx'd.
Ilaxint: skeletonized the line, rej^hice tlie original line, and
place the other one on another galie}'. .After all the indi\i(lual
lines ha\-e been -keletoni/cd. ;issembie them in ])ropcr order and
sp;ice out the job as in the original page, using the dr}' ])roof as
a gauge.
if the iol) is to l)e eiect rot}-])ed, there is no need to skeletonize
i:, if tlie colors do not o\crlai>. When sending the form to the
ckn'trot \'per, mark on the ])roof what ])arts are to he in each
color. Tkic elect roly])cr will take two ca>ts from the form, and
eitlier ])lock out in the wax or rout awa\' the ])arts not net'ded in
each form, if an eJeclrotx'ped job is to lie j)rinted in red, the
elect rot \'|>e -hould be nickel-plate!!, as coppei" usualK' has a
dek-leriou- elTt;ct on red ink<. ile.~tro\-in''' the color and lu.-ter.
ri2 PRIXTIXO
ii6. Setting a Register Job. Tt is ex irlent from the
description i,M\cn in Scclioti 115, that some of tlic lines in the
job nia_\' ha\e to \n: ninxcd to pul them imo reui-tt-r, more
especially if the_\' ai'e widcl}- -caltered. W'lien puttiriL: to.irellier
a form that may ha\e to \>v mo\"e(h do not in-ert .-olid hhx'ks of
furniture, but be -ure to haw >omc lead< an*! >1u.l;s between
each group so tliat the line- ma\' be readily mox'cd without
seeking new material.
117. Allowing for Squeeze. — Xearl}- e\er_\- ])ieee of ty])e
composition is made u]) of a great numbe* of indi\-i(lual unit-.
Such a combination is almo-t certain to be >])ring\-, and each.
jol) possesses a certain amount (A "gi\'e."" Wdien making u{) a
job, es})eciall\' if enclosed with a border, prcr-.- it together 1a'
hand, using considerable force, aiid when it >eem.- to meet jier-
fectly at the corners, add a two-point lead "for scjueeze."
When, the job is locked u\). the.-e two ]ioint- will t)e ju.-t about
right for a perfect locku]). If the jol) i.- \-er\' long or very
si)ringy. additional "xiueeze" >!iould l>e allowed for.
118. Concluding Hints. — All t}pe is (or ^hould be> cast
on the [K)int >\'-teni. con.-e(iuentl\' each >ize of t\'pe is a mul-
tiple of another, and can be justified with it b\' the u^e of [xjint
material. Before ])Utting tlie material together be a-.-ured
that it is of the riglit thickne.-s and of the jjroper lengih. that
it is not Ixittered. bent. twi>ted. dii.-hed. nicked, liurred. or in
any wi-e mutilated. .Make ^ure that the matericd i- perfect
in e\-ery re-j)ect. If it i- not, di>card it. The trouble tliat it
may cau-e would douljtle-^ be more exi)en-i\'e than the eo.-t of
tlie material. If the defect can be ea-ii\' reniediedi. do -o.
!)(> not u-e lead- lliat are too -liort for the incisure: tlie\-
are alwa\> trouiile-ome.
Wdien doublim:-u]; lead- 'jikuanii theiii c-nd to end . b'e care-
ful not to u-e lead- ol ililferei;! lllickhe--.
I'lurred (juad- are ,1 fre(|Uerit lau-e of trouble, and are liard
to detect when in ,i lorm. e.-peei:iil\- if ilic biwr i- near the bot-
tom. Hurr^ oni lyi)e or rule in.iy ea.-ily be reirio\-ed with a llat
hie.
JOI! CO.MI'OSI'I'IOX
When usin.ij; a border made u]) of small units ha\"e a six- or
iwehe-point sIul? alontisidc of the border, ll ])()>-;il)le, do not
allow an\' hreak in the line of units to come direetlx' in line with
a break in tlie material >urroundin,L,f it. If x'ou do, the material
will \ery likel\ slip or hind. (,!' i;^- 5,3-J
I'lr,. ^^-- I'riip(t- aiv! Improper Mctliod of I'hu in'_^ Slu,Lr^ in,-i<k- of HorrkT
I' nil-.
Owin,^ to tlie fact that letters u>C(l a> initials are not always
an e\en number of picas wide, the lines alonjj;sidc of the initials
are not always an e\en number of ])icas lonu;. If the matter is
leaded it is not alway-- necessary to cut leads to lit the resultant
s])ace. Unless comjjelled to nm the t}-pe ri,a;ht u]) a.^ainst the
initial, place enoutrh material alongside of the initial to brini^^
the remainin,^; sjjace to e\en picas. Do this for all the lines
exce])! the tu'st. which :^hould be close to the initial. Occasion-
alK', if the space i:< a multiple of jjoints. the u-e of poin.t-thick
si)aces alon_u-ide ol a p)icaden^th lead will just be the ri^ht lenirth.
The foUowiuL'' sjjaces are eacli two points thick and may be
used with t^vo-jioint lead-: li\-e-em space of ten-])oint, four-
em space of ei,ii:ht-i)oiiit. and tlu"ee-em >pace of six-])oint. Wx
u-ine a lead and some combination of the-e three sjjacc'- we can
izenerall}' find a multii)Ie to lit the -pact'. With these, len.trth-
mav be built up in multiple- (A two point-, k'or e\am])le:
sui)p()sc that the resultant sj)ace beside an in.itiiil <hou!d prox'C
to be twent\'-orie esns and th-ve jxiint-. I'lace a ihree-yoint
114 PRIXTIXG
lead alongside of the initial and leave twenty-one ems as the
measure for settinj^ the t\-pe. If it is absolutely necessary to
set the type right against the initial, and the leads must be
absolutely full length, then cut leads to fit. If the leads may
be one point short of full length, make u]) a combination to
equal twenty-one picas and two points. A twenty-em lead,
one four-em space of eight-point, and one three-em space of
si.x-point will suffice. Twenty ems plus fourteen points equal
twenty-one ems and two points.
QUKSTIOXS OX CHAPTER VII
1. What are the duties of a typotect ?
2. Where is the optical center of a page ?
3. What do \'ou understand by " harmony " in a piece of t\-pe compo-
sition ?
4. Why should a mixture of old-style and modern roman type faces b(»
avoided ?
5. Explain " tone " as apfdied to a page of t\"pe.
6. Explain " contrast," and tell ho'.v it is obtained in a piece of composi-
tion.
7. What do you understand b\- ■'appropriateness" ?
8. Explain the fundamental principles of type grouping.
Q. What do you understand by "proportion" ?
10. X'ame the four oblongs in use by printers at different time?.
11. IIow is the multiplying factor, or constant. f(jr the different oblongs
obtained ?
12. What rules go\'ern the use of borders and ornaments ?
13. Explain how t_\'pe matter shfnild \)C run around initial letters.
14. Wh\' is it inad\'isable to use condensed t}'pe in wide measures anrl
extended t\'pe in narrow measures ?
15. What special thinu'- should be kejit in mind \".'hcn analyzing cop\-
preparatory to settiiiLT a Job !■'
16. If after setting: a job it did not meet your ex{)ectations, how would
\'ou proceed to aki-r or imi)ro\-e it ?
17. Should a uniform amount of space alwa_\-s be j)hu'ed between words
in a line ? If not, why not '•'
iS. What i^ " let'er-^p,lcinL^" and wh_\- i~ it u-ed ?
19, When the line> in a job are nearly all of the same length, wh\- is it
desirable to make them all of e'|ual length ?
20. Xame tile different materials of which rule is composed.
JOB COAIPOSTTTON 1 15
21. Explain the rclatl\'e merits of lead rule and brass rule.
22. What is face-rule ?
23. Xame the kinds of rule with which you are familiar.
24. How should rule be ali<;ned with t\-pe ?
25. \\'hen lengths of rule are made up of two or more i)ieces, how should
the joints be arrani,a>d ?
26. What is a mitered corner ?
27. What is a lapped corner ?
28. Explain how perfect joints may be obtained in a table consisting
of horizontal and \'ertical lines.
29. What do you understand by skeletonizing a form ?
30. Describe how you would skeletonize a form for two colors if the
second color consisted of full lines only. How would you proceed if the
second color consisted of words scattered throughout the job ?
31. What special pro\'isions are to be made when setting a register job?
32. Why is it necessary to allow for squeeze ?
33. Why is it inadvisable to use leads that are too short for the measure?
34. When doubling-up leads, how should they be placed together ?
Tell why.
35. When making up a border consisting of twelve-point units, why
should we use a six-point slug instead of a twelve-point slug alongside of
the border units ?
36. Explain how type set to a bastard measure may be leaded by using
labor-saving leads and point-thick spaces.
>i;j'r!\(. A joi;
iiQ. The Order-blank. — Xearl_\- e\x'r\- ])rintin!:r office has a
cliffercnl >tylr ol' orck-r-lilank. Im'l£. 54 show^ oik- that has been
in svu:(;c--l"iil ojH-ration. All the data re,Li:a inline comjxjsition,
prc-swork, Itindini^. and dclix-ery is written out in full, so tliat
there can he no doubt about any part of the work. 'I"he eom-
po>itor is ehiel1\' Kineerned abinit the si/e of the Job. the ])ur-
po>e for wliieh it i- intended, the color and nature of the stock,
and the color of the ink.
Referring to ihe (jrderd/hmk. we lind that it calh for a letter-
head, (Six II inc}ie>. So tliat thcj'e ma}' ne\"er be any doubt
as to which wa\' tlie t \'pe i- to lie -et. tlie widtli i> alwa\-s ^i\-en
first. The ty])e i<. tlierefore, to be -et the cSldncli wav.
The letterJK-ad i< to be ])rinted in bronze blue ink on liuht
blue paper. It i> bu-ines< stationer\' for a book liouse. \\'ork
of thi- nature and with this combination of colors alwa\> looks
\\(-ll when set in sohk; old--t\'Ie tx'oe face of medium weiirht.
(doi<ter. (dic'ltenham. Kennerlex'. or -ome letter of aliout eciual
weiizht. would look well. C'loi-ler i- cho-en for illu.-traticjn,
mai!il\' becau-e il i- a new letter, and (jiule the \"o,Lrue.
The copy is manu-eript . an. 1 rea<h a- follows: ]•'. A. \\"illiam<.
i'riwiilenl: (". W. ll!'o\". n. \'ice- I're-id.eni ; jolm .\dams. Sec-
ret a r\--'l'rea- u re r. I'. \. WTiliam- \: Co.. f I i -tori cab h<lucational,
ScientirK. .\rt, and L;iw bo^k-. 121; I'rintinu' Iloii-e Sr|u;;re,
hliiladelphia. I'a.
120. Analysis of the Copy.- A brief anal}.-i- of thi- copy
rt-\eab the l.itl ik.;;! ii e;;n be LTorqx'd >al i-fa<'l orib.' in -ew-ral
dilYerent way-. lA obtain ,: jiroper conception nf the iini-hed
■f2d-r
SETTING A JOB
READ CAREFULLY
117
NO JOB to be SET or SENT to
PRESS WITHOUT an ORDER
Date
/9^ /J/G
For
Address
Quantity /^ O O Title of Job
Description
<ZKlaJ^^^tl^iyAu.^i'^
Cy yi-y'^^'-^-^-yCj-d^ ^<tXr /^^^
CUSTOMER'S ORDER NO
COMPOSITION
STYLE — -^ -C-O-t-^^'Cfc^V'
SIZE S^ yj- X // -^^-vx^c^ue^
ELECTROS
PRESSWORK
COLOR INK C<£'t-'«->»_-a^ -f^OCot
COVER
NO, OF FORMS
PROOF WANTED '/ '^/ / / C
PROOF SENT OUT
REVISE SENT OUT
IMPRESSIONS ff~>rJL
REMARKS :
PROOF RETURNED
SENT TO PRESS
. --
Stock Cu-zr't^apn^o-iLjo C/u^ay^aL^ v/<^T-«^t^
Cover /7 X ^^ -iO
ORDERED FROM
ORDERED FROM
Cut Stock Size Cut Cover Size
^/^ X //
Ruling
Tablets
Shipping Directions
Date of Delivery
Order Received By
Cd. ^.
Fig. 54. — A Typira! ( )nliT-l)!ank.
Ii8 PRINTING
iiiiiir
t ,,,,,,, , I ,„
iiiiiiiMiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiimiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii
tlllllllllllllllllllllll
::;:iiiiiiiiiiiiiitiiiiiiiii!iiii z:::;:;:;
iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii
iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiMiMiiiiiiiiiiniiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiMiniiiiiMiiiitiiiiiir
Fk;. 55. — Suf^'j^'i'Stcd Cirou{:iinKS for Letterhead,
SETTING A JOB iig
III
iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiniiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii
JIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIU
llllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllilllllllllllllllllllllllllllll
uiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiriiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiniiiiiiii
Fig. 56. — Suggested Groupings for Letterhead,
I20 pRix'j'ixc;
a])])earance of the job a layout is first made in the form of a
few routrh ])encil sketches on ])a])er Si inches wide. See Fi,s^s.
55 and 50. When malxinu; pencil sketches ;d\\a\-s usi- paper of
the exact size of the joh. for }-ou uill thereby yxl a better idea
of its ai)])earance when ]uit into t\'i)e. When \-ou sketch a hne,
;!ppro\imate botli its ty])e <i/.e and its len'_rth. Do not sketch
lonL; lines to iill ii]) a space when \"ou know that the tx^pe selected
will not ruti thait lonij. \'ou uvax in this wa\- sketch a well-
FlG. 57. — Other (iroupinixs for the Word "' Hooks" ami it,- I hialif>'iiiu
AdjectixT-.
balanced la\-out, but \o\\ ()t)tain no idea of the ap])earancc of
the fmi-hed job.
l''rom \'our roii.udi -kelclie- -elecl th.e inie that to \-ou seenis
the ino>t plea>int:. ."^uppo-e thi- to be the one that teatures
ihe wiii'd "Hook-," on the left-hand -ide. There are at lea-t a
half-(i{»/:en dilferi'nt uroiipinu- tn be inadt' ol the-e word^. see
Y'vj, --J. A-.-i;nie for l!ie iun"j u)-;es of the ])resent discussion that
Number 2 i> tinally selected; the compositor is now ready to
put tlie job into \\])V.
SETTI\(; A JOB 121
There is ample space on the letterhead, so there is no need to
crowd the matter. The main line should fall about seven-
eighths of an inch from the top, and the list of officers from one-
fourth to three-ci,!^hths oi an inch. The side margins should
be about one-half inch on each side. This will leave the measure
fort\--ln'e picas.
Set the bod}' of the heading to fort}'-tive ])icas. The
word "Books'' and its qualifying adjecti\-es should be set in
a smaller measure, so that it may be leaded out or placed
in any p(jsition without interfering with the date line. Even
if there Mere no date line it would be ad\'isable to set this
in a narrow measure to avoid using up a quantity of small
material.
The featuring of the word "Books" also gi\-es opportunity
to put this word in some contrasting color, if the customer is
willing to pa\- the j)rice of a two-color job.
121. Size Type to be Used.-- Unless advised to the con-
trary, it is safe to assume that the following is the order of
imj^ortance for dis})la}- lines — name, business, and address.
Following this schedule for the letterhead, twenty-four point
type may be selected for the name, fourteen-])()int for the
word '"Books," and tweh'e-point for the address. Six-j)oint is
large enough for the officers' names, and also for the adjecti\'es
around the v/ord " Books." There is sufficient contrast in size
in such a selection to secure the proper relati\-e importance.
Moreo\"er. the fact that the lines are not crowded tends to
set them off to ad\"antage.
122. Position on the Sheet. - When planning for the posi-
tion of {]\c main line on a letterhead the com])ositor should be
go\-erned entire!}' by the groui)ing and the amount of material
on the heading. A headim: that cont;iins but a few lines, and
those short on(>, can usual!}' stand more space titan can one
that contains much matter and whose lines are long. If tlicre
is a line acro-s the extreme top, tlirce-eighths of an inch from
tlie edge is a!)0ut the ri,Ldit distance, and se\ en-eigliths of an
inch is about right for the m;un line, Thert? is no absolute
PRIXTTXG
1
Fig. 5S. — Layout for a Statement on Ruled
Stock.
1
(
N
y
Fir,. :;r). — T.ayont for Statement for Outlook F,n\Tlopc on
T'lirulcd Stock.
SETTIXG A JOB
12-
F. A. Williams, Pres. C. W. Hkown, Vice-Pres. Joii.n Adams, Sec-Treas.
STATEMENT
-igi —
M.
IN ACCOINT WITH
BOOKS
F. A. WILLIAMS & CO.
1 21 7 Printing House Sq., Philadelphia, Pa.
Fig. 6o. — Statement set According to
Lavout in Fig. ;8.
F. A. Williams, Pres. C. W. 1!ko\vn-, \'ice-Pres. John Adams, Sec-Treas.
F. A. WILLIAMS & CO.
1 21 7 Printing House Square
BOOKS ■ Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.
STATEMENT OF ACCOUNT OF
Fir,. 6i, — Statement Set .\ccording to Layout in Fig. 59.
124 PRLXTIXG
rule for this, but a stu(l\" of well-halanced letterheads shows
this to he good practice.
123. Layouts, l-'igs. 58 and ^(j .-how two layouts for a
statement heading, one f(jr a ruled >heet the other for an out-
look envehjpe. I'ig>. Oo and (ji >how them in t}'i)e. When
planning a jol) for an outlook en\-el()})e, rememljer that the line
separating the heading from the hod\' of the joh ser\-es as a
guide for folding the sheet so that it will ht the en\-elope. lie
sure to ])Iace it in the ])ro])er po>ition. As nearl}' all office
stationer}' is now written on a t\i)ewriter, if guide-line- are
used for the adilress they -hould be the distance a])art of two
typewriter lines. It is much better, howe\"er, to omit them.
When setting billheads, if there are ])rinted lines alongside of
the outlook, the\' .should be so positicjned that the}' may be
t}'pewritten at the same time that the addre.-> is written.
See Fig, O2,
F. A.Williams & Co.
Books 0/ All Kinds
1217 PRINTING HOUSK SQUARE
FHIL.ADKI.PHIA
Fig, 0,^.— All i-jr/ddj^c Curner.
rig>. 6:;, (14, arid oq >hov.- -etlings of an en\-elope corner,
a bu>ine.-- card, aufj a JabcL It i- frcrjuently adxi^able to
keep all the othce stationer}' of a firm in harmon}', and for that
rea.-on one st}-lc of i}-])c has been u-ed throughout. I-'re-
quently the label will appear to better advantage if set in bolder
t}'i)e.
I-ieforc uriderlaking the netting of an}' job the co])}' -hould
be anal}-/ed. and a l.i}'iait roughl}' .sketched r-o a- to get -ome
idea of tiic fuuihed [product,
SKTTIXC; A J()|}
125
126 PRINTING
F. A. WILLIAMS & CO.
1217 PKINTING HOUSE SQUARE
h-HILADELFHIA
RKPRESKNTED BY T> /^ f~\ "17" O
JAMES B. SMEDLEY D W ^ iV O
Fig. 64. — A Business Card.
ff.3 j;-3
^■3 /» ^-3
/or
S'S jBti
gg . gg
ff.j} K /a . . M
gg g-2
S-2 r §-2
5;-3 rrom g?.
F. A. WILLIAMS & CO.
tH 1217 PRINTING HOUSE SQUARE ^3
I BOOKS PHILADELPHIA i
Fig. 65. — A Label.
124. Specimens.- -The syiiTimens on the following; pap;es
liuvG been chosen for criticism, and their merits or demerits
l)ointe(l out. The student sliould follow closely the criticisms
and the reset si)ecimens ,u;i\en in the current numbers of the
various t\'i)o,L;rai)hical magazines, and especially the depart-
ment devoted to api)renlices in ''The Inland IVinter." lie
will lind therein much helpful suggestion.
SETTING A JOB
127
Cturcf) (glagS 'h
JDomcsitic (^lasis
iHemorial£{ ^ 4-
JDecoratibe^Kaorfe
in Jfabricsi ►l* ►!-
iHofiaicsi^ ^ -^
iHural ^aintingfiJ
tablets; ►!- 4- 4-
Fig. 06. — Co\'er for a Book of Testimonials. Xeat, dainty, approp^-iate
I2S
IN rixc
WILLIAM H. ZIEGLER, M.D.
3028 Frankford Avenue
Philadelphia
SHINGLE POULTRY YARDS
IS LAN D HEIGHTS
OCEAN CO.
N. J
IF NOT DELIVER EC
DAYS KETLJRN TO
EDWARD G. MURRAY & CO.
No. 9 Bank Street
PHILADELPHIA
IF NOT riELIVEI.
EDWARD G, MURRAY & CO.
No. 9 Bank Street
I ■ H 1 L A D F L P H I A
\... I. \ I-!._.l'
si'/n'ixc; A foi
129
CHAS. H. FULMER
INSURANCE
400 WALNUT STREET
PHILADELPHIA
CHAS. H. FULMER
ALL KINDS OF
INSURANCE
408 WALNUT STREET, PHILADELPHIA
CHAS. H.
INSURANCE 0
408 WALNL
PHILAD
FULMER
F ALL KINDS
JT STREET
ilLPHlA
CHAS. H. FULMER
ALL KINDS OF
INSURANCE
408 WALNUT ST., PHILA.
I'-n
r!-rc C"..r!HTs.
i^,o
PKIX'I'IXC]
M O N ■] J) ]. V
•J () 1 S C 11 r. - T \ L 1 "■ I I! I. 1 I'
I" II I I. \ i> I. r. 1' II 1 .\. I '■> I
M -
SAMUi:i. I). ]'. isLi:^, M.D.
F O 1! P H < ) I' i; < S I r > X A I. S i; li V I C K S
H i: c I- I N i; 1) 1' \ V M i: \ I
c ( ) N > L' i.'i' I N I. 1 1 I > r i;
;i \.M 1 I'M.
<,y, A I'
si'/rriXG y\ JOB 131
DR. BEN CLARK GILE
HAS REMOVED FROM 1728 CHESTNUT STREET TO
2018 CHESTNUT STREET
OFFICE HOURS : 9 TO 12 A. M.
OTHERS BY APPOINTMENT
WILLIAM A. GRAY
THOMAS E. COGAN
ANNOUNCE THE REMOVAL OF THEIR LAW OFFICES
FROM ion CHESTNUT STREET TO
WEST END TRUST BUILDING
BROAD ABOVE CHESTNUT STREET. WEST SIDE
ROOMS 809. 810. 811
BOTH TELEPHONES AUGUST 1. 1917
iMi'r. 70 - l*r<>!'^'->iiinal Rniiinal N.
'3^
Pkixiixd
■-l£>P
THE PHILADELPHIA
CLUB OF PRINTING
Mf)at toe eat
X
PUREE MONGOL SOUP
Olives
Radishes
K
PLANKE2) SHAD
Pansicnne Potatoes
X
FILET Ol- BEEF
Muthrooins
Potatoes
String fjeans
X
Neapolitan Ice Creara
Cakes
Coffee
V'...:.\
CLUFi TOAST
Tune: '',-\u!'l I.an;^' Sync'
Nov.- Kcre's a toast to our new band
'^ e 1 ypos tru d a:i;l true ;
HOUSE CRAFTSMEN
.-\nd 111 re's fucc'-sr to niea who plan I
By each \\liate'er \ve dc.
1 f)gether Lam ii whul is old
KUGLLirS
1 I'.en l;iiii_' ii[) what is new ;
May Twelflli, Niiiet'vn^-tpn
If eacf. will fii.d he's of c^e r.ind
.•\nd liie whole not im-tl !jv few.
i :,,. , ..-I . :, .' i ■
-.,::.e.LT,: :i M. : ;.
c- ^.■. r. . . _-..-, .^ - ,-
.... T'.- : ■•■■• e:- ::... ..; -.1 e:.e:-
in I.!., !; -i:iJ red on ^■. ':" " ;.:i^i:':e ;i:.;jC1
SKTIIXC; A JOIi
133
'T J IS lamp am I
To shine where He shall say:
And lamps are not for sunny rooms,
Nor for the light of clay:
But for dark places of the earth,
Where shame and wrong and crime have birth;
Or for the murky twilight gray,
Where wandering sheep have gone a^ray;
Or where the light of faith grows dim
And souls are groping alter Him;
And sometimes, a flame,
Clear shining through the night.
So bright we do not see the lamp,
But only see the light,
So may I shine - His light the flame —
That men may glorify His name."
A Mnilw Canl
134
I'KTXTIXG
'n -D - .□^_Q :n-n
n
u
"ranklm's
---
lJ
Birthday
^: i
□; 1915 ■ :□
D
-
i
n
n
706
1915 —
»,L-' :■.. ■'. ( rr.L-
si'/rriXG A jc)i5
135
Recital
by the Pupils of
Louise De Ginther, at
her studio, Monday
Evening, April J 0th
m
^
m'
,>-
^m;^
#^
Type an:!
ivi'.h the sh'U)
^-A \Vi-l!-!):iiaiuc(l I'a-^
llv apprupria-r
lit rust this witl
a[ie '>f lh.c jo' I is i:'. harmony
job on, page I,;'',
1^6
I'RiN ri\"(i
Hiawatha Academy
55 .MINNEHAHA STRELT. HIAW ATHA. KANSAS
SKTTIXC A J()I5
137
H
A
•
1
c
a w a
a d e
th
m
a
y
55 MINNHHAHA STREET
HIAWATHA, KANSAS
7'. '1 hi. ^'niil,.r-ri;lr liMr'lrr hrrc ,l'1\ i-.- tin- p.iu'e a iini-!.(_-'l ai)i>r;!r-
ain r. 'I'r.c -hajn- n;' ilir julj (onl'drnii 1<.) thr shape of ihf {Kiuc, ihercb}-
pr.-xiucini; shape harmony.
i:S PRIMING
OF THE SEVENTEENTH ANNUAL
MEETLNG OF THE MLNNESOTA
TRADE ASSOCL\TIOxN, HELD LN
MLNNRVPOLIS, JUNE r7-18-19, 1909
V<-'Z:'^
\:i r
SETTING A JOB
139
PROCEEDINGS
OF THE SEVENTEENTH ANNUAL
MEETING OF THE MINNESOTA
TRADE ASSOCIATION, HELD IN
xMINNEAPOLIS, JUNE 17-18-19, 1909
Fig. 78.— a \Vcll-balance(l Pai^'C.
Type matter with plenty of '.v'liif space arourvl it is always much easier to read
lan when jam.r.eJ against a border. Contrast this with job on opposite page,
140 PRIX'JIXG
QUESTIONS OX CHAPTER VIII
1. IIow do \vi- (Iclurmiiic from :iii order-blank which way the type
matter is to be set ?
2. W'liat is tlie usual order of ini[)ortance in a piece of ofiice sta-
tionery- ?
3. What is a laxout ?
4. Why should la\ outs always be drawn full size ?
5. What is an outlook en\elo[)e?
C). What ad\anta,i,'es are there in usinj,' an outlook en\'elope ?
7. \\ hat special care is necessar}' in setting a job to be enclosed in an
outlook einclope ?
S. If the top line of a letterhead is a subordinate one, at what distance
from the tof) of the sheet is it usually placed ?
o. At what distance from the top of a letter sheet is the main line
usually placed ?
10. if a letterhead is made uj) of short lines f^rouped around a center,
should it ha\e more or less toj) margin than one consisting of long lines
similarly grouped ?
CHAPTER IX
SETTING TABLES AND OTHER INTRICATE MATTER
125. Ability Required. — It has already been stated that
one who as])ires lo be a really jjood job compositor should ])0s-
sess both mechanical ability and iurtislic taste. Unfortunately,
many engaged in the printing business do not possess these
requirements. Some arc artists, but can not put a job together
so that it will "lift"'; others are capable of work that is perfect
mechanically but lack the artistic touch. In setting tabular
matter there is greater need for mechanical skill than for art
training. Here, if anywhere, the work must be mechanically
perfect. The artisan must be thorough in his work, must pos-
sess ingenuity, and must be able to determine at a glance the
best way to set a })articular job, for hardly any two are exactly
alike.
126. Jobs Containing Rules. — Fig. 79 illustrates a job made
up of rules with a heading to each column. If there are but a
few sheets to be printed, it is sometinies cheaper to have them
ruled by a paper-ruler, and then j^rint in the headings. If a
great number are required, the job should l)e electrotyped and
more than one sheet printed at a time. Electrotypes may be
obtained from a type form or from a wax-engraving. There
are three methods of getting the form into tyiie — by the Typo-
tabular System, by monoty])ing, and by the regular method of
liand setting.
127. The Typotabular System. — The American Type
Founders Company has devised a ])lan for composing tabular
or l)lank work which is called tlie Typotabular System. This
system consists essentially of special t_\'i)e, rules, and a mass of
units called typotabular squares, cast on six-i)oint body, the top
141
142
PRIXTIXG
NAME
RATE
DATE
BY WHOM SENT
NAME
1
RATE
1 ^
DATE
BY WHOM SETJT
{'•) Monotype.
NAME
RATE
DATE
BY WHOM SENT
'i'y'r
NAME
RATE GATE
CY WHOM SENT
I-I.
.in- a Rule ]>'h liv DiiiLTiiit ^I^■!h(lli^ (,f Scttini
TAHI.MS AND 0T1I]:R IXTRTCATK ^lATTER
143
of each sciuarc l)einji; in the form of a four-sided ])yramid. When
these units are asseml^led, V-sha])ed channels are formed into
which rules can easily be slipped. The lengths of the hori-
zontal rules are all multiples of six ])oinls. Any distance
desired between the lines can readily be obtained by coml)ina-
tions of rules of different tiiickness, one-, two-, three-, and four-
point sided )evel rule being used. IW using two-point parallel
rule or one-point center-face rule between the columns, the hori-
zontal rules coiue so close to the \-ertical rules that the slight
gap is scarcely i)ercei)tible. The type used in this system is
cast to unit width so as to be self-si)acing.
Points 10 Points 12 Poirits 14 Points
A,
16 Points 18 Points
J ! .
c h
V
\\
II
ri n
S'.iowiui; use of rules of ililTereiU lluckness with 'i ypotabular units.
The (!ia:.;ram. iu'Kinnini; '■villi S ]), lint s. siiows (ira'lna: inn Ijy 2 points, viz.: S. in,
J J, \ \. 10, anil iS points, by tr.euse of 2- anil 4-point siile-face rules. If interineili;il e
rulint; is necessary, 7. 1,5, i<). 25, 31 points, etc., can be maiie with i-point rule,
and Q, 12. 15. IS, 21, 21, 27, 30, is. etc., can be n;a'le with 3-point si.ie-face ruie.
Fig. 80. — Typotabuiar Method of Securing' Definite Number of Points
lietween l>ines.
When two-point center-face rule is used l^etween cohmms in
tables, the ga]) is distinctly n(niceable. When head rules
alnit column rules, side-bevel rules sliould be used, so that the
face of the iiead rule will join tlie viul o\ tie column rule.
128. Hand-set Ruled Blanks. — 'ii.j l.v-i step in setting a
ruled blank is to exandiie tlte co])}- ;;ik! cisl it off in column form,
allotting a size nearest to that shown In copy, but making its
width a multiple of six ])oints. Abirk t\ich column width on the
copy. Total the widths of tlte cohnnns and the rules between
144
I'kl.X'l IXC
to determine the full widlli of the table. Tf too much has been
allotted, reduce the widtli of a colunu-i, choosm.i^ the one for
reduction whose heading would seem to indicate that but little
sj)ace is required. If a cohniin must be enlarged, ])lace the
extra S])ace where it 'an be used to ad\-anta<;e. After the
width is determined, count the number (jf lines desired, and
note the len^dh that the table is to be. Allot a certain de])Ui
for the headin.ij;, and divide the balance o: the len.i^th of the tab;C
by the number of lines required. This will give the desired
s])ace between lines.
If the ofhce is ef|uip])ed with the different thicknesses ol
side-be\'cl rule mentioned under the Typotabular S\-stem, the
job can be put tot^^ether by usinj^' these rules and regular six-
Fig. Si. — .\ 'typotabukir Job Rc.;i(l> to Slide onto the Stor.c.
point or twelve-point cjuads, as ref|uire(i. In fact, llie method
is practically the same as The Typotabular Sx'stem, the only
a.d vantage ])ossessed b\' the latter being that the iinit^ are always
in mass formation and tliat the \'~shape(l channels aid in the
insertion of rules. I'Ik; table can, tiierefore, be put together in
much less time. If the ofi"ne i>^ not so equipped (and this is
ustialK' the ca~e). t'le space n.(|Mired nuist be made tip by util-
izing such material as is at IkukL This is u>uall\- two-{)oint
rule and the a\'erage run of qtiads.
]i \-er_\- much oi tliis niud work i> doiif tlu' ofVac should be
efpiipped with Slcp!u''i>\ M iih io l[f\>(t (,)tia(h-ats. A full
outfit of the>r con^ml^ ot liiigi!!- Irc.Mi -i\ point to >e\-cnt \'--t wo-
point (\arying by si.\ jioint-', in lhieknr>s Irom si,\q)oint to
TABLES AND OTIIIIR JXTRFCATE MATTER 145
thirty-six-point (varyino; by six points). They may be obtained
with either square or ehamfered edf2;es. The chamfered edges
facihtate the insertion of rules. These quads are kej)t in a
special case, with each size and kind in a row. When com-
posing a table, a full-length row of the right size and thickness
may be taken from the case and placed on the galley. This
saves all of the time usually spent in assembling an infinite
number of individual quads and spaces. After the job is com-
[)leted the rules are removed and the rows of quads replaced
in the case. There is thus a saving of time both in composition
and distribution.
In setting the job shown in P^ig. 79 the first operation was
to approximate the s})ace on the copy, and then cast off the job
by allowing eight picas for the first column, three and one-half
])icas for the second column, four [)icas for the third column, and
six picas for the fourth column. This confijination, with the
three tw(vpoiiit vertical rules, makes up to twenty-two picas,
the width of the jxige. Allow one-quarter inch spaces between
lines; eighteen points are ap])roximately one-quarter of an
inch. If the space could be sHghtly greater than one-quarter
of an inch, the setting could be simplified bv using eighteen-
point quads and one-]x:iint rules. If the space cannot be any
greater, sixteen points must be put between two-point rules.
When planning a job, the compositor should always endeavor
to put it together with the smallest number of units, and to
use material that is sclf-s])acing to the measure. Do not use
material that nuist be justified to some pica length if some other
material v,"ill fill the space without justifying. For example, in
the first column material is deshed that is sixteen points thick
and eight picds long, l)ut a com])ination of eleven-point and
fi\-e-point to make xy[) sixteen should not be used as each line
would have to be justified with s])aces. Nor would nine-point
and seven-])oint be used, for tlie same reason. Two lines of
eight-point would fill the space without justifying. If this
material is scarce, ten-])oint and six-])oint quads will fill the
space propcrh', ])ut the ten-point lines wil' need justifying.
146 PRixrixd
Twelve-j)oint quads and two two-point leads will also suffice.
If notliin^ but ciuads are used in one column, and a combination
of C[uads and leads in anotlur, it fin-riuent ly happens that the
column containing leiid- i- longer ihan tlie other. This is
evidently due to the \:ic{ tiiat leads are not as accurately made
as quads, and consequeni 1\- run a little tliicker than they should.
The job shown in Id'i. 7t) nia\' b'C set by making u]) a stick
to twenty-one and a lialf ems and settin,ir the job strai^Ldit cross.
Use ei,i:ht-])()int (juiids ihrou^irhout. I'u.Ldit ])icas (96 ])oints)
equal twelve ei'-rlit-point ems; three and one-half picas (42
points) equal Uvc ems and a four-em s])ace; four picas (48
points) cf|ual six ems, and six f)ica- (72 ])oints; ecjual nine ems.
Set the Tirst line b\" ])utting in tweh'e ems of eiL!:ht-j)oint, then
five ems and a four-em space, then six en"is, then nine ems.
This will just fill the line. Set as man\- lines as ma}' Ije required
for the whole job. Tlace tliem on a L'^.-'Iey. Xow set the head-
in,ii;s, but make up the slick to the different measures recjuired.
Place the headiuL^s in position at the top of the columns, -lip
in the column rules of ])roper len^rth, and proceed to in-ert the
horizontal rules. Ik\<,dn at the bottom of the first column.
Put a rule at the bottom to support the quads. Place the llrst
rule between the second and third rows of ciuads, the second
rule between the fourth and tiflh rows, and so on up the column.
This will _L,d\-e sixteen points between each two-])oint rule. After
the I'lrst column is completed, proceed witli the second in the
same manner; then fmish the tliird and fourth columns. Place
a be\'el-face rule at ihe head and foot of llie j(;b, with the
bevel turned outward in botli c:i>cs. U the cwlumn,-; are sliirhtlx-
too Ioul: or too sliort, the di^crepanc)- can be adju.-ted b\"ah(.T-
in,<^' tlie space in the headin;_r. Allow at le;:>l two points for
"sc|uee/.e.'"
129. Wax-engraving. An extcllmt imit.i'tion of rule work,
and one whit h jjruducc- piTlccl j(iiMl>, :.< i !'i:!iiu-di b\' a procc.->
known as ::MX iimi'ii: iu'. A mc1,il plate i- lir-a coated with a
tin'n l:i\'er of -.v.ix. 'i'hi- plate i- tknu |ilacrd i:i :i ruHrar-nKichine
and line- of the proper vidlh of f.ice are ruled in the wax.
TABLES AND O'lHIOR TNTUrCATE MATIM'-R 147
cutting through to the metah If any lettering is required, the
ty])e is set u]) and ])ressed into the wax, down to the metal.
After the work is a])proved, the wax part of the plate is l)uilt
up, then dusted with plumbago, and an electrotyi)e made and
mounted.
Most of the diagrams and outline illustrations in this volume
were made by this method. A rough sketch is furnished the
artist, and the size is designated. He then sketches the design
in the wax and submits it for approval. After it is api)roved
the plate is tlnished and mounted, as described above.
130. Monotype Method of Setting Rule Work. — Fig. 79 (b)
shows a rule job set complete by the i\Ionotyi)e system. The
job was keyboarded exactly as shown, and the specimen com-
posed on the caster. This is just as it came from the machine,
without any attem[)t being made to fix the joints. Close in-
S})ection reveals the fact that it is built up of individual char-
acters.
\h ^J ^1- TT r- ^ ^ !- i =. ~ ^ ^ Jl L T Jl r? ^l _ = =j
\= '-'A- - 7? -"- H ^ H -^^ ^ + II 'fr I - IF = = = - ~ -
I i H _ h ^! "^ + - r ^ h ^ -^ -■ ■- r 1 h n - I
t + h H T- ^ T -^ I I } -^ - - _ -^ h -r
FlG. 82. — Characters uscti in Composing JoIjs by llie A!onol.}-pe Aletiiod.
Every character is on a six-point unit, there being no long
j)ieces of rule in the jol). The l)lank spaces are made uj) of six-
j)oint em (|uads.
131. Casting Off a Table. — Fig. 83 shows a table set in
cight-])oint, solid. The manuscript reached the ])rinter without
any designation for colunm size. The width of the whole table
was gi\-en. I^xaniination of the coi)y showed that the greatest
number of ligures was five, therefore there was am[)le room to
make each cohunn three ])icas wide. This a.cconnnodated a one-
em cjuad on eacli side of th.e cokmm of figures, a.nd made the
cokimns selt-sp;i(ing. There are fi\e colunms three i)icas wide,
whicli necessitated fi\e two-poijil rules. This left six picas I'or
I4S
PRixrFxc;
the first column, [)lus two ]K)ints. The matter in the first
cohmin was .-et six ems wide. After this cohimn was in
t}-pe, a two-])oint rule wa- put alonirside it and the other live
columns proceeded with. Ir.a>mue]-L as there were no words
TAHLi: CWISC STOCK Xr.MRF.R.S FOR DrFFKRF.XT STYLFS OF
RFIRIGFRAlORs
\:i:-i-. s:y:r 1. Style/;, >::.;<• r, s:y\- //. St;.-;,- /■:.
Ari't'k- IOJ2I
i'ri^i'l 4,S-^
K-e-<a\ rr i 72J
KiiiL' 1 4 -"'7
Sturlinir ;"-i
I I,vi-
I -'44S
Fvv>4
i4''"5
44 -'J
4xS0
4"40
4 7.V3
i ."^ : .'
111:2
20; :•
: I y :
I4J','S
14-^'")
M-70
14-71
37-'i
.v^^i
,]^)2 1
4021
V'lC,. S3. — Sl;o-.vinL' hov,- :i Tahlc may be .\Fi(k' Sylf-.-pariiiL' and Si-t in a
W'iilc .Mc•a^urc in-tead oi in Single. Xarrow Columns.
amon.i: the figures, and it was sim])ly a line-up of li.irures. tht
li\-e columns tliree ])icas wide were set all at one time in a liftecn-
em measure. First an em cpiad was ])ut in. then the li\-e li,<j:ure-.
then two one-em quads (not one two-em ciuad, for a rule was
linalK" to jio between the two one-em rjuads*. tlien li\'e more
^-
r'n.. S4. ia-s! Wa\- to Make up a Stiyk D a Xarnr.v Myasure.
tiL'ure-, then two mere one-em (luad-. and so on across the
measure. All the lines were -el in lhi< way. until the talile was
couijiicled. Th:- left a di\id/nL:-!iiie between tlie row,- of one-
em '|uad<. rile h(yidii:Lr,- for llie columns were set in a three-
em me, .-r.ro. A- i* w,:- impo~-ilile to ,L:et the tliumh) in the
TABLES AND OTHER EXTRICATE AE\TTi:R 14Q
bottom of a stick made u]) to three i)icas, it was found advisable
to make u]) the stick as shown in Fit^. 84, by using a two-em
piece of metal furniture, leaving a space three ems wicie between
it and the end of the stick. Always follow this [)lan when setting
type in narrow measures.
After the headings were all set and i)roperly placed and
spaced, a two-j)oint rule of proper length was sli]-)])ed between
each row of one-em ciuads. This separated the t}'{)e into
columns. It was now found th.it the table was two points
short of full width. I'his amount was added to the first column.
The rule under the heading was made eight\'-six j)oints wide
(seven picas and two points). A two-point lead was ])laced
beside the heading and one between the t}']je and rule below the
heading. The top and bottom rules were added and the table
conipleted.
When type is new llie composed matter usually comes out
riccording to calculation. ]f the type in the table shown had
been old and (lirt\-, there is a s.rong })ossibilit\- that the two
l)oints additional would not ha /e been required in the tlrst
column. One point might havj ];een sufficient. When the
additional s])ace to be added to a table is ver\- slight, or there
is a great number of columns, compositors sometimes place
thin pieces of paper each side of the column rules.
Table III, page 40. shows another tyj)e of work. Here the
columns are narrow and there is so much to be gotten into the
table that the columns cannot be made to multiples of {)ica.
In this event make u]) to the llgures. The llgures are on en
body, therefore make tJK' width some multiple of the en. and
use the en leader as a decimal ])oiiit (one period on an en bodyj.
Tills makes the whole job self-spacing. Each line can be set
straight across in a wide measure, and the \ertical rules slipped
into place after the table is set. Of course, when columns are
not set to pica widths. labor-sa\-ing rules cannot be used under
the headings, and rule- of prcjper width must lie cut to tit.
Whene\'er it is ])o<sibIe to do so. al\va\-s set tables with narrow
columns in ihis manner. Thev can be set in hall the time that
I50 PR1NII\(;
it takes 10 comiiose them in narrow measures anrl then put them
together.
W'lien liadcrs are used tlie\' -houltl run the full width of the
eolumn. ; Sre "(ili)S-arv" for e\])lanati()n of leader.)
132. Three-point Spaces of Eight-point.- I-Aery font of
ei,L^dit-])()int tx-pe tli:.l i- i:.-rd for -ettin.L' tal)le> <hould be er|uii)i)cd
witli spaces thrre poinl> tliiek in^te.id of tlie orfiinary tliiek-
>l)aces. This ,ei\'L> a ran^e of s])aces \ar\'in,t: li\' one point.
The f(jur-em s]>ace i- two ])oints thick, the thick-=pace will be
three ])oints thick, and tlie en ciuad is four points thick. By
comlMniniz; a thick .-]);;ce and a four-em fi\'e points arc obtained,
two thick -])ace- e(|Ual six points, and en Cjuad and a th'ck-sj)ace
equal sewn jioint.-. ;;nd t'^'."o en riuads efjual eidit points. If the
matter is beini: >et in a measure made up to picas, and the type
tills all but six ])oints of the measure, a three-poim space each
side will just 1:11 it. In fact, tlie use of the three-i)oint sjkicc
practicall}- makc< ciLrht-point t\"pe -clf-sjiacini: to ])ica measures.
133. Point-thick Spaces. — It is sometimes necessarv to set
a table leaded in>tead of solid. If the columns are ^^•ide and
an even numlicr of ])!cas. ordinar}' lal)or-sa\-inL: leads sliould be
usc'L If tlie columns are A-er\- narrow and. it would be neces-
sary to cut a ,i:reat number of >horl lea.d-. it is ]>etler to double-up
spaces of tlie pro])er size and tliickne>-. Tlie ll\-e-cm space of
ten-])oint i- two ])oints thick, the four-cm space of eiizht-iioint is
two ])oint- thick, and tlie tliree-em >iiace of six-point is two
])oints tliick. Wy u>iiiLr tke-e in combination, a spa.ce ol the
projier widith can u.-ually be ma.de uj). In faict, if the jot) i^i to
\)v le.uled. this mu-t be taken into con--id,eralion in ca-tini: oil
tlie job and, if jio.-.-iiile, a mea-ui'e c^io-en tliat will be some mul-
tiple of tlie,-e sjiace-. I-'rom tlu-e three sp-aces, b\" wAws, tliem
.-inudv or in combination, the folk )\'. htj: widths in ])oints c;in be
obtained: >i\. eiiiht. ten., iweixe, fourleeP.. >!Xteen. eiiihteen,
twent\'. tweiit\"-two, 1 weiity-foiar, 1 \'.-enl \"--i\, t went x'-ei'i'it ,
tliirtw thirt\---i\, etc. If tlie -jiaie reouired lietweell line- is
tliree inan',-, ,: i:reat number of combinaiion> may be iniilt \\\)
\>y wAw'j. the four-eiu ^pace oi t w eh'c-point , the tliree-em ^pace
TAI5Li;S AXIJ OTIIKR IXTKrCATE MATTER 151
of nine-point, the tliree-])()int space of ei.i^^ht -point, and the en
quad of six-point. If four points l)et\veen Hues is required, the
thick-space of t\vel\-e-])()int , the en fiuad of eii^ht-point, and the
tliree-eni space of six-point may be used; two of the last-
named, of course, heiiiij; refiuired.
'J'he stuflent sliould make a study of the inter-rekition of
sjiaces. Quads and sj)aces of one size of t\pe can frequently
be u.-ed vitli another size when there is a scarcity of material.
A two-em quad of })ica is the same size as an en quad of twenty-
four point. A three-em quad of ei.t^ht-point is the same size as
a three-em spvcQ of twenty-four point. A three-em quad of
pica is the same as a three-em si)ace of thirty-six point. A two-
em quad of ei.triiteen-point is the same as an en quad of thirty-
six ])oint. A tlir'X'-em quad of six-})oint equals a three-em
space of ei,i^hteen-j)oint. A tv,'0-em quad of nine-point equals
an en quad of eighteen-point.
The list gi\-en lias not exhausted the numl)er by any means,
it is merel}- suggestive. It ser\'es, however, to illustrate the
advantages of tiie j)oint system.
134. Line-up of Figures. — The printer is occasionally fur-
nished cop}' in which the matter seems to ])C in tabular form,
Init with the rules omitted. In other words, the copy is simply
a line-u]) (jf figures. In cases of this kind there is no need to
cast off the jol.i into columns of any s])ecilied size. Set one full
line of the ty])e with the ligurcs in apijroximately uniform posi-
tion. If possilde, have an e\'en numljcr of ems ])etween each
column, using quads for this puri)ose. Set all the lines straight
across, making the figures line U]) in column form.
,. , „ Rate per Square
„ ,,. Ao. of Eir.s per . ,
Type Size. _ . ir.cn at 40 ( ents per
"' Thousand Ems.
6-poinl 144 .0576
8-point Si ,0324
10 ;/oint 51 . S4 .0207
I2-i)iillit 3') -0144
I'lG. -"^5. — Sliov.in^ a T-lnc-up of Fiiriirc:^.
1^2
PRIXTIXG
135. Setting More Than One Column in a Single Measure.
— ]\Iattcr that contains iwu or three col'anin>. eonsistin^u' simj)ly
of a line-up of material, can fr(_'C|uently be set more expedi-
tiously and accurately in one measure than in narrow measures
and then assemliled : e^peciall}- is thi^ the case if the matter be
leaded. The matter below is a sample of such composition.
BRIEF LIST OF ARTICJ.KS ICJUXD IX Till; C O.MI'OSIXG-ROO.M
Ikxlkin
Composiii^-^tick
I'urnilurt:
(iallex'-rack
Compo<ing-stone
Mallet
Proof-press
Quoins
Quoin-kc}-
Ke-Ift
'r\"[)e-L'au.^e
Tweezers
Fig. 86. — Showing a Line-up in Two Columns Set in One Measure.
Of course, if tlicre is a |")ossibilit\- of alteration, and con>e-
(juent o\-errunnin,!j; after the jol) is set, it is better to set leaded
n"iatter in separate columns, ikit if there is no likelihofKl of
chan,<ze, it is ad\-isable to ^et it as shown.
Fig. S7. — Settinu T\T)e in Tv.o Colunins in One Measure b\' tl^e Use of a
Twe!\'c-lJ(.ii;t >\n-j:.
Fi,L'. 'S; illu-trate- how ilii- wa- done. The full measure is
tweni\'-two cm.-. J\ach to!'.ur;n i- to br eie\rii en-- wide.
Obtain a shii: or a ])i(He- of .-i.x-poinl or t v. elxe-jiciru rule clexen
eir.- lon'j. ."^e-t the t\-])e and put in a. few fuiad- until th.e line
is about half nlled. I'ul in 1 lie -Iult and iu-tif\- tlie line. Remo\'e
TAHLKS AM) OTIU'R IXJRICA TJ'; MAiri'.R
153
the skip;, set tlie balance of tlie line, and justify it. Proceed in
the same manner for all the lines.
Any number of cobmins can be set in this manner, by using
~,\uis,s of a lengtli that will lea\"e each colunin of proi)er width.
i
\^
-^-^
i.
1
>
'?
.^
,
'*-
>
1-
. i
'■-
.-
<
■^
5
i
-■■
en
en
UJ
'
D
n
1
<
i
ui
5
<
Z
i
ijoAipt! y^ n^-a
:
1
!
j.^pjo J" Jt^-'a
■
K Jip'O i"-i"i--i;
1
1
'•■'.V'A
1
.M:;p.>-1
H Y-
c O
SCDid 9-
136. Blank-book Headings. — Fig. 88 illustrates a rather
intricate form of blank-book headin,i.,^ and shows how it has
been put together. If i)ossible, alwa^'s obtain a ruled sheet of a
job before setting it. The secret of success in setting blank-
154 I'RIXTIXC;
hook lieadin.L^s i.- in allowiiiLT amjilc space for mo^•ing the type
to lit the rl;iiIlL^ 1 .\ er\- jo!) sh.ould he ])i:t to.L^ether in such a
way that it c;.n readi!}' IjC ir:o\''a(l /;/ eiiry direction. Many
a C()n".])o-itor ha.- con'.e to ,L^rici' I'euai.-e he dir! not allow for
m()\in'i the t\pe when the joh is on pire.--. If [)Os-ili!e. cast
off the Cohan, n- to jiio:.-. >(> as to use lahor-sa\-ine material;
hut do not do .-o if ii hrin;j:s the cohnr.ns too close to,L'ether.
Better cut a fc\\- ha-tard lead> while settin,L^ a joh than run the
risk of wastin.ir x'uvx \\\'nv^ it on pre.-<. If tlie columns are so
close th.at tliere i- a -])a.ce of Imt six or eiLrlit ])oints helween tliem,
it is hetter to maki- up tlie rerjuired amount with th=ree or four
leads tlian to ha\-e a sin^jle jaece of nuileriid, f('r if the colunin
nced;> mo\inL;- th.e r-i'ii:lc ])iece will ra,\'e to he ren'o'/ed and its
erjuixaient m.aie u]) of ^e\'(.r:d piL-ce> and ii^scr^ed in its stead.
It is hetter to jiu.t in that n^aiierial when settin^e the joh and
a\'()id the nece.-^ity for chancre whale on jire.-s.
The 1>'pe in narrow cohimns should read up tlie slicet.
Wdiere a headim: cr.')--es two columns, the rule hencath it is
sometimes ])rinted in. a.s it is e.\])ensi\-e and rather difficult to
strike it in on a rulin'^-nKicldnc.
The hest wa.y to lunvlle hiankdjook hea.din,crs i- to cut a
section of the ruled -heot .:n(l ]>hice it in tlie con:p:o;in,2-stick a.nd
set tlie t\'])e to lit \\v:: rulinir, hearip.;^ iti mind tliat am.]/Ie allow-
ance must he made for mo\-ini^. If a s]:eet of the jol) i- not
a\adlahle, mark oif iho cohuun- on a narrow strip of pajier,
u-iiiL' the pattern .~'utI a- a a^iide. The jol) na;\' 1:C- set in sec-
tiotis. atul than as-cmhird. on a. c;-:dh-\a If a jo], onh' coxxts lialf
a sh.eet, thoro is tio nc-ed to set it full v.-idth of tlie .-heet. It is
ad\isahle, hiOwe\'(,-r. to -et it to a niea-ure of which \"ou ha\'C
plenty of material; sa\- fort\". i';ft\a or >i.\tv i)icas. This wall
sa\-e time aial trouhlc wha-r, lockinL!' up tlie joh for [iress.
137. Setting and Registering Type to Horizontal Lines. —
When setlina' a column of t\'pe nuittcr to he rcj-i-tered on hori-
zontal Tu'ef! line-, nail.e \\\> your me:!.-Mr(' to t ha/ neare-t pira
size. See that \aai lai\e ]>ltai;\- of h-id- h(.a'ore heainihm: the
work. If Ic.ah of il;c -i/r ( hosen are -(arce. u,-e a -ize tliat is
TABLES AND OTHER INTRICATI-: AEVITER 155
plentiful. Better to set it slif^htly wider than to cut material.
If the column be a narrow one with nothing but figures in it,
and you have plenty of room on the sheet, there is no need to
set it in a narrow measure. It is unhandy to set type in a
narrow nieasurc and time can be saved by making the measure
to a con\-enient width. ^Moreover, there is greater likelihood
of having leads of the wider measure. If the job is in eight-
point, or in some otl;er size that is a multiple of pica, set the
measure to eight, ten, twelve, or some other even number of
picas. The ligures will then be self-spacing. Make an approxi-
mation of the amount of space required between the lines and
put in the leads while setting.
After the column is complete, use a sheet of the ruled stock
for registering. This can be tacked to the side of a brass-lined
wooden-rim galley, or it may be held in the hands. It is m.ore
convenient to tack it to the galley, as both hands are then left
free. Get the hrst line of the type in register with the first
ruled line on the sheet. Insert the required amount of space
between the lines to make them all strike on the ruled lines. If
the sheet is not ruled on the point system, it may be necessary
to use cardboard between the lines to make them register.
Usually, one-point leads will bring the lines sufliciently close for
the puri)Ose. After the horizontal lines are in register, if there
is a heading, it should be put into register, and the column
material moved so that the type lines will fall three or four
points above the ruled lines. If there is an abundance of room
between lines, it might even go more; but it should never be
less than two points.
138. Running Type around Cuts. — The Monotype and
Linotype methods of running type around cuts are described
in Section 188. The method by which it is done by hand is here
given.
When the cut is a perfect rectangle the job is comparatively
simple. If the matter is leaded, arrange to have the type of
some pica width, so as to use labor-sa\-ing leads. Just how much
material is to be placed between the type and the cut will
156 PRJX'ilXG
depend on the aniount oi white s])ace on the cut. There
should be at least one ])ica of while space around the cut. If
there is no \vhite niarLun. all the -pace nui>t be ])laced between
the cut and t!ie ty])e If there i> an abunrlance of white space
on the cut. the t\'pe nia\- frcpuenlly be run almost u]) to it.
Ne\'er ])lace the t>'pe nuitter airain-t th.e cut. but ha\-e at least
a two-point lead bet\'.a-fn -o that ihe t-nds of thic lines of t\-])e
will not pre>^ into the w^ood and ])rc\-fnt the job from lockin,^
U}) properl)'.
If. in arranudn,!: to ]ia\'e the t\'])e matter set to a ])ica width.
it is found that one ])ica >ize allow- loo much., ihe difficult\-
can be o\-ercome b}' .-citing the t\'j)e to the larirer size and
indentin.LT each line sulTicienth' to make the mar<^dn of the [)roper
size.
If ihe cut is irregular in sha])e. and the t\"i)e must conform to
the outline of the cut. the job become- a coi"])licated one. luich
job is a ])roblem in itself, and the method of ^L•ttin,L: calls for an
exerci>e of in'j:enuit\' on the ])art of the compo.-itc.r. FiL^ Sq
.-now- a jol) irre.LUilar in outline, nm] the followin^i: description
tell> h(jw it i- to be put to.crether.
I'ull a jjroof of th.e cut, and draw a line around it, aliout one
jaca awa\" frtjin the ed,L:e. followiuL^ the irreLTuIarit y of its outline,
to sliow where the i>'pe matter i- to bcLiin. Cut the ])a])er to
the width of the t\"])e paire. Hold th.e ])roof to the liL'ht and
mark the outline of both the cut and tb.e t>"jie on tlie back.
Cut the proof into jiiece- that v.iil ju-t lit th.e -tiek. Put the
marked -heet in the bottom of tl;e -tick diid ^et the t>'pe on lo])
of it, iisiuL^ the markdl ii;;tiinea- a Lruide. Set the full line>
-trai,trht acro->. in-ertip.ir lead- if th.e matter i- leaded. W'liere
the matter bt-Lun- to run do-.'.m the .-ide of the cut. i)lace enoueh
quafl- and >pace- in llie -tiek tei make uj) a bkink -])ace where
the cut i- to ;:o and beirin th.e t\-])e at the ])eneikline. Where
the nairirin ei.me- bet ween t he cut a.nd the 1>"jh' ])Ul a one-em
fjuaii i -e-iiie t he I \pe. 'I'hi- \'/i!l be r;eeded w hen t he cut i- ])Ut
in ])o-ii:iii). ^et a- much a> can be gotten in tlie line, and
ii;-tif\- it b\- ,'/;t/r:;,-'' iitti.i'f)! /In T^ruv/.-a .<et the -tickful in
TAHLKS AND OTIIIIR [.VrRFCATi: AIATIKR
157
this manner, niakinu; tlie ty])C matter fit the penciled outline.
lunpt)- (he stickful on thi- galley, put in the second half of the
])roof, and ])roceed with the hahmce. W'lien the matter is as-
sembled on the .galley, there will be a blank space in the type
matter n^ade uj) of (^uads and conformin^i; to the outline of
the cut.
If the matter is to be electrot}-|)ed, and the ori.t^inal cut is
to be inserted in the electr()t\'])e plate, there is no need to place
it in the pa.^^e with the type. If the job is to Ije ])rinte(l from
ty[)e or the cut nuist be placed beside the type, continue as
i^: Cut i.apL'r to Mz.' of type matter
^
X . ,
"\ \
.^ \ \
' W ' \ N
. /• •■ \. '%. \ \
,^'/ \ ' 'vi \ •,
--'l " i. "*/'■ «• '' \ V \
,' '• A % ' ^\ ;: . \\
I \ '^^ U' . '^r . y <K \ \
'^^c.. <V .^'f,'' < \T-—
==:;
-Blank >piu-e
-. •^^^- ^^ - '^- '«\ \ I
followin- out
~^- ^- ^^, ! _. _
Ihlr of cut.
M ■
Put a on, -en
c|uaa in l.eix-
y
aloni^MJe of
'
the type.
t'li;. S(). — ifow 'I"\i)(; S!iou!(l l)c Ivun Around ;i Cut Irn-.^ukir in Cutliiu'.
[['h\< .sliow's tlu; Jol) as printed. )
follows: place the type on a <:^alley as shown in Fi^^. 90, with 'he
head of the job toward the left-hand side. I'ut furniture
around it ami lock it up. Cut oul the ])roof of the cut close to
its edm'. JMace this u])>ide down on the t\-pe matter and mark
the outline of the cut on the (|uad> with a lead-pencil. As it is
physically iinpo<~ib!e to cur\-e a lead to lit such outlines, in
cases of thi< kind the 1}'i)e must come U]) airainst the cut.
if the matter i< -olid the r|uads enclosed in the jiencilcd outlirie
may now lu' remowd and the cut inserted. If the matter is
leaded, the leads bet ween the lines that ;ire alon'jside of the cut
nuist be shortened. They must be long enough to i^revent the
158
PRIXTIXG
letters from clroppino; down on the end:^, but not lonj::; enough to
bind. Obtiun enough picct'r^ of odd lengths (do not cut labor-
saving nialerialj, mark the size that each is to be cut, making
each long enough to reach I'roni the cut to the end of the line,
take them to the lead-culter, and cut them all to i)ro])er size.
If the lead-cutter is right Ijcside \ou, tlie}' may be marked and
cut one at a tiiue, but do not waste time ruiming a foot-race
between the jo!) ;ind the lead-cutter. J\.emo\e a full-length lead
and substitute one of proper length. 'J'his will iea\e all the
(|uads loose exci'pt the one-em quads beside the type matter.
1
1
' -^ v^ 1 _ ^ -«.^_,. 1 ^ 1
:
1
I j
! 1
1
=
A ;
1
i ! i > : : : :
]'u;, yo.— Showing' '-I"}'[)c ,Maitrr as J I, A;){)r:ir.s oa the (lalli
ufliT ]ii>LTti()ii of the Cut.
kemo\-e tlu' loose f|uads and spaces. SH[) the cut into ])1;uh'
and put enough material al)0\e and below to justifv it to p:ige
lenglli. Xow ('(U'cfitUy ])lace eiiomrh <p::(e between each em
(|uad and the type to justify tlie line. If the eiu (|u;i(l strikes
the cut ;it an angle, and lias a 1endciic\- to wedgi' the line out of
phnnb. in-ert a Mnaller >i."';e (|ua(k and >ee that the ])re>>ure is
exerted ;ig;iin-t the end of tlie hue iml agaiii<l the >i(k' of the
(|uad. The job is now coiuplete. Place furniture ;ill around il,
so as to support the sider-, and tic il \\\).
I3Q. vSetting Type in Circles, llelow ai-e -howii iwd forms
of circle.- a label and a job ihat wa< en! out after printinj^,
'iAHl.l:S A\l) OJIIKR iXTklCATi: MAT'JKR
159
Tfie prinlin,^; of the latter is described on pa,c;e 246. When
t\'i)e is to be placed in a circle made of brass rule the inside of
the circle must be liiied with leads or a slu.t:!; to keep ihe ty})e
away from the rule, Idrst determine the mar<^in inside the rule
and curve the niaterial to lit. To do tliis cut a strip of stiff
paper and cur\e it in^ii'e the rule. .Mark the len^i^^th that the
lead or slug is to be. (hit it to size. If the office is not ecjuipped
with a curvin,y;-machiiie, the lead or shi,c; may readily be curved
by bendin^ij; it around a mallet diandle or a shaft on a printinf^-
press, care beiiii.,^ taken nol to bend it on the bias. I'ry the curve
I'lG. yi. — Typo Scl i;i Circk
inside the rule. If too lon^^, cut it carefully so as to make a
perfect M.
There are two wa}-s of ]>lacin,ir a line around a circle. One
is a tentative or ruie-of-thumb melhod, the other an accurate
one of determining the exact distance around the circk", settins^
the line in a slick, f;istenii\Lr it willi irummed ])a]K'r, and then
cur\-in,L!; it into place. The latter has a distinct ad\anta,<j;e over
the former in thr^t the t\'p.(' is held in pro]>er place a.nd position.
The former is the old^r ;Mid n^ore fre(|uentlv used nu'thod.
In the first method, after tl.f^ circle is lined, determine what
t\-pe is to l)e used, set it out of th,e case into a stick, with si);ices
between words. I'kice the tv])e inside the circle, curxanu; it to
fit. W'lien ab(^iii three-fu/,r!hs of the line is in i)lace, it wiil be
i6o i*ki:\'iix(5
necessary to riir\\> a lead to fit inside so as to hold the line in
position, icaxinij; the lead siiL(htl_\- lon,L!;er than it. will be when
linished. When the lead is in place, tinish the line of tv])e,
lea\-in<^r it a ioo>e lit. i;.\])and tlie inside curxerl lead, mark the
correct length, cut it t.o size, and force it into ])Iace. If there is
room, a second cur\ed k'ad should be forced into ])lace for the
sake of stability.
Next set the horizontal lines, cuttinsi; leads to lit. Use slu.gs
wherever possible, as they are iirmer. When e\er\thin,g is in
place and titling looselv, lirst justify the h.orizontal t\'])e lines
lengthwise, then force in enough material abo\e and below the
horizontal lines to \\edge the inside tightly. Lastly, force
enough s])ace in the cur\ed line to tighten it. ] )o not attem])t
to tighten the curxxxl lin.e unlU. the inside is hrm, or the curve
n:ay be forced out of sha])e.
'J'he second method is the same as the first except that the
curved line is asseml)led as follows: cut a ])iece of stiff ])a])er to
lit inside the lining of the rule. Determine what size t\'])e is to
be used. The ])a])er shows the outside diameter of the line;
it is necessar}' to lind the inside diameter. I'he circ-umference
of evei'\- circle is s-T4t6 times its diameter. As the line runs all
the wa\' around the circle, the inside diainetc" will be less than
the outside b\' 1\\ice the bodv size of the t}'i)e. 'I'o lind the
inside diameter wlien the outside is known, multii)ly twice the
body size in [)oints ])V ^.1416 lo obtain ihe number of ])oints less
that the inside i> to be. .Mea.sure off this ;iumber of points on
the stiff ])a])er, and cut it to '^ize. Make r.]) a stick to this
measure, set and iuslif}' ihe line, i)ut ha\e a s])ace at one end of
the line. Now glue a ])i('ce of hca\-\' nrniila ])a])er lo th.e bottom
of the 1 \-pe. ( )!ie or 1 wo lhiclviu><e> of gummed manila 1 inding-
])a])er is u^^eful for this ])ur])ose. When llie glue has lirmly set,
the line t'an be curxcd into ])o-ili()u in the circle, and will lit it
])erf('Cll\', each letlcr l)eing held in juTfecl iu>silion radiall}-.
d'lu' balance of ik-;' clrek' <houid l)<~ rmi>hcd a- alrea.dx' describeik
'j'he circaikir iob. Idg. 01, -hows a (ailoui lor a tally-card.
It \\'as moil n led cii a i)iii in llic center <o 1 ha.l it could be rotated
'rAKI.lvS AND OTIIKR IXTRICVrK MATTER
i6i
and each desi<i;n l)routi;ht. into \iew through a hole in the mount-
ing. It was \cry imi)ortant that each desifin should be equi-
distiinl from, the center, and that the central point should be
printed, 'idle tirst step was to cut a circular hole in an old
electrotype block, d'his was lined with a sluf^ and the charac-
ters assendded about the circle, uniform space beint^ ])laced,
between them. A slug was curved to ht inside of the char-
acters. A scjuare block of wood was placed inside the circle
and the job was justified by jamming material tightly at all
j)()ints. The characters were now forced tightly into ])lace.
A proof was ]Hilled, and the center of the circle determined.
An electrotype tack was driven into the block, leaving the head
Spaces betwcon letters-
em quada
-Six-i)UiiU sluj,'s
l-"i('.. g2.— Showing' How ;i Cur\e(l Ij'nc Should be Held in Position with
Spiices.
of the tack ]e\el with the face of the type. The head was then
filed to a ])lunt point. A ]iroof was pulled, and the center
tested with a pair of ca!i])ers. Il was slightly out of center,
l)Ut was l)enl into ])()sition with ])incers.
When setting letters in a cur\-e, the to])s of the letters are
spread apart while the bottoms are close together; the larger
the letters, tlie broader the gap. In order to kee]) the letters
e(|uidistant. it is sometimes ni'cessa ry to ])ut sj)aces of a smaller
size at the tops of the letters. (See Fig. 02. i
140. Algebra, Genealogies, and Pedigrees, d hese repre-
sent tlie most difficult forms of all t}-pe C()m])<)sition. This
treatise is loo elementar\- to undertake to ex])lain this intricate
1 62 PRIXTIXG
work. The student will not be qualified to undertake it until
he has mastered perfect jusnticati(Mi in some of its simpler forms.
He should, however, read ihe cliapter on '"Difficult Composi-
tion," in I)e\'innc's "Modern liook Com])osition,"' pages 171
to 230, and tzel an in.-ighl into the subject.
OUKSTIOXS OX CHAPTER IX
1. \Vhat is the 'r_\-[H)t;il)ul;ir S\-stem, and how is it rsed ?
2. E.\{)lain ho'.v a liand-set ruled blank should be cast oil.
3. Wdiat are Multio-Hexsel 'Quadrats, and how are lhe\" used ?
4. \\'hat is a -ivax-entrrax inc. and lio'.v is it made •'
5. Explain the .Mnn()t_\"pe s\'stem of settinir rule work.
6. How should a stick be made uj) when setlinj,' t\"pe in narrow
measures?
7. Will the fact that t\'pe is new or old make any difference in the
castin<:-<jlf of a table 'f If so, ex{)lain why.
■S. X'ame the ad\"anta,Lres deri\X'd b\- the use of three-{)oint spaces of
eight-point.
Q. \\ hat do you understand b_\' j)oint-thick s{\aces ?
10. Tell what spaces or (juads ma\' be used as tjuads or spaces of another
size,
11. Wdiat (Id you understand b\- a line-up of figures or type ?
12. Explain '.'.hat meilKKJ \-i'U \\"ould [)ursue in setting more than one
column in a siiv_de measure.
13. Ho'.v should blank-biink headini:5 be set ?
14. ['kKplain ho-.v \-ou would jiroceed to make a column of t\-{)e matter
register 'Aath the fiMri/ontal lines on a ruled sheet.
15. Is there an_\- ad\aniage in setting t\[)e to a narrow measure if it i=
possible to set it wider ?
if). Secure a pic^e of printed matter t'ontaining t\'{ie run around a cut,
and describe in full just how \ou '.'.■ould set the job
17. l^esi'rihe a method of running t_\"pe around a cut that is irregular in
outline.
iS. Describe how you wf)uld Set a ruund label ccjntaining circular and
horizontal type lines.
10. ibi'.v '.'."uuld ynu bend lead> and -Iul's into circular form if a bending-
machine was ii^t a>"ailat)!e f
JG. \\d!>' i~ it r.ece5^ar>- t<i place spaces between letters at the toj) of
some cur-.ed lines '•'
CHAPTER X
LOCKING UP FORMS
141. General Principles. — Many old-time printers, evi-
dendy under the impression tliat any old thing is good enough,
are in the habit of building up their forms as shown in Fig. 93.
This pyramid st}-le of placing furniture is wrong. Contrast
Fig. 93 with Fig. 94. Notice that the only bearing the furniture
Fig. 93. — Improper Way Lo Lock up a Form.
in Fig. 93 has is alongside of the short end of the job. A form
put together in this manner is \-ery apt to work loose and pull
out on press. When locked up in the proper way, as shown in
Fig. 94, both job and furniture are being locked up at the same
time and there is no likelihood whate\-er of the job working
loose or pulling out.
16.S
104
PKIXTIXG
Fig. 96 shows another form properly locked up. The job, as
ori,ij;iiially set, was not the same len,u;th as the wooden furniture
used in locking it up. It took hut a few moments to add enough
niateriid to make it full K-nuth.
I'k;. 04.- PropiT Way to Lork up a Porni.
142. Quoins. — Wedge-shaped dexices, known as quoins,
ire used for locking up forms. For many years wooden quoins
-^"P^
w^mssm^
wiTc the Oil 1\' !;iiid- in ii-c. bring (lri\r 11 togulher with a shooting-
stick. Then came iron (|uoin-,, kicked with a ke>'. Today
LOCKIXG UP I'ORMS 165
there are quoins for every ima,i^inal)lc ])urpose. Fii^. q5 illus-
trates a few.
143. Locking up a Form. — In general, jobs are locked up in
certain ways for convenience in handling the sheet or to secure
better rolling of the form. Jobs containing rules are usually
placed in the chase in such a way that the rollers do not strike
the ends of the rules. (See Section 216 for method of preventing
perforating-rules from cutting the rollers.) Inasmuch as it is
more convenient to ha\'e the guides on the left-hand side of the
tymi)an, jobs are usually locked up head to the left. There are
sj)ecial cases, however, when this is not done. Letterheads
that contain but few lines are usually locked up head down.
Envelope corners may be either head or foot down if the enve-
lopes are not opened {i.e., the flap turned upj, always foot down
if the enveloi)e is opened.
It is always advisable to lock up a form so that the press-
man can read the printed matter on the draw-sheet while run-
nmg the press, for by so doing errors are frer|uentl\- detected.
Fig. 96 shows how a letterhead should be locked up. It has
been ])laced head down in order to get a better roll. l"he job
has been set forty-live ])icas wide, and it is nine ems deep. Put
fifty-em furniture abo\'e and below, as shown. Add a ])iece of
metal furniture 5X10 to build job out to hfty ems. Place
enough material at the bottom of the job ('one [)ica in this case)
to build the job out to ten ems. Use nothing but hft\'-em fur-
niture, arranging the same in a neat manner. Do not have the
furniture all zigzag; a good com])ositor is neat in everything
that he does.
After the furniture is in place, })ut in tlie (|Uoins. Thev
should be arranged as shown in the figure. Note that the jjoints
of the fjuoins alongside of the form are pointing toward the lower
left-hand corner. This is the point toward which \'ou wish to
drive the form. If the ciuoins are ])laced in the re\ erse position,
they will be driving against the f|Uoins on the other side.
Having placed the Cjuoins in ])ro]K'r [josition. lock up tlie
form ti^ht enough to lift. Stand it on ed.Lre, and reni()\-f> all
i66
I'RIX'JIXG
dirt and grit from the bottom, using either the hand or a brush.
Also l)rush the stone, if it seems dirt}-. Rephiee the form on the
stone, loosen the (juoins, arrange the furniture neatly, and ])ush
the quoins together as tiglitly as possible with the fingers.
Then plane the form with a planer and mallet; lirst rubbing your
hand across the face of the i)laner to remo\e anything that may
have adhered to it, and which would very likely batter the
type.
The word phuic means to make level. That is why the form
is planed — to make it le\-el. To see some men planing a form
I'ica slug 'Job ilftiil iuiiiiuuc, 0 x lU i.ii-.as
I''i<'.. 9(1. — rr()])cr A\'a}' lo Luck up a kcUcrlicacL
you might think tliat ])!aning meant to drive the form intc
the stone. It recjuires but a very light ta]) of the mallet on
the i)laner to drix'e down an_\' letters that may be ])rojecting.
1)0 not drag or slide the ])laner o\it the form, but lift it when
moxing it from ])oint 10 jjoint owr the form. If you slide it,
an\' t\-pe thai mav be sticking up is a])t to be l)roken off.
When. \'ou ri'place the planer on the stone (or, better, a shelf
proxided for it) do not lay it on its face, as it is a])t to ])ick u])
urit .
J.OCKIXG UP FORMS 167
Every form possesses two dimensions — length and width.
Every form also possesses a certain amount of "give" or
"springiness." The way in which it has the greatest amount of
give is the side that sliould be tightened first. In the letterhead
in Fig. 96 we should start at the top and tighten the quoins a
little with the key. This will remox'e the greater part of the
spring. Then tighten the cjuoins on the side a little; then the
top; then the side. In this way go over the quoins until the
form is "tight enough." This can only be learned by experi-
ence. When the form is so tight that the letters cannot be
pushed out by a fairly good pressure of the lingers, it is tight
enough. Do not exert extreme pressure in locking up, for it is
comparatively easy to break a cast-iron chase.
After the form is locked up, raise it above the stone by
placing something under one edge, and try to push down the
letters. After the whole form has been gone over in this man-
ner, stand it up on one edge and rub the hand across the bottom
of the form. If any letters are loose and have been pushed
down, they will be detected. Do not drop the form flat on the
stone after trying it for loose letters and before rubbing the hand
across the bottom, as this would push the letters back in place.
See that everything is tight before sending a form to press.
144. Bearers. — In many offices it is customary to use
bearers in job-press forms, the popular belief being that they
prevent the rollers from bearing too hard on the form. A
brief inspection of rollers that have been run on bearers will
prove that the bearers do not bear off the rollers, but that they
actually sink into them. Bearers are useful only under cer-
tain conditions.
145. Gudgeons. — In all types of job printing-presses the
rollers are moved up and down across the face of the type. On
each end of the roller-stock is a wheel, known as a gudgeon, that
rolls on a track at the side of the press. This track should
project o.giS inch (type-high) from the bed of the press. The
gudgeon should be exactly of the same diiimeter as the roller.
The roller-stock should be keved to the gudgeon.
x68 I'KIMINC.
When these ];erfect conditions ])re\-ail. if the rollers are not
bearing lirnily enouL^i on the form, all that is necessary is to put
a few sheets of paper back of the form; if the rollers are bearing
too llrnaly on the form, glue a strij) of cardboard on the track.
In the Victoria Press the rollers are raised or lowered by mo\ing
the whole track with an adjusting-screw.
If the rollers and gudgeons are not exactly of the same diam-
eter, the one of greater diameter will roll farther than the other.
For exami)le, su])pose that the circumference of the roller is six
inches and that of the gudgeon-^ only l"i\e and one-half iriches,
what becomes of the other half inch? The gudgeons in rolling
are rotating the rollers, both makmg one re\-olution in the same
]~)eriod of time; the circumference of the roller, howe\-er, moving'
six inches while the gudgeons onl\- mo\e liN'e and one-half
inches. That half inch is gained in the ib.e and one-half inche<,
the roller sliding o\-er the form instead of rolling. The same
thing will hap])en if the roller^ are smaller than the gudgeon-.
In thi^ e\-ent, it ^^■ill sli]) in the ()j)po,-ite direction. The roiitart of
the roller on the form should be a rollin'^ eojilaet. not ,i slidiir:;^ one.
If the roller is sliding instead of rolling, it will fill u]) the t\])e.
and produce smeary ])rints. It will abo wear out the roller-i>ins,
which finally break, lea\'ing the roller free to re\-olve in the
gudgeons.
It is only when rollers are loose in the gudgeons that it is
advisable to use roller-bearers, as the\' will cause the rollers to
roll over the forni and not drag; but they leill not bear o^> the
rollers from tJie form.
There are adaptable an<l a.djustable gudgeons on the market,
?o devised that the ])res^man ma\- alwa}s ha\e tliem of proper
diameter for his rollers.
146. Locking Up Register Jobs. — "While tliere are de\ ice-
made e>[)ericdl\- for rcLi'i-tcring jolis A'.illiout unlocking the forms,
e\"ery ot'fice is not equip] )e(l wilh .-uch ('c\'icc-. When in:])osing
a form that ma\- ha\T to be mo\-cd to gri it in.to re'd-ler, alwa\'S
place about .-ix two-poiiu leads at the >ide awa\- from tb.e ([Uoin~.
Tlien. if it i> ncct>.-ar\- to Piiow the io!i. it can In- done withoMt
]X)CKIN(i UP lOR.MS
l6o
disturbing the furniture. If the form be uiade up of plates,
use leads or furniture at cacli of tlie four corners, as shown
in Fig. 97. This will permit of twisting the plates if neces-
sary.
When a register job is tirst locked up I'or i)ress, a chalk-mark
should be made across each quoin in such a way that it marks the
(|Uoin and the furiuture that it abuts. E\-er\- time the form is
unlocked and a change made, exactly the same amount of
material should be put back into the form, and the ([uoins and
furniture })ut into their original i)ositi()ns. When the quoins
Fic. (j;. — -Mtlliod of I.ockini: up a Porni so thai it, .May he I]a^i!^■ Moved.
are tiglitened, the ciialk-marks will all come into perfect align-
ment. When this occurs the form is locked up exactly as it
was in the lirst instance. In no other \\a\" can you be assured
th.;it sucli is tiie case. It is a \x'ry easy matter to exert more
force at one time than at another.
147. Locking-quoins. — There are se\-eral lockiii'^-quoi)is on
tlie ma.rket, o[)erated with a s]>ring-act uated catch that engages
in a r;ick on tlie fjuoin. After the (|Uoin is tightened the catch
is released, when it engages in the rack, and the cjuoin is locked.
It is nu[)os>ibie for the rjuoin to shi).
I70 pRixrixc;
When runnin,!,^ register jobs, ])rcs?men frequently resort to
the expedient of ])lucL(in^ the quoins with a wad of moistened
l)aj)er, which, wlien (h"_\". liolds them lirmly in ])lace.
148. Jobs with Rules.- -Jobs containing rules should, if
possible, be locked uj) in such a way that the rollers will not
strike a,L^ainst the ends of >harp rules, for they may cut the
rollers. Forms are fre(|uentl\- locked up at an angle, usino;
wed.ge-shaped furniture, to prex'ent any cuttin,^ of the rollers.
Perforat inL;;-ruk' that is lockecl u]) with a job and im])osed so
that it is \-ertical in the cha>e. should run olY the sheet, and
should ha\-e a two-point or three-])oint face-rule at the to]) and
bottom, d'his will prexent the rule fron: cutting the rollers.
The marking of the tym])an may be pre\'ented by the use of
a frisket. (See Section 212.)
Fig. q8 shows the ])roper metht)d of locking up the two sec-
tions of the rule job shown in Fig. 51 on ])age loq. The guide-
edge is marked. Ob>er\-e that the top and bottom horizontal
rules are printed in the form with the \-ertical rules. This
should alwa}'s l)e done. It ])re\-ents the rollers from striking
the sharp ends, and al<o guarantees a ])erfect joint. If the
sheet does \'ary a little it will not show a gap between the ver-
tical and horizontal rules, as it undoubtedlv would do if all the
\-ertical rules were in one srction and all the horizontal ones
were in the other.
149. Allowance for Squeeze. — Tt is almost imi)ossil)le for a
com])<;sitor to set a job in.-idc of a b'jrder and squeeze it together
so tightly that it Avill look all right on the galle}- and still make a
])erfect joint when locked u]). Some allowance must be made
for s(jueeze. \i the job contains man\' lines of t\"pe and much
spacing material, it will lia\e more springiness tlian if ]>ut to-
gether with coiL-iderable >olid furniture. Tlie jolj sh(Hild be
Sfjueezed together as tightly a< po>>ible and then about two
])oints more ])Ut in to allow for >queeze. If \-ery spring}-, allow
four ])oint -.
150. Troublesome Corners. - \\ lien locking up a joii with a
ride liorder. make a ])erieet lil of tlu- corner awax" from the
LOCKING UP FORMS
171
Job i< fell to this f.;ui(le first, then turned end I'or end.
^ After tlie tirst iin]iressioii tliis tdge is fed to the guide
FiG. qS. — Showing: Lock-up of a Rule I-'orm in Two Section-, to hv I'rinted
at One Time. When the slieet is turned end for end tlie two sections
will overlap, thus producing two copies.
172 I'klXTJXO
r]U(iins l)y ])u>hinrr the rules together with a piece of wooden
furniture. Xe\er u>e a hodkin for thi^ purpose, as it mav hatter
the end of tlie rule and prex'ent a jierfect joint. Now lock u])
the form carefull\- until all the corners come together perfectl}-.
Use a try-.--f|uare to see if the end- and sides are at ritiht
an,Ldes.
If a corner should pro\-e a little refractory and per.-ist in
pa])in^^ open, a little l)ee>wa.\ melted into the joint 1)\- the heat of
a lighted niatch niay o\-ercome th.e diihcult}'. After the wax
hardens, trim (.){( the >ur])lus. d'imoil placed in the open joint,
and the surplu- trimmed'off, ha> al-o pro\-ed etTecti\-e.
151. Squaring the Form. — I!\-er_\- form with a border, or
which ha> rules, either horizontal or \ertical, or an\- element
whate\-er that \\'ould mar the appearance of the work if it was
not at ri,i:ht an.irles with the -ides of tlie ])aper. should be te>ted
with a tr\'-srjuare before sendini:; the form to j)ress. This will
fref|uentl\' .-aN'e a nseles- wa-te of time in the ])ressroom. for. if
the job is not scjuare. it A\ill be returned to th.e com|)osin,f;-room
for correction. Learn to do tinners correctl}-. Tt is the doing
of the little things correctl}' that con-tilute.- perfection.
152. Wooden Furniture.-- Xo matter how carefuil_\- woorlen
fi.n-niture i> kept, it will -h.rink, and some of it w ill w^.rj). Warped
furniture is fit only for kindlin,LJ:-^^'o(Kl. Throw it awax': it
inx'ites trouble, and wa>tes time.
When u-in.Lj wooden furniture to make u]) forms for cxiiniici
prer->e> be .-ure that th.e pii-ce- are all of the >ame A\adth. Some
pieces shrink >n badh' as to be unlit for thi- purpo>e. The}'
are all ri.u'ht for job form>, but are not to be relied on for mak-
ini: uf) mar,Lrins.
]-'<)ur-em woodc-n furniture lia- a irrooxe runnim: the length
of one >ide: this i.- the top. u-e it t!]i> -ide uji. It is almo-t.
/ lil Kdt (juitr. -f|uare. Therefore if turned (jn its side it does
r;ot mea-ure four pica-.
Xfvcr u-e w.iter on x'.'ooden furniture.
153. Riding of Forms. Wlun lockincr u]> a small form, it
will -onietime- be noiireil that it ha,-, a lendenc\- to "ride"—
LOCKIXG UP FORMS
173
tliat is, the pressure causes the matter to l)ul,c;e up in the center.
Unlock the form and see if anythin,;]; has dropped down between
the t_\-pe and tlie furniture. If the cause is not disco\-ered in
tliis way, take out a few of the ])ieces of furniture and ])kice
them side b}' side on the stone and see if a fjjap is \isible l;etween
them (// the holtom. See Fig. 99. Sometimes the furniture is
sliii;htly wider at t)ne point than at another. If this ]>ro\'es to
be the case, eitlier insert other furniture, or turn one or two of
the shaping pieces iipside down, when they wiU counteract the
sloi)e of the others, and the form will lock up without riding.
The riding of forms on cylinder presses is also a frequent
cause of trouble. This is usually due to the fact that the
Fig. 9(). — ShowiiiL; Two Pieces of W'lirped Wooden Furniture. \\'hen
pressure is applied by the ciuoins the furniture will ride.
material is wider at the to|) than at the bottom. In locking up,
the forni i> slightly raised. As the c\'linder goes o\-er the form,
the t}-pe is i)ushed down, but not the furniture. After the
cylinder has ])assed, the type comes U]) again, and brings the
furniture with it. This continues until the furniture is high
enough to be inked ])y the rollers and lea\-e an impression on the
sheet, thus s])oiling the sheet.
To overcome *his trouble, unlock the form and see if any-
thing is Ijinding. If not, then examine tb.e ftirniture, and
reverse a few ])ieces as directed abo\e. If this does not correct
the trouble, cut long strips of thin cardboard about one ])ica
wide and drop them down alongside of the material that is
riding. This will usually rectify the trouble. As a last resort,
174 PRINTING
pressmen are sometimes comjjelled to drive small nails into the
furniture to keep other material from riding.
QrF.srioxs ox ciiaptkr x
1. Describe the f)roper way to lock up a form.
2. W'liy is tlie p} raniid >t_\le an improper \va_\- of locking up a form ?
3. \\'hat is the meanirLC of the word " (Juoin " i
4. Name t!ie dilTeri-nl (juoiiis with which _\'ou are familiar.
5. I'xplain the at'tioii of a (|uoin.
6. W)\\ should ([uoins be placed in a \wm ?
7. \\ hen lockin;,^ up a j(jb tontaininj,' rules, how should the job bi.
placed in the form ?
S. \\ hy should a job be so placed in a chase that the pressman can
read the })rinted matter on the tymj)an ?
9. Why should a jjlaner ne\er be draj^'ged o\'er the face of a form ?
10. A\'hy should a planer ne\ er be laid on its face ?
11. \\ liy is it important to be<_'in to lighten the cjuoins in a form at stjme
spcciiled place ?
12. What will happen if the ti,i,ditening of c^uoins is not be<,'un at the
riirht j)lace ?
13. How would you te^t a form to make sure that it is tight ?
14. What is a roller-bearer ? Of what use is it ?
15. What is a gudgeon ?
i(). Mxplain full\' wh_\' it is so important to ha\e rollers and gudgeons
of (Xdclly the same diameter.
I". If the rollers were pressing loo hea\il_\' on the form, liow \\"0uld }'0U
o\ercome the <lii'iiculty ?
iS. If the rollers and form were not in contact, liow would >ou bring
them together ?
ig. How should register jobs be locked up?
;o. If the corners of a rule job did not come together, how would \'0U
rectify the matter ?
2[. What expedient do pressmen sometimes resort to to pre\ ent (juoins
from slipping ?
jj. \\ h_\- is it important to make a chalk-mark across ciui)ins ;uid fur-
niture after a regi>ter job is lockeil up fur pre-s ?
23. W hen a rule inb 1 on^i^liIlg of horizontal and \erlical rules is made up
into t-.M) forms, wh>- is it important to ha\e the top and bottom horizontal
rules placed with the vertical rules?'
24. What do _\-ou understand by " allowance for s(jueeze " .•'
LOCKING UP FORMS 1 75
25. What difficulties are likely to Ije encountered if warped wooden
furniture is used in makinf; up a form ?
26. Why is four- em wooden furniture marked with a groove along one
side ?
27. Which is better for making up margins in forms, wooden or metal
furniture ? Tell why.
28. If a form was " riding " on press, what would \ou surmise was
causing ihe trouble ?
CITAPTF.R XI
iMi'o-iriox
154. Placing Pages on the Imposing-stone. rm])o-ition is
ihc naiiic uiv^c^n to tliat branch of ])rinlin^ whirh lui- to '!o will:
the ])ro|)c'r ])lacin,ir ol ])a,L,a'S on the inii)o>in<i'->tone so that when
the ])a,i:e> Lire ])rinte(l on tlie sheet, ami tlie >heet folded, th.e
])a,<:::es of tlie hook wiU ()])en out consecuti\e'i\'. A n:on:ent'.--
thonudit will rewal the fact that the pa.Lres cannot be laid wtit on
the .-tone side l)y side in re.irular sef|i)ence and be in jroj^er
position I'or ;: folded >heet. Pa.ires that l)ack each otlu-r nu::~t be
at o])])o>ite ])arts of the form.
'J'here are two \va\'s of ^ettini: the ])ro])er ])a;.{e> to back up.
First, 1)}' ])rintinti; a form on one side of the >hieet then tiirnin,^
it CA"er and IjackinL'' it uj) with tlie sa.me form. 'I'his i> called a
'Avork-antbturn form." Tlie slieet is cut in Iialf, furnisl:inL''
two copies. Second, 1)\- ])rintinL: a certain miml;er of |<u,i:e::
on one side of the slieet then bacdxim^ it up with another form.
This is called workinLf ">heetwise," and refjiiires two forms to
produce one printed >heet.
If a >heet of ])aper b-av oXt2 inche>^ i- folded once ^to
6yr) inche.-' it will make two Iea\-es, or four pa'_a--. 11 it i>
dr-ir(,-d to bind up a mmiber of ])a'_:('s into a book, eithei' b\'
.'^i-u in.L,^ or b\- -litchine ihrouLdi the back (-addle- -i itched', the
number of pat,^e< in a form mu-t be in multiple- of four, 'i'hat
is to -a\', the form mu-t consi-t of four. eiLrht. t\\el\e. -ixteen,
'wentw t w ent v-four, thirt\--two. -i\l\--four. or more pa^t,'.-.
If the iob i< to be wired tliroULdi the >ide other combina-
tion- of jiau'e- ma\" be made up. but such combination- are so
imu>ual that a description Wduld ti'ud to confu>e rather than
ai'' the be.t^inrier.
1-6
IMPOSITION 177
Inserts consisting of single lea\es are glued into sewed books,
but they may be wired into hooks that are stitched on the side.
155. Hand- and Machine-folding. — The hrst question
asked by the compositor wlien he is given a form to impose
should be whether tlic sheet is to be hand-folded or machine-
folded, l)ecause the lay of form for hand-folding is not the same
as for machine-folding, nor is the lay for machine-folding the
same for all machines. If but a few hundred copies are to be
furnished, it is a foregone conclusion that the job is to be folded
by hand; if a great number of copies are required, it is equally
certain that the jo!) will l)e folded on a machine. If there is a
([ueslion as to what m;i chine is to be used, the compositor should
consult the ])ook])inder.
156. Margins. — Whenever two or more pages are printed
together, the (|uestion of margins must be taken into consider-
ation. If the job to ])e imjiosed is a circular, and the sheet is
simpl}' to be cut ai)art, and not to be bound and trimmed, the
margins will l)e made up to the fmished size. If the sheets are
to be trimmed idler ])rinting, allowance must be made for trim-
niing. 'I'he majorit}' of books are trimmed around three sides — -
lop, front, and bottom. One-quarter inch is a fair allowance for
trim, l)ul this is nol always ]X)ssible. It is frequently necessary
to do with less in order to get a jol) out of a sheet of paper of
stock size.
157. Determining Margins. — Fig. 100 shows the i)ropcr
inelliod C/f delermining niargins. Assuming that two pages are
to be printed, lliat the linished size is to be six inches, and that
the i)ages are of the same size, the distance from the edge of one
p:ig-e to lire edge of tlic other ]>age should be made just six inches.
1 1" llic jol) is a circuh'.r, fold a sheet of the stock in half, and make
the distance l:etween llie edges the same as the folded sheet.
(Fig. loi.) 'When the guides arc pro]):_rly set, each page will
be ill the center.
If the pages are of uncf|ual size, mark olT Ihe center of each
[)age. and make all necessary measurements from the centers
inste;u! of from edire to cdire. (V\<z. 102.)
178
PRIXTIXG
158. Determining the Lay of a Form. — While diagrams
are usualK' ;i\-;iii,il)l'j for refcTeiicc, so th:il the ompositor may
I
Fic;. loo.- -Makiii'-.' up .Margin-, tn (ii\cn I );:iK:i>i()iiS,
Sl.r. t tol,lr,l i„ l.alf
L
Fu;. loi.- MakiiiL' up Mar^Mus to Half of Slicet
I -1
Vh; io:.-- I)i-i(
Man
. I'r o ■ nfjual size.
verih- hi- work, it i> udx'i-alik' t h:it hr should kni w how 1 o marl-'
a (hminu' form and dclLnniiie the ka- of llie pa;..t's. Inasmuch
IMPOSI'I'lOX
179
as the type is in reverse of the printed sheet, it follows that
pages printed to the right of the sheet must be imposed to the
left of the form. To determine the lay of a sixteen-page form,
fold a sheet of paper, say 8X12 inches, over and over as shown
Third folJ here
Second told liero
First f..Id l.rre
Vie. 10,^. — Showin^,^ Suiccssi\e t'oldin^'s to J'nxlufc a Dummy.
in Fig. 103 until finally the size 2X3 inches is obtained. This
will produce a dummy form.
As the form is to be worked and turned, folios are to be
marked on oiilv one side of the sheet. To get the folios on the
Slit fihccts luTi', so thr.t
f„li,)-,inav 1h- marked
I'u;. 104.- Show ill",' a I'ohkd l)ummy willi I'roi)cr IMaccs to Alark I'tjlios.
dunmiy so as to sltow the })roper position on the stone, mark
page I on the inside of the tirst leaf — in reality, what would l)e
page 2 of ;i ])rinted sheet. See Fig. 104. On what would be
]_)age 3 mark folio 2. Now skip the next two pages, for they
will be on the other side of the sheet when it is opened out Now
I So
I'Rixrixc;
mark paf^^es 3 and 4; then skij) two pai^es and mark the next two.
In this way ,i:<) throu.Lrli the dummy, kippin;.^ two paa;es, mark-
ing liif next two. At'UT the fir.-t eii^ht ]vi\v keen marked, ii
will he 1 und that tlie folded lea\'es will ha\-e to he slit at the
lower eorners :o that the folios ma\' he marked in pr()})er posi-
tions. Ma.rk tliem.
Xow open oin the sheet. If the markin.c; has been properly
done, the folio- will all he on one >ide of the sheet, and in the
p(;>itions in ^\•h.ich the ipa^L'^es slioiild be ])laced on the stone.
Compare witli the la\- of tlie form shown in Fi^Li;. 105. The lay
(jf aiu" form ira.\- he (h-ti-rndiK'(l in this way.
Some comi)o-itor> fold the .-h.eet as de-erihied. and instead of
ir.arki'i'j; tlie p::L'>-> h\' 1 -rLrir^nii's.L: on the lirst in.-ide j»a.^c (]yd'j.L- 2 ',
tliL-\' heu'in on tlie ont-ide on pa^re i, an<l, markin^'j; two and
>ki;';)ip.Lr t'>vo, L^o ihrou,L,di the dumm\'. 'I'hi- ]>lafc- tlie ])a,<:es
a- tliey \'dll lie ])rinted on tlie .-heet. noi a- the\- sliould he on the
stone. The Iir.-l ir.ethod i,- lo he jjreferrL-d, a~ it is sometimes
]>U/:/lin,L; to re\-er<e the pa,Lre- from the print^'^d ■-heet-.
IMI'USITJON l8l
If the job is to be folded on a machine, it is better to obtain
a dummy from the l)inder, for some of the forms have to be laid
inside out.
159. Various Parts of a Form. — In order that the terms
used in imposition may be fully comprehended, Fig. 105
and the accompanying explanation arc here given. The form
shown is a regular sixteen, and is to be folded by liand.
The point marked cut is where the sheet will be cut apart,
thus making two copies.
The i)oint marked _/W(/ is where the first fold will ])e made.
Trim is to be allowed in every place but the back, which is to
be made up to the trimmed size.
It will be observed that the pages are all imposed Iiead to head
and foot to foot. This is imperative ; they will not fold pronerly
if ])laced in any other way.
The grippcr-cdge is the edge fed to the guides. As the sheet
will be turned right and left on the press, the same edge always
comes to the grippers, which are the lingers that hold the sheet
to the cylinder.
The page numl)crs are called folios.
Notice that pages i and 16, 2 and 15, 3 and 14, 4 and 13, etc.,
come back to back. Notice, also, that the sum of the folios of
each of these pairs totals 17, which is one more than the total
number of pages. This })re\'ails for every kind of form where
the pages are bound into a book. If it were a 32-page form, and
the folios ran from i to 32, each pair of pages would total t^t,.
The form shown is a n'ork-aiul-tuni form. If these same pages
were to l)e worked in two forms (shceticisc), the pages would be
im])osed exactly as shown, but the right half would constitute
one form and the left half the other. If worked shcctwise ti:e
right-hand edge beconies the gripper-edge for the right half of
the form, and the left-hand edge becomes the grii)per-edge for
the left half of the form. This seems almost o!)\-i()us. for ])age 2
musl l\u'k up ])ag{" i, consc((uently the edges named must be
run to the guides. The lowest folio in an}' form should be run
toward the grippers.
i8-
PRIXTING
Tf a slicetwise form is l)ein^ imposed, the pafjjes which p^o in
each half of the form may he determined by i)]acing the entire
number in a row and cancelHn^ each alternate two, l)e<:^innin<^
with page 2: thus
1^^45^; 89 K) ]/l 12 13 H ^S 16
From this we determine that ])a<j;es i, 4, 5, 8, q, 12, 13, and 16
go in one forni, and ])ages ?, 3, 0, 7, 10, 11, 14, and 15 go in the
other. Compare with I'^ig. 105.
It will be noti('e(l that the two center i)ages of the form (8
and ()) come head to head with the two outside images (i and t6).
This ])re\-ails in all forms, regardless of the number of pages.
(See Fig. 106.)
—
—
1
.s
s
n
1
It;
n
L
fr.
QZ
1
48
Vie. 106. — Showing How \hv Inside and Outside I'a^es of \'ariouH forms
Come 'I'o<'ctlKr.
In c\-erv ])air of pages, if the foot of ea:h i)age is toward you,
tlu' uneven folio is alwax's to t he left ; if t he heads are toward you,
the uiie\'en folio i^ on the right. (See I'ig. io().)
160. Imposing the Form. —The si\teen-])age form is a
(onxeuienl one to use as an illustration of the proper method of
imposing forms, and the stalenients which follow a])pl\' to such
a form.
l^efore ])Iacing the i)agi's on the stone, see that it is per-
fectly clean. Arrange the pages as shown in Idg. 107. Obtain
u c/iust L-^ee Section 172; large enough to enclose the form and
IMPOSITION
183
still allow room for the quoins. If the chase is one that just
fits the heel of the press, make certain that the tyi)e does not
come outside of the dead-line on the press. There is a line
marked on the l)ed of e\ery cylinder ])ress, known as the dead-
line or gri})pcr line. If the form is placed too close to the edge
of the chase and comes beyond the dead-line, the grippers will
strike the type and batter it, and perhaps mash the grippers.
E\'ery pressman has (or should ha\e) a gripper-gauge. The
6-eni bir,
or 1"
th
^r'".-
>iin
■as
s
= 1
P-
zt
-
X
^"
'2
a'or 12 picafc
.
-'^t
cc^ ^'
^
-
r=-
r~-
-^
r'iG. 107. — Diagram Showing Aluke-up of a Form.
type must be placed far enough from the edge of the chase to
avoid hitting the grippers. To accomplish this it is sometimes
necessary to place the type nearer to the long bar on one side
than on the other. Determine the proper distance with the
gripper-gauge.
The top of every cylinder chase is marked in some way to
distinguish it. If the chase has shifting bars, it is important
to know the top, because the bars are always put in from the top.
They slide into dovetail mortices, and taper from top to bottom.
1 84 ]'Ri.\-]-j\(;
When rcmovin.c; a har, al\va}-s tap on it from the hottom. 'I"o
strike it on the top \\\nil(l wedLre it more t'lrmlx- into tlie mortice.
When chrise-hars Ijecome loo<e I'rom con.-tant shiftini:, it is
sometimes necessar\' to turn tlie cliase upside down to ])revent
the ])ars from '"ri(Hni:,"" or workini,^ uj).
Where mucli locking u]) of c\'Hnder forms is clone, the office is
equipped witli an abundance of furniture of \-arious widths and
lengths, so that combinations of any size ma\' rea(hl\- be made.
If the office is not so efiui])i)ed, tlie con:positor i- com])clled to
use whate\-er kdjor-sa\'ina: materiid may be at lianrh or eL<e cut
material to ht. Ikich form ma}', therefore, Ijccome a.n in.(li\-idual
problem.
Either metal or wooden furniture may lie used. .Metal is
accurate, but heavy; wood is Ii,ifht in \\ei,Ldit, l)ut unreliable
for width, as it is liable to shrink. ]f wood is used, each com-
bination should be tested Ijefore l)einii; pk.ced in ])osit!on.
Wooden furniture has less tendenc}" to '"rifk'" than metal.
If wooden furniture is used, care shor.ld l)e exercised adiout the
four-em pieces. The groo\e is on the to]) of the furniture. It
will not measure four ems if turned on its sirle.
After the [Yd'^i^e?, are proper!}- laid, and the cliase pkiced
around them, the amount of space necessar}- in the back should
be determined.
Assume for the sake of illustration tli;!t tliis jol) of sixteen
pages is to be j^rinted on a slieet 25X;v'^ inclies, tliat it will be
trimmed to 6Xq inclies, and thaa the pages of l}'j)e measure
4X7 inches. The sheet after ])rinting and fokling, and before
trimming, will measure ()\Xo'', inclies. This will allow one-
quarter of an inch trim on the toj), front, ;ir,d liottoni.
Begin at ])age t and me;i-ure from the k'ftdiand c'\;j:e of
page I to the left-hanrl v(\'j:l- ('f ])age I's. Make the distance
six inches. The 1\'])e is four inche- wide, -o a coirfl'inat ion of
material will be ncc'kd to ma.ke un to t v.-o inche-. or twel\-e
])icas. Th.e ])aec is sex'en inche- long, therefore, the; material
to 1)C used in the backs must not be le.-;- than fort}--1wo picas
lorn:. It should be Ionizer. If ffiv-em ])ieces are the nearest
IMPOSITION 185
you have, use them. Make up eight sets of the combinations
twelve picas wide, and place one set in each back throughout
the form.
Next, make the distance from the foot of ])agc i to the head
of page 8 ex;;ctly nine and one-half inches. This will leave two
and one-half inches, or fifteen ])icas, as the distance between
lieads. The width of the page is four inches, or twenty-four
I'jicas. ]Make uj) eight combinations of metal furniture 23X15
picas. Furniture twenty-three picas wide is used so that the
pages will not l)ind. Place tlie material in the eight heads
througliout the form.
Now measure from the left-hand side of ])age i to the left-
hand side of page 13. This shou'd be twelve and one-half inches,
or just half the sheet. This will leave two and one-half inches,
or hftecn picas, between ])ages 16 and 13. Deduct the width of
the bar (let us assume that it is one inch, or six picas), and ])lace
one-ludf of the renuuning amount on each side of the bar.
This will be three-quarters of an inch, or four and one-half picas.
Do not place metal furniture alongsble of the bar; use a six-
point reglet along with the four-em furniture.
Next measure from the foot of page i to tlie foot of i)age 7.
This should measure nineteen inches, just one-half of the sheet.
The same amount of material will be needed here as alongside
of tlic other bar — four and one-half ])icas. Put a 4X23-em
piece at the foot of each ])age and a six-jioint reglet on each side
of the bar. If there should be folios at the bottom of the pages
near the sliort bar, do not measure to the folio, but to the last
line of the i>agc. Let the folios go into the margin.
All the m;!terial has now been placed inside the form. Place
wooden furniture ;i!ong the outer sides of the })agcs and wooden
furniture at tlie foot of each outside i');ige. Place one ])air of
quoins at the foot of each ])age, and two pairs on the side of
each page. Remo\-e tlie strings from tlie four jxiges in one
((uarter-scction of the chase, 'oeginning ni the page nearest, the
center. Finish one quarter-section before ]:)roceeding to the
next. As tlie string is removed from each page, close the furni-
i86 rKL\TiX(;
lure around it and push it toward the center of the chase.
Wind the strin.L,' carefully, as descriijed in Section 37, unless the
strin.LTS are to be retv.rned to the maker-up for immediate use.*
After all the st -in:.'? ha\-e been remo\'ed, and the pa.ces
pushed toward the center, ])lace enough \vooden furniture
l)et\veen tlie fjuoins ind the chase to just fdl the space. Look
across the heads of die pa.L'cs and see if they line up. If not,
put in enough mateiial to make them do so. A lon,^ straight-
edge is an excellent hing for this ])urpose, but be sure that the
two end ])ages are be th of the proj)er length before testing.
Idle raioins shoul .1 be placerl so as to drive toward the bars.
(See Figs. 94. (lO. and 97. j Force the C|Uoins together as tightly
as i)0s>ible with the fmgers, plane the form, and tighten the
c|uoins with a key. Do not tighten each quoin to the full limit
at once, howe\"er, but go o\-er the whcde form, beginning at the
bottoms of the ])ages, tigditening each one a little at a time, until
the whole form is tightly locked up. d"o lock a cjuoin to full
limit at once would lia\"e a strong tendency to ''spring'' the bar.
Do not plane the form ajtir it i> loektd up. The lock-uj) may be
tested by ])ropping up one side of the form and trying to push
the letters down with the lingers.
If a proof of the form is refuiired, lock the form just tightly
enough to ])re\'ent the letters from ])ulling out, and then pro-
ceed to beat oiT the j "(x. f as ciescril)ed in Section 27. Fach pair
of pages Ixing back to back throughout the form should be
proved on a single ^heet. Then when the proofs are lifted they
may be folded together like a book.
161. Pages Out of Center. — The description just gi\en was
for t)ages centered on the sheet. Quite a number of our best
t\'pographical i")roductions are imposed out of the center. Some
t\'])OL:raphers make the head and back margins the same and
allot hfty ])er cent more margin on the outside of a ])age than in
the b'ack, and one hundred per cent more at the foot than at the
* If tit-ufi ^luL's hru'c been used, there is no need to remove the string's;
but allov-;in(e for tlie slues must be made in the amount of material used
betv. een the })ages.
IMPOSITION 187
head. This means that if the margin of the page is four picas
at back and head, it will be six picas on the outside and eight
picas at the bottom. As each back margin is four picas the dis-
tance between backs will be eight picas. If one-quarter inch is
allowed for trim, then the distance between heads must be
eleven picas — eight picas for the two margins and three picas
(one-half inch) for trim. After the head and back margins are
in place, make the distance from page i to page 7 equal to one-
half the sheet, then make the distance from page i to page 13
one-half the sheet, as described in the next section. The bal-
ance of the form is made up as described in Section 160.
The relation of margins for pages out of the center is not the
same in every office, but the method described is the proper one
for imposing pages with unequal margins.
162. Making Up to the Paper. — Order-blanks sometimes
specify the trimm.ed size, and state that the form is to be made
u]) to the paper. In this event, make up the back to the trimmed
size, then fold the sheet in half, each way, and measure from
page I to page 13 for the narrow way, and from page i to page
7 for the long way. Put enough material each side of the bars
to just equal the size of the folded sheet.
163. Lay of Forms. — As has been said, forms come in mul-
tiples of four. Diagrams of the four, eight, twelve, twenty, and
twenty-four are, therefore, given in Figs. 108-114. The sixteen
has already been fully explained. See also Fig. 116. The lay
of a form containing any number of pages may be determined
as described in Section 158, or the student may consult some
more pretentious book.
Figs. 108 and 109, showing various methods of laying the four
and the eight, are so obvious as not to require any detailed
explanation. It will be observed that the long four is the same
as the square four except that pages 2 and 3 have been swung
around to come side by side instead of being head to head.
The same thing prevails in the square eight and the long eight.
The halves of the square eight are side by side instead of foot
to foot as in the long eight.
z e
□ D
PRINTING
Orliipfr-fdKe.
Orlpper-eclRp.
Square Four. I^'ir^K Four.
Fig. ioS. — Three Ways of Laying a T'our-page Form.
Loni,'l'nur lai'l iTisi''.e out.
Useful v.hen p:iKe four is
hlai;k.
I- 5
u u
!l V.
1 s
7 2
■"_ZI'
(;rlpp(.r-fdk;e. C;rli)p(T-i-d-p.
Srjuare Eij;ht. Uoni; Eii^ht.
Fig. log. — The Square lught and the Long Light.
The Twelve. — There arc sc\ oral \vry.> of im])osii\s.,' the twelve.
It ma\- be laid so as to foM without cu1tin,L^, or it mav he ])rinted
and then cut a])art hefore fohlini;;, one section insettin,^ the other.
Fi,<f. I lo shows a re,ii;ular twelve. This sheet is folded over and
()\-er. There should he fohhn.t^-niarks between ])a.!:jcs 2 and 5,
and the sheet should be folded a little bit scant of the mark to
a\'oid crimi)in,<ji; the ed,i;e of the sheet, when making the second
fold. When the lwe]^•e is imjjosed as showi^ in Fi,Lr. t i 2 it may
be cut apart and folded as a four and an ei,<i;ht,the ei,Ldit insettin.c;
the four, or it ma\' be folded without cuttin,Lr, both outside
fours Itein.i^ folded out insli'ad of in. The d is;; chant aire of this
arran'j;emen1 is tliat the sheet niusl Ijc turni'd for th.e second
foil ; it ha< the ad\'antajj;e, howe\er, of ax'oiding tlte c rim[)ing of
the r.lLre of the >heet.
IMPOSITION
189
It will be noticed that in Figs, no, in, and 112 the same
four pages always come side by side in the rows, the only dif-
9 L • a 9
^IG. no. — Regular Twelve,
Folded 0\er and Over.
9
3
11)
9
4
1
12
U
r— 1
Fig. III. — Twelve Pages
Worked as an lught and
a Four, the Eight to Inset
the Four.
Fig. 1 1 .
.V Forra of Twelve.
This may be folded '.vithout
cutting, or it may be cut apart
and folded as two forms, the
ei^ht inscttiiif; the four.
ference being in the positions of the rows. Inasmuch as the
forms work and turn {tumble, see Section 164), and are then cut
IQO
PRIXTIXG
apart, the two halves in each form could be reversed and still
back up properly. In fact, any form whatever can have its
halves reversed if they back each other.
The Twenty. — Fi<i;. 113 shows two ways of imposing the
twentv.
14 ! i:i
n
III n n 6
n'
5 n; 15 f,
20
19
Twenty-paKC Form.
To lie cut a;)art a:i'i folded
as two separate forrr.s. the
six*!-',-!! insetting the four. The
shi-i-t must h'e tumbled.
I
u
Twenly-paKe Form.
To he lut apart ami folded
separately, the twelve insetting
the eiv;ht. The sheet must be
tumbled.
Fk;. 113. — Two Wa_\-s of Imposing a TuentN'-page Form.
The Twenty-four. — There are many ways of im])osing the
twenty-four. One arran,!.,'emenl is sliown in Fi,t^. 114.
164. Folders. l''i.^. 115 shows the kiy of a six-pa,ye and a
twel\-e-pa,f^'e folder. This l\'pe of folder is sometimes calk'd a
''cat-step" or "pull-out " folder. It may consist of an\- numlier
of ])a^es — four, six, ei^ht, ten, IweKe, etc. The\' ari' all laid
IMPOSITION
IQI
in exactly the same manner. Beginning with page i in the lower
left-hand corner, make page 2 back it up head to head, then run
consecutively across the top from left to right, come into the
—
L'()
17
s
7
1^
19
fi
1
L
1
'J I
13
lli
u
14
2:3
2
Fig. 114. — A Twenty-four, Withoi.t Cutting.
bottom row at the right, and linish consccuti\"eIy from right to
left. 7'his brings the last page alongside of page i.
U
Hcail tM Head.
lU
.1(1
Ic
.1(1.
1 t; o
Grlpper-e(i«e.
Si.x-page roWif.
1 1_' 11 11) 9
Orlpixr-edtje.
Twelve-p.'ige Folder.
Fig. 115. — Showing the Lay of Cut-step Folders.
The folders cut apart between heads, the printed sheets
being folded over and o\-er. As there is no trim allowed, the
sheets must be \-ery accurateh" cut. The margins between
pages should be made u]) to the folded size.
In ])acking u|) a form of this kind the sheet is turned over
from top to lx)ttom, not from right to left. This method ol
102
PRlXTIXCi
c
SI
10
II
1 1
_
S
1
Hi
_
4
01
r
_
9
II
14
I
s
I-
1-'
Regular Sixteen.
Iir.poseii lioin Ceiiler.
1
r,
u
ir,
1
n
111
! I
1 1
s:
!»t
I
t
!:i
i 2
111
^
1 T
14
Pnr I)e\'cr S:;
M:ir);;::a! l!<",k 1-
I'm- Dev-rr I'eri. ..iic:.!
l-'ic. ii''.-I'our \\'a\'S of ^nlp(l^ill■J: ;i Si\tcH'ii-p;iL;o I'drni.
Xr.ti
-T- -fi • 1. in
iH.sr;-:; m
ni POSITION 193
turnin,c^ a sl^ect is called '''lunihlin.G;." These folders must be
tumbled. But in makin.ii; up other forms ne\-er plan for a tum-
bled sheet if it can be avoided, for any \-ariation in the size of a
-heet will ])ut the ])a'j;es out of re^i^ter.
165. Machine-fold. l'"oldin;j;-machines do not all ])erform
tlieir work in exact!}' the >ame wa\'. It i< fre(|uently necessary
t(j consult the binder and ha\-e him mark a sheet for folding.
Xearly all machine,- refjuire the forms to be kdd inside out. A
work-and-turn T()-])a,L:e form, can I)e laid in four different ways
and still fold correctly. Sec I'hj:. iiC).
166. Signatures, .\fter a book ha- been ])rir.ted the sheets
;ire folded, .uatlieri'l. and bound. hach sheet n-.akes one sec-
tion (A the hook, au'i i- calk'd a s'rj^iialityc. On the tirst page of
each >eclion th.ere i- a smah figure, aho called a signature,
placed there as a guide to the binder in colkiling the sections,
each section being mimi;crc(l con-ecuti\x'l\-. If each section in a
book contain- sixteen pages, a .-mall ligure will sometime- be
foimd on jiages 17, ;^:;, ..](), 65. etex, throughout the book.
Sometimes in colkitina' a book the bookbinder n^iy gather
two shet't s in<ti';id of on(x or m;iy mi-phice some of the signa-
ture-. To ob\i;;te thi-. mark- ai'e fre(|uentl\' printed in the
back< between the two out-ide p:ige- of ;i foi'm. '['his is done
^^■ith ;_i liea\-y rule, which is placed in a new position for each
form. W'h.en the -ign;;ture- are collated thev resemble Fig. 117.
Fig. 117. — I)i;i:,'r:im SIiowinL^ ( 'i)lI;itinLr-m:irks on Ma-, k- of SiLaKiturcs.
If a sign;iture i- mi--lng. mi-j)laced, or du])licated the error
can be ddt'cied at a glance.
167. Insetting, form- arc -ometime< im])o-ed so that
after a -licet i- ]irinlc(l ;ind (ail :q)ait one ]):n-t will in-et the
other. I'or e\a!ii])l(x ;i t wrKx'-pa'ie lorm ma\' con-ist, of an
194 l'Rl.\ri.\(,
eij^'hl-pc^Q;e form and a fi)ur-])a,iie; a twcnty-pacje form may
consi.-.t ()[ a sixteen and a four or a twcKc and an eiti;ht; a
twenty-four may consist of a sixteen and an ei,L!;lit. Whenever
forms are imiiosed in this way, arrange to ]vd\c the larger form
inset the smaHer; it is easier for the hinckT.
i68. Press-points.— On some foldin,^-macliines the sheets
are fed to points as a ,^uide for correct mar,<:;ins. When these
are rerjuired, t!ie ]>ress-p()ints are screwed into wooden furniture
in the form and arranged to make a strong mark in the head
margin. Tliey are usuall}' ])laced lifteen inches a])art — scA'en
and one-half inches each way from the center of the hrst fold,
(iet the i)roper plac'e and distance; fron; the Itindcr.
169. Other Forms, it is not to 'he understood that the
various forms gi\en in this cha])ter are the only ones capable of
being ])roi)erly folded. There are many, many (iliers. Forms
u]) to i2(S ])ages are not uncomnTon. Forms are frequently
worked iu'o-oii: that is, two sets of the san^e pag'cs are printed
in one form and so arranged that after folding and Ijinding
two complete copies are ol)taine(l, thus cutting down the cost
of binding. Manufacturers of folding-machines issue diagrams
showing the x'arious forms c;!]>able of being folded on their
machines.
170. Proper Lay of Lengthwise Forms. When t}-pe pages
or illustrations are imposed si) that they run lengthwise of the;
page of the book, the}' should read up the ]);!ge. This will place
the head of the ])rinted matter to tlie left-hand side of the page.
This follows for both righl-h.and and left-hand ]>!ges.
171. Folding Heavy Paper, If a job is be'ng ])rinted on
hea\'\' ])a])tT, it i- iindxisabie to ha\e the signatures made up of
a great number of ])ages. for hea\y ])a])er has a tendency to
crimp and break where the backs join the heaals. IJetter i)rint
the form a^ two >ignaturcs, one insetting the other.
172. Chases. Fig. i iS shows an ordinary bo()k chase and a
AIc(ircal ('(/mbinat ion ("hase. The .Mc(ireal chast' is an es])e-
cial!\- ingenious arra.ngement . As will be seeii. the chase is
made up of ra'parate barii. Tliese bars cuuic iu Icnrllis from
IM POSITION!
T95
four to sixty-two inches, all iiiterchan'^eable, so that with a few
assorted sizes a printer can make up a chase that will just fit his
r~
_
\
i
i
i
1
L
J
Vu'.. I iS.
yiH'S(>f linok Cha-
form, thereli}' obtaining a belter lock-up than would be the case
if the chase was out of all ])r(iporti()n to tlie size of the job.
or b
orKsrioxs ox chai'ti-r xi
What do \'ou u mi erst and hy " i'nposilion " ?
\\ hy arc forms usual!}- made up so as to Ije in inultij)k'S of four ?
What is a work-aud turn fnrm ?
W liat i< a sliL-ctwisc form ?
\\ liat is an insert ?
Wliat do \-()u imderstand b>- saddle^stitch.cd ?
\\'h>- is it important to l^no'.v wlieilu-r a job is to l)e folded b\- liand
maehine jjefnre tile lorni is imposed ?
W liat do _\'ou undei'stand Ir; mar^dn ?
On how mail}' sides of a pau'e of a hook is trim usua!l\- allowed ?
Why is il that a hook requii'e- trimmiiiL,' and a eircular does not ?
io() rkixnxd
11. IIf)\v wciulil you (k-terminc the hack mar,t;in l)ct\veen two pages if
they were of e(|ual >\/a- :' il n; uin(|ual ,-~i/A' .-^
12. What do ><)U undeistaiKi 1)_\- making up to the j)aper ?
iv I)rseril)e how you would determine the lay of a form b\- fokling
and marking a dummw
1 ;. Name tin- \ariiiu- p.'irts of a form.
15. ("an you ;k.in!; uf r-(in:e reason wliy tlie two mi(klie l)ages and the
two outsiik' pams of t\ir\- form always come liead to liead ?
1(1. When inipn-ini: a pair of pages with the fo(;t of each I)age toward
you. is the unc'.en folio to the k-ft or to tlic riglit ?
17. What is a diase ?
iS. How are cha.sc l)ars inserted, from the top or the l)ottom ?
iQ. liow s'iouM cha.^e-liars Ite remo'.'ed ? What will happen if the\- are
forced in liic w I'oru; dirci lion ?
20. Xame tl;e relali\X' cuh'antag^es and disacK'antages of metal and
wooden furniture.
21. Dr.aw a diagram of a i^-jiage form showing the ])ages in proper
[')o^ition for iian<l-fi-]ding. Mark all ik.e different parts of the form, and
show the (|uoins in proper position.
22. W'h}' should we l)(;gdn with tile quoins at the bottom of piages when
locking u]) a foriu :'
2^. \\h\ is it \\:-onu to plane a form after il is locked up ?
24. W'lu-ii Ijcai ing (iff a proof nf a form, w hat ad\antage Ls there in having
eai h {)air ui [Kie'is o!i a single sheet ?
?■;. Wlia.t i- a cit >lcp or |nilkout folder ? Why is it not laid the same
as other toldcrs .•'
20. W lial i- a si'/natur(.' ?
27. What expedient i- sometii.ies resorted to to insure accurac)' in
eoilal ing --ignatuie^ :'
25. W lial i,- iic-ei ting ?
20. \\ hat are press points ? Why are they used ?
30. IIiiw sliDuld leML't iu'> i>e pag^es read, up or down the page ?
,^r. What is 1 he di-ail\ anlage in iia\ ing a great number tif ])age3 printed
on a heavy sheet oi iLipei'. and folding u]i as oni' foiau ?
v'. What advan'ac'es does tlie .McCireal Combination C'hase possess
o\ er the oi-iliii.ir\" kind :'
ciiapti-:r xit
CUTTIXGTOOLS lUK I'l^IX rKRS
173. Miller Saw-Trimmer. —The great slogan ot" llie day is
"cfficienc}'," and inventors are vying with each other in e\-ery
branch of the printing Inisiness to i)r()(hice tools that will curtail
labor and increase out])ut . Wliereas, a decade ago a printer was
conipelled to send to an electr()tyi)cr for ^
the various odd jobs of sawing, cutting,
trimming, mortising, beveling, routing,
and dressing up material, nearly exery
large office now h;:s a single machine
that will do all of these things. Tlie
]\Liller Saw-Trimmer (I-'ig. 119) is a ])io-
ncer in this cl;;ss of t()t)ls.
Anv iirinter owning a machine of
the above t\'[)e is no longer imder
the necessity of cutting leads, slugs,
and rules singly on the lead- cutter.
These things may be cut in luilk, and
the\' leave the machine accurately and
])crfectly cut, and there is no necessity
for further (lres>ing up before using.
Tvpefounders cut aU their material with
metal-slitting saws.
174. The Lead-cutter, — No office is com])lete witlioiit a
lead-cutter. It is the most useful i)iece of mechanism about the
office, and at the same time the most a])used. I-'ig. 120 shows
the American Lead- and Rule-cutter. As its name implies, it is
for cutting leads and rules. Leads are cut ofi the front of tlie
machine, slugs and rules on the back. There is a limit to the
i'^iG. 1T9. — Miller
Saw-Trinimcr.
107
loS
i'Rixri\(,
aniount oi" strc-> that can I'c j)Ut on any piece of mechanism.
Thcrctofc the direction- liere L;i\-en I'or u-in,L: the lead-cutter
will he dex'oled more lo what !u>t to do than to what to do.
The actual melh<Ml ot' -etlinu' and usinu^ tlie cutter is oh\-ious.
hut the author ha- -eeii >o many l"ooli.-h thincis done on a lead-
cutter, hoth 1)\- apjirentice- and juurne\-men, that he mu>l
sound a warning'.
Do not try to cut >teel rule on a lead-cutter: use a three-
cornered tile for .-uch worh. and <lre-s the i)iece to size anrl per-
fect hni>h with a ilat h!e. Kememiter that thie machine is a
/m/(/-( utter, not a -teel taittcr. Kememher, al.-o, that mitering-
machines are not to he w-rd for tliis jiurjjose.
Ii... I.e. .\ri:rri..,i. l.^ad- .-la R./a
XexaT tr\- to eut n;ore th.an one lead at a time. If \ ou do,
\-(ai will hend the end- of tlie lead.-. ;.nd th,e\' will he umit for use.
If. vdieii cutting a -iiiLde lead, the end i.- crimped or di-licd. it
!- a -ign that the kiufe need- adju-'ing.
.\e\er cut -lug- on t!;e front of the machine, you can get a
h'etter !e\"er:.'_:t; ( ill tile liack.
Xe\-er ::tten jit t'l (a' a -lu;_' thicfaT tlian tweU'c jioint-,
uiae-- the n:.,t Idne i- iiuilt for l";e.A-\- ^er\ ice. In fact, twehce-
]M'im -Iul:- :n:\" he loo thich f' if -una; cutter-. I)o not rel\- on
\'our iudirmt-nt ; ^-k -ona; e\perie!a ed •Ani'kman.
Linotyjie ^h;i:-, ahicli are u-uai!\- -ikter ti;:,;i regular -Im:-,
m::\' he cut on tla- :i\'eraLre cuta-r il ni't aim-.e laei\a' [xiint-. If
ir.uch of thii- ^^■ork i- done. lioweN'er, a .-pecial -lug-cutter should
CI iriNC-TOOLS FOR PRIXTKRS
199
be ])ro\-icle(l. These are built on tl^c same |)rincii)le as a lead-
cutler, but are ver\' j^tron.^ly niiule. (Fi,^. 121.)
The blank ])arts of linot}'i)e slu.i^s are but sli,^htl\- lower than
the face of the t\'])e. If the t}'j)e mailer is \er\- o[)en, the
rollers will louch the slu,<i;s and lliey will print on the sheets.
To olniale this it is fre(|uently necessary to cut li.e slu.tfs away
so that llie\' will not ])rint. d'his is sometimes done on a lead-
cutler, sometimes with a coarse tile. If much. lii:olype work is
done it will pay to have a Barber Low-slu<^ Trimmer for this
purpose.
Rule u]) to four points thick may safely be cut on a lead-
cutter. The operatiom will \'ery likel}" dish the ends, so it is
Vic.. 121. — Ruu.-c (ir AnK-rium .slu"-riittcr.
advisable to cut the rule a few points lon,L,'er than actually
needed and then dress it to size on the miterint^-machine.
It is soU'Ctimes necessary to cut ])ieces of leads to some point-
size other than mullii)les of pica. Some machines have gauges,
graduated to points, that ca.n be set to accom])lish this ])urpose.
If the machiine does not j)ossess this de\ ice, any regular type of
machine may be made to do the sanie thin^. Su])pose a num-
ber of ])ieces thirty-four ])oints lon^ are wanted: make uj) some
combination of spaces and (■^uads to e(|ual thirty-four ])oints.
Set the gau,a;e at any i)ica measure (say twenty ems). Put the
coml)ination of spaces and quarls against the gau,£;e, insert a
piece of lead (not labor-sa\-ing) about eighteen cms lon,g and cut
otT the end of the lead. Xow remo\-e ihe cjuads and s})aces,
push the lead back against the gauge, and use the lead for a ne^Y
joo I'RIXl i\(.
!4aii,m'. 'I'lir dislaiKi' hct w rcii the c\u\ of tht' lead and (he knife
is now just thirl)'-l"i)ur poini-. .\ii_\- si/A- lead can Ite cut in this
way.
175. Mitering-machine. MitcTinLi; a rule is euttiuL:; the
end of it to a he\cl so ihal wlien a ri^lit and a left miter a,re
joini'd lOj^ether they will [)i"o{luice a corner willi a t'erlain an,<^le.
If a ninet \'-(leii'ree corner is dc-;drcd., botli miters must l)e at an
an,^le of forl\--l"i\"e de;!,i-ee>. X'arious forms of mitei'in^-machines
ha\"e from time to liiiu-heen deN'ised lor this purpose; some
{)raclical)!e, some inipract ica])h'. l''or manv }-ears (wo ditfercMit
types of machines I'emadned in ])uhi|ic fax'or -the horizontal and
the vertical. The horizontal i^ known as (lie ''.Mitcliell Alit.er-
in^L^-macliine." It has ,ij;raduadi\- keen sui)])lantc'd ky the ver-
tical or upii^ht t\'\)v, and is no loULrer manufactured.
The i)roper miter on a Mitchell machine is secured ky the
use of a knife irroup.d to (he ])roi)er kexcl, a set of knixx's accom-
pan\an,!j; each machine. On tlie upriichl maclune, howt^\ cr,
there is kut oik- knife, :'.nd the pi-(>['er miter is secured ky sldftin;;
the ,ii;auji;ed)a.r around the arc (U" a ( ircle. The kase of the^auu;e-
k)ar has a hole in it aiui is pro\ ided v.itli a i)in whicli nia\' ke
sli])i)ed into holes in tke ked-plate. When the hole in the
j^'au,Li;ed)ar comes iii liiie with a hole in (he ked-plate and the |)in
slipped into place the maclune is accu'-ately set to miter to a
certain ke\'ei. The lio'.e^ in. (he ked-plate iwc lumikered. If
rule for a. four-sided korder is desiixc! (lie pin m s!i])])ed in(o
hole Xo. 4. 'I'his will pi"0(luc(- rules of (lie i>r(>])er mi(er. If a
six-si(K'd korder is de-ircd, the pin i< slii)])ed into hole Xo. (>;
and so on. 'i'here ai"c two >et- o| tmnikcred holi-<, -o as to pro-
duce ri,L:;lit and left niilers. I'hen i~ (lui- pi'ov ided a (|uick
mean> of oktaininsj; au'.dc- witkou! makiuL^ calculations.
'I'hc .Mitclu-ll machiiic i< c-]nciall\- u>cful in cuttin;; a,]iart
or miterinii (kick ruk-, and for nioi't i-iri'j; letter-, 'kin- ui)ri'j;ht
machiiK- i-^ u-t-ful onk,- for mitci-inu" and for dre:-.-in_t:; material
to ~-iz(-. 'klie iuali'|-i,il mu-l lii'-l kr cut ai)art. heads, >1u,l!;-
u]-' (c, I I'll 1 loinl , and rule up to foiu" point ma\- kc cut ap;ir( on a
Icad-uitur kulr I kickrr I k,i II fon!--p(iin( >lionld kc cui wi(ha.
cu'i'j i.\(.-i()()i.s I'OR i'Ri\ri;Rs
20I
hacksaw and drcssccl to size on the ui)ri,irht machine. Tweh'C-
])oint brass rule is about the hniit that should l^e attem,])ted.
The author has dressed up eight een-]>()int rule, l)ut it was a
hard job.
176. The Upright Machine. — In this type of macliine
(Fig. T.?jj the knile is secured to a knil'e-liolder, whicli is mo\cd
u\) and down b\- liand in two slots milled in the body of the
machine. I'he slots are wider than the guides on the knife-
holder, so as to allow some \)\ay sidewise. This is important.
When using the machine, the knife-holder should be moved
to the right, then raised to its highest point, then moved to the
I'"i(;. \22. — Rousi- .MitiTiii,''-ni;i('him
leff, and forced down to make the cut. The amount taken off
at each cut is determined by the "set"" of the knife; that is,
the distance it projects from the knife-holder. One-half a
])oin1 (;ibout 0.007 inch) is about right. Hardl_\' an\- two
machines are set the same as thi>. It is a matter of indi\idual
preference.
It will re;ulil\- be si'cn that each cliangc in the ''set" of the
knife will alter the length to which the material will be cut,
unless the gauire i> adju-tt'd to meet the set of the knife. So
far as the autlior i> aware, there is n.ot a machine on tbiC market
containing this es:-(.'nlial feature. I-nr thir> reason the com-
po-^itor is warned again-^t relyinLr on an\- machine posse-sing a
202 I'KINTIXG
''set '" ,i:;iu<fc. It WcH (loul)tlcss all ri.<i;ht when it left the manu-
facturer, hut someone may ha\"e altered the '"set" of the hnife.
Test it. The machine illustrated iu Fi^. 122 has an adjustment
for settii\L!; the ,^au,L:e to nuilti|)les of ])oints, hut it has no means
of lirst ad.justin^ the ,L''au,La- accuratel}' to pica distances from
the cutlin.ir-ed.ire of the l.nife.
When usin,Lr the machine do not slip the gau.^e into a pica
notch and proceed to cut the material to size. .Someone may
ha\'e mo\'ed the ])oint-;idjustment a point or t\vo; ])erha])s the
knife is not set so that the distance hetwcen cauue and knifc-
ed.LH' is exactly to ])icas. Test the knife-setting before using the
machine.
To reset a knife so that the ,s;au^^c ^vill he accurate, slip the
gauge into a ])ica notch, place a tested ])iece of lahor-sa\ing rule
the same length as llie measure of the gauge again>t the gauge-
bar, and set the knife to the rule. l"o do this, place the knife
looseh- in ])osition in die knife-holder, raise it until the knife is in
line with the middl ; (i the end of ihc rule, hold the knife-
holder firndy again.-l the left-hand side of tb.e machine by
pressing against it with \'our bodw adju.st the knife against
the end of the rule, and clamp it securel\- in position.
177. Trimming Material. — If tiie job in hand is simply one
of trimming lo get <tr;dglit ends, there is no need to set the
gauge. Wdien u-ing ilie macT.ine. ho\ve\'er, there are sex'cral
important things to be kipit in ndnd.
The proper method of o]H'r:;iing the knife is to swing the
handle lo the right, r. i-e it to fidl 1 ri-iit, mow it to the left, and
make the down >troke firm and >Ie::d\'. At the same time ])ress
the material again^t the km'fe-holdcr and hold it tirm.h" along-
>ide of the gauge-bar. Contimie cuttmg until .-Uibicient material
has been remowd. When bringing the knife u\) for a new
stroke, be careful not to rcb the knife again.-t the material. To
do .-o ma\' rub a burr on the toj) of it.
178. The Burr on Rule.— Xearl_\- all mitering-machines
!ra\-e a lairr on bra.-- rule. After lini-h.ing tlie trimmini:. turn
th.c rule on end. bottom towan! the knife, and trim otT tlie burr.
CUTTIXG-TOOLS FOR I'RIX'J'KRS
203
If the rule is lo be trimmed on botli ends, ])C sure to trim off the
burr on the first end l^efore trimmin,^ the other. If you do not,
the burr will tilt one end of the rule and the other end will be
trimmed at an an,L,de. Compositors who are in the habit of
producing rules trimmed on the bias alwa\-s blame it on the
machine, ne\"er oh themseh'es. Remember tJie burr.
179. Trimming to Gauge. — When a number of pieces of
Left haiKl In<I.x-ti;;^'LT liol.lin^' ritamlard
^ ruleu-uiiKt ;_'augL-lMr w hili- Hiuiiib-serew is
' N l,eiiitr'ti'lai'iiL-abv tliuiub and niiiUlle linger.
/ ■
i;i'-'ht luiti'l, 'Holding
knift-bur up ami to the
left, with knife-edge
midw.ay of the rale.
I'b
rule are to be cut and trimmed to the same size, cut the strips
apart on the lead-cutter, leaxing them long enough to allow for
trim on each end, for the lead-cutter may possibly ''dish'" the
rule or l:)end the face of it. Cut enough for the whole job. Take
the strips to the mitering-machine and proceed to dress up one
end of each rule, being careful to remo\-e the burr,
204
TRINJIXC,
Now set the gaui^e. T(.) do thi- correctly obtain a piece of
labor-saving rule (test it to insure accurac\-j, ])lace it against
the gauge-bar, raise the knife-hr)l(ler high enough to bring the
knife to about the center of the labor-sax'ing rule (see Fig. 123);
while holding the knife-holder lirmly to the left, {jress the rule
against the knife-edge, move the gauge against the rule, and
clamp the gauge in ])osition.
J-'iG. 124. — Drc??inu up ;i Sir.ull Pi','' i- dt Ri:!c "ii a J^litt rinir^^Iacliinc.
The di-tcuu;c bclwrcii kiiitV-rdu;f and gauL'c i- now cuicHy
the same as the length of the rule. Do not make the mis-
take of placing the rule ;:gainst tlie bod}- of the knife-holder
instead of the knife-edge vT.en -ettini: the gauge: if }-ou flo, the
rules will be the thickne-- of one cut >horter than the sam]>lc.
When a rule i.< now iikiced, again.-t the gau.ge it will be -^een
whv it is uf^ce-^arv to haxa; some pla\- -idcwise in the uj^right
CUTTIXC; TOOLS FOR I'Rl.X Tl'RS 205
slots, for the rule is longer than the measure. Hold the rule
down against the base and back against the gauge, and con-
tinue cutting until no more material can be removed. Stand
the rule on its end and remo\-e the burr.
Be \'erv careUil not to strike the rule on the up stroke. If
you do it will trip the rule and jam the corner against the gauge,
thus battering the face of the rule and spoiling the piece. A
piece of rule v/iih a bias end or a Ijattered corner will not make a
perfect joint. Both delects can be a\-oided with a little care.
180. Cutting to Multiples of a Point. — If a piece of rule is
to be cut to some multiple of points, set the gauge accurately
to picas, and place enough material between the gauge and the
rule that is to be trimmed so that the rule will be the right
length when linished. For e.\amj)le, sup])ose that a rule two
points less than ten picas is wanted. Set the gauge accurately
to ten picas, put a space two ])()ints thick in front of the gauge,
place tiie rule against the s])ace, and proceed with the cutting.
When the rule is llnishied it will be two ])oints less than ten
picas.
181. Cutting Very Small Pieces of Rule. — When cutting a
j)iece of rule that is x) short that tliere is not enough space
between the gauge and tlie knife for tlie insertion of the fingers
to hold the rule, set the gauge to a wider nieasure and use a
piece of rule of the same th.ickness as the piece being cut. This
will act as a gauge. The distance between the end of this rule
(which we will call the ""gauge-rule"',) and the knife-edge is
the si/e to which the rule will be cut. Set the gauge in the same
manner as descriljed in Section 179.
Tlie author has cut ])ieces as small as six points. It if
almost impossib'le to hold extremely small pieces in position
with the lingers. They w/dv be easily held, howe\-er, ijy placing
a six-])oint slug in fnjnt of the rule and the "gauge-rule"' and
pressing them both against the gauge-b'ar. 'See Fig. 124.)
182. Type " Fitting " on a Mitering-machine.- -The process
of m<<rti-ing or be\-elling letters so that one ma}' o\-erlap another
is kno\\n as '" lifting.''
20(J I'KIXTIXCi
Side mortices in initials or for fittint^ letters are best made
on a Miller Saw-Trimim-r. i Sec I'i^. i-\S-' II" a Mitchell ma-
chine is a\'ailal)le it will also be found useful.
This is how the A, \', and A, in A\'ALOX, on pai^^e 103,
were cut and titted.
t'lc. 1 .?5."- LctttT- .Mi.rti-rd 1.) fit.
The ujirii^ht machine is sometimes used for this purpose,
but the letters are cut on an an,L,de. (See Fi,Lr. 12O.)
Tlii> is not as good a way as the first, for pressure on the
ends of the line is apt to wedi^e the line out of ali_Ljnment. It is
usually done cmly when a Miller or a Mitchell machine is not
a\ailable. The printer who lacks a mitering-machine can
Fic., Tjr..-— T.ettcTS ^klitcred (o Fit,
accom])lish the same result with a coarse hie. It is a laborious
task, ho\\ever, and re(|uires considerable skill to make a pertect
job.
183. Type-high Machines. —Owing to the f,ict that the
printinL:-])lates furnished to the ])riiiter are fre(|uentl\- abo\-e
type high (o.()iS inch', man\' ])riiiter- ha\'e found it ad\-isable
\() iiistul lypr-Iii'Ji Dhirhinrs. The>i' are de\'ice^ for dres-ing
ott the bottom of ])l;ite--. There are >e\-er;il machine^ on the
market, and the\- accom])li.-h tlie work b\- idinLf, (lre->iiig olf
with kiii\-e-. or b_\- till' use of rotar\' cutting-tool^.
When 1>'1H' and ])late< are worked in one form, it is \-erv
e--ential tluit they be all of one height. The u>e of tvpediigl;
CUT'J'IXG-TOOLS FOR PRl\ri:RS 20'/
machines saves a lot of time on make-ready in the pressroom.
A form of pkites that are either abox'e or below t\-pe-high will be
rapidly worn out if run on a cylinder ];ress.
184. Care of Machines. — The c;ire of all cuttini^'-tools in a
composin,i^-room should Ije entrusted to one man, whose duly it
should be to keep them clean, well oiled. an<l the cutting-edges
always sharp. A sharp tool sa\'es unnecessary strain and wear
on the mechani-m: and by being a ])leasure to the user is con-
ducive to better work. Tool-l)locks for use in sharpening the
knife usualh' acc()m])any the u])right mitering-machine. By
j)lacing the knife against the sloping side of this device and rub-
bing them both (n-er the face of a goofl emery or carborundum
stone, a new edge wiU be put on ihe knife, and at just the right
bevel. When edgin^^ a cutting-tool. eniea\-or to maintain the
original bevel, for that is the proper angle for perfect service.
(^)ri;sTi()xs ox ciiat'i 1:1% xii
1. Name some of tlie things that ma_\- be (ione on the Miller Saw-
Trimmer.
2. How should steel rule be cut ajjart and dressed to size ?
3. How man\' leads may be safel\' and accurately cut apart at the
same time on a lead-cutter .•'
4. What would _\<)U surmise '.vas '.vrong witli a lead-cutter that crimjied
or dished the end o< a lead or rule ?
5. \\di\' is it ina(h'isalde to cut thick slugs or rules on an ordinary lead-
cutter ?
6. If \'ou needed some leads eighteen i)ic;is and three points long how
would \'ou cut them to si/.e on a lead-culler that lu,d a gauge that was only
adjustable to picas '.
7. Describe how you Nvould secure lead.- of the following lengths on the
machine s[)okeri of in (Question 0: iiS p(dnts. 1:2 [Joints, 94 jjoints, 98
points, and 37 points.
8. How would \'ou cut atjart a thick rule or slug if a special machine
was not awiilable ?
9. What is a miter '^
10. Wh>' are ricdit and left miters necessar_\ ?
11. How are the projjcr miters secured on t!i..' .Mitchell machine .■' on
the upright machine ?
2o8 PRIXTJXG
12. Describe how you would set tlie ,i;au,ue and how you would operate
the upri^rlU miterintz; niacliine. Tell \\]i;a en h parlieular mcn'e is intended
to areoni[)lish or to aNnid,
].v W h\' should the •■ set ~' of ihe kiiil'e on an I'pri'^dit niiterinir-niaeliine
al'.\'a_\'< he the same a> when the niaehiiie lel't tlic inanui'aelurer ?
14. Describe the resettin.u of a knife so that the pi(-a-<,Mu.L;e will be
aeeurate.
15. \\h}' is it so in-,i)ortant to retno\e the burr from the ends of brass
rule ?
10. Why is it neeessar\- to lia\e some sidewise pla_\- for the knifediolder
in the upri.^ht slots ':"
17. What will hapi)en if a rule is tri[>ped on tlie uji stroke of tlie knife-
holder ?
iS. If a miterini,' maehiur did not possess a point -adjustment, how
wouhl you cut rule to a muUi|)!e of points r*
n). Describe a method of v uttint; \er\- small pieies of rule.
20. \\ hat do you understand by ty[H'-littinL: '-^
21. Describe the dilTerent \\a_\s of fittint: t_\pe.
22. \\ hi( h is the better way of liitinu' type, b_\' niiterin.t,' or b\' n'.ortis-
in[^ ? (ii\e _\()ur reasons.
23. W hat is a t>pe hiuh macdiine i"
24. Why is it inii)ortant to ha\e all f)rintiiii: purfa( es in a form e\;u tl>-
t\'pe hi.idi ?
2v < 'f \\hat use is the tool block that u<uall_\' aceompanii-s an upriidit
mitc-rinLj-mac hine .-'
20. W'h_\' is it adsisable to place one man in char,u;e of all the cutting-
tooh in a coniposing-roorn ?
CHAPTKR XIII
C'OMIMjSIXOMAClIIXF.S
185. Economy of Machine Composition. — While every
branch of the printinf^ business is showing wonderful progress, in
none is the stride more rapid than in the field of composing-
machines. It has not been such a great number of years
since men laughed at the idea of being able to set type by
machiner\'. To-day it is an established fact; in fact, so firmly
is it establisl'ied that tlie statement may be safely ventured that
there is \ery little, if any, straight matter now being set l)y hand.
From the standpoint of economy, any piece of matter containing
upward of three thou>and ems can be composed cheaper on a
machine than by hanrl. Moreo\-er. the |)rinter is not only
buving compositiiMi Ijut material from which to print, so that
there is no wear on his own material.
'I'here ha\-e been Cjuite a numlier of machines invented to
set foundry type, among them the Rogers, Thorne, and Simplex,
but the sujierior efficiency of the machines that both compose
and make the type, either singly or on a slug, has resulted in
their being aln^ost supplanted, 'fhe major ])ortion of straight
matter to-day is either monoty])ed or linotyped. Each method
has its \-()taries, and for certain reasons each is better adapted
to s])ecitic ])urposcs.
186. The Linotype, — The Linotype machine (Lig. 127), so
called because it ca-ts a "hne o" type," or slus, was invented hy
Ottmar Mergenthaler, in rSS^. The macliine consists essen-
tiallv of a ^;/(it;(/:/;/(' containing brass matrices, in one side of
which two ch.aractcTS hax'e Ijecn [lUnched; a keyboard, connected
with the magazine by a rod, pawl, and wrgc, so that one matrix
may be released at a time by simply tcjuching a button on the
209
210
PRIXTIXG
keyboard; an asscmbliug device, to carry Ihe matrices into the
stick, so that tlie ojK-rator can ,u;au^e his lines; we(l,^e-shai)ed
spacc-hanih, so constructed that when inserted l)et\veen words
they niav be ex])andcd and the line justitied; and a device
to carry t,ic composed line owv to the caslin_^^ mcelianism, wliere
■K - "Z^^ /T^ — •
/^
ilyiH- .\<). ! 7.
the line is justified, and tlie matrices lield a.^rainst the mold-
disk, while metal is bein^ forced into the mold i'rom the melt iii^ii;-
I)()t, and the line cast. After the line is cast the matrices are
"withdrawn from aij;ains1 the mold-disk, an arm comes down from
the toj) of the machine, the mal rices are slipped onto the arn^
the arm is raised, and the mafricc'S are pu-lied off onto the di.--
COMPOSIX(]-AIACIII.\i:S 211
tributing-bar, wlicre ihey arc carried forward l)y a worm.
Each matrix has a key-way, so arran,tj;ed lliat the matrix can
only shj) from the distributin,!j;-bar wlien it ^ci^ over its own pkice
in the mai!;a/.ine. In this way tlie matrices are automaticaUy
returned to the ma.^azine ready to l)e used a,!i:ain.
The o})erator of a Linotype c(^m]")oses the matrices and con-
trols the casting nieclianisni. If errors occur, it is necessary
to reset llie wliole line, ])crlrai)s se\eral lines, in order to co'rrect
them. The machine is specially adapted to newspaper work,
for the slugs caji he handkxl with less care than is requ.ired in
ha.ndling t\i)e matter com]iose(l of indi\idual letters.
Each matrix in a magazine is stami)(Hl with a certain char-
a.cter or letter of the alphal)et, hut in two different faces of ty])e.
As till' matrix is lacing assenibled in the com[)osing-stick, it is
possible, 1)}' the use of a S'pecial de\ice, 1o bring either face into
alignment, thereby setting two dilTerent faces of t\'pe in one line.
The early type of machines contained but one magazine,
and could make slugs of but one size, unless the mold was
changed. Of the later styles, tlie Xo. q has four magazines, and
can cast eight different faces, adl the o})erations of change being
made by the op^era.ttn- siin])ly by moxing a few le\'ers; and that,
too. without lea\ang his seat at the keyl)oard.
E\en though,, the Einot}'])e casts ^olid slugs, still it is pos-
sible to cop.ii)ose tad)les on tlie machine. This is done bv the
use of speciad m;itrices, which cast sniidl lugs in the slug so
that ])!ece> of triringuhir brass rule can bi put into position and
the lugs crimped about the rule. Anollu^r way is to make saw-
cuts in the slugs in. j)roper position and thi'n ioixa ])ieces of
brass rule into these cuts.
Tcd)ular work may also be done by cutting the slugs to col-
umn Viidtli, and using rules between the cohnnns.
The \ery latest method is by tlie use (if the Auto-Mat Tabu-
lator, a de\-ice consisting of a matrix with two mcA'able jaws,
so arranged that in c;i-ting a. rule a triangular orifice is left in. it,
into which a triangular rule can be sli})ped, tlnis making a [)er-
feet ioint in the rule.
212 I'KIXriXG
While the Linot\'r)e is f!"i'f|iuTit!y used for setting; newspapers.
it mu-t not to l)e infrrreii llial it is useful only for this work;
there is ;in inerea-in'j; al.uiidanee of hi,L'h-class niagazine and
hook voirk 1 eiiiL!' j iroihicriL
187. The Monotype. -'Y\\.: Monot_\-pe, so called because its
j)ro(luct eon-!~l- of separate letters, was in\-ented by Tolbert
Lanstoii. in iSSj. A complete out lit for composing ty])e con-
sists of two separate |)ar1s -a ki y/ oiira' ' I'ig. 1 2S) and a casting-
Fir, . i:>.-^y
vuirhiuf I'"ig. 120 . The (-oniie( 1 ingdink bet'.veen the twc
machiner; is a rilTon of ]);:per in whieh hole- ha\-e been punchicd
'somevdiat 011 ih,e orPcr of a mu-ie-rtilj , the holes automatically
controlling tlie ta-ting de\ ire, so th.at whatewr character was
touched on th.e l.exi'oaril I'dll be ea-t on ttn' cast inLT-machine.
It abii aut' iirai! ieailx' ca-l- -jiace- of iu>t the right thickness st)
ihat after I'ie liiie i- (Mr.pMMd il eAactl\- lit.- the measure to
which it v.ar- ,-et. Ti.e ca-iine'-Piiachine automaticallv makes
co.MPOSixG-:\iAciiixi;s 213
the t\-pc and space? and com]xiscs the lines, moxing each line
forward so that the next nia}' cwme into pro])er position.
The successful o])eration of the Mon()t_\-])e s\-stenT is due to
the fact that each character is cast on soiree predetermined
width, or unit. The Monotype unit is one-ei.^hteenth of the
cap M of the font. When a line is to be com[)osed it is only
necessary to know the width (set-size 1 of the face of the font,
riG. ijy.---MuiiOi\-i)i' C'a.-lin
and the len.iith of the line. When the^e matters ha\'e been
decided it is sim])l}- necessary to consult a chart (for these cal-
culations ha\'e been made and charted ' and set the indicator to a
certain number of units. This inelicator shows how many units
e)f the kind of t}'[)e we wish to use may be 'gotten into a line of
the width we wish to set.
When a key is touched on the ke\'board the indicator mo\'e3
TO the riudit a number of units e(|ual to the width ot tlie letter
214 1'K1MI.\(,
>trutk. Wlifi tin- rnxt ke\- i.- tniKJicI \]\e indic;itor mo\-e3 that
nuir.liL-r of unit<. In tlii- wiiy tlif full wirlth of tlic sp;ice is
u^cd up. until iIrtc is n.ot .-uiiicicnt space to <j.(ji m un\' more
\\or(i.-, after wl'.ieh it i- nvic- -::r\- to space tlie lin.e.
At tl:e toj) of the ke\ hoard there is a cylindrical (!e\-ice
called a ju:':tyh::J,-M:ii!i'. \\ hieu nearin.;: tlie end of the line, as
tlie line is heirm' con-jiu^ed. eac)i tin'.e a letter is struck the
c\-linfler ir.o'.'es a n.un!her of i:;.it- e(|ual to tliat letter: each
linie a nurnial -pace i>: louclied u jxanter n-.o\es up one step
on tile i\.>tif\'in'_r-.-c.de. Alter th.e line i> C(jn";i)leted, tlie pointer
on tl'.e iusiif\'inLr--cale shores A'ddch justil^an,L;;d^e^■s nnist be
strucix to ])urich holer, that will set the space-setting n:echanism
on the carter.
.•\1 !ir.-t thouL'^hit it seems almost im})C>s-il)le to strike a stpace
aiifl afterward determine its size. \\'hen we realize that the
iiI)hion is run into th.e castin.i^^-jraichiiK' hackward, the mailer
hecan^es riviite clear, for tlie id'-t th.ii!,ir tliat l;a])]'ens on th.e
castinL:;-mach!ne i- the last thinii; lliat was done on tlie ke}dioard
--the ^pace-^ett!nLr mechani-m i- ~rt to ^ize. I'lds is dotie with
a ])cdr of accurate •.^"ed,'ies. th.e si'ttiuL'' of \vldch adds tlie reriuired
amount to tlie nor"mal wedLie. Once th.t sp;.ce-castin!j: mech.an-
ism !- -et for a. line each space emerires from tlie ca^ter e.xacth"
of tlie same \'diltli.
'I'liere are t'.'O) huiiorc-d and t ■.\'ent\--ll\'e mat rice- in a matrix-
CaSe ' L'i.r. i;0' <n th.e c.i-ter. c.;ch. C'.)r.tr<il!ed h}- a ke\" on the
keviMi^rd. i here are :;itee!i rn'.'..- with, id'teeu character.- in
each r!)w. The r.)'.e- in oiil d:r>aaii(,!; are c.dlrd iunt nn^s. and
the I'.flren (dia'"actrrs in ea. !: uuit ;"o-.',- are alwa\'> ca^t on the
s,.me \'.id'h 'if 1i(m!\-. Wduai the nu;' rix-c.:-e mo\e- into an\"
unit p.r-itiMU da- la^ld i- -el ai:i nmat icall\- -o that the letter
c -1 !- I 111 a h' 'dy (if di" ] )ri '• K-r \-. id; h. 1 f t he m.n r!\-ca>e mw\a;^
t.i ria'hleen-'Uni' i)--i;i":!. d:v naild np-n^ to tli:t width; if
tlie r:.:i' v\\-i\:-r anWr- \n idia'-Uilit jiii-iliiUl. the Ilii >M-open in<:
( )-'da- :- tla f .1 1 thai M-a^ it xo- i- :dl ( :. -t . .f Kuit widdi. it
!- 1 1!. cd( .,;;}■ ~eii-.- ;)acn.aa aud tliei'eaa-e -in-idaily ad.ipted to
coAii'osixc; AiA(iii.\r:s
215
tanukir wcirk (Fip,. i.^il. It i.s mathenialiccilly accurate, and
all lines are absolutely of the same len,<i;th. Tabular matter
can be conii)ose(l in column form and deli\-ered on the galley
readv for the iii>erlion of ihe rules.
'I'he use of special characters in the matrix-case })ermits of
setting units \vhicli, whi'n assembled, look exactly like work
composed of brass rule. (See Fig. 79 (/'j and Fig. 82.)
jjj
fff
aa
00
oo-
?-)!-<
XX
Fic. 1^,0.-- ,Mi>iint\-[K' ]\l;ilri\-
Imc. i^u-— Illustrat-
ing the delation
ht'lwccii Cliarac-
tcTs (jf tlic Same
Font: Thus, M
('i8-unit Cliarac-
tLT) is the same
Widlla as T/nrc
j's or fs (0-unit
Characlersi, or/i.o
a's, o's, f,'"s, or x's
(Q-unil Charac-
ters).
It is also ]:ios>ible to com])ose and cast a large face on a
small l)ody ])y su]>])orting tlie oxx'rhanging ])art with plain
ciiiads or xx'ith slugs made on the Monotype. Faces as large as
sixt\'-])oint can be cast on bodies as small a- twehx'-])oint.
188. Mounting Illustrations in Machine-set Composition.
— There was a time when it \\as ab-olutel}' necessary to run
type matter around the blocks on wiiich illustrations were
niotmted. That necessilx' no longer exists.
2I()
rkixrixf
Thf .M()n()ly])e C"om[);iny \v;is the 1ir>t in llic licld \villi a
method of niountini^ iilustrations (Hrectly on the compo'secl
materiah To do this it is nece.-sary to know ju-t what part of
the pane is to ])e co\-ere(l with t\-pe cMkI what part with illus-
tration. This is determined 1)\- the u-e of a hnoul-shcct. The
quads are of such height that a uhile ele\-en points thick when
mounted on tlie (|uads. will ke exactly t_\'pe-high. After the
Fig. I 31;.- - Showinq; Mur^.otvpe Method tA Mui;n:i;i,^' Cut Directly on
'ju;id-, mi'l also I'urm and U^e ui 'J'ii--i:[j SkiV^^s.
proof i;^ kinalK' pa-sed llie jilale i.- cemented to the ([uads.
(Id-. IS 2.
The Linotype (^impany"- invtlvid i- to ])rcpare a layout
sheet, tlien .-et the line.- of tvpe (,f tlie proper length to go
arounri the illu-tratii ai. .Vfter tlie whole T)age is in type the
slug> are lined up aloni: the in d'ie ;ind the klank parts of the
slug- routed a\va\' to tlie ])riip(r drpih r-o as t(! torni a le\"el
ka-e for tlie i)late, Altrr tin- -'irjr- are rea.— enikled tlie ])late i.-,
placed in po-itinn aivi iiailrd f:i-! Im the .-lu'_^-. idg. i;;.!
189. Non-distributicn. WkiU- the pnnluct of the Mono-
tv])e machine ma>' In' lii-trikutrd into ca-e,-, and then set ky
COM I'OSlNCi-.M ACI 1 1 X i:S
217
hand, it is Ix'coming more and more evident that such procedure
is inadvisable. Tliere are two reasons for tliis : first, it is
better to liave new material on eacli job; second, it costs money
to ])ick a jol.) apart and tlien distribute tlie t}'pe. Doing away
with the necessity for distril)ution is the order of the day, and
the next (leca.de will tloubtless witness many radical changes
I'lc. 1,-;,^.- I iii()i\p(_ ^'ui,^ l\()iilc(l Ready for ^Mounting llki^^lralioii-
in the ]M-o(luction of com])osed tvi)e. l^\en now the Mono-
t}'pe C'ompan\- has pro\ ided altachments lo its casting-machine
for j)roduring t\'ne, ])()r(lers, leads, slugs, rules, electrotype
bearers, riiid tic-un slug<. The use of this material renders dis-
tribution unnecessar}-. After a jol> is completed it is swept off
into the melting-] )ot.
2i8 I'KIMlXd
'\']\v I.iiiolyite niacliinc is a comhiiu'd composing and casting
mechanism. The caster ])ai"t of the maclune is sold separately,
and may be used for casting leads, slugs, rules, borders, etc.;
tlie length, howex'cr, is restricted to thirty-six ])icas.
At tliis writing, the Linotyi)e ("omi)any is putting out a
machine known as the Ludlow 'I'ypograph. With this machine
the matrices are set in a s])ecial stick and the lines cast on a
slug, which is then put into ])lace in the job. It will cast a face
as large as forty-eight ])oint on a t wel\e-point slug. Slugs of
\-arious thicknesses and lengths can also be cast. The slugs
are of the re([uired height to scpport the overhanging slugs.
190. The Intertype.— Inasmuch a.s some of the l)asic
patents on the Linot\-pe haw expn-ed, another machine built
along the same general lines has made its ai)])earance. It is
called the lnterty])e. It is a newcomer, is rai)idl\' adding
im])rovements, and is destinecl to become a \ery important
machine. Its strt)ngest bids for fax'or are the facts that it con-
tains fewer ])arts and is being marketed at a much lower price
than the Linotype.
191. Type-casting Machines. — Printers are hnding it ex])e-
dient to instal ty])e-casti!ig machines, thereby kee[)ing their
cases ])lentifully sujiplied with ty])e. There are f|uite a few-
machines on the market. The .Monoty])e caster will cast t\'i)e
bodies as large as thirty-six [joint. Tfie Ab)not}-pe ('ompany
has an extrenu'ly large number of ty])e faces from which to
choose, and the matrices may be rented for a nominal sum.
QUKSIIONS OS C'lIAl'l'lOR XIII
I. What is niacliiiu' (■onii)()>iti()n ?
2.. What t'.'.o ili>tiiut mrthiiilsof niaihiiic composition arc in \-oL;uf :it
the: prcsint linu ? I )c.-,i I'ihc tlifiii.
,.;. \\\\\ ]< \]\r l.iliolv pr iiKU liitic so callr. i ?
4. What (Iocs tlif woi'il inonotxp.c iiican .-'
5. ( ii>. (• a .L'riicral oul line of 1 lie iiiannrr in wliioh lines arc composed
and I ast on the Linotype; on ihr Moiiot\-]H'.
C()Mih)six(;-ma('iiim;s
219
6. How is tabular work composed on the Linotype? on tlie Mono-
type ?
7. What is the -Monot_\[)e unit ?
8. How man_\' matrices are there in a .Monoty[)e matrix-case ?
9. ]v\[)hiin how ilkistrations are mounted on Moni)ty[)e quads; on
Linotype slugs.
10. What do you understand by non-distribution ? Why is it ad\isable?
11. What is the Ludlow Typograph ?
13. What is the Intertype ?
ciJAPi i:r XIV
PRKSSWURK
TiiK term pressivork coxtTs two cnlircly dilTcrcnt methods of
obtaining im])ressi()ns from type forms : ^y the aid of e\linder
presses and by the aid of ])l;itt'n presses. The latter is tlie only
|. <
one tliat will l)c di-cu^-t-d in tlii- i i.mI i-c. I'riniarih', Ix-iaust
it is the ^-implcr nielhod and ihc oiu- Hkrl\' lo he in m-nrral use
in manual trainiiiL,^ m1im()1>, and I)eeau>e il i- the logical sUp-
PRKSSWORK 22 1
pinfi;-stonc to the more C()m])lc\- one of cylinder presswork, and
admits of clearer exjxjsition. He wlio aspires to be a cylinder
pressmar. sliould first master the platen ])ress. When that is
accom]~)lished he is fiualified to take uj) cylinder work under the
guidance of a skilk'd pres>man.
192. Platen Presses. -A i)lalen i)rinting-press is one in
which the form is locked up aiaiinst a Itcd and the impression is
I'lr,. 135. — CiuiiKllcr >i; I'ri. l (joi'doii I'lv-s.
delixercd against a llat, sir.noik,, lex'el ])late called a platen.
There are two types of platen presses: one, known as the "clam-
sheir" t\"pe, in which the platen r()ck> up a!j;ainst the bed (Figs.
i:;4 and 1,^5); tlie other, knov/n as the sliding platen, in which
thic pkitt-n is In-st placed i)aralle! with tlie bed and then drawn
up airainst it ( h'ig. 130!. The latter method is the better one.
193. The Bed.— The bed of a ])rinting-i)ress is the part on
or against which tlie form is fastened. On platen presses th.e
J'KIM l\(,
l)c(l i< always attaclied to >ntnc ii])ri'_:lit ]iart of llie framework.
[]i somi' tx'pc^ of ])rc---i,'.- tlir franu-woi-k niow^, in others it is
_rv-iy
■|\-. M.Hui
ri'iid. W'liiK- no ;,(iju-l nu-nt oi tin- hrd i- f\-rr ri-riiiired. it is
\i.-r\- iii;j)i rt;,iit 1,1 .^.i. tlmi iIk. i',,rni i~ >afrl\- InrKL-d au'aiiir-t it.
194. The Platen, hui-niiah a- ilu- plaU-n i> the part
a,u^airi~l vdiiih thr in,; 'rr--i( in i.- i-km. incciri> ir,u,-t he prnxddcii
PRESSWORK 2 23
for altering, regulating, or ef|ualizing tlie impression. This is
aecomplished by tlie use of adjusting-screws Ijeneath the platen.
To allow for variation in nuiking read}', the experienced press-
man has, for general use, a sheet of presshoard and three or four
sheets of hard pa})er on top of the j)laten. This tympaii, or
packing, as it is sometimes called, is co^'ered with a sheet of
hea\'v manila i)aper, called a draii'-shcet.
It is cjuite e\ident that if the platen is not properly adjusted
the impression will not be even. The proper way to adjust the
platen is to lock u]) four large, gothic letters, one in each corner
of a chase, and pull an impression. By raising or lowering the
impression-screws, as required, the whole four letters may be
made to show uniformity of impression. When this is accom-
plished, the screws should be fastened with the lock-nuts. After
the platen is once properly adjusted it should ne\'er be changed
unless it becomes sprung, or it hr.s been necessary to alter the
imi)ression in order to [)rint a hea\}'form that could not possibly
be locked in the center of the chase. If the im|)ression has been
altered for a special form, it should be leveled before i)roceeding
with the next one.
195. The Draw-sheet. — The draw-sheet is the hea\'y sheet
of manila })aper that is stretched tightly over the packing and
clamped under the tympan-bales. The guides and fenders are
fastened to it.
196. The Grippers. — The grippers are the long steel "fin-
ger?"" or strips that are clami)ed to the gri|)per-bar, which, in
turn, is mo\-ed l)y the mechanism of the press, and causes the
gri])])ers to i)ress the sheet tightly against the t}'m])an while the
impression is Ijeing taken, and to hold it there while the form
and sheet are being withdrawn. On extremely light forms they
are not necessar}-. If the form is a hea\'y one and carries much
ink. thev must be used to ])ull the sheet from the form. They
are adjustable, and should be i)laced in the margins on light
forms and at the ])oint of strongest suction on heavy form.s.
Skeleton grip])ers are \-ery con\-enient to have at hand, for it is
sometimes necessary to use gri})])ers in a \'ery narrow space.
224 I'Rixrixo
If tlic ^rippers fail lo exert the ref|uire(l pressure on a sheet,
a few thin pieces of cork f^lued to them at ditfereiit ])oints wiH
usually ])ro\-e eiTecli\'e.
197. Roller-bearers. Tlie suhjecis of roller-l)carers, jjjud-
geons, etc., are fully treat^'d in Sections 144 and 145, and sliould
be re\ie\ved at this point.
198. Rollers. --Printers' rollers ;;re made from a composi-
tion containiniz ,L,due, .glycerine, mola.^ses, and other ingredients.
Each manufacturer has his own pel formula, the ])roportions
of wlrich he \'aries according to the >eason of the \-ear. These
rollers are \-er\' susceptible to changes in tem])erature and
humidity. It is, therefore, :m])oss!l)le to m;ike a composition
roller that will he in perfect condition at all times. Heat
will soften the composition and cold will liarden it. It will
absorb moisture from ihe ;ur and become '"tackx-."' A roller in
perfect condition for printing; \ ields sli'^litly under a hrm ])res-
sure of the linLrer, a.nd h;is enouLfli "t;ickiness" to cause the ball
ot the hand to drau, \\];en it is rubbed o\er its siu-face. If the
hand slides, it lacks suction. If tlie f;n.t:er sinks into the roller,
the roller is too soft ; if it does not dent the roller at all, the roller
is too hard. Summer rollers (whiih a.re ])ur])osely made of a
firmer C()m])osition ) are too hard for winter use; and winter
rollers are too soft for summer u.se. Soiue ])rinters chanue their
roller outlits four times a year. This ])ractic(; reall}' pays;
for a pressman can easil\' wa.ste in 1 ime the cost of a set 'A rollers
trv'ini;; to do y;ood work with jioor rollers.
Hot, luimid weather i^ especially trxint: on a com])()sit ion
roller; the at iuos]>heric heat and I he frictional heat sometimes
beiiiL!; sufticient to c;iu;-e the co!nj)(>^it ion to "run cK)wn."
Rollers should be care!'u!I\' watclied on hot. dam]) da\s.
Some inks ha\e a \er\' deleterious I'll'ei I on composition
rollers, manv of them posse.^-in^ an a,-t rinu'ent j)ropert_\' which
takes all the suction out of the Killer.
Rollers ,^rad.uall\' shrink, and frr(|uen1 chan^inu' of ^ud^'ons
is necessar\' so as to ha\c i-o!ler ;oid irud^eons of the same diam-
eter. See under '' ( iud^eons." Stri'oii 145.
pki;ss\\c)RK 225
199. Oiling the Press.T-Onc of the first thin.i^s with which
the enibrx'o ])ressman should make himself familiar is how and
where to oil the pi'ess. IvNei"\- oil-hole should ])e located, and
never ne,ij;lecte(l. 'ilie pre-s should be full)' and carefully oiled
each mornimx Ijcfore l)eii;innin,^ work. A few drops at each
point i^ usually sutiicienl. Do not ilood the press with oil, for
the suri)lu^ will >iniply I'un to waste. If any oil runs over the
part while in the act of oiling, wii)e it off at once. If the ]ircss
has oil-cu])s, see that they are filled each morning. If }-ou find
that the oil-cups do not need tilling, it is a sign that they are not
feeding. Adjust them, and he on the lookout for warm bearings.
If there is even the slightest scjueak alx)ut a press ferret it out;
something needs oil. d\) neglect it may ruin the machine.
The side-a.rms on platen ])resses recjuirc careful attention. Do
not fail to oil them daily. Also, be sure that all oil-holes are not
clogged with dirt, otlierwise they will not get oil even though
you think yon are t)iling them.
Xe\er attempt to oil or wi])e a ])ress while in motion. It is
positi\-ely dangeriuis: pr;ictice the motto "Safety first."
200. Shrinking of Furniture. — After a form has been locked
up and left ^tanding for some time, it is usually found that the
tvpe is loose. This ma}- be due to one of two causes, i)erhaps to
both. The wood may lia\e shrunk, or it may have \-ielded to
the compression to whicli it was suljjected. In any e\'ent,
ne\-er go lo ])res> with a form without ilrst l)eing assured that
the type is absolutely tight. If the ])ress is left standing with
the form on it for any length of time, try the Cjuoins befc^re j)ro-
ceeding with the job.
If comjjelled to lea\'e a press ^landing for any length of time,
remo\-e the rollers. Xe\'er !ea\e the rollers in contact with the
fi)rn"i or on tlic iiik-plate; tiie ccwistant i)ressure will mark or
mar them.
if. [or any reason, a job is not coiTijileted at once, but is left
on press for a few days, do not leave the i)re>s wide open, with
the t\-mpan expo^ed. to the air, but close it, with the tympan
almost in cop.tact wiiii the type. If left wide open during damp
:':() l'kiNrj.\<,
weather, the pajUT on tlic l\-:r,;i,.!! j^.a" ah^<or'> nioisture aiici
^var[) to <;ic!i ai; cU-r,' ;;< ti, -;m l\ {],,, n:akr-!T,a :\-.
201. Impression. Thrrr i-- (!i\!-:-il\- ^i - oia^-a anaiiai
prL■^^laL•n a- in v.-'u,i\ c; i:,-! i: a' i\- a pv-a i ! i; ;.rc--'(aa MiUiihl
<ir ^}a'ul(] not tin. ^h.-ri ^h^r.,- ,.::y i .a ■:■<•--:. .a iM ;j:e l.;iek?
'i'here are >o i;aaiy [ar'nr. raa-r'aa ia'- ;la> "i,^ -\]i>]]. llait it
can only he a!:-^\^a■l/|[ , a i ;■ -yi^i.! a. a 'ai't^ai' a (jf caah lair-
ticular ca-r. fa a -iirr: h -';;,- '■;.: i\ --' ,;; ]■-■ ,.; r^hach' aetr—
sar\- to pre-- 'h^ Jah a:a i\" aaa:;^ 1 "" ■ a:.pc:\ li ihe \':-{,vr i.-
soft and \'ielaina the haorr---!i:a :- ■ -a,..: ta ,aa.v.-. it' il:t. pajn-r
is hard and nMn--ds( a'hrat il '"'aaa;a- ;; .-' ';T "ah; ihh: i;(:ai.--i-
tates eo:]-i.irr.,hh- s-aaa-/;- a, <r\ {].•■ i:ih hrad}' on thv ji.a'er.
Here, ai~(a l!a- iay a\/~:-;; >:. ^ i (■:,;;/ s- -hov/. \ rf>h ]i:ia,dna
will >la r,\ tin: iny )••■•- -ii in Vv/-; i'lhi :'- •" ' •; h(_ ;• c ,ndh :< m -. .\ ia.rd
pachini:. ailh -a:oiah payvr. a-ot; n pe. aad ao. ^d iah, r-i-ia'd
show iiut little i-:pre-''aa h 'aai t]a.a i a ;-eia; t!,:'1 p>pe. iah.
stoch. and ;iailday ; !l rv.U v aa < iha : at-d^n, T: (av ;■ laiiv
one hiCtvjr iK-re o\aa" -.adah th- ]aa;,--ra.:n :".- aa;. rnatrni —
{)ae;dnLr. Jf pordlde. 1 r -h^'a.o ;aa t- a ;a rd p' ch'aa. di;c
])r(;--inan naa-! taha \'. iaa ! ^ av: ,a^ . :- : ■■a :- a"\ ra aiaa ; ad a^e
inh -uilaide to hoda Wha '..\:- :,aa(, ;: aa: :a--1 hiia ae is
= a!)i)o-i.-d lo j.r-da r ;••■'■•" v'; -]:. d'h!- i- .'a..:v id:- hii''-al-
edye and -ad; (■■'■ at ,:'■':■!.-: a/a s r- arr i'^^d aa
202. The Tyrnpan. d'it'i a did^i.ar . ii -a^^ ad >'/:-!a th,* a
i:~ the 0 :~e. h p a > i 'a ■ ■ - ■ : ^ ' ■■ ; . a ■' !:. ' a.-:adr-' > ai
rKi'issw'okiv 227
ihe cause of llial louu'Iin,!^'. It, is olivious that if tyi)c is l)cin!];
enihcddcd in a so'd j)ai. King lln> wear is all oil ihe edj^^es, wliicli will
he ,L!;raclu;illy roinuled.
203. Inserting the Form.-TIie first step in llie j)r()cess of
L';eHini^ a jo]) re:i(l\- foi' ) iriiViiiiL,^ is to insert, tlu: form, in tlie ])ress.
Open llie j>re,-- !o it< luiiesl e.vtenl, :it. wliicli time tlie rollers
will be at ilieir lowest j)oint, a.nd cle:ir of tlie form. .Insert the
form (l)Lin:r \ ery earefu! n.ot to strike tlie ,Li'rip])ers), and clamp it
in ])o<ition. Xext, nio\a.' the i^ripix'rs, if nect'ssa.ry, so that they
will ( iL-;ir tlu' form, iiat he sure that tlie}' are liuht hefore lea\an_cj
tlu-m. If lite dr:i\v-.-~herf u^cd on the jtrevious form will do
fiir the pre-eni on.e. ^iri;) ol'i all guides and fenders. 'J'hen
remove tlir preNaous mahe-read}- p-elainin;; it for future use
if the joh i- to he kepi stanilinii), insert enoiii^h sheets to make
up for lliose remo\ed, and, proct'edi ^vith a new make-ready.
All the map.ila -''eels on the t \'i'''!])a!i should he clanrped l.)eneath
the lym;);!n hales. .\!\\;p\s he sure to put th.e joh in the ])ress
with the (|uoins ad llie to]). If, for any reason, the form is
!-e;;io\ ed from the })re-<s or il< i)(>sition chan<j:;ed adtcr the grii)pers
a.nd ,<.;uides ha\'e been set, he sure that the form does not strike
them.
204. Make-ready.- -d" lie material of Avhicli ]^rint,ing forms
are eomjMKcd ii}'!)e, n\^-c, I'order.-', orn-nnenis, illustrations, etc.)
is seldom, if vvrr, of uriif'inn iiei,ii;ljt. Jn order to secure a
Mrm and e-\a.-n impre,-,d.ai of this material on a sheet of ])aper, it
i-- iv'ee.-sar\" to y^n ihrou'j;h an oi)eration known as nuikiiii^ ready.
'Yhv \\vA >tv'i) in \h\> operatioai is the pidlinLT of a trial sheet.
I h,-' ^krc; i< exaaiined in a L.'ood li^'lil', and llie impression noted.
\\ hiTv' thi inp)rr<sio!i \-, v/eak, the s])ols are outlined, with lead-
pencil IV;;. rl--, :\\\i\ patches an,- suh-^c(;uentl\' j^isted thereon.
d'hi< i'> !sn;n\n r- ::p(;/iinLi 11 pi. Mow llian ont' spot-up, or
j)aiehcd -hcM, !.-; u-uaiiy rciiuircd l;ef(;re the form is ready for
[)rinii!pp d1u: rcsuhant series of paiclied s'leets is called a
}}u:J:i yriiiv.
A ]v;'s-ma;i wdi -■omciimes ]i!;ice one sheet of make-ready
l)eneaih ihe iyp<.' or form m order to mako e\er\'thini; le\'el.
228 I'RIXTLNG
When this is done that ])arl of llie niakc-rcady is called an nyidcr-
lay. The ])arl that is ])laced on the l\'ni,])an is called an overlay.
Inasmuch as it i< im|)ossil)le to (ell ju>t how nuich im])ression
is Ix'inu; exerted by the type a,!i;ainsl the sheet if the type is
flooded with ink, ihe pressman sliould see that there is too little
rather than too much ink on the press. Many a jiressnian has
frittered awa\- time because he used loo much ink when making
ready, only to lind that when the color (amount of ink) was
properly adjusted for ])rinting the job the form was breakinc;
away, and he was compelled, to stop the i)ress and s])ot up
another sheet, if the prexious job on the ])ress recjuired a
;zreat deal of ink, remo\-e about half of it from the plate, and
thorou,ghly distribute the balance.
Before takin;^ the trial impression, the tx'mixin, or packinc;,
should be arrans^ed. Jhx'ssmen differ as to the i>ro])er method of
doing this. One good way is to ha\-e three or four sheets of
manila pa])er clam])ed beneath the tymi)an-balcs. Between
the bottom sheet of manila and the ])laten ])lace three or four
sheets of the same stock as that on which the job is to be made
ready. Pull an impression on each manila sheet as a guide for
])lacing the make-read\' sheets.
When the trial im])ression is secured tlie sheet should be
be held to the light and examined on the back. l\ the t_\-pe is
punching through at an\- ])oint it is exidence tha.t there is some-
thing beneath the ty])e. d'his must be remox'ed, the form
should then be o])ened up, re-[)Ianed, and again locked u]).
If examination of the sheet does not rexeal :\ny txpe ])unch-
ing through, but, instead, certain areas lacking impression,
these low ])laces should be marked as a guide for patching or
spotting u]). These low areas or places art' to b'C coN'cred with
jxitches of thin paper (usually I'dcnch folio) in ordiT to make
them le\'el with the high s])ots. The lower tlie spot the nion
pat die- recpiired.
In order to ])ro])erlv see the imi)re>:d()n the pre-sman sliould
Iiold the sheet to the light, about (in a level xvilh tlie eyes; he
should then njo.rk on the back of the sheet the outlines of the
PRESSWORK 229
low areas, using a heavy crayon or pencil for this purpose.
Sonietiines three or more patches may be necessary on an
extremely low place, eacli succeeding patch becoming smaller as
it hears the cenier. The outlines for these patches are to be
marked on tlie sheet. After all of the low places are marked
on the back, the sheet should be turned over and examined on
the face. The back of the sheet should be placed in contact
with a sheet of carbon paper or put on the ink-plate of a press,
and the low places on the face gone over with a pencil. This
will lea\e marks on the back of the sheet.
The sheet is now ready for j)atching. Having secured some
French folio, a little paste, and a sharp knife, put a little dab
of paste on the smallest area first, stick on a piece of French folio,
and with the sharp knife cut the folio to the outline shown by
the pencil-miirk. If more than one jxitch is recjuired on a low
;irca, each succeeding patch covers the smaller one, so that
when the patching is complete the lowest spot in that area has
the greatest numljer of patches. Do not use much paste;
just enough to make the paper stick. Paste on the large patches
with a scries of iiiiger-dabs around the edges and with a few in
the center.
Wlien this spot-up sheet is ready, cut off two diagonally
opposite corners close to the printing, raise the upper tvmpan-
bale, lower the top slieets, and ])aste this make-ready in register
with the impression that was pulled on the lowest manila sheet.
Take out a sheet of the loose stock near the platen. Put the
tympan sheets down smoothly and carefully, clamp the tympan-
bale, and pull another impression. The job should now be
fairly level, with some low ])laces still in e\-idcnce. Go over
this sheet the same as you did ihc ilrst. Should a third spot-up
be necessary, follow the s;imc routine. When everything is
priming clearly and distinctly on the face without showing
much ini])ression on the l^ack, the make-ready is complete.
After tlic job is fully made read}', remove a few of the loose
sheets near the platen and place the [)ressboard just beneath
the draw-slieet. This will give a good, llrm imuression.
230 i':;i\ii\(;
To ux'oid ;ill ri--k of Lrftlinir lln- ->i)()t-up >lirc(s out of register,
always rclrasc tlu' l\'ni|)aii sIktI s !)\" oijimuiil;' tlic haim- txaiipaii-
haK', ])i\'f(.r:!lilv tlu io!) om.-. '1 iu' iij'p;T -liicl ^ can In/ rollrii
down out. of the \\,[\- w'uiio i)u!ii!);i iiiKac-.-ic:!- 011 tlu: iiianila
shci'ls or for jilaciii^ a sjiol-up -A:vv\ in ])o-i{i;in.
Il ail occ\L-ion,.l lottor is -■.■ i'^"'. lia^t it iri;,i;cs no niark on {ha;
slu'ot, it is cxiticnl tliat it i< !)a.(ily worn. \]:\\v il clian^cd ;it
onco. If it (annot It r'-r.!a i-c(1 wiii! a 'ort K i' laic, l/Ut must ])C
usfd, paste cnouLrb lawrs o" pcipcT o:; !m-- i-otioin of it to niako
it t \-po-!ii<j:h.
, \
i-V/A n\\^:^i.i, ■■■■ t:.' I)!:-. 1; :\
cciriiur Kji Uiu lrin;r it would i'i~4i
l,,y. Shouill- !!>.\V \.> Hr
T, .1 l.rlUr.
Occasiotadly a r\^\ijjr irttt-r wiii kv l.adi\- I'altfia'd on ofu
coriaa', ; n(i liirrr \,ili wr.i In- .iMoiluT irtM r in tiir olliic u> rrjilacc
it, luaua; il rnii>l kr u-rd. \\ ill' a iilllf ;-i;;r!u;i; y tiu' |a"a^>!iian
ran niako ilu- iny>ro— ion l'^.'-m i^v \\ p!\ ~; nla'.io. I: i!':;\- p.-
nri'f'-<ai"\" Id o\ar!a\' iha liai'rrid CDriaa nail; a piaco ci (-rd-
koai'd. 1 ail i iic ca I'di loa rd ]•: ' 1 k --'in!; Id ! i. 1 ^ ■ alfd :a d:a -ana
anylc .a- t i,i ^;il i > |- <^ . t ;a' ■ ;; '■ ai oa d; ; 'a- ^da.-' d.iwa: .:ao iii-t
touch the (luana' •>{ ikc ia'oaa laa no; ]iunc'i tia-(na;!i \h>: stock.
(Sec I'iy. 1 ;;.
205. Overlaying. k' a- |i:-,m>-- of n:dday ri-ad\- balftor:;-
pki'i-- i- l.,jo'.',i: : <;. ' //a wo/a. !)'-a;>> da- ca:iina of o\a:aa^-;
k\' h.ind. ik( rr a !'c a naU'l-cr 0! lacciainical nuaiaai ■ of rnakirai
i'j-;i;ss\\()kK 231
them, sc\cT;iI heiii,:^ patented. Tu order to o])t;un a ,i:;radation in
tone \-alues l!ir(>ii':liouL 1 lie pieiure, certain j)arts of the ])late
r.'cniire Uiore ;!n;u-e;^ain l!i;;ri o'dirrs. The dee]) sliadows
r.Miuire the tno-i . \\\c h\-A\4i::]\\> the lea-^t. Between these two
extremes ihi, hi:, )re.--^iwn -luuild IjC A'aried Ijv the number of
.-■■heels lit nwrh.;." 11. ■•.■!. ri\\^;''r.^{ fr^^m ahiout three or four in the
s!:adows lo n, :e ;.! .,H in Me hi\:hd'^ri-|s. 'i'}-e JKilf tones take
ahorn t we shen s li i'\a'r!:.}'. i'o malce a Irind-ciit overhi}', pull
ah-)ui h:i\[ ;, c'o/en inipre^ricns C'f the i/iaiu on i'"rencli foli?) or
"div ]>]\;i'.[ pajier."' L'--e one ;dieet as a IxioixL^iround on wiheli to
p:.s'i' i!^e eu;:ii!'s. "^hit ^i^-e'x- and e,;re!nily around t:ie out-
Inu' ()\ e..eh d;---' > >h.ido\\ end j)a-tc the ia;loui in proper position
on the tjaeh;j;roi:nd. l^o this vdth ah iLl- parts that need o\-er-
le\ inL^. -[.atiij; oil the r> •pdr-he nu:a-h.;- of laN'ers for each place.
Tins must ae .cry aecuraie'}' dene, ity- if an\- ]);irt of an o\-erlay
0-. L-riapv a pa? ; diat vli h-s not rep u: re u. the eiVect wid l^e sj^oiled.
-\iier the o\eria\' is eompieled, ii should lie ])asted on a t\'mpan.
sheet in rce;istar wilh an impres:d»ai that has T)i"'-^'vious!y been
puih'd.
In tile otliei' n-a:l!a':dr: of o\eria\'in'i this pradafion is secured
iy meeiiaTur:-.! nuains. Son^c (■! the proee-s^s are secret, some
ar-' r.itlio" riai o:^ ii;. .\n^"on^' inlcre-ted in n^eclianical o\"erlays
should coivuh. "'ihc A- arican Manual of I'l-esswork,"' page 34.
200, Gaiuea.- After ih.; job i:-. sali-f^icioriiy naide ready,
thi' i:u:'L:^ t-aaa A..; i,-p Tia-re are a num'-er of !j;au(^c-pins on
the Tn;:"Aci, 'au the old fa-hioia-d thrrr-cin pica rpiad seems to
b^_- 1 oldi'p; ia- (a,\ n in la^aai.u" 'a\a)r. A fy>>: pini-'^dw^c, eonsist-
in'.' of a sh^at of iran-aaiaaA cA^iIidd v.adi ruleil lines ];rinted
t; erci, n. aff''a s n p\:Ak iuoAa:d of de'ernuninp marpin-a An
eoaaay aoo'i o:,/. bona •ay. vda n t'u' uA is to in- printed in the
'-i-vWr v.i Aa ■' ;■. P ': 'a ana :a\ ar--r'-S:A;n. (ui A;e dra\v-sheet,
!a' ;■ '1 -h'a't o' 'he -a-r', ;.;: v.-ai'-h -he job is to be printed, and
\[-v i; Of; ifa (bav. - -a;o.-' a-'tb a:e edae (A the jaqKa- apainst the
upper e ha- vA iho 'a'intid raut rr. i h A \-A Aeaoo ,P! i!ie marpin
at A;o i.oiuaa of Aa> sloc!^. .\- on!;.' half of i ae marpin is
waalida' t;aAiotA>aa fold the <^aoi b.uk uiU il it s eclLre touches
i'RINTIXt;
the hottoni of the prinlini:. Tlic jhw cdc'c of llie ]);rper i.^ tlu'
I)ropiT HKiruin. Make I'/.d ])(_iuil-ir,:irks in the Io-.nxt inargin
on the draw-sheet, one i;ear the to]) d tlic jo!), th.e other near the
bottom, and draw a line ])ara'iM wilii the lower ed^irc of the joh.
This is where the hoHom .cruidrs are to Ih' plaeed. I'rocccd in
the same manner for the ^i'-h- a:uid,c, ar/l marl, its ])osition.
''See Fic!. I ^S. '
Procure lliree th,ree-em jiic'i r|ii;id~. "I'laee a little lif'uid
glue on one of the broad -id.r- >•[ eaidi quad, rub it li'.ditiv o\-er
a sheet of ])a])er to di-t '-ibvlf the crlue c.-ridv, wine off all the
glue from blu- top narrow rr'cfe wl:ere tho sheet will tourli. and
put the cjuad on the dra .'.--heel in ])roper ])osition. IMace ail
three guide- in thi,^ way, piri-,--ii;'.j: them do\'Ti tlrmlw J)o thi.-
Cjuicklv; th.en ])uil ;l sheet. ;ip..l lr~t the mar'iin- at op,ee. To
do thi.-, f' >ld the ^heet in had', h,,k' ii 1:) the light, and -ee if both
margin- arr tka- ^a^iu•. If ni'. iv tr wirieli wa,\- an.d, hn.w murh
either one or bi.th guide- vrr{ br na-wdl. arid nv '\"e them
Ijefore tlie giia- h...- l;;,d lia.e t- - W; i '^ m rmi-.c t':o head and
foot Uiartzin- in the -an.r maiin; r. 1 ho LTuide- -hould he n,o\-ed
in the direeti' ^n opot iriie to th,:l in \'. hioh ' i'e printing -lioukl go.
If the printing :diouid go i\nv::,. !i:>''-e t!ie guidi.- up; if the
]>Ri;SS\V()RK
233
printin<i; slioulcl jjjo U]~>, niovc the guides down. With a little
experience the ])ro])er settin,i^M:)f <i;uides should be accomplished
before the glue has had time to set.
After tlie guides are in ])roper position some precaution
must be taken to kee]) the edges of the sheets from cutting
I'll.. i,i().-- Showiim C"iuick"5 and l-'cnders in l\)::;iUon.
between the guides and the draw-sheet. This is accomplished
by making a X'-shaped slit in the draw-sheet, the V pointing
toward tlie guide, and slightly raising the point of the V. As an
additional safeguard, and also to firmly anchor the c^uad to the
draw-sheet, a stri]) of gummed paper should be pasted beneath
\
{\
^\
dva\\"-?li
l-!it in\
^^
/
/
1 llKUlih
Fig, 140. — .'>ho\viii^r \'-sIil and Quad (niitk; Ilcid Down willi Gummed
Manila I'apcr.
the V and carried com]:)letely over the three sides of the guide
and out over the draw-sheet for a distance of about one inch,
llie gummed maiiil;! j>aper used for binding parcels is excellent
for this ])ur])ose. Figs, i^g and 140 will make clear the pre-
ceding explanation.
-\^4
l'ki\ 1 IXC
Two sets of ()ua(i '.niiofs s-houid !k' kej)t on himd, one set
.-oakinL: in water while tiie oilier i> in u,-^;'.
If the job i- a hir:j;e one, with an'iue ni;in.dns, _t;;7/;/;(T.- should
he used to kie[) tliesh,r: a;.{ains; t he lyrni)::ii alter ])rinl iii::; if
it is a sjnall one, lit t le pii ee> of eardiioard, calied fi lulcrs ■ si.e Vy.';.
i^(>), are nsuali)' suhieii'ii: . A feniter '.\ sinvuv a strip of s'iiY
eardhoard, h^Mii al a r^li;a:l ,.n:de, :su; jl'ud lo 1 lie (ira w-du et.
The hent par! of if -■:\i\:i-^. ;;;; diyhiK' f.::ai liie d; :. \\ -.;.ei.i . an;!
the stoels ean he sliii ijene.Lth it. i\ '-er\e- \'^) ]>rc\(n' the foiaa
from puliitiL' the ;-*oa!, awav fror~i the dr.; '\--shvet . I-'eiider>
should he placed on tha aadae :ddc- of ii:e siaTi, :::id at sonic
])oint in the niariAin \'d • ^f Vi^vv v\ih !jv;t ^;rike iia; i}.pe.
/
^ /
Ik. r i I . Hi r,\ 111"" ;i
■1! •! ■ . ,i; a :■ \!;!-, \u- [ .-,| iia.i \\w l'l\,-.
207. Feecing; a
■p-f
ae n:in:ar w; \-aie'; a -neet
should h(. fen in-r; ■ hi ;.o\ ;
of the sheet. !f l!a j'aprr i ■• !
ean he Ln'a-; sed h\' i la' t h; "a
hourd -h'/ht i\' \', 1! h(; it mW'' ']•
I H • ; ! ( : - o u
i>ee : i;a a; :
niantaii ( r;n
'ir eannot
i-i ri M \\ a
ui it . \] ' f
:.nd U-; !;^o io-e. i!
; id • !•■■ tipi-t a' i,;i,
ad Ui' 'o i!a' -h('a-^
i; t' h: or ; i'v iddy,
'■|h hi-"' 'i-
pile
o' irn' p,
PRI-:SS\\()RK
235
This will cause tlic siiccls to project slis^htly (like the leaves of ■
a fill!', so ilial \hv vdy^c-^ m.iv readily oe iSJjr.isped. Grasj) the
e<I,^;e oi lac toj) shcc; i^lwecn the ihunih and index-linger of
the ritriu IuukI, ^aipix.uliiig t!^e l)od}' of the siiect with, the otlicr
tinkers, and turn it co!n{)letcl}' o\-cr, at, the same time swinging
it from the feedhoriril into i)osition on the tympan, and pushing
it up to the guides. i^Sce idg. 142.)
Tlic ])rirLt'.vi slieel is withdrawn with the left hand at the
s;huc tiiiVv- ilia! t';;c plain sheet is being hrouglit o\cr with the
right. Some j^re.-smen insert tlie plain sheet });irtly in the [)ress
r
-■-
ta
\\
1
'■"X , '
' '
'\ '
L
'^
■A t\i:'i;.i:i r:.; .1
PiL- ■■u.nnud" u;,t.
before the nrinted (')Tic :s witlalrawn. This is a very bad habit,
for in nine cases dui of ten the ('C\\'S'. of tiie incoming sheet wiil
touch the ink v)n tlie jirinted sheet -wvX be soiled. I'hi- will not
1)C detecled until the sheets are s; r d;:htened. They must then
iie trinuued lo get clean cdge-^. --'•>metinie- to the detriment of
the n^ar-in, :'nd. :dwavs at nddition:d expen-e for trimming
Ab)re'i\-!T, sprdrgr ij-,. iM-infcd sluMa uTcy !u::rk the ]a:ck of tlu-
plaiii d-i(\'f ;:!v] give it the ;a)T-iearanc? of otT^et.
If it !- iurvvd' k' t(^ \Ml!!drav; the [adnted sheet before the
pk;;!! one iwudw- the pre--. r:iist> the prin^a; -hcet and I'.-v^X the
plain one bone;i(I-) it. not o\\]v it. Th:> \'."d' -Ti-\'a"t -cTiuLr.
236
I'RINIIXC.
If you ha\e trouble in withdrawint;; the sheet because the
finj^ers slij) over it, eitlier f:isten a ])iece of sandpaper to one
fmirer with a rul)ber band, or moisten the tinker occasionally
on a j)iece of rair saturalcxl v/ith ^dycerine. Do not wet the
hn_c:er v^itli spittle. Such practice is unhx^izienic.
There is a dilTi'rencc ])i't\\een tb.e two sides of every sheet of
uncoated ])ai)er. 'I'!ii< is due to Ihe fact that it is almost im-
J''i(;. ij-;.- hr\ iim-r;ii k~ and I'rainc.
I)ossibic to eliminate tiie mark of tlie wire -creen from one side of
the paper (>ee Srrtiun 2^\]'. The rou.Ljh ^ide is the ^vire side,
the smooth side i.-^ the feh siije. W'itli some ])apers this dilTer-
ence i> >o jjronounced tli;it to ])rint on the wire side would spoil
the iol). I'hxaminc the -t'-i !; e;irefulb/ liefore ])rintim,' on it.
208. Drying the Sheets. - If tlu- form is a liirlit one or the
stock ab^orbs the inl-; rc'adiiy, the jjrinted sheets may be jjiled
PRESS WORK 237
without " offsetting "; that is, without the ink on one sheet
marking the back of the sheet above it. If there is danger of
olTset do not pile the ])rinte(l sheets, but kiy them out on drying-
racks (Fig. 143), in such manner that one sheet does not touch
the printing on the other. Letterheads can usuaUy be over-
lapped, somewhat after the manner of laying shingles on a roof.
If the job is a small one, and from twenty to thirty piles can be
laid out on a drying-rack, begin at one corner of the rack and
lay oil as many j)iles as the rack will hold. By the time the
sheet for the last pile has been laid the first sheet placed on the
rack should be dry enough to hold another sheet without off-
setting. Go over the piles in regular order. Watch carefully
for olTset. If it occurs, the job must be slipsheeted as directed
in the following section.
209. Slipsheeting. — When one printed sheet offsets on the
next it is necessary to slipshcct the job. This consists in putting
sheets of some rough-surfaced stock between the i)rinted sheets,
placing them alternately, first a printed sheet then a slipsheet.
Paper known as heavy news is frequently used, but oiled manila
is much better and lasts longer. Never use enameled paper for
slipsheets, or the sheets will stick together. Inasmuch as it
recjuires the services of a boy to put the sheets in and take them
out again, slipsheeting is never resorted to if it can be avoided.
Sometinies a press-feeder can put the slipsheets in while he is
running the job, but usually at a sacriike of speed. If the job
can be put out on a rack in layers, each layer can be slip-
sheeted by the feeder. The slipsheets should be within reach
of the feeder's left hand. As he linishes each layer he can
quickly catch a slipsheet and place it without missing an
impression.
210. Envelopes. — If an envelope be held to the light it will
be seen that certain parts of it overlaj-), producing one or two
extra layers of paper. If the printing strikes at such a j)oint
a cutout must be made from the envelope itself and pasted on
the tympan so that there will be equal thicknesses of paper at
all points. (See Fig. 144.)
,s
J'klX i l.\G
(■ '';.', .1 . I'
i!h'- air
« I . .-. ; I
;; . • I -Lu::;:.-
J'K];SS\\'()RK 2V)
slip llie flap into fhc cin-clopc nnd cut a,w;i.y the end of the fliip
l-y followini,' liie oulline of the ui)T)er ed.t^e of the b;ick of the
en\'e!()])o, iisin-i' a shar]) knif'?. Now cut, away the entire back
of the envek.pe, bein;; ciroful to ])reserve the full outline or
dimensions, retainiu'^ notinnii; luit the front of the envelope and
the remaining section of the flar). The cutout sliould now be
pk-.ced in ])osition. i'l:!ce a perfect cnveloi)e on the guides and
dniw a ])encil-niark or^ t lie dniw-slieet along the bottom and side
of thiC envelope. ]\enn)\-e the envelo])e and stab a few holes
along ti'.is ])encil-m;;rk ris a guide for jdacing the cutout on the
sheet be!ie;ith. liaise tlu' npjKT tym])an-bale, lower the draw-
sheet, and j>;;ste t];e cutout on tlie first niam'la tymjirai sheet
be!(i\v the drr:w-s]ieet. Rei)lace the drriw-shicet, and })ull an
in^iiression. If the ^^c)^k h;is ijeen careful!}" and properly done,
the [)rinting should ])resent a uniform aj)pearance.
if tlie en\-elope l;;is ;i jirinted addres--, covering the lower half
oi" it, make it ready a^ if for a plain sheet (jf paper, set the guides,
and cut out the two parts where th.e sides and Ijott.om are glued
togcMdier, following tlie outline closeh'. Put the cutout in posi-
tion on tlie nianila tympan sh.cet as (]escrii)e(l above.
Any envelojic c:;n ])C made rc;idy in tins manner. In making
a cutout it is simply nccessar}' to ha\-e enou:^!! ])ieces of ]>a])er of
proper slaijie in pterfeci regi'^1(T, so th.it when tl:e en\-elo])e and
tlie cutout ;;r(^ pi:iced in position tlie}' will give ari e([u;d mmilier
(^f kivi^rs of i);iT)er. If tlie en\-eJupe h;is ffuu" t hicknesses of ])aper
at one point, three at arother, wud two at anotlier, it will be
id two jtieces to tha two la\'ers, one piece to the
,-e !U)Tie ;i1, all where tliere are four layers.
1 cutout use one of the en\-clo]>es, so that
lily ])C Uyl'-v'cd, If ijie en^•elol;cs are to be
aj) fa:a t'> ;.:i (an-eloi)e, cud \\-here the four
;y ihc wliole four layers; where the three
\' iv:'\ retaining one; wlierc the two la}-ers
th. 'i'his will leave 'MK !;i\'er (ATr the three
iud two over the two. making four. When
llu' cuLv)ut a.iid thi' (auelopc are ];)ut into register and held to the
necessary to
;ul
d tV^
three !a\Trs,
;in
(1 Ik
Wlien maki;
theoutliee-^
'''■'.
;' re.-
i'rd closed, a
ura
! ne
■f.
, cr
;' av
laA"ers occur,
(K'cur, r-' .:ir;
kivors, niaki
cu
' ;!W
four.
243
PklNTIXc,
li.dit it will he f(jun(l that they present a uniform tone. Put
this cutout in position as der^crilied ab()\-e.
211. Opening and Closing Envelopes.— The printing of
envelopes is very hard on type, owing to the particles of gum
S'.ip one tla;)
Fi;ips !jent iiack so t:
(.:r.vc'io;)es ■.vlV. lie ::;■-
r"iG. 145. — ]\lL-thc)(l (if Opening out Enx-eldpe Flap^.
that frequently stick to them. If the price obtained for {>rintinr;
them admits, it pays to open out the flaj^s before ])rinting.
Fig. 145 illustrates how this should l)e done. Orasp a pack (of
twenty-tivc) in the left hand and bend the en\-elopes back
'u;. 14(1.- -Slvv.'/i
r W"
slightly at the top so as to raise the flap of llie tup one. Grasp
the uprai.-ed tlap with the thumb and lingers of the riLrht hand,
slip the top of ihe etix'elope iienealh the llap of the one beneath,
and push il complelel\' under, (ira-p the ikip 01 lluit one, and
proceed in like manner until tlie llaps of tlie wh.oie pack ha\-e
rki;ss\\()RK 241
been slipped one under the other. Raise the flaps and Ijend
them back far enough to cause the envelopes to He straight.
With a little practice this can be done \-ery quickly.
The envelopes may be closed while in the act of taking them
from the press. Withdraw the envelo[)e with the left hand by
sliding it up the tympan. As the flap projects above the edge
of the tym})an, close it with the thumb (See Fig. 146.)
212. Frisket. — Owing to the fact that parts of a form some-
times become inked and mark the printed sheet, it is often nec-
essary tc resort to the use of a frisket. This is a sheet of manila
paper stretched tightly between the grippers and glued to them.
An im[)ression of the form is ])u!led on the manila sheet, and
holes are cut in it so that the type may go through and print on
the sheet beneath.
213. Registering. — Registering seems to be about as puz-
zling to the beginner in i)res5work as imposition is to the average
compositor. The fact that everything is in reverse seems to
confuse. If the job is too low on the sheet, the guides must be
moved down; if it is too high, they m.ust be moved up.
When printing a job in more than one color, pull plenty of
register-sheets of the kev-[)late or form, and register each suc-
ceeding color into the key-form. Registering can be facilitated
by pulling an impression on the draw-sheet, oiling a register-
sheet so that the impression can be seen through it, and then
mo\'ing the register-sheet until it is in register with the impres-
sion on the draw-sheet. Draw a pencil-line around the guide
sides of the sheet, and mark the i)osition of the guides (a register-
sheet having been mar]-:ed and preserved for this purpose).
Have tJic guides in the sar,ic position for all the colors.
DilTiculty is sometimes encountered in regir^tering vignetted,
three-color halftone plates in the center of a large sheet, espe-
cially if th ^ jcjb is a small one. Owing to the fact that there is no
circumscribing outline, some prominent point in the center must
be taken ;is a registering-[)oint. For a trial register, set the
guides as Ijcfore described. If one j)lace is in register, and the
balance of the job seems to swing around that point as a center,
242 PRTXTTXG
Stick a pin throu,2;h that central ])()int, rcmovt the (guides, and
very carefully swinj^ the sheet the re(|uire(l amount. Replace
the guides. The reason for ren"io\-inL; the Lmides is that one of
the bottom pjuides must <^o down and the other up when a sheet
is swunp; around a center. Moreover, tlie side guide would be
crooked. A movement of two ])oints near the center of a sheet
may require a mo\-ement of ten points at the guides.
214. Slurring of Rule Jobs. — When a job is completely
surrounded by rule and all the corners are perfectly joined, tlie
pressman is frecjuently troubled by his inability to overcome
slurring, that is, ])roducing a double mark on the sheet. This
slurring is due to the air which is compressed inside the rule
border at the moment the sheet touches the rule. The air is
forced out over the edges of the rule, causing the sheet to move
slightly and resulting in a slur. This happens more frequently
on a ])ress with a sliding ])laten. It can be obviated by drilling
a coui)le of holes through the rule as an outlet for the air.
215. Embossing. — Kmbossing is the pressing of paper or thin
cardl)oard between a pair of dies so as to leave the design in
relief. The first essential is the die, which is usually of brass and
hand cut. All the details that are to a})pear on the face of the
finished ]>ro(luct are cut into the brass plate. If the plate is not
type-high, it is mounted on an iron base. The best way t(~
mount a plate is to attach it with screws to the iron base.
Lacking this, the next l)est (and usunl) wa}- is to coat one side of
a stri]) of hea\'y manila ])a])er witli glue, and wrap it about
the iron ba.se until it has b>een built \\\) to tlie pro])er height.
Then glue the br;:ss ])late to the manila ;)aper, holding it under
pressure until lirmly set. As embossing re(|U;res considerable
pressure it should only be attempted on strongly built presses.
After the glue is thoroughly dry, the plate should be locked
up in a chase and clamped on the bed of the press. The next
step is the n;aking of the counter. This is done by the {■)ress-
ma.n in various wa}'s, one of which is as follows: strip olT the
tympan, leaxiug the jtlaten bare. Clue a sheet of strawboard
to the ])later,. While the glue is ^ettiim, mix a, little Alabastin^
tRESSWORK 243
with enough liquid plue and sodium silicate (sokible water-
glass) to make the com[)ound of atjout the consistency of putty.
Smear this in a fa rly even layer on the strawboard in such
position that it will cover the die. Oil a sheet of tissue or
French folio paper and cover the composition with it. Go over
the inside of the die with an oily rag or dust it with French chalk
(powdered soapstone) to prevent the composition from sticking
to it if the oiled j^aper should break. Start the press and apply
the j)ressure gradually, letting the press go over once, with a
lingering squeeze. Remove the oiled sheet and examine the
counter. If it has failed to fully fill the deep parts of the die,
apply a little more composition where it seems to be needed,
cover with an oiled sheet, and pull another impression as before,
If the counter is now perfect, trim off the surplus compositioii
while it is still plastic, cutting it away entirely where it is not
needed. Allow room on the strawlioard for the guides.
Leave the press wide open so that the composition will
harden quickly. It is better to make the counter just before
leaving in the evening, so that it may harden overnight. It
should be as hard as stone in the morning. If the counter has
any sharp or rough places that seem to break or tear the stock,
they may be smoothed with fine sandpaper.
Another method (which the author has seen highly recom-
mended, but which he has never tried) is to use an old talking-
machine disk. Soften this by the aid of the heat from a paint er's
gasoline torch or a Bunsen burner, and make the counter while
it is in a plastic condition. If tlie first strike is not a comi)lete
success, soften it again and add more impression. This hardens
at once.
216. Perforating. — Perforating-rule conies in two heights —
type-high and slightly higher. When it is run in type forms, it
should be just t}-pe-h.igh. The cutting-edge is sharp, and if it
sticks up above the type, there is nothing to pre\'ent it from cut-
ting into the rollers and ruining them. It will also cut into the
draw-sheet and pile up an aggregation of ink in the perforations,
Fven when th.e rules are type-high they should, if possible,
.^44 i'ki\ri\(;
[■»ro]cct beyond the cdi^c of ihr [)ri:itcd sheet, and each end should
I'c abutted with :[ sliort ;)iecc '.'f three-[)()int face-rule to prevent
the end- from cutting; the roHers. The three-point rule can be
prcwnled ir^un marking the draw-sheel by usini; a frisket.
It would be an iuipro\-enient if perforatinci-rule were slightly
lower thin tvpe-high so tli.it it would not touch the rollers at all.
A thin sheet of zinc or bra-- under the draw-sheet could be used
lo give tlie required iinpr(.'>-ion for a clean cut. Of course, this
would not be fea-il)le if tyj)c came very close to the rule.
217. Scoring. — All machine-rjiade ])a])ers have what is
known a- .1 grain. That is, the sheet will fold and tear more
readil}' in one direction than the other. The grain runs the
length of the stock on the j)a])cr-making machine, and usually
the long way of the sheet. It is impossilde to fold some cover
stocks across the grain without cracking them. When the
stock must be folded in that direction it must be scored. This
consists in mashing the fibers with a thin, blunt edge. A j)iece
of brass rule is usually used for this i)urpose, being locked in a
cha.-e in ])roper [)Osition. As no printing is to be done the
rollers should be remoNX-d. The make-ready consists in adding
sheets to the tympan until the rule mashes the stock just
enough, so that it will fold without breaking, but not until it is
sutTicient to cut it. If tlie .-lock is a co\-er for a book, two
scoring-rules may be neces-ar;c, the distance between them
beini: equal to the width of the back of the book. All scoring
should lic done on the out-ide of the sheet. If there is ])rinting
on the inside of the <heet it .-hould be doi'ic before the scoring, as
the -coring ha- a tendcncv to lieml the sheet.
Scoring i.uil ])rip.tin'j: can be done at oiie orveraiion. If the
primed miirl; made b\- the -corirvi-rule is (-bjectionidjle, it can
be jirev-euted ]>y the u-e of :i fri-ket. (See >ection 212.) It sel-
dom -how- ;i!;er t!a' .dieei i- foliieil.
218. Cutting and Slitting. — Slit- and cutouts of various
sizes and slia'pe.- can be made i>n a platen press liy the u>e of
>teel cuttirvj-rule as-emb!ed into ])roper form. If the outline
is n(jt reei.an:'ular. tlic u-ual methotl is to la\' out the sha])e in
PRESSWORK 245
lead-pencil on an old electrotype block from which the plate
has been removed. The block is then cut along tlie pencil-
marks with a jig-saw, and the cutting-rule bent to lit the saw-
cuts. The block is then locked up in a chase. Cutting-rule
is of just the right temper so that it ma\' be bent without break-
ing; it should be severed with a three-cornered file.
Best results are obtained when the cutting-rules strike
against a thin sheet of zinc or brass ])laced under the draw-sheet
on the tympan. If the piece of stock that is cut out sticks in
the cutting-die instead of falling to the floor, a few pieces of cork
- I'l.-rforutiiit,' ru'i' ^Soorins-'-i'uks
2 <? The Terabciitine Co.
C B. -118 and 419
^ 3' Mariner and Merchant
H r^ EuildinK
2 5 PHIL.VDELPHIA, PA.
>Cuttoig-ru!(:
'The
disappearing
Dollar"
Yours — perhaps.-
Fic. 147. — A Job that was Prinu-d, C'lil. Stored, and Perforated at One
Operation.
glued to the block near the rule v;ill eject it. A sheet of heavy
paper on the floor to catch the cuttings will facilitate cleaning
up after the jol) is fmislied.
219. Printing, Cutting, Scoring, and Perforating at One
Operation. — By the exercise of a liale ingenuity, tlie ]>ressman
can frequently accomplish severed things wiili one impression.
In Fig. 147 is shown a jol) that v/as printed, cut, scored. ::nd per-
forated at one operation.
An impression of the job was I'lr.-t i)r,iK-d and all llie type
underlaid; then the rules were ail })usbA'd d';wn so that thcv
would not take ink. The rollers w(;re raised so that the\- would
246 PKIXTIXG
not mash into the type. Tlie job was made ready and enough
impression put on the wirious rules to make them cut, score, or
perforate, as refjuirefL When \V(jrking a job of this kind if
there is diiTicuhy in getting the dap up after it is cut and scored,
a piece (;f springy cardboard glued to the draw-sheet will serve
to open it.
220. Printing a Two-color Register Job by the Aid of a
Frisket. — Fig. 91 sl;ows a two-color job for a tall}--card, the
various });irts of which had to Ijc kept in i)erfect position.
Such a job is diiTicult to set, and more diiTicult to skeletonize.
There is reall\- no need io skeletonize it, for it can be kept
intact and })rinted l^y the aid of a frisket. Pull a j)roof of the
job on light cardboa.rd and cut out the t\'])e not desired. Paste
this on the back of the form, in perfect register, then lay the
form on the stone, unlock it, a.nd push down the type not desired,
plane the form, and lock it up again. Strips of the same card-
board should be glueil to the ndler-tracks to raise the rollers.
Take out enough ])acking from the tym])an to com])ensate for
the thickness of the cardijoard underlay. ^lake the job ready.
Cut a frisket so that onl\- t!ie j^rinting desirecl will };e impressed
on the ^het't. If the other part- do print slightly the ink will
get on the fri>ket, not ow the slieet.
After the lir.-t color i.-- comi)leted, Avash up the ]^ress. put uj-
the other color, cut a new underla\', ju.-t tlie re\-erse of the lirst,
bringiuL: wo wlial was down, ])ushing down what was up, make
a nrw owri;i\- and a new frisket. Be v-ry carrfnl not to dis-
plarr tlw draii-:-/!'' t, thereb}' altering the guides. The jolj v.'ill
the!) be in perfect regi.-ter.
221. Washing Up. — It is generall\- conceded that the best
solulio'i for w:;-!:ip.g roller.- is kero-ene. It is not inflammable
at (jrdinar}' t enu >er..turcs. as i- benzine and gasoline, and it
leax'es a certain aiv.ount of oiline-s on the rollers that is con-
ducix'e to loll:: life. ikaizine ewqiorates r|uickl\', and fre-
ciUentK' t:d--.e- l!ie' -uctiou \',i'h it.
Benzine i- in. liigh fa\-or \'.-itli rom])Ositors for cleaning tyi)e
IjCcause it ewipor^te'- at once, and, if necessarv, another proof
PRI':SS\V()RK 247
can be pulled very shortly after washing the type. This is
impossible with detergents of an oily nature. Type that is
frequently washed with benzine finally becomes encrusted with
dirt, and a lye l)ath is then necessary for a perfect cleansing.
222. Removing Hard Ink from Rollers and Press. — When
rollers and presses are neglected or not thoroughly cleaned,
they become encrusted with hard ink. This also happens with
ink-knives and ink-slabs. There docs not seem to be any-
thing Cjuite so efTicient for softening these incrustations as
dead-oil. This is a gas-house product, with a characteristic odor.
Carbon tetrachloride is also recommended for this purpose.
223. Safety Devices. — Only within a comparatively few
}'ears has it been recognized that every member of our complex
social system has a definite producti\'e capacity and monetary
value, and tliat the maiming or the shortening of the life of an
indi\-idual is just so niuch loss to the community at large.
Legislators ha\-e taken up the matter, and laws are ])eing passed
compelling employers of labor to safeguard their workmen.
No piece of machinery that in any wise jeopardizes the life or
]U'rson of the attendant should l)e permitted to l)e used without
proper s;ifety attachments. Printing machinery is particularly
dangerous.
All e\])()scd gear-wheels on ])rinting-presses should be
encased, so that it Avill lic inipossildc for the attendant to be
caught, no matter how careless lie inax' be. Fl\'wheels should
be co\ered with sheet-iron on the outside so that no one can
get between the sjx^kes.
There is liardh' a ])rinting office that has not at least one
I'ressnian or feeder who, at some time, has not had a finger (per-
haps a wliole hand) mash.ed in a platen press. There are now
sexx'ral (le\"ices on the market that will lift the feeder's arm out
of the way in time to a\()id accident. I-^'ery press should be
e(|ui{)ped with some such device. Fig. 148 shows a (le\'ice for
this ]iur])Ose. True, attendants are freciuentl\- Acry foolhardy;
they will take big chances to accom])lish something without
".topping the press. Sometimes safety attachments are thrown
24'S
I'RI.NIMNX;
back or out of use. Dont lake surli risks. If sometliin^ serious
should ha])pen, it will neees>itate a nnieh lonj^er slo]), and it
may mean a ])ainful and. ])ermanenl, disabilit}'. No amount of
safeguarding; will prexent an accident unless there is intellii^ent
co-o])iM'ation on the ])ai't of the workman.
While this cha])ter is dexoted to ])kiten ])resscs and not to
cylinder presses, tlie author cannot refrain from telling of twc
accidents an.d one near-acci(k'nt on cylinder ])resses with which
he was j^ersonally a.c(|uainted. The two accidents ha])])ened in
])recisely the same way, one of them seriously. In both cases
the pressman was ti-ying to renio\'e something from the form-
Mc,. i.|S. --S\Kc>ur S;ifcly I)c\M(x- for JdI) I'rcssi's.
rollers while the prc-s \va- running, and just at flie moment of
reversal r;!( h had a hand and ;ii-in drawn ])i"tween the rollers.
F()r1un;!tel\ , in one case tlu' fecdei- stoi)])ed the ])ress imnie-
diatel\- 1)\ throwing!; off the ])ower and ])ressing hi> body again>t
the llywhccl. This accident i-e-ulled in a l)a(lly si)raine(l hand.
The second pre-^niaii was not ^o fortunate. His arm was
drawn in up lo liie elbow, net ('.-.--ilal ing ampiUation.
'i'he nciir-.ici ident oii'urred when a machinist was working
beneath a cxiindei- pi-e-> and pu>he(i his foot against the back-U])
lexer, lie didn't know he wa? doing it, but thought sonu'one
i'Ki:ss\\()RK: 249
was start i!\ii; the i)ress. When lie nioxx'd to ,i;et out. of harm's
\\a\' hv ren;o\ecl the eau>e. Moral: nex'er <;et under a cylinder
])ress to tix anxiliin!^ or clean u]) while the ])ower is attached.
If it Is l)elt-dri\en, throw olT the belt; if it is electric-connected,
pull out the fuse.
If \'ou are ruiuiinii; a ])ower cuttin.ir-n-iachine, keep your eye
on the \icious knife-l)lade luitil it conies to a full stop. Under
no circumstance he tempted to reach under the knife until you
know you are safe. This is the one dani^'erous machine that
caiuiot well he guarded, ^'ou must be }'our own guardian.
Xe\er wipe around any kind of press while it is in motion.
Keep in niind the slogan, '" Safety tirst ! "' Remember also, that
a cai'eful workman is the best safet}' de\-ice.
gii:.SiK)XS ()\ CllAPTIiR XIV
1. W hal is a jilaU'ii press ?
2. l)i'srril)C' iho dilTcrt'iil t\'pc's of ])laU'ii presses.
3. Whit'li part cf the press is the bed ?
4. \\ Jiii'li part of tile press is the [)lalen ?
5. W'liat is a t> ini)an ?
0. \\1iat is I lie (irav.-siieel ?
7. WTiat are tlie in'i{)pers ? Why are they used ?
S. ( )f what use are roller-l)earers ?
(). W'ltat inm'edieiits are usually used in composition rollers ?
10. \\ liy is it neie-sar_\- to \ary the ingredients during the different
s;asons of the \"ear ?
M . 1 )eseril)e t he ph_\->ieal eliaracteristies of a roller in perfect condition.
12. \\ iiat causes some inks to ha\'e a deleterious actitui on composition
r Jlers ?
I,-;. \\ li>- is it neces>ar_\' to chanu'e the gudireons on composition rollers ?
14. What special care should you exeridse when oiling a press ?
15. Why are forms t'onlaining wooden fiu-iiiture usually loose after
standin--,' for some time '-'
[(). Why -liould roller- not he allowed to stand in contact with form or
•nk4)late fia- aii_\- lenul h of lime ?
17. Sliould or shoiiK! noi a printed sheet show an\- impression ?
i.s. W huh f- belter, a hard or a soft [lacking ?
i(). Whal cau-es type to wear round on its edges .-'
20. What will |M-e\ent type from wearing round on its edges'-
PKiXTIXC;
;"i. If type i? rounded <in its (.'(I.t^'cs, how can we ^ct it to leave a jierfect
impression on a sheet '■:
12. Desirihe how you would phu c a form on a platen i)ress, tellirf:
what each mo\-e is intended to aeeomplish or a\()i(h
2^. Should the (juoins he at tlic top or bottom of a form ? \\'h_\ ?
2.\. \\ hat do _\ou understand hy mal^e ri'acK :'
25. (;i\e a lull desrri[)tion of your method of maki!i^' a form read}' for
printing:.
2t). Why is it ina<l\'isal)le to carry much ink while makinj^' a, form ready ?
27. What is an " <)\crla_\- " ? an "underlay""?
2S. Why is it adxisahle to open the upper tympan l)ale instead of tlic
lower one when pullin,'-r impressions on the tympan sheets and when placinj^
the make rt'adx' in po>ition ?
20. Desciahe the makin.^ of a hand-cut o\cilay for a halftone.
30. W hat is a tympan-.u'au.Lje ?
31. Describe the settiuL;: of (|uad f:uides on a jjlaten ])riss.
_^2. W h_\- do we luake \'-siiaped slits in tl)i> draw sluet near the ;zi-iides ?
,^,-;. W hat is a fender 'i \\ hy is it used ?
,v].. \\ hat do _\"ou understand 1)_\- buckling' or crimpin;:; a sheet as api)lie(l
to ])res> fi'cdin.t; ?
35. I low would \'ou " ll_\- "" a sheet when feedin.t,' a pri'ss ?
,^(^. What will happt'U if the inconu'n;;; slietl rubs o\i'r the surf;ue of the
{)rinted sheet as it i> bein^ withdrawn from the press ?
37. II \'ou were: ha\in;j; diliicultN' in withdrawiiiij; sheets from the {)ress,
how would you ON-eriome it i
^S. I low can \'ou distinj,aiish the ri^dit from the wi'oiiy side <:l the pa])er ?
30. What is olYM-t ?
40. ilow should lettei'heads be laid out to ax'oid oiYsetlini; .•'
41. Why is it neccssar_\- to slipsliect a job ?
42. What kinds of paper may be used for slipshi'cls ? What kinds ma\'
not be u>c(l ?
4-;. hcscribc the making of an enxclope cutout.
44. 1 )e>! ribc how I he lla|)S of en xclnpis should be opcu'd.
45. I low ma\- 1 he llap- of en\'elope-; be closed \\hile in the at t of drawing
I he en\elo[»es from 1 he pres> ?
40. W'jial i> a fri>kcl i llow i-- it macle, and why is it used ^
47. W lien prinlini,' Jobs in more than one color why is it necessary to
!ia\e the iruides alwaxs in the sanu' po-ition lor e\"ei'y sheet .-'
4S. I )cscribe a nielhod of ;,'ettin,L': a small job in '■e,ud^U•r in the cenler (.f a
.aru'e sheet.
.)(). llow would > ou prexcnl a rule job li'om : birring."
50. Whal i- embi i.— in;,', and how i.- it done?'
^ I. \\ hat i- iiei-foial in:: 1 ule ^
TRESSWORK 251
52. Is it an advantage or a disacK'antagc to have perforating-rulc
higher than type-high ? Cii\-e your reasons.
53. What is scoring, and why is it necessary ?
54. If you wanted to print and score at tlie same operation, how would
you prcN'ent the scoring-rule from marking the sheet ?
55. What do you understand by cutting and slitting ?
56. If you wished to m;.ke a cutout, irregular in shape, how would you
proceed ?
57. If the piece of stock that is being cut out should stick in the cutting-
die, how would \-ou eject it ?
58. Describe how you would prepare a form so that you could print,
cut, score, and perforate at one operation.
5(). How may r. two-color register job be printed without skeletoniz-
ing it ?
60. Why is benzine not as good as kerosene for washing rollers ?
CIIAI'TKR XV
PK1N[1.\(;-I.\K
224. Composition. - I'he object of this chapter on printing-
ink is not to <iWc llie student a full and comprehensive treatise
on its manufacture, hut sim])ly to ])()int out a few things regard-
ing it and its use that a ])rin1er should know. The manufacture
of ])rintingdnk is too com])lex a ])rocess for the a^■erage kiyman,
in\()l\ing as it does a knowledge of cliemistry. In general, the
ink may he said to consist of a pi'^moit, a vehicle, and a drier.
\'ari()us otlier suhstances are added for s])ecilic ])uii)oses, ])ut
unless one is familiar with the composition of an ink, it is unwise
to make additions that may enter into chemical coml)ination
with it, foi- other })r()])erties may he im])arted that will completely
dehar it from use. .All (k)ctor!ng of an ink should he done hy
the maker, or hy the use of ingredients made and recommended
])y him.
225. Pigments. -There is an inlimte munher of })igments
used in the making of ])rint ingdnk, some of them occurring as
earths in a raw ov natural slate, some are hurned, some are ])re-
ci])ilate(l from chernical mixtures, and others are made hy dyeing
a hase with some coloring matter. \o mattfr what the ])rocess
of ])reparat ion, the ohiecl of t!ie i)igment is to gi\e hody and
color to the ink. d'lie i)ignients used in printing-inks vary in
tinctorial sti'cnglh. hor}' hlack has greater cowring power
thari cither carhon hlack or lam])hlack. I'\)r this reason a
high price ink i< sonicliincs cheaper in tiie long run than a low-
[)rice one, hecau:-!-, co.^l foi' co-l, it will coxcr a larger area than
will t he low -j irire nnc.
226. The Vehicle. 1 he vehicle whi(h carries the ])igment
and ])ermit~^ it to he rolled out and s|iri'ad thinly o\er a surface,
2.S2
PRTX'J'IXC.-TXK 253
is varnish. Varnishes for printing-inks are made from rosin-oil
and from linseed-oil, the better j^rades bein.e; made from the
latter. Linseed-oil is obtained from the seeds of the flax plant.
The seeds are erushed, heated, and put into hydraulic presses
which squeeze out the oil, leavint^ a residue known as oil-cake,
which is used as fodder. The seeds are about sixty-five per
cent oil. The raw oil is boiled for detinite ])eriods, de])ending on
the consistency or viscosity desired. The longer the oil is
boiled the more viscid it becomes. It is thus possible to obtain a
varnish suitable for mixing ink for almost any purpose. Each
particular branch of printing requires a different kind of ink.
The inks used in lithography, die-stamping, or intaglio printing
are not adapted for letterpress work.
227. The Drier. — When linseed-oil, or a varnish made from
it, is exposed to the air it absorbs oxygen and turns to a gum.
When a varnish and a pigment are intimately mixed together,
each individual ])article of pigment is encysted in a covering of
varnish. When rolled out thinly and ex])ose<l to the air, the
varnish dries l)y absorbing oxygen from the air. This drying
can be accelerated by ntixing with the varnish some substance
that will yield up oxygen to tlie mixture or cause it to take it up
f[uicker from the air. Such sul)stanc('s are called driers. There
are quite a number of combinations used, but one of the best
is a mixture of the oxides of lead and manganese. Prussian,
Chinese, and bronze blues have a natural affinity for oxygen and
dry ciuickly.
Nearly every ink-maker has his own formula for the making
of driers, and it is well to use ink and drier from the same manu-
facturer. You then know that the drier is ada])ted to the ink.
Driers come in liciuid and in paste form The paste form is
considered the better, especially for inks that are to be kept
stitT, because it does not thin the ink as does the li([uid form.
Soft ink will dry quicker on absorbent paj)er than on hard
paper, because dr_\-ing is facilitated by the absorptive ])ower of
the stock. Soft ink should not be used on hard paper because
the pa])er is not absorbent. Hard ])a])ers require stiff inks, and
254 PRIX'JIM.
the ink sliouUl ])e firmly ])re55ed into the paper. Stiff inks dry
1a- oxidation; -oft inks ])artly by ab.S()r])tion, jjartly b\' oxidation.
228. Pressroom Temperature and Humidity. — To the unin-
itiated, the puttini,' on of ink and the ])rinting of a job appears
the simplest of operations. So it is when e\X'rythin_<f is just
ri,Ldit. Hui e\'er\-thin^ i>n"t ahva^'s just ri^ht. K\'ery change
in temperature or in the amcjunt of moisture in the air alters
conditions. Ink that ,i:i\e> sati>fa('t;.r\' results at one tem-
perature may not work well at another. Pa|)er that will not
''pick" unrler ordinar}- conditions ma}' peel off on a damp day.
The ink may be too >iiff or too soft. It ma\' <ii\'c a mottled
impres>ion. It ma\' offset. Sometimes ink will dr\' on the
press while runninir, but will not dr\- o\'ernight on ])a])er. In
fact, the pressman's troubles are legion.
The tinie is undoubtedly coming, and is, perhaps, not far
distant, when the u])-to-date pre^snxjm will be glass-encased,
where tem])erature and humidity can be kej)t under perfect
control. When thi^ is done a major portion of the trouble will
be eliminated. Not onl\- does humidity affect the working
Cjualities of rollers and ink, but it also entails endless troulde in
the registering of forms, especially with enamelled papers.
Taper forty-four inche< long has been known to expand one-
fourth oi an inch o\ernight. Xearl}' e\'er}" experienced press-
man can recount some unpleasant ex])erience resulting from the
ex])an-ion of })aper. The author knows of one job, printed in.
nine colore on enamelled ])a])t'r. It took about two weeks to
(iimplete the jol). during which, timr there were many changes
of temperature and humidit\'. If one color ran owr from one
da\- ti; the next, tlu' fu'-t d;i\-'< woi'k would not alwa}-s register
with the iiext d,i \'V \\'()rk. If the humidit}' x'arii-d from morniim
to e\"eiiing, the >heet> al-o \'aried : -o did t lie rcLn'-ter. When the
iob \va- comjileted, about oiie-lialf of the .-heet.- were thrown
a\va\ berau.-e the\' did not reL'i-ter.
229, Adapting Ink to Stock.— In order to ])ro(luce a perfetl
elTerl in jirinlitiLr. the ink nui-t be >uited to the stock. If the
Job ha- main' lialftoiie- of fine >crcen. a highly enamelled ])aper
rRL\rjx(;-ixK 255
is essential. If the coatintr on tlie |)a])er is tender, a st)ft ink
must be used to ])re\-ent the ''taek "" of the ink from i)ullin,<f off
the eoatint^. The best pkm for oN'ercomin.u; l)kiek-ink troubles
with halftones on enamehed paper is to ha\-e two inks from the
same maker, one a soft halftone black the other a stiff halftone
black. I>y a judicious mixin<r of these two, any consistency
re([uired may be obtained. If the stiff ink is too stiff, add the
soft ink; if the soft ink is too soft, add the stilT ink. In fact,
if the ])rinter be provided with two different consistencies for
each color of ink, he can overcome nearly all his troubles. It
may be argued that the addition of a thin \'arnish will accom-
plish the same result, ])ut such is not the case. If varnish is
added to an ink the ink is thinned and its covering power
decreased. More ink is secured but it has less pigment per
square inch; on the other hand, if the soft ink as sent out by
the maker is used the covering power is retained yet the ink
is softened.
230. How to Remedy Ink Troubles. — A proper apprecia-
tion of the changeable composition of a printing-ink and of the
multitude of variable conditions that arise during its use usually
leads to the best ways of overcoming ink troubles. Every
change in temperature produces a change in the consistency of
the ink. If the ink gets cold it becomes stiff and causes trouble.
To remedy this, the temperature niust be raised, or if this is not
possiljle, the consistency must be A'aried, usually by the use of
a thinner \-arnish, or, better, by ndxing the stiff ink with a softer
ink. If the temi)erature rises, making the ink too soft, obvi-
ously, it should, be mixed willi a stiff ^■arnish or a stiffer ink. The
j)roper temperature for a jircssroom i.~. Ijctween 70^ and 80'^ F.
If the ink pulls off the face of the j^apc-r, it is too stiff; it
should be softened. If it offsets, too much ink is being carried,
there is not enough im])rcssion on the job, or there is not enough
drier in the ink. The remed\- in i-acli case is o])vious.
If an ink gi\-es a mottled impression, this is evidence that
the ink is too thin and lacks cohesion; it needs more "tack."'
Add heavy varnish, or use a hea\ier-bodied ink.
256 i'is:i\ii\(.
231. Dopes. — Nearly LAcry experienced pressman has
gathered an outiit which he terms '"doije." luich of these sub-
stances he uses for specilic purjjoscs. Occa-ii)nall\- a pressman
is found who ]>ins fiis faith to one "do])e."" wliich he ccjnsidcrs a
panacea for aU inL: troubles. Another will ha\-e an array of
red, white, and blue ]:)0wders; paste and licjuid driers; castor-
oil, vaseline, tur])entine, sodium silicate, c'c. With tliis bat-
tery, he feels competent to tackle an\- ink trouble that arises.
Freciuently he would be Ijetler oil witiiout such so-called reme-
dies. If he is not full\- aware of just wliat action eacli has
under every condition of temperature and humidit}', he is
usually groping in the dark. The \'alue of the time wasted by a
pressman tr\'ing to get an ink to work ])ro])erly may frequently
be more than the cost of an ink that would work properly witli
out doping.
At the same time, there is no (len\'ing the fact that it is not
always con\-enient to stop a ])ress while vraiiip.g for the inkma.n,
and the pressman must frequently rel\' ujM)n his own resources.
The novice should, howe\-er. undertake to remed\- ink trouljles
oni}' under the guidance of a c()m])elent pre-sman. Unless th.e
[iressman is also an ink chemi>t or know- deimilel}- \nm^ pre-
\-ious ex])erience what the result will be, it is ratlier ri>ky to
tamper with an ink by the addition oif oiher materials. As
stated l)efore, the safest wa.y to lK:ndle the ink probleni
is to ha\'e a stilY and a soft ink of tl-e s:;me color. I!}- a
judicious admixture of these two a suilalde ink ma\- u>uall\'
!)(..■ (jbtained. If not, then consult the inkman; the problem
i> his.
232. Mixing Ink." It frequent 1>- ha|»pen,s that a job is to lie
printed in a specilied color and the ]ire-.-:r.an i- Called on. to
match it. This lie can sometime> do b\- n:ixing ink> that he
has in stock. It is a ]iroce>-, howe\er, tl:at calls for a well-
de\eloped color i)erception and a knovdedu'e of color analx'sis.
Here is an extremeh' intere.-tinu' I'leld for a ]ire.--man wlio is
anxious to get aliead in his wur]-;, for a iire--m;:n wlio knows how
to obtain a particular tint without \sa-ting time in its produr-
tion is a valual)le acquisition to any office and need never be
out of employment.
The student is uri^ed to re;id and di.L^fcst Andrews's "Color
and Its Application to PrintinLr"' and Miinscli's ''Color Nota-
tion." Both of these writers ad\'ocate a theor\' rcf^arding color
that is at variance with that usually acce])te(l, but Andrews
offers so much that is of practical value thcit the pressman will
do Vi'ell to read his book carefully. He also gix'cs specific direc-
tions for color-mixing.
233. Mixing Tints and Shades. — The inexperienced press-
man will sometimes make the mistrd-ce of adding a little white
to a large amount of the bo(l\- color when he wishes to ol^tain a
t int of that color. This is wrong i)racticc. When mixing colors,
alwa}'s put the stronger color into the weaker, and do so by
adding a little at a time. If a tint is to be matched, and it is not
known what body color has been used, try the experiment of
adding a faint trace of the strong color assumed to be the
correct one to a little white. Mix a little of the combination
onl}- until assured that the right color is being used. When this
has been determined, proceed with the mixing b}' taking the
required amount of white and adding the body color until the
right tint is secured. It is ;dways better to mix a little more
than seems neces^.ar}', for if there is any shortage much valuable
time will be wasted in matching the second ndxture with the
tirst. Use a glass slab wh.en mixing inks, for it can easily
be kept clean. Work the colore together thoroughly with a
palette-knife.
When a certain shade is desired, if it is to be made by the
r.ddition of black or some darker color, take a \'olume of the
lighter color and add tlie darker to it. Make the addition grad-
ually, and mix the ink thoroughl}' as just explained.
234. Duotone Inks. — T\\-o-color effects are obtained in
])rinting halftones b\' two distinct methods. In one, known as
the duograph or duotype, two halftone ])lates are prepared, one
for ])rinting the h,::h";(i!u- ]:r(i]H^r I'l;' (:lher for ])rinting an.
undertone. The othtT melliod i> b\- ilx- i;-e of (i;;();(;ti.' ink.
25S PklXTlXG
"Duotone'" means two tones, and the effect of two tones is ob-
tained by one print in.ii;.
If a halftone i)icture ])rinted with duotone ink is examined
it will be noticed that each dot in the halftone seems to be
surrounded with a halo of a li^Lditer color. This is due to the
fact that the ink is composed of two colors that ha\-e not amal-
gamated, the li<^hter of which has si)read out over the pa[)er
producing a stain, ver}' much as a sj)lash from a shaft-hanger
would do if the thick, dirl\- oil dro])])ed on a })iece of paper.
The most peculiar feature of the ink is th.at the job must be
dried in the dark. If dried in the light, th.e undertone does not
develop. Do not attempt to modify a duotone ink by the
addition of do[)e, esi)ecially if any other part of the job has been
printed with the same ink without doping.
235. Halftones. — Before the student can have a defmite
idea of the use of process inks it is essential that he should
understand the method of making halftones and be familiar
with the theory underlying ])rocess work.
In the production of the beautiful halftones that are now so
much in evidence in modern jorinting, the photogra})hic image is
kept on the surface b}- breaking it u]) into dots. If these dots
be examined it will be found that while they are uniformlv
spaced, they vary in size, ranging from almost imperceptible
dots to sizes so large that they coalesce. This is accomplished
by the use of a screen, which is placed in the camera, in front of
the negative, while the i)icturc is being taken. These screens
are made by ruling ])ieces of glass with a series of parallel lines,
then tilling the lines with some o])ariiie material. Two ])ieces
are j)laced face to face, \\itli tlie lines running at right angles,
and cemented together. This ])roduces a checkerboard with
minute oj)enings. The halftones in this book A\"ere made
through a screen ha\'ing one hundred and thirt\--three lines to
the inch. News[>aper halftones are u-uall\' si.\t\"-fi\-e lines to
the inch. Screens a- tine a> foi'r hundred line.- to th.e inch ha\'e
been made. This means four hundred line< and four hundred
spaces, yielding a si)ace i,'8oc Dart of an in(~h wide.
PRIN'I IX(MNK 25q
236. Three-color Process Work. -According to the Brew-
ster theory of color, the primary colors are red, yellow, and blue.
From these the secondary colors, orange, green, and i)urple, may
be mixed; and by tlie mixture of a primary and a secondary a
tertiary color is ])roduced. From this it is evident that all
colors may be obtained simply by the admixture of the primaries
in dilTerent proportions. The production of the beautiful three-
color process engravings is accomplished by the use of a half-
tone screen and by photographing the colored original through
three different color-filters. Three separate plates are made.
According to the amount of red in the original ])icture, dots of
the required size to give the right amount of red in the finished
picture will be provided for in the red plate; wherever yellow is
needed in the fmished picture the right amount will be pro-
vided for in the yellow plate; the same with the blue.
When the three plates are printed from, the effect is as if the
object were printed in an infinite number of colors. If exam-
ined under a magnif\-ing-glass it will be seen that the j)icture is
built up of a mixture of red, yellow, and blue dots of varying
size. It will also be noticed that the production of a hue is not
due to the printing of one dot over another, but by printing
them l^esidc each other.
It is obvious that the juxtaposition of red and blue gives the
effect of pur})le. If red predominates, the effect is a reddish
purple; if blue predominates, it is a bluish purple. If the dots
are small and much of the white of the paper is visible, the effect
is that of a tint.
When making the negatives the lines of the screen are placed
at a different angle for each plate, to avoid tlie ])roduction of a
checker].)oard or moire ])attern in the ])icture.
237. Process Inks. — It has l)een f(Huid that inks that match
the true sj)cctrum colors do not gi\"e good results in three-color
process work. By experiment, cert;un hues of the three fimda-
mental colors — red, yellow, and l)lae — ha\-e ])een found which
produce excellent results. These inks are called process inks.
When ])rinting, the ])uites are run in tlie order, yellow, red, I)lue.
2f)o rkix'i'ixr.
Owinfj to the fact that the three fundamental colors cannot
producH' :i lihick or a ,i;ray shadow, a fourth color is sometimes
re.-oiU'il 'lo. This color is a urayish lilack. When printinr:; a
four lolor i)roccs> ])i(iui-e, the folio\vin.ii; is the ])ro|)er orrler:
yellow, reel, hhick, blue. It is better to run the black before the
blue, for if the black is run last and darkens the tones of the
,ii;reen>. there is no ()])])ort unit}- to rectify the trouble. If the
blue is run last, the ri.i^du hue may be used to ])roduce the
ri'(|uired tone< of Lrrecn.
When one inl^ i< jjrinted o\-er another, if the first ink dries
iKirik it is frc'iuentl)' necessar_\- to increase the tack of the one
thai i< to le suix'rpoK-d ; each subseouent one bein^ taclder.
Ink-makers ])rn\iilc si)ecial ])re])arat ions that may be used to
t)b\iale th.i;-- ti-oui.le.
(^)l'i;SlI{).\S ox ( IIAl'Tf.R XV
1. Name thrcf tliiiiL's that e\i'ry k'tlerpre'ss j)rintin{,' ink should con-
tain.
2. What i~ a piL'nirnt ':'
3. ( )f what use i- \arnish in a [)rintinL'-ink ?
4. Of what sul)^taIH■(■^ arc \aniishrs usuaUy t'omposed ?
5. \\ hat is a drur ." \\ li_\' i> it used f
(1. Is a drier alisolutcl\- ^ccc^sary in a printinizdnl; ?
7. What is tlic diffcrcnic hcl'Accn a h(|iiid and a {)aslc drier? 'J'cll
under wliat < diidii ions eac li sliould be used.
;s. \\'h\- iloes ~.,,i'i inj^ dr\' (juickcr (Ui some papers than on otliers ?
(J, W'liat kind of ink ^];ould be iiscd on hard papers?" on s.)fl icipcrsi-'
10. Wliat ciTcc; lia\e Icinpcraturc and humiditv- on :he workinj; (juali-
tie> of an ink !•'
11. if llic ink _\-ou were usin,Lr |)ullcd the face off of the paper, how
would _\-ou rectify the troul)le ?
[J. If tlie inl: was too thin, liow would \'ou stilTcn it ':"
I ^ W'li.at is the disad\antai:c of usiiiL; \arnisli to soften an ink ?
I \. Wliat i- tlie matter with an ink tliat ^d\a-s a mottled impression ?
15. Wiiai do you undcistand h_\- " tack" ?
i'l. Xi'iie -omc of tlu- ^ul)Statue^ Used 1)>' pressmeii in dopinj^ ink.
ly, l.\:il:d;i t::r proprr mctliod of mi.xiiu' tints and sliades.
iS. W hal i- :i duoloiic ink ]'
]'KI.\ riX(i l.Mv 2()i
iQ. Kx[)lain how Jind \vh_\' a duotonc ink clc\'cIops two tones, and tell
what s[)ecial liandlin;:; of the sheets is necessary for perfect results.
20. What is a halftone plate ? How is the printed ima<^e produced ?
21. What is the ISrewster theory of color .^
22. What do \'0U understand h_\' three- and four-color process work ?
23. What colors of ink are used in the three-color process ? in the four-
color process ?
24. Name the order in which the colors are j)rinted in three-color
process work ; i;i fou;' tolor process work.
CHAini-R XVI
PAPER
238. Origin.— Paper, that indispensable substance for which
modern ci\'ilization linds so man\- uses, had its origin in the
papyrus i)lant, from which it derives its name. The early
Egyptians split the stalk of the plant in two and peeled otT the
pellicle in la\'ers, then placed these so that they overlapped, and
stuck them together with some adhesi\-c, thus producing sheets
or leaves.
The modern article consists of a prepared fiber mixed with a
number of substances that act as binder, filler, coloring matter,
etc. These substances are intimately mixed, and after passing
through a number of processes are hnally laid out on a moving
wire screen which ])roduces the pa])er as a continuous web.
239. The Fiber. — If a ])iece of paper be torn apart and a
section of it held to the light, it will be seen to possess a feathery
edge. This is the fiber. It is the most important part of the
paper, and gi\'es it strength. Long-fiber papers are stronger
than short-fiber ones made from the same materials.
All fbcrs are of \-cgetable origin. \\"hile there are a
great number of long and strong vegetable fibers throughout
the world, the cost of prcparati(m and importation makes their
use jtr{^hil)itivc. Owing to tlic low rate at which jxiper must Ijc
sold, the eost of the raw m;iterial is an im])()rlant factor. Of
our nati\"c til)ers, ilax (linen") and cotton are most commonly
used. Linen makes the \'ery best jiapcr. cotton ranking second.
Other -ubstances arc as follows, in the order of their importance:
wood. e>[)arto fa grass . manila. and strjw. An\'thing that
yield> a filter i-^ useful for [)a])er-nKikini:. The residue of licorice-
root, after the extraclion of the licorice, is used. The linen and
2(J2
PAPER 263
cotton used in the ])etter <:^ra(les of paper are obtained from shirt
and collar factories. Other grades are made from old rags.
Rag stock is stronger than wood-pulp. Paper is frequently
made by combining them.
The bulk of the paper used, however, is made from wood-
pulp. Owing to the fact that timber is becoming scarce in the
eastern section of the United States, wood is being made into
pulp in the forests and shijjped to various paper-making centers.
Much of the pulp used in the United States comes from Norway,
where, owing to the wooded mountains and the consequent
cheapness of water, water-power, and timber, it can be pro-
duced and imported into the United States in competition with
the home product.
240. Pulp. — The first step in the preparation of fiber for
use in paper-making is to reduce the material to pulp. If pure
white linen or cotton cuttings are used no special preparation
is necessary other than to dust them and then cook them in an
alkaline solution with steam, after which the fibers are thor-
oughly washed and l;leached. If assorted rags are used, they
are taken to a sorting department, sorted and graded, then cut
into small pieces, dusted, and boiled in a strong solution of
alkaline water to loosen the coloring matter, after which they
are washed thoroughly and bleached. They are then ready to
go into the beater.
Before wood-pulp is put into the Ijeater it is prepared by
grinding the wood mechanically or by treating it chemically.
The paper used in the average newsi)aper is made from mechan-
ical wood-pulp. The mills that make the ])aper are located
near the source of supply. The trees are cut down, carried to
the mill, stri]>ped of the bark, put on inclined tracks, carried
against circular-saws, cut to lengths, dropped into hoppers,
held against grindstones, and ground to short liber. To pre-
vent the heat generated by grinding from igniting the wood, a
stream of water is played against the wood and grindstone.
The water carries awa\' the ground p;irticles. Th?y are passed
over a sie\-e, which excludes all that are not sufficiently minute
264 I'RIXTIXG
to be used in makin;:' ])a]>er. As mechanical wood-pulp con-
tains \-ari()u> deleterious suli-lance^, it deteriorates rapidlv and
darkens oPi e\])o.-ure to li,L:!u.
Ck.emieal wood-])!!!]) i-^ made 1)\' irea.tinL: <mali ])articles of
wood with eliemicaU to rcmox-c ail extraneous sui)Slances and
lea\'e nolhinir kut the iii-er, whicli i.- rcall\- the cell-walls of
the plant. There a.rc two naatliods of makin:^ chemical wood-
f)ul]) — the sdilo proiA--.^ and the -ulpIiiU' proces^:. The former is
the chea]HT ])roce.-,-, hut the latter xa'eid^ a stronger hijer. In
both ])rt)Ce>>L> the wood i- tir.-t chi])])ed into <nu 11 ])article3. In
the soda ]lroce^- the chii)~ of wood are ])ut into a. cx'lindrical
tank, called a di'^(-t>r. toiiether with a .-])ecii'.ed amount of
caustic soda, and suiijected to li\-e stea.ni at a ])re.~sure of about
ei.uduy ]K)und.-. for aliout ei.udit hour-, th.e c\"linf'er kein.c: rotated
during the boilin^ii. Th.e tank is then o])eried. th.e lifjuor drained
olY, and the l)ul]) thorou.Lrhl}' \va,--hied. The first lir|uor is pum])ed
into e\-a])orators. where it becomes a s\tu]), after which it is
burned and tlie soda reclaimed as soda-ash. After heim: mi.xed
with lime the soda ash a.uain becomes caustic soda, and can
thus be used a,L'ain and a^eain. It is due to this reclamation of
soda that the soda ])roce-.- is chea])er than the >uli)hite ])roce^s.
for with the latter all \hv chemii'al- are wa.shed awa\- anrl lost.
241. The Beater.- In order to thorou,i:hly incor])orate the
in^rredients, and also ,L:rind th.e ii'her into ndnute ])articles, all of
the materials of \\T.iLh j'a])er is co!i^])osed are jiut toLreth.er into
a clexace called a h,<il(r. r^ee Iul:. 140. The material ])asses
between a steel or stone bc-djilate and a revoh'inLr r(jll on the
[)erij)hery of which thick steel I).ars h.a\'e !;een. i:nifornd\- ]»laced.
The >])ace lielweeM l!;^- roll an*! 1 lit- bed] lia* e can l)e accuratel}'
adju-ted >o that the ikiier in ])a.->in;^ between them i> torn.
dra.iiLIedi, or lea-lcil nu' -o a- to ](roduee a feather}- end. in-
stead; of biana: ca: oiT. Tld- r:;u-e- the liber.- lo ma,t together
in the v.'eb of thi- ]ia|ir''. ; 'i^i iiroiluee a .-t roUL'er article.
242. The Refining-engine. IVoni the 1-eater the ])ul]>. nov/
ca'led .//r', L'oe- to - ir.:.(h;:.e cai'ed. ;; [ordan. or relinimr-
en^^ine Td.ij;. 150,, '.'diich in action ;.nd a])])earance is \'ery much
PA ft: I
20:
2 66 PRIXTIXG
like a coffee-mill, except that it is fully encased. Here the
stuff recci\'es its final ^L'rinding or reiming, after which it passes
on its way to the pa])er-makin,i{ machine.
243. The Paper-making Machine. — Figs. 151 and 152
show respectixely the wet end and the dry end of a paper-
making machine. After the stuff lea\-es the Jordan it passes
into a sand-trap, where it is n^ixed with a great quantity of
water, and as it tlows along all hea\-}- particles, such as sand,
iron, or other foreign substances, sink to the l;ottom and are
caught by rip])les. The stulT continues on its way, passing
through a hne screen to the head- or regulating-box, thence out
under the gate on to the wire screen.
The gate is adjusted to allow a certain amount of stufT to
pass through in a given time, and is very seldom changed.
Different thicknesses of pa])er are obtained by regulating the
speed of the machine. The faster the n^.achine goes the thinner
the paper produced; the slower the machine the thicker the
paper. In fact, the machine is really la}'ing out a predeter-
mined weight of paper in a given time. I'he daily output of a
machine, in tons, is fairly constant, provided the paper is not so
thin as to be troublesome, in which event the speed of the
machine and the set of the gate ma\- ha\t to be altered.
As the stutT emerges from under the gate it flows onto a
moving copper screen, oi fine mesh, made like an endless belt.
The screen is mo\'ing forwcird at a uniform rate, taking a uni-
form layer of stuff. A sidewise shiiking motion is imi)arted to
the end of the screen neare>t the regulating-1)0x which tends
to set the filjcrs at various angles, causing them to mat together.
As the screen mo\-es forward, the bidk of the wiiter in the
stutT j)asses through the screen by gra\it\". In its forward
journey the stuiT ])asses o\'er suction-ljoxes. where the balance
of the water is remo\a'd. The stutT is pre\-ente(l from llowing
off the sides of llie screen ])V a belt of rulilicr, called a deride.
which nu)\-e.- f(jrward in unison with the screen. The shaking
motion of the stTcen tend< to force some of the stulT Ijeneath
the deckle, thu^ ])rofluring the deckle edcre, so much desired in
PAPER
267
t^:?^
2 68
pRixrixr,
PAPER
269
270 I'RLVnXd
high-grade work. If the deckle is not desired, it is cut off with a
jet of water, Ijefore the stuff leaves the screen.
If the ]Ki])cr is to be watermarked, either with a name,
trade-mark, or with a series of parallel lines (thus producing
laid paper), it is ])assed Ijeneath a dandy-roll, which is a hollow
C}'linder of wire gauze, on which the design is worked out with
thin wire, soldered fast to the outside surface of the cylinder.
The weight of the cylinder jjresses the design into the still
])lastic mass of the paper, pushing aside the rr.aterial. The
reason the watermark is visible when held to the light is because
the paper is thinner at those ])laces.
After leaving the screen the pa])er is run between heavy
brass rolls and rolls covered with thick blankets or felts. This
serves to com])ress the ])aper, absorb the balance of the water,
and, so far as possible, oljliterate the mark of the wire screen.
From the felts the i)aper goes to the drying-rolls or drums.
These are heated by steam, and l)y the time the ])aper emerges
from the rolls it is thoroughly dry. It is then passed through
a calender to im])art a finish, after which it is cut to size if
machine-lniished, or rolled up if it is to have further treat-
ment.
The necessity for an abundance of pure, clean water in the
making of pa])er will be realized when it is stated that in all the
()])erations necessary from the time the wood fiber is j^iut into
the digester until it is laid out in a thin layer on the wire screen,
a barrel of water has been used in the preparation of two ])Ounds
of pa])er. As the diluted stuff floats from under the gate to
the wire screen it is ninety-six ])er cent water.
244. Hand-made Paper. — If a sheet of machine-made paj^er
is torn, it will be found that it tears more readily in one direc-
tion than at riglit angles to that tlirection. This is due to the
fact that tlie forward moxement of the screen under the gate
has had a tendency I0 set the fibers in a longitudinal direction.
This is known as the I'/ain of the ])ai)t-r. All machine-made
]);i])ers possess tlii^ grain. II.iiKbniade i)a])ers. howe\tT, owing
to the wa\' in which they are made, do not ])ossess ;i grain.
PAPER 271
When makin<^ paper by hand, the workman uses a wooden
framework, or mold, covered with a copper screen. Another
framework, known as the deckle, is fitted over the screened
framework, and both of them are dipped into a tub containing
the stuff. The mold is then drawn u])ward through the stuff,
rapidly or slowly, as may be necessary, so as to leave an even
and uniform deposit of stuff on the screen. As the mold is
being withdrawn it is given a constant circular motion, which
tends to swirl the hbers at all angles, and prevents grain. After
the water has drained from the stuff, it is put between sheets of
felt, and then compressed in a screw-press, after which it is hung
up in lofts to dry. Hand-made papers are very much stronger
than machine-made papers.
245. Book Papers. — There is an inhnite variety of i)apers.
The most imi)ortant are machinc-fniislied, sizcd-and-super-
calciulcrcd, and coaled or enamelled papers.
Machine-fmished pajiers require no subsequent treatment
after leaving the machine, but are usually cut to size after leaving
the calender.
Sized-and-supercalendered papers, called engine-sized by
]')a])er-makers, are made by adding the sizing to the other in-
gredients in the ])eater. This sizing is usually saponified rosin,
which is ])reci])itated on the fiber by the use of alum. After
the p;i|)er leaves the drying-drums it is rolled up and then
coiueyed to a calendering-machinc, where it is steamed to
bring out the starch, after which it is passed between calenders,
Vv'hich burnish the surface and impart a gloss.
A calendering-machine (iMg. 153) consists of heavy rollers,
some of polished chilled-iron, others niade up of disks punched
out of sheets of paper. These disks are i)ut on a mandrel and
subjected to man\- tons' pressure, thus making a cylinder of
solid ])aper, with the edge of each sheet on the circuniference of
the roller. This cylinder is then turned down in a lathe to
I)ro])er size, after which it is gn)und and ]K)lished. The iron
and ]xi])er rolls are of ditTerent di;imeter. and are placed alter-
natcK- in the calendering-niachine. When the machine is set
272
i'I^I\II\(i
in motion there is friction I)et\veen the surface of the rollers and
the niox-inti; weh of |)ai)er, and a .li;1(>-< i-^ inipaiied.
Coated or eiianielled papers are usualiy prepared 1)\- first
makiiii^ a \w\i ni paper, 1 lim j )a --iuL^ 1 he >her1 1 lii'c iuli;Ii a 1 r< aiLrli
u »n1 a iniiiL: t he ei):ii iu'j;, after which it is passed between roner> to
PAPER 273
squeeze off the surplus and leave an even, smooth coating, or by
])utting on the coating by the aid of brushes, which leaves it in a
smooth, even layer. After coating, the paper is passed through
calenders to be polished.
246. Flat Papers.— There was a time when nearly all large
siz.cs of paper were folded before delivery, the smaller sizes
ben:ig delivered flat, d'hese were called Ihits. The name still
persists for the smaller sizes, even though all large book papers
are now deli\-ered flat. Flats are the papers usually used
for writing purposes, and emlorace writings, bonds, and ledgers.
Owing to the high state of i)crfection attained in the manu-
facture of pa])er, it is almost impossible to tell from a superficial
view of a sheet of paper of just vhat it is composed. Some
papers watermarked linen ledger have so little linen in them
that the amount is negligible.
Ordinary writings, especially the cheaper grades, contain
nothing but wood fiber, and are composed of ingredients that
impart to it a Ihiish that will take writing-ink.
Bond papers are composed of good, strong fiber, with plenty
of sizing which gives them a hard finish.
Ledger papers are bond pa])ers that have been tub-sized
to give them a coating that will fill up the pores and impart a
smooth finish, specially adapted to writing-ink.
Papers that are to be used in blank-book making, especially
matters of record, should be made from all-linen rags.
247. Sizes of Paper. — Tn the early days of paper-making,
manufacturers restricted themselves to a moderate number of
sizes. Today, papers, especially book papers, may be obtained
in many sizes and weights. Flat papers have not changed as
much as book ])apcrs. The following list gives the names and
sizes of flat pa])ers:
Demy, i6"X2i"
Folio, I7"X22"
IMcdium, i8"X23"
Royal, i9''X24"
Double Cap, ly'^X.-'S"
274 PRiArixd
Super Royal 20" / 2?)''
Doulilr I)cni_\-. iJrdail, 2i"X,32'''
Doulile T)i_'n\\". Lop.LT, i(^"y ^2"
Douhk' l-'olii). 22",/' -:4"
Double -Medium. 2^"y,;6"
Double Royal. 24"X,;S"
Double Double Cap, 2S"X,34"
Some book paper.- may be oljtained in I'le following sizes:
2S"X42" ,;^" X46"
2S"X44" 0^" y'-o"
248. Tlie Ream. — Tlie average .-^ehoolbo}- i- being taught
that there arc t\vunl\'-fuur .- Iiect^ to a (^uire. and l\ven.t\- (juires
to a ream. Thi- m[d-;t,> fou,r liundrt-d and eiirlity -heX- to a
ream. Thi- i> the leiia! n-am. .\!1 [)a[)er- '\-xec])t a Ifw im-
ported one> and tho-e that are .-o exjien.-ix'e that tlie\' are
worth upwarrl of two cents a -heet ■ are now m.ad.c up into reams
of live hundred ^^leet-. or tWL'nt\--fi\"e -iRxlr- to a rpiire. As
mo>t jol).- are ordered by tlie tliou-and. or a multi[)le thereof,
thi- facilitate^ the computation of the neces-ar\' .-tock.
249. Weights of Paper. — A paper i- known b\- the number
of pounds it weigh.- to the ream of fi\-f hurulred -heet-. bjook
papers are ba.-ed on a >l'ieet 25>',y^ inehe,- iii :d/e; llat,-. on a
ba.-i^ of 17X22 in.che.-: car(i;KXird, nn a ba.-i- of 2 2\y 2'^\ inclie-.
If a ])aper-dealer were to te.-t a .-heet of ]ia[)er by feeling it and
sa\' that it feel.- like ba-i- eigiii\' pa.pLi-. he mean.- th.at a ream
of it. 25X,-",S inche.- in. :Xe. w.'uld weiudi eight \' ])e)U.n.d.-. If
the .-tock v,-ere a vrritim:-. a bwud. '•.■■: a ledLjer. and lie .-aid that
il feel- like an Xo. 2Z jKiper. I;e mean- tha^. a ream of it, 17X22
inehe> in size, would weiiih iwen!\' pound-.
250. Designating Paper .According to a Substance Num-
ber.- Prior to ihe Woi'ld \\'..r. p:4)er wa- made -e, that it
wei'ihed a certain p.umber 1 4" [:oup.d.- to I'u- rean.i. It wa- al-o
made in an imnun. c n;m.ber of k/.e- and color.-. O-.vini: to
PAl'ER 275
the scarcity of raw materials (liirinfj^ tlie war, the Unitcfl
States GoN'crnmeiit placeil man}" restrictions on the pa^jcr
in(ki.-tr\-. The United Stales llureau of Standards advo-
cated clianges in the s\-steni of paper size.-; and weights. As
a result of numerous >ug,i';estions, paper-makers have adopted
new standards f(jr making paper.
Unfler the old system of sizes and weights, paper was made
so that it weighed a certain cirji mimbcr of pounds to the
ream. To do this it was neces:-ar\- to var\- the speed of the
f)aper-making machine. .\s a re-ult, the j)aper-maker was
making an infinite num])er of ihickiicsscs of paper. If a
printer Vv'as using a {)a[KM- tk.at weighed twenty pounrls to the
ream (jf i-jK2 2 inches, and he wanted the same weight of
{)aper in >ize 19X24 inches, he could not get it. The nearest
he could get Vs'as i(jX24 — 24 pounds. Exactly th.e same pa[)er
would ha\-e weiglied 24.4 pounds. See Section 252.
I'nder the new system tlie paper-maker does not alter the
speed (jf hi- machine. He makes a [)aiper tliat will weigh a
certain e\"en number of pounds wlien cut to 17X22 inches.
If it weighs sixteen pounds to a ream of 17X22, it is called
sub.-tance Xo. 16. If it weighs twenty pounds, it is Xo. 20;
and so on.
The same method pre\'ails vdth book papers. The Ijasic
size is 25X38 inches. A j)aper that weighs 50 pounds to a
ream -S^-S^ inclies is called basis 50. U it runs So i)Ounds
to a ream, it is basis So; anrl -0 on.
A ba-ic weight produt:e.- a staiidarii iJiichncss for each par-
ticular paper. When a -tandiard lhic]vne-< is cut to other
sizes, the paper does not always run an even number of poundis
to the ream. I'o avoid intricate calculation, weights are listed
in the nearest half-pound i)er ream. See I'ables \1 and VII,
also Seclitjn 2^2.
A studiy of these taides <hov.'s tluit it is ncj longer necessary
for a |)rinter to figure relative weight-. The weights are given
in the taljle-. The number at tlie top of each column is the
basis number. The numl)ers iii eacli hnriz(jntal row op;)o.-ite
>76
i'kixTixc;
TAHI.K \T STIO\MXC. Till: Sl/.F.S AX!) WF.TGIITS PER REAM
oi' lioxi)^, i.ixi;x<. i.i;i)(,i:ks. axd oihi-.k i-eat papers
WUES ALVDi: ACCURULXC. TU .^L'BSTAXCE XU.MBERS.
4X34
6X21
6X26
0X42
X22
7X26
X2S
X44
X50
SX25
SX4'-
0X2.1
UX26
0X28
qX.^o
UX4S
20X2S
20X56
2TX32
2iXj3
22X25 I
22X34
23X2S
23X31
23X34
24X3-^
24X4^
26X32
2')X33
2f,X34
26X3^
27X40
2 '^.•■40
2>/'42;
.S4 ■ 44
:; ., 13
lOi
Tl',
I4J
23
13
T -'
26
3,1
16
14:.
2()
16
24
u]
iS
21'
18
22
2 0 \
29
3 'J
43
16
23
24
10
-a]
2.^1
-)-■ ^
^ _ i
80'
32
4"
4'^
41
51
(n
i:]
22
26',
35
44
S3
io\
24'
20 •
21
2') .
81 •
22,
2^1
84
24i
8°:
3''i
39
4')
5')
24
30
36
4>
'do
72
20
_:;6
4i
20 J
8 7
44 i 1
24
30
V'
T ~ 1
40
1
4^
. r 1
,^ I
4 1 .■
. - 1
.•)3 2
42
50
r8
3''
4' '
50
, !
(.i\
74
"-, I
44
4'-'
~ ""
^ ^
47
5 -
42
4'-'
^8
(1:
41
;i
Cil
4''
,^7
( ' >
:. 1
1, , 1
40
III
7,',
( , ■
> s
<il'
\ 28
N' . 32
X. .36
-\ ^ 40
Xo. 44
, - 1 1
40 i
46
51
56
25
281
32i
36
392-
31
, „ 1
3 3 2
40
44^
49
50
57
65
72
79
2S
32
36
40
44
88
3-^
42^
47i
52
, . 1
40]
4.6
51
56
56
(n
72
So
88
71
Si
92
102
112
31
-1 - 1
,10 J
40
44^
483^
02
71
80
89
97
34
39
44
49
53l
37
42. i
472
53
58
40
452
51
57
62i
42!.
49
55
61
67
68
78
88
98
107
42
48
54
60
66
'S4
96
108
120
132
50
5 7
65
72
70
52
59I
66i
74
Sii
42
48
54
60
68
S'>
64
72
80
88
4S
55
62
60
76
_ , 1
61
68.1
76
84
;iv\
67
_ - 1
/ J 2
83i
02
02
71
8o
8u
97
08
78
88
oS
107
80
98 i>
1 1 1
123
i35i
0 •)
71
So
S)
08
''4
- , 1
82i
02
101
(.0
76
3-
05
104
74
8 ^
95
100
I lO
81
02 i
104
lis]
I 27
71
^I
02
102
1 12
80
0 1
102
114
I 25
>4
oO
108
1 20
1,1 2
■"^0
102
114'
I 27 I
140
3 -
0^
I 10
I 22
184
■ 23
1 l^^'
1 -^
175'.
I "31.
1 I 2
I j^
i44
KO
I 7O
PAPFR
277
TABl.K Vri -SIIOWTXG THK SIZF.S AXl) WKIClIirS TM-.R RKAM
OF IU)()K RAPFRS \\Hi;X .\F\l)i; A(C'()K1)F\(; 10 SUii-
STANCE BASIS.
Size.
24
25
26
26
28
2S
20
34
,55
.S6
3S
41
42
44
44
X3S.
X32.
X36.
X38.
X2Q.
X40.
X42.
X44.
X52.
X4I
X44.
X46-
X44.
X45
X4S.
X50.
X61.
X56.
X56.
X64
Basis 40
liasisSO
li iSlS 60
40
50
60
30
37
44^
3''
45
55
40
50
60
32
40
48
44
55
66
50
(12
74
^2
65
78
(H
80
06
53
66
76
60
74
8q
^'4
So
q6
70
I5a.-,is 80 iia>is 100
('3
60
80
106
100
104
I 20
70
83
90
100
132
124
I ^o
148
Q5
lOO
I 10
I 20
158
148
15')
178
64
70
/ /
86
go
IT 2
02
104
1 1 2
no
1 16
128
140
184
I 72
rSo
208
80
^0
63
88
QO
104
126
105
IK)
I2S
126
133
146
160
210
ig8
208
23S
100
74
91
ICO
79
1 10
124
158
132
148
160
157
166
182
200
264
248
2O0
206
the >\/.e< arc the wcijzhts per ream for thai .size and for the ba.sis
in that column.
The standard size for cardlmard is still 22.^X28', inches.
251. Other Papers. While flats and book papers have
undergone a change in weights but not in basic sizes, cover
papers have undergone a change both in sizes anrl weights.
Organizations of printers, adx'ertisers, anrl publicity experts
have agreed to restrict the number of sizes and -ha[jes of their
ad\"crtising matter so that j)a[)cr will not be wa-ted in cutting
and so that the manufacturer may make fewer sizes and
weights. To accomplish this, okl -izes anrl v/eights of cover
papers have been abolished, and co\-er stocks are now listed in
the following sizes and weights:
20X26) — 50, 65. 8c:
-o'^'^'-oS 7.5) 9,S; 1 17-
In Section loi, page 98. a con-tant or muhijjb/in'j; factor is
given for determining the dimension- of the lu'potenuse oblong.
2 78
TRIXTIXG
'["111- (iljldnLT lias licxn ciulor-fd 1)\" many inlluenlial national
orLranizalion-. aniDUi: llicm tiit,- X'ationa! A^-ocialion of Pur-
cha-iiiLr ALa-;u-. American Inr-iiiuu- of Arcliitccts. American
Swrit,-i\- iif Mrrlianic:;! l-inL:;]:i'L-r-. I'niU'd Typollic-la' of America,
Xatidiial I'iiOtT 'I'rade A--ociat:on. I'niled Status T)cj)artmcnt
I'i Commerce. Clianilier of Commerce of liie United States of
AnK-riea. It i- \)viu'z a'ixdcatcd -invaltaneou-]}' in America,
]''.iir()j)L-. and Au>lral:a. Tiu- nr\v cover -ize is, for all practical
]un'i)()~es. an hvnotenu-e iddomr.
New c(i\"er .-i/.r. j^X^o inclie-.
By calculation. j,-;"X 1.4142 ^ -jj.^j 7 ittches.
Or. ' ' = 2 :;. ^ "^4 inclies.
1.4142
Tlii- mraii.- that cowr -paper- in tlie new .-:/c. j-p'-'y; inches,
will cui winiiiii! \\-a-iL- to Ir-.'potcnu-i- oMoni:-.
TliL term ■■h\-poti'nu-e" i> Ldx'en to tb.i.- olilonc: l)ecause the
ratio of k-r/jtli to \'.'id,t;i i< dct(-rminud \)y an lp\-i)otenu-e.
-■' — I Taki:v2; tlie widali a- one dimension, diraw a
riL'iit an^dc the other -id,c of wliich ha- the
sam.e dimension. Draw an ]iy*)otenu-e from
cornL-r to cn'-MLr. Tlii- ]p\'potcnu-e i> the
le-n-'h (d liic -idc dc^ired. ^er Idi:. 154.
In e\cr\" trian-rK' where t:ie l^a-e and
allilteh- arc of opKal fhm.'n-ion-. the 1 a-e
i- !iithi^ !r.'po!rn\;-.- a- i : \ 2. The -onare
Too- of : i- 1.4 142. l'hrrcf('re multi'dxdriL:
ihr vddtli of a;y -i/e do-i:'rd ' y T.4142 vdil
i:"\'o the h-n2'ih nn.(;--a:'y t^ ]>!-oduco an I;\--
pM^nu-e oh'h.nL:. Or. if ihelemrth i- known,
d;-."' h- dp t.4142 t'l od;:dn tlio width de-ii-ed.
252. Rule for Figuring Relative Weights. \mw t^ait
'j]\' - '■' "i-an'- ■,::■:■ idvon in iah'o~, there i- i / ■! the ^ame
d.. li-
IWIM'.R 279
need as fornicrh' for printers to know how to fit^ure relative
weights of paper. Oceasior,a!!y, howe\'er, when odd or special
sizes arc desired, it will l)e necessary to know how to figure
the resultant weight when tlie sul)stancc is known.
The usual formula for determining relative weights of paper
is the following:
Desired weight X basic numl^er , . , . ,
,i — -. — . = desired weight.
JKisic size
Basic size in llats is 17X22; in book papers, 25X38.
Examples. — How much will a ream of 19X24 weigh if the
basis is No. 20?
lyX 34X20 ,
--= 24.4 pounds.
17X22
This is listed in the table as 24.5 ipounds.
How much will a ream of 32X44 weigh if the basis is 80?
32X44XS0
--^~ =iiS.57 i)ounds.
25X3<S
This is listed in the table as 119 pounds.
253. Envelope Sizes. — Xearh' all paper-dealers are now
making ])a]:)cr and en\-elo])es to match, in sizes suitable for oflice
stationerv. If sjieciiil sizes are desired, the}' can be made to
order. Tal)le \\l gi\es the numbers and sizes of envelopes
ordinarily carried in stock in standard white papers.
TABLE vnr,"i;xvt:i.()i>i': sizes
C()MMi:KCI.\L
No. Size. Nn. Size.
5 3/./'X5y' 10 4i"X9V'
b\ rx/'X(> " II 4r'xio;;"
6^ 3s"X()V' 12 4i"Xii"
M 5 "Xii^'
.vr'xc
1
1
4-
^r'xs
B
AROXI
.\I
Size.
X
0.
\o. Size. Xo. Size.
4 ^ - ' 4 , .. .-:..•■ 4 b X :> s
2So I'RixriXd
Drug and Pay P.wklopes
No. Si :'.(.'. ^<'w. Size.
I li"X.2'" ,5 2i\"X3;"
2 2A"X3r' I'ay 2y'X4l"
254. Figuring and Cutting Stock. -W'lK-n fiuurin.L' on stock,
be sure that you are ])lannin.L[ lor llie rii:lil number that ma\- he
cut from a sheet, and ahva\'S endeax-nr lo use a -heet that will
cut to size with a> lilth- wa.-le a^ [)<).-.-:hle.
Manv co\'er stuck^ will !"oM only with the ^rain and not
across it, unless scored. If iheru i> an\" ch'jice in the matter,
cut the stock S(j that it will f(dd with the ^L^-ain.
The avera,iie letterliead is Si/ 11 inches in -ize, and four
niav be cut out of a slu-rt i~'A22 inches. If a short letterhead
(8-2 X7I inche-) is de>ired. it ma\' he cut out of i7X22dnch
stock, six bein.L' obtained from a >lieet.
Paper-dealers will not sell an o'ld; niiml»er of .-lieet>. and it is
necessary to order >tock in e\'en fiuiri_>. The u.-ua! allowance
for spoila<;e on a job i> two per cent for each time a sheet ,^oes
throuf^h the pres>. If the job i- a three-color ])r()cess one, three
per cent for each time throuLdi th.e ])re.-.- is ;:iot too much.
If it is your dut\- to cut paper, ])roceed with extreme caution.
Paper is frerjuentl\' I'LUirerl to L'et a certain nuniljer out oi a
sheet in one directiori and a certain number in the direction at
right an'iles to thi-. .Man\- a.nil many a time ha\-e such cal-
culation- b'Ceri iij)-et becau.-e the cut'er took the I'lrst cut in the
wrong direction !
OrP.sTIOX- ()\" CIIAl'TI'R XVI
1. From -.vhat <'A'\ V<:u'<-r 'a ri'.-.- :'- r..:r:-,w
2. \\;i:i' :- ih'- -■:•.-■ i: ^ •-■ ti.ar -; -, - :.,i;,rr a^ ^trcneth ?
3. XarM- "ia- (iiarr'-M p!.;nt~ ir'iM ■.',::.:, rtxr is cbiaincd ?
4. W!i:a i-M;;;.r
5. Wha; i- -,vu(. i in!;- '^
C. l-;v;,!ain tar (:i;":"'.rr:aa> !irf.vi-t-:-: -a. ]:.:'\] al an'! ( hemical wood-pulp,
7. Of ;:.'• v.:o ( Lcii'i'.ai \vu,,.':-\,:_:'.i,y. :■:''•. h i- i i.,- Ik-i lir. soda or sul-
phite ^ \V!;v ^
papi::r 281
8. Whirh is the chcajier process, the soda or the sulphite ? Why ?
g. What is a diu'cstcr ? \\ hy is it used ?
10. Descrilje a heater, a.ud tell wl'at action it has on the liber.
1 1. \\ hat is a Jordan ?
12. How is pa[)er of dilTerent thickness obtained on a pajier-making
machine ?
13. Would it Ijc j)ossible to sell paper b\' the pound if the paper-making
machine al\va\s_ran at uniform sjieed "■' (ii\e reas<Mis for your answer.
14. \\ hat per cent of th(; "' stuff " is water, as it runs out on the wire
screen ?
15. What jircvents the ''stulT" from running ol7 the screen at the sides ?
16. \\ h>' does the screen ha\e a sidewise motion imparted to it ?
17. What produces the feather\- edge on paper ?
iS. What is the so-called wa.termark in pajier ? How is it produced?
iQ. Why is the plastic layer of paper run between heavy rolls and
Idankets or felts ?
20. Is there any dilTcrence in the appearance of the two sides of a sheet
of machine-ilnished j)a[)er ? Wliat is the difference, and \\hat caused it ?
21. II(,?Tv is paper dried wldle in j)rocess of manufacture?
22. What is a calender, and wh_\' is it used ?
23. Why is hand-made paper stronger than machine-niade paper?
24. What is a mai hine-hnislied pai)er ? a sized-andsupercalendered
pa{)cr ? a coated paper?
25. Wh;it iia})ers are usuall_\- known as " flats" ?
26. I low man}' sheets in a legal ream ? How man_\- in a ream of book
paper ?
27. (live the basic sizes in the following: book papers, llats, cardboard.
2S. What do you underst.and hy a 20-pouTid paper ? an 8o-j)ound
paper ?
2g. Wdiat do }'()u understand by relati\'c weights ?
30. fii\'e the formula for iinding relati\e weights.
31. How mucli would a ream of paper 22"X2S" weigh, basis 80?
32. How much v.'ould a ream of [laper 32"X44" 'vwigh, basis 70?
^^. What ad\'antage- are derived b\' making paper according to a sub-
stance numlier ?
34. Wliat difference does it make if co\'er stock i^ cut with or across
the grain ':■
35. What is the u>ual allowance for s[)oilagc ?
GLOSSARY
Abbreviation.— Part of a word used as a substitute for the whole word.
Examples: Pa., for Pennsjdvania; X. J., for Xew Jersey.
Accent. — A letter with a mark attaehed lo show that the accent falls
on that letter: e, acute; e, grave; e, circunillex. Other marks, as e
(dieresis), f (cedilla), n (tilde), are diacritical marks, and are used to denote
pronunciation.
Agate. — Name used for a size of t\'pe. On the point system agate
became 5 i -point.
Alignment. — When different sizes of type arc so justified that their
faces all line at the bottom, they are said to be in alignment. See Point-
line.
Alloy. — A iKisic metal mixed with other metals to give it certain char-
acteristics. See Type-metal.
Antimony. — A metallic element, used in type-metal to make it hard
so that it will resist wear.
Antique. — A name given to a type face. The topic headings in this
book are set in ten-point Old-style Antique.
Appendix. — Tiiat part of a book usually added as an afterthought,
or to incor[K)rale matter omitted from the text.
Apprentice. -One who is working under an agreement to serx'e an em-
ployer for a stipulated time, with tlic {)ri\ ilcge of !e:irning a trade.
Ascender. — That part of a lower-case letter that extends above the body
of the letter. Tiie letters b, d, f, h, k, 1, :ind t liave ascenders.
Balance.— W'lien a piece of t\'pe composition has its warious parts so
grouped l!i:it they are equalized in mass, it is said to possess balance.
Bar. — Book chases usually have bars across their centers to prevent
them from spre;iding under i)ressure.
Bastard. — Anything :iround a printing ofi'icc not to standard form or
size is said to be l)astard.
Beard. — See beard of type. Fig. 29.
2^4 i'Ri.\Ji.\(;
Bearers.— Roller-bearers arc useful in job press forms when the
roller-[)iiis arc Ijrokcn, lor thc_\ llieii cause the roHers to rotate. Elec-
trotype bearers arc pieces of metal, type-hi;,^h, phiced around tyjjc forms to
l)rotect them wliile maivin<,' a mold in wax.
Belly. ^W'hen type forms are loiked u[) and tested with a strai<,dit-
edge, it frequently hapi)ens that the luics l)i:id at the ends and show a gradual
depression in the center. '1 his is railed a belly.
Ben Day Process. — .\ jjrocess in\ented by lien l)a_\-, and used by
photoengra\XTS. The [)rocess consists in using gelatine films, with designs
in relief, wdiich arc inked, and the designs transferred to metal j)lates.
After being co\'crcd with a resin, which a.dlieres to the ink and is burned
on, the plate is etched.
Benzine. — .\ licjuid deri\'ed from coal-tar distillation. Used for cleaning
type and presses.
Bevelled Rule. — When the face of rule is at one side of the body,
and the shoulder sloi)es to the otlier side, it is said to be bevelled.
Billhead. — .X form of olTice stationery, usually sent with goods on
delivery.
Black-letter. — .\ black faced type, usuall\- called Ifxt. So named
because when set in mass fcjrmation tlie \',hok: tone (;f the page is black.
Blank-out. — The blank part of the last paire of a chajiter. In the days
of piecework, when t_\-pe v.'as mostl)- all si't by hand, the compositor who
got the last " take " in a chapter got paid for the blank-out.
Blocks. — Used for tem[)orarily mounting i le( t rf)tyi)es. The old form
of electrotvpe block is rapid!\- giving way tcj solid and seclional blocks.
The latter are comjiosed of units, and can be made up to an\- si/.e desired.
Bodkin. — .\ long, tapering, sharp-pointed instrument useful for getting
t\'pe out of a line while making correction.-
Bodoni. — Designer of the hrst modern roman type face. Theie is a
t}-pe named in his honor.
Body.— See diagram of a type, t'ig, 29.
Bold.— .\n\-thing that stands out [)rominently. Certain heavy facer
of ty{)e are called bold.
Boldface.— A n.ame gi\cn to \y]H: that i^- heavier than the text in which
it is used. All topic headings in tills bool: are in boldface tyj)e. See
Proofreaders' .Marks.
Book Chase.- \ larg'c ihasc, usually wilh shiftin", b;irs ]■'[<:, uS.
GLOSSARY 285
Border. — Anything enclosing a job, and intended to ornament it, is
called a border.
Bottled.— When type is so badly worn that it no longer stands upright
on its feet it is said to be " bottled."
Bourgeois.—.! name given to a type under the old system, now sup-
planted by nine-point under the point system.
Braces.— Here are a few sami)le5 of braces. See also " Cock and Hens."
Brayer. — .\ small hand-roller, used to keep up a uniform supply of
ink on a job-press. Sometimes used for inking type when pulling proofs.
Break-line. — The last line of a paragraph.
Brevier. — That size of type now called S-point under the point system.
Brilliant. — .V size of type. Now called 3 ', -point under the point system.
Bronzing. — C'o\-ering a printed surface with bronze powder. The bane
of the pressman's life.
Burr. — .\ny small projection left on metal after some mechanical
operation. See Section 17S.
Cabinet. — An enclosed wooden or steel frame containing type cases.
Some of the newest are very elaborately equipped for holding leads, slugs,
and other spacing material. See Fig. i.
Calculagraph. — .-\ combination clock and time-stamp, so arranged that
the elapsed time between two stampings is shown on the sheet.
Calendar. — .\ printed device showing the months of the year.
Calender. — .\ mechanical (le\-ice, consisting of alternate rollers of
chilled-iron and paper, and of diilerent diameters, used for polishing the
surface of sized and coated j)apers.
Cancelled Figures. — Figures with strokes through them, used in te.xt-
books of mathematics, etc. i :i ^ 4 5. See under " Imposition," page 182,
also Section 250.
Caps. — Capital letters are usually spoken of as caps.
Caption. — The explanatory matter printed beneath an illustration is
called a caption.
Case. — A receptacle for type or other material, partitioned to keep the
different items sei~)arate.
cS(, TRIXTIXG
Case. — The co\-er of a hoo;:. after Ijving printed, stamped, and made
up t'l pr(jf)er size to iit the book, i~ kivj-.va a= a case.
Case-rack. —A frame used fur the storage of type cases.
Cast. — An exact duplicate of a t\-,')e form, obtained either by electro-
typing or stereotyping.
Casting-ofl.^ Measuring t\T)e to ascertain lio'.v it will di'cide into pages.
Catch-line. — .\ line consisting oi a fe'.v of the unessential words in a
piece of atlvertisinc. but nece~~ary lo bind tlie main lines together.
Cat-step Circular. — .V'so ciilel a " [lull-out '' circular. .A circular
printed on two side- of a lone strip of pai);;r. and wiiieh is folded o\'er and
o'.'er. "Many lime- tables are folded in tin.- manner.
Cedilla.— A mark under the letter g w'len it occurs before a, o, or u.
t'") indicate tiiat it lia- tiie sound of s. as i.n i;icade.
Celtic.-d'he name of a tvpe !a> a Tlds is CELTIC.
Chapter Heading, -d'he t^i.ain iiead at t!ie beginning of each chapter.
Chase. — An iron <-)r -t'^e-l fraitna in whi', h forms are locked, so that they
may be held hrml_\- cju tlie bed of the' yiress. Tiicre are many kinds of
chases— cylinder, job, spider. Ab ( .la al * ■ jmijiaa; !■ a;, electrot\'pe, etc.
Circumflex.— An accent, 6, used to designate tiie long sound of the
\"0'.',el.
Clarendon.— The name of a type faie. Tiiis i- CLAHENDON.
Coated Paper. -Wlien a hi-rhly enamelled jiai'^r i- dedred. a web of
paper is hrst made and tlien inateil aial aalendered. It tomes in gl(.i^>y
and dull hnis!;. an i i= a prere(pii;dle fv^r Idah-arade ladiione '.vurk.
"Cock and Hens." — la^iiA :a,i aiaaae. iers tlait m:iy be joined
toLT'.-tiaT to make i;raies . — . . I!y lia: ii.t ri idu', tii ai of ikisiies
•lie braces ^an be made (d wiri^-a- -'.a-
Collotype. ~A ;.laitn-pla!a)ar.ad.> n-tiiod <<i pr;;uim:. ddie j)rintin;:-
plate luasi-t- id a cei.aiae :a!:i naaa'ad -ii a iaavy pk.te of gla^s. dd.e
Colophon,— \dr:a d'y. a tr.L knmra; '- a-nv :ay pb.aed at the end of a
Color Work. - \ term a-ed :■, ^ ■'- >.: '.'.. .\ aart .a ar'ada.^ in ^^"id^dl t;;e
Complementary Color. - la ;k. , a. ;; -i~ ■ : ■■'■\.l\- i:a:;a it i- f' -and t;;at
GLOSSARY 287
produce white light. Either of these lines is complcmentan- to the other.
In pi<,'ments, no two hues ran be combined to pro(hice white ; the result
is a gray. Green is complementary to red.
Composing-room. — A room where type is set or composed and made
up into forms for printing.
Composing-rule. — .\ compositor docs not set one line of type directly
on top of another, but uses a composing-rule on which to comj)ose tj-pe.
It may be of brass or steel, and is usually two points thick. See Figs. 10
and II.
Composing-stick. — A metal de\ice used by compositors to hold tlie
type while it is being assembled into lines. It has an adjustable knee
so that it can lie set to different measures. The \x'ry latest ones are gradu-
ated in ems and half-ems of pica, and are capable of being (|uickly set to
these measures. The com[)osing-stick tleri\"ed its name from the fact that
the first ones were made of wood. See big. S.
Composition. — That part of printing covering all the necessary opera-
tions incident to preparing forms for press.
Compositor. — One who composes type or performs any of the various
0{ierations incident to preparing forms for press.
Contents. — .\ resume of the subject-matter of a book.
Copper. — A reddish metal, sometimes used as an allo\' in type-metal
to impro\"e its wearing equalities.
Copper Thin Spaces. — Pieces of copjicr, one-half point thick, cut to
labor-sa\ ing lengths, usually from si.\ points to forty-eight points.
Copy. — All material furnished to the printer and to be used by him in
the firoduction of printt-d matter is known as " copy." It may consist
of mamiscri[;t, reT)rint, illustrations, ])hotograj)lis for reproduction, etc.
Copy-holder. — One who reads coi)}- to a proofreader.
Corner Quads. — Pieces of typ.e metal cast in tlie form of a right angle,
and used .'iround tlu' corncTs of jobs, the inter\'ening space being filled in
with metal of the same thickness.
Cost System. — .V modern efficienc}' method of ascertaining e\'ery
item of expense connected with the production of a job of printing.
Creasing. — If cardboard or co\'er stock is so tliicl^ tliat it cannot be
folded \'.atli(iut breaking, it is necessary to crease it. This is usuall\- done
on a printing-j)ress b\' locking up a jiiece of rule in the chase anrl exerting
pressure against tlii' t\-mpan, the stock being fed t.) a guide. AH h^avy
cover stocks that are to be folded against the grain must be creased.
?ss
l'RIXl'I.\(i
Cut-in Note.— An fxi)l;inat(ir_\- iidtc \>:\l riL'lit into the text to which it
l)clon'-r>. S(.-\rr;il iir.is (if liic irxl IjeiiiLr si-l t<) ;i luirrowcr nieasurc so as to
aUiird room for tin- I'lOie.
Cutter.— One \--lio operates a ci;ttiiiL'--mac];ine.
Cutting-machine. -A medianiLal lie-.iee eon=i-tinLr of u bed, a clamp,
and a knife, and used lor cultiiiL: stock to ti'e rrcjiiired si/e.
Cylinder-bands. —Strip- of t'lin. ilat steek fi-'e;iid in position near
the CN-liiider ar.d c lo-c i(, tko bed of tlie pnss. 'I'hvy lu-rp the rear ed,i:e of
the slieets from faUii'.L: on tile bed of ti'.e piL'SS.
Cylinder Press.- \ pri-iMn--Tin <; crmsi-iinLr of ;. ryiinder. a flat bed,
:ind an automat ie inkini: dr-.de . d'k.e tyjie tcirm i- ku kcd on the llat Ijcd,
and tlie bed mo'.as bark and fo'-tk. l)ene .til tl r rcl,;t;;i,r .'vlindor. tlie slieet
bein^; lield nil i;ir . ylindcF vddle i!io impr>-^i<.,n is O'li:- taken. If t!ie
c\dinder makes but nne ix". ■. 'iut i' n duriae a. i.ir-.'.-ark; an 1 ba.ekv.ard motion
of the Ijed. it is callod a " drum " eylindur; if it maias t\'."o re\olulions
durini: a forv/ard and Iiaekv.-ard motion of tk;e lied, it i~ caklud a t'.vo-re\'olu-
tion e\-liiider. In tiie latter teiie cf nuicidia-. •.d.i'.e t'lc bed is m<j\in,t^
forward the eslimier is raiscil so tiiat tlie b'-d ma.}" pass lienealli it ; \\dien
the bed is mo\any baek'.'.ard tk.e eylindi.r is do'.'.ii. taldn_' tin.- impression.
Dandy-roll. — .\ ryiindrieal ro'l used on a paper-ma.kinLr machine to
produce tlie ■.".'atcaanark and tlie kiiii elYect ^vili^jl is \i.~iide wheit a sheet of
papi-r is lield to tk.e lic'lit.
Dashes. - bkdn. or ornaniental pii i -r- of rule used to separate various
jiart.- iif printed, matter.
Dead-line. —.\ line ma.rked on tlie bed of ,i cvk.nder jire-.- a,s a puide
for pkeim.; the form, if tlie t\a)e >. viands l)e\ond. the deaddine it v.iU
strike tlie L'rippers on tlie c_\!i;id,er.
Dead Matter. -d'>'[ie tliat hcis betn used .and v.-hieii is ready for dis-
tribution.
Deckle. -ddie fiathery edi-e th.it i- i:a ident to the proces- of makini^
paper. It is left on tin.' printedi .-Iul t t-^ .a-.a- an a."ti.~;ic etfect.
Delete. '\'i< e.apuna'e; lo remo-.e. See "dele," undt r Proofreatlers'
Marks.
Descender. — Tliat pa,rt of
tk.at descends !)elo\v the
Diacritical Marks. .\bi;i;s u-ed iti iiv liem. ark- to -ii I'.v tiie jir iper
r.LOSSARY 289
Dieresis. — Two dots ( " ) placed cntT the second of two adjacent \-owels
to show that tluy are to Ijc j)ronounced ije{)arately, as in cooperation.
Distributer. — An_\- mechanical device that distributes type.
Distribution. — [Macini; type, rules, leads, furniture, and other material
in their res}>ecti\x' places.
Distributor. — One who distributes type.
Dope. — Xearl\- e\"ery pressman has some pet material which is supposed
to be a panacea for all pressroom troubles. This is known as " dope."
Double-leaded. — Placifig two leads between lines in text matter.
Dovetailing. — When doubling-up leads, the arranging of them so
that they o\"erlaf), or break joints.
Draw-sheet. — The top sheet of a tympan, to which the guides and
fenders are attached.
Drier. — .\ material added to ink to facilitate its drying.
Drying-rack. — A skeleton frame with remo\'able slides. The printed
matter is spreatl out on the slides when printing, and the slides are placed
in the frame until the material is dry. See J-'ig. 143.
Dub. — An inexperienced printer, .\ mediocre workman.
Dummy. — Unprinted sheets made up into the form in which the
finished jol) is to appear.
Duograph. — Two halftone plates made from one copy and usually
printed in black and one tint, or two hues of the same color, the two plates
Ijeiiig made with different screen an<xles.
Duotone. — .\n ink which, on drying, gives the job the appearance of
having been printed in two different colors.
Duotype. — Two halftone jjlates made from one copy, both from the
same negati\'e and etched diilerently.
Egg-shell Finish. — A finish given to enamelled papers whereby the
luster is destroyed.
Electrotype. — A ])iiniing-plaie made by the deposition of a copper
shell in a wax mold. This i> Ijacked with lead and trimmed to size and thick-
ness. Before being printed from, it niu:-t be mounted type high.
Em. --The sciuare of an\- bi dy of 1\'i)e. The pica em is the unit of
mea-urcmei'it in j>rintii:g (.li:; e-. ^ee "en."
Embossing. — Pre-- iiig jniper or cardljoard between a pair of dies so
as to lca\'c the dc~i'.:n. in rvhvi .
2(jO I'RIXTIXG
En. — ()rn'-li:i!f of :in cm. C)^^■in;' tn tlic siniiiarity in sound of cm anc
en. tiiL- en (lua'i is fucincn.tly s[i()kcn of as tlie '" nul " qn.ad. and the em
as the " inuLLon '" quad.
Enamelled. — Said of paper tliat has In-en coated and the surface
calendereil to a hij^ii oijlish.
Envelope Corner.— Adx-ertisin'.^ niatler firintcd in tlie upper left-
hand corner of an en\-c!o;)c. uswalls' rr-; ricud to iiiv, nrmc, business, and
address of tlie sender. Useful in c:;sc of inisc;irria,4c- of t!ie letter.
Expanded. — .\ name jds'cn to a type face wiiose width is slightly
wider than a normal one.
Extended.— .\ name 'Avcn to a t}pe face (if extreme v.ddth.
Face. — That part of a ty})e thcit is ink; d and wincli leaves tlie impression
on tlie printed surface.
Fat. — Said of nialter that is fuM of illiisf rations, blank lines, or o;-)en
sp;ices.
Feeder. --One ■viio fc^cds a press. .\]-o a c:;nic fnr anc piece of nvcclian
ism that acconipiisiics tlie same i 'dri' - i hat of put tin;; slu-ets licjwn to a
guide or holding Ih^m in a (ieiiidK- po-idon.
Feet. —When, a t>'!K; is c:c;t ;hcr-c i- a jet adhci'ing' io tiie (.enter of the
hot' im of tlie letter, 'i'lds i^ bi-okeii oi'f. ie,;\-ing a rough seiiion. .\ gi'oo\-e
is ;)!ougl;ed throua;!! the cenlei" lo r< move !hh- rou^rii scctio!i, aiul tins !ea\es
the letter Nvitii two sej)arate sc'tic'ns, on v. hit h it stan^ls. These are called
feet. See Idg. 20.
Felt Side of Paper. -.\'d pajn-rs are ma.de on tuie vcire si'reens, which
lea\"e what is known as a wu'v mark on one >ide ui th - paper. With a
view to eliminatiiiL' ihi:-, tln' pap'-r is .-(iUcv/cd hc'wccn !ica\\' l)iard<cts.
Tiiis im[)arts a feli unlA: to the pajMi'. d'lie ■.■, ire -marl^ .k^ ne.er eiilirely
eliiuiiiated.
Fenders. —Pieces of (an!bi;an! g'ued to tiie tymp.ui to j)rev( nt a slieet
from .-^lipiiing o-, cr llu- :'m\<\i -.
Fiber.- Part ni the ( ■'k:I :r sjivicMrc nf pia-ut-; li-ci: in papt'r-making
to iuijjart >trc:i-lli. kiic k-i.ger the :]]« v. tkc . ir^i.^^i'V ii ■ pa.icr.
Flats. -It var- foru'criy t k;- cu.-lo.n vlih ci r v -he^-l s c' paper to count
them inlo (lain ^ and ;V!d 'kcm in iialk :-ma!I :d/e^,k p 'i.-T were n<,t fi.kkd,
hut were deli\er. d !ki!. In lais v..;\- I'ai'cr up to about 17X28 inclies
became kiK c.'.n a.s ik';.~.
Fiv. .\ mecliani: ai de-, ice \.!lh k u' '.'.Mnden -!ia;is. u^-ed ('U lylindcr
pres-'- In re eive t ke ;e-i::led ;d!ci'! ' V< ■':]'. ' ke .xTudeT ami place if on a Jiile
GLOSSARY 2gi
Flyleaf. ^The blank iyA'j,v at Ihc front or back of bound books.
Folding-machine. — .\ mechanical device so constructed that it will
fold a sheet of paper, ready to be bound into a book.
Folio. — ()riL;ina!l\", a le^if in a boolc. b'rom the Latin /o/fj/w, a leaf.
In the earl_\' da\s hooks '.'.cre actually written on the leaves of {)lan;s;
hence the name leaves, j'he h^'ure used to designate a page number is
aho called a folio. I'oHo is the name gi\en to a sheet of paper 17x22 inches
in >\/.c.
Font. — A comfilete assortment of any one size and style of type is called
:i font. Tvpefoii'iders hax'e a regular fouling scheme, each font containing
a prescribed number of each letter or ch.aractcr.
Footnote. — An explanatory note i)ut at the foot of a page, and usually
referred to by some specilic mark in the text
Form. — An assemblage of type, quoins, etc., locked up ready for press.
Form-truck. — A two -wheeled device, used for rolling heavy forms
froin pLice to place.
Fournier (Pierre Simon h — A native of France, and inventor of the point
s\-stem.
Fractions. — IVactions arc made in three dilTerent forms: solid, I2;
piece, i; and adaptable, '"'/iciiO.
Frame. — A coniposing-stand, of skeleton form, with slides for holding
cases. See Idg. i.
Frisket. — A sheet of he;ivy paper rdretclied across the grippers of a job
press and cut out so that only tlie type can rnant on the sheet on the tympan.
It is used wlien certain parts of the foim mark and si)oil the sheet.
Full-point. — T'le mark of punctuation knov\'n as the period is frequently
called a " fuU-poInt."
Furniture.^ Pieces of metal or wood userl in making up forms. It
comes in wi(h.hs wliich are muilijiles of picas, and in warious lengths.
Galley. — Sometimes called a " pan." It ma\' be of wood, but is
usually of metal. It consists essentially of a smooth, llat bottom, with
raised edgts along three sides, the end being left o[)en so that the com-
posed matter may be pus'ied from the galley to the stone.
Galle\'-boy. — A bo\- v.hose dut\' it is to lool; after the galley's of type,
pulling pro(.'fs, etc.
Galley-press. — \ {le\-ice corisisting essentiall\- of a base and a heavy
roller running on track;-, and ;;sL'd for pro\ ing galle\"s of type. See Fig. 19.
202 J'RIXTIXC,
Galley-rack.— A -ectiiiiial ra^ k. v/iil! iiiclined ^lide-. for holding palleys
(if \yiK-.
Gauge-pins. —I'icrL- ot" -l^^ci i-::eta!. ^Ui:r.[K■d into form, and u-ed
a- L'liidt'- I I) l!:c lyir.jian of a j^ h j.rc-.-.
Gauge, Type. — A -trii) (.f -.VMcd or i^ictal. .eradualerl in ty{)e sizes.
Tlie ^'auLTC u^uall}' u-i-d ]>y coi^ijx.-iti ^r- i- .L'radualed in jtioa and ])alf-pica
>i/(-.
Gothic. — A name ::i\en to a ty;ie fare, usually square in outline ;infl
de\-i.id of ^erif■;. The Mi-oalkd te\t letter i~ really (;otliic in form. Thi^
iellc:r is in 'J' jtliio — H.
Graphic Arts. -A name tluit endir^u e~ every nirm <,i printing tiuU
lia- f'ir its oLje^ t the profiui tinn of tr\t it ion-; ralii in.
Grave ( ^ . — An aeient. r-iL'nif\-in'_'- t'lat the h.-ller i-; not to be stroniriy
aroc;Ved .
Great Primer.- -A_ rian:e i:\vin to a ^i/:e of ix-pe that v.-as in vi.j:ue
prior to ll;e ad' iption > f tl:e j)' lir.t -\ -lem.
Gripper-edge. — -Ti-at tdre i-f a .-iieet of f)aj'er v.hii]] i:; taken hold oif b\
the crripper- on - cylinder p''e--. SnUietime- called i:uidc-edLre.
Gripper-gauge. —A LMUire u-ud I.y pre~-n-.en a::d eompo-itor- to d.eter-
mine ■-■here i^ pla< e the tv'jte matter ia a iha-e i.r on jirc-s to a\-ii;d beim:
strut k by the ;:r::.:>er=.
Grippers - d he ~n;all tniL'or- on a e}-|;r.der pri -s that h-ih! the s'leet
tirmly ai:ain~t the ( \linder v.hile the in:pre--ior; i- beinL: lal-;en. ' )n a j-^b
pre-s the i:r:pper~ are -in:ply hat plei e~ of steel that pre^s airainst ti;e :rheet
and h<ild it iir:r;;\- a::ain-t the tj.-mpan.
Gudgeons. -Metal v.heob thai a-'e ~li;)pod M\-cr the ettd- of tite r.iller-
^tool;- on ji,b j^re—e-. 'Id;e :;;;o^o- :,- r.ll it: the traok- anf'. beiri^ keyed to
the ^toik-, (au~e the riiher- t-i r .0;'e. dd;ey -h-uld be of the ~an:e diatn-
eter a- the rnller-. Adaptable arsl adju-talde irudi'eoit- are n:ade for thi-
[.urpii-e.
Guides. -On job T)re--e-. (ithir oniid- i:lued to the tynipan or iraime-
piiiS -tuih into it : -< i ;)lai ed ih'^: the ji; inth l: i eroe:- int-i pr< mer [jo-iii^.n
on the -heet . fiji a i ■slhtder o''i -- the bi it I ' 'r:, -j'Al'ii.'- at'e ;.;- toned to a bat",
anfl the ~lde L;i;;di ~ t . the feedb- -a'-d . JIai h L-idde i- ret by n.io, in- a - re'-v
v,-hi' h ha- a n-dhed head, a Mt--'re^.^- Is hlh.- it in-nd\- after it ha- been
[irojierly adjt;-!t d.
Hair-line. - d he \er\- ntte I ins - i-f ;t; y t;. :■• fa- .■ are kii'--.'. n a- halrdine-.
Half-title, d'he na-.e ■ rr tl'h- .,f a h-.h. pla .-d at the mad ■ f the hmt
Halftone. A ph .n en-ra-. i d p;,:-, i . od-:^' ^ i-f d m .f ■.arj.ha: -:/e-,
tiiid ^h;^do■.^ - of a i 'h tare, bat all the half or interna, dia to I'-ne-.
GLOSSARY
293
Hell-box. — A box into which all manner of bent, battered, or useless
printing material is thrown. There should be sep)arate boxes for tyjie,
leads, and hniss rule.
Imposing-stone. — A framework surmounted by a smooth, le\'el slab
of marble or steel, on which forms are imposed.
Imposition. — The placini: of pages in a form so that they will print
in proper position on tlie sheet.
Imprint. — The nanie and address of a firm. A name put on printed
matter to show who did the priiiting.
Indention. — ^^'hen one line stands in farther than another it is said
to be indented. I'aragra[)hs are usual!}' indented. If the first line begins
flush, and the subsecjuent lines are held in a little, the indention is called
a hur:i;i>iii indrntion.
Index. — A compilation of the most essential things contained in a
book, and arranged alphabetic;dl_\- for quick reference.
Initials. — Largi' letters used at the beginning of the main sections
of a l)0ok or other printed matter.
Ink.— .\ combination of pigment, ^•arnish, drier, etc. Made in many
foims, colors, and consistencies, to suit the \aried requirements of the
printer.
Ink-balls. — Formerly used for inking forms. They were made of
leath.er stulTed with cotton. Since the ad\"ent of rollers the\^ are no longer
used. A picture cm' two ink-balls, face to face, is frequently used as a sym-
bolic sign by printers.
Ink-knife. — .\ thin, flexible steel knife, used for mixing inks.
Inserts. — J'iec^s of pirintecl matter produced separate!}' from the main
bod}' of a book or maga/ine, and inserted in {proper position before binding.
Intaglio. — .Nny engra\'ed surface wliere the di'sign is cut in the metal,
and ',vhich is filled with, mk, the surface being cleaned, so that the ink in
the design may be transferred to ])a|K'r.
Ionic. — A name gi\en to a t}'pe face. This is a specimen of Ionic
type-H.
Italic. — A slof)ing type face, named in honor of Italy.
Italic Quads. — .\r,iong tlie uninitaled. the sending of an apprentice
foi italu- quads is sujjposed to be a joke. 'J'he .\merican Type Founders
Compimv, how'AiT, did make a font of •( Gothic lt;i!ic in which ex'cry letter
;k;4 I'RJX'riXC,
!'>p(.'(l, ;ui(l \','!ii(h rr'jiiii'((l iialii' t|u;i'l~. 'i'i:i- ila!!'- matriic- u-cci 'iii the
l.;;<i!M/.- '1 yi)..-rap!! ai-w -l.'pc in ihj-; i-a!.ncr.
Jeff. -To !::'M-.\- i-ni <nia'i~ i:' i':'- -aiM- niai.iH-r a~ diic. 'I'!u; diu-
thrM,', !;/_^ ll'.L' 'ji'talc-l nuiiiljer i,.i" (;iia;!- v.iih tl.c uirl-c up v.-iiii.iiiL: tlic-
tlin )■.'.■ .
Jet.— A sir.ai! iiri'jcriirin rm tia,.' I:nii(im u\ c-arh Diecc of t_\'pc a- it conic-
frii!;i liaj iimM . The- jcl i- la-'-kin ' ■:': arai !':,_• r(.i;i:hiic-~ reiiaAu'l \'.ilh a
!)lai,c. ]\]Ur- k-a\-ini: I he idler v. ;i!i i.'.m u-et.
Job Press.- -Any priiniiiLr-pr-e -^ i:--i'! [nr i,rintin:/ jwo-. h'ornierU
re-:ri':i<l h, platen pre--e-. :-'.i:' ■■ the i' i r'-ri'i' ti'/n o'i curxail elecli'Mtype
[iKiti -. ~;i:a!i ]'■]> e\-!i!:(h;!- pie-e- ha'/e a pp' ■;. -rfi '•■! t he n;arhet.
Journeyman. A fi:h-:'( 'Ilt^ a -.■. aAiaaa. A i'ev.- ceMurie:- a^M thi-
iit!e \'.a^ t:i-. e;i to a x'.nriiaaa ••■ii'i ]• a:ia:eye'i ir'iia pla< e I'l phn t: in laaje:'
lo a< rpiire a fail i;:a r,'. le'k'e ;a h:.- ir.aaa
Justification. Ma!;;!:_ a !:■<• I't a -Jiwn tnearure. W'lien u-ii:::
Kern. Thai pari '■; li:e fa e ^a a '-lur v, !,;< h la.-er'ai'ii:- the h-iriy.
'hiie !e!iei-~ f and j are i.-uah\- i.eraeri. Heiaiai: i'\ ti.e hern en the f it i-
ncee-.~ar\- in lia\e lia: liaaMire- li. n. il, ih , and : a . AJaijy itahc letter-
are heraeih
Keyboard. -Ai! a— endeaLre < ■' i:e\-. -}-~;err;a'i' a"y arran::e'i. ea !;
of ■.'.hi'h cnir-'-- ~'Mae i:i'ha.h-a: -i a'rar.r;-;! thai a laalrix naty lie
a-einhle'i 'a- in tia- Lira:t:pe aa-l liaeitv;..- nr a hater cart la-; in ihe
.Men.ayia- .
Key-plate. A:;y iilaie tiiaa :■- i.-n' a- a :Jiii ie '<> i^l ^tiicr jTii' - iaiu
,-h.r pr.nr-- ih.- hi... h pht ■■ ;- :-..:.
Labor-saving Material. \; y n.^r'a! ■ '.>' ^r ' a-t to temJa.r jh^ ;i
!'-na' : - .
Laid Paper. h\'>- :iep.-'' v.'y/r '•,. ■-.'.. -a h.-'h i-. th: !;::hi. -ho/.- (l.-e,
eae' I i - ri ai^r a '. a' e; na^. ri. . a o '- hi e : . '\a- ;aa--a'a- ' a' ; ae ':;i: h\ -'' A
Layout. !'^...-- h. . a ■.-.aaaaa h.aa'aa • :. hT. l-aahy nairhc-i
Lavout Man. >ia..-':a'- <:.-'' ' a -a -.-a' a,-, i .' i'!;iiiiah\- a t-.!'"-
GLOSSARY
295
Lead. — One of the t:lemc!its of tlie c.-irth. Th ,' basic metal in an alloy
used as t\pe iiu-tal. Tlie ])ro', xirlion of load in t\"pe~metal varies with the
size of \\-])v to In; cast.
Lead-cutter. — A device for cuttin;,' stri[)s of lead to required size.
See I'ii;. 120.
Leaded Matt'T. -Tspe nritter with leads b'^twecn the lines.
Leaders. — I. ea.ders are jn'riods or dots cast to diiTerent multiples of
the body size. The}' are used in tables to lead the eye from one point to
another. Ojwii leaalers run one dot to the em. and are cast on one-, two-
and three-em units, (dose; leadei's are cast on en, em, and two- and three-
em units, and ai'e s(imetimes used ;;s a subsf i'.ute for dotted rule.
Leading. — Idacint; the required number of leads in a piece of compo-
sitioii.
Lead-rack. — ,\ partitioned receptacle for the accommodation of stock
sizes ot leads.
Leads. -Strips of metal, made to multiples of j)oints, and used in spacing
lines of t\-pe.
Leaf.- !-"arh separate sheet of p;i[H'r in a book. Some of the earh'
books \^'ere made b\- scratchim; on lea\es with a stylus; hence the word
" leaf."
Letter-board. — .\ llat bo.ird, usually witli strips of wood around three
edges, used ;is a place of stoniLn/ for composed t\-jU'.
Letterhead. -i'iie printed form at the head of sheets of letter paper;
also rhe slieet itseh" a.fier it is printed.
Letterpress. - I'iie adjecti\e ; denoting printing that is done from
r;dsed surfaces.
Letter-press. -Tiu' n !un; denoting an oflice de\ice for copying letters.
Letter-spacing. I'uttiriL' thin spaces betwt.'en letters in a word in
order to incfiase tiie leuL't!; of t'.'e word, or to make uniform the apparent
white space bet'.'. ecu ti'c Idlers.
Ligature. I'wo cli;iracters jniiu'd together on one b(jdy, as h, IT, A^
i\. etc. I'lrroiiLousiy c.illed io:::)lyp( ^.
Light-face. .\ n ime -ini-'.-tinKs !:i\en to a ty[)e face whose major
and !iii:::);' e!c:,icii;- :ire 'vXTy na'Tow. and ihertfoi-e light in cliaracter.
Line-engraving. - .\ !'h.<itoengra.\ mg wliose \arious parts are reprc-
:;ented in line-, and n.(it bi-okc!! ui) into half tones.
20)6 l'RI\TT\(;
Linotype. — A compcisiFiu'-maLhiiic. After tin- o;)cr;aor ;;.-scmbIc? a line
of matrici'S, the murliine autornatii all_\- casts a " linf-i)'-t_\'[)L-.'' or ?lug,
and tht-n <listribute5 tlu- matrice? into a maL'a/iia.-, rtTui}' for u-c.
Lithography. — A planou'rapliiL mctlioii of priiitiiiL'. (JriLri:ia!ly, it
simply meant printing' from stone, hut: at ti:e pre.-ent time it n'.so co\xts
printim; from ^'rained /.inc or aluminum phUer-, 'hhe jiro', e>i is based on
the antaL'onism of L'rease and v/ater. 'I'he de<i;:n r)n ti;e stone is made
receptive of irreas;.' ink. 'I'he stone aij.^orbs ■■■.ater and resists th.e ink.
By successivel>- moistenini,' an'! ink.inu' tlie stone, impre-sions can be
obtained on paper. Thin sheet.: of /.inc ur aluminum are used in the
" oflset " process of printing'.
Live Matter. — Type matter that i~ not ready for distribution.
Lock-up. — Locking up forms for pire-s
Logotype. — .\ combination of letter? joined to:_'ether on one body.
Ligature is the proper name, thouL'ii mcjst pjrinters call them lo'-rotypes.
See " Lijj;ature."
Long Primer. — Xame of a size f)f t}'pj in use before the adoption oi
the point s>"stem. Ten-pcdnt i,- tiie -i,.e ne.are^t to -.ehat was ioni: j)rimer.
Lower Case. — The hr.'.er of a pair •<•: lyp- i a~e~ ; 'lie one in which
Ihe small letters are kept. .\lso. one of the small letters. W'iien de;i;j-
natini; a lower-case letter on a proof the contrriction '■ hi.." is v.Titten.
Machine Finish. — Usually, a dull hrd.-h. left on [Kiper as it comes from
the paper-making machine
Magazine. ^That part of a com[)osin_'-m:;cl:ine in v.hich the letter?
or matrices are stored, read}' t<"j be as?embied into Hnes,
Majuscule. ~.\ letter u?ed as ,a ^apit.-j letter durinc the period when
books were written, .^ee "Minuscule-."
Make-ready. — The proiess of _'ettim: a j(.b really to print. It cons: = tr-
of pulling an impression, s[.)ottin'^' up. settiiv-' c'uide--. eti. d"h;e name is also
Luven to the sheet containin_' t!je ^p- 't-uT'.
Make-ready Knife. — .\ l-.rhfc -:•' - i -liv s':c.:>ed ;ind •-:round, and used i"-:
cutting the [deces of p,.p^■r i:sed in --.^ir ;[::,: up a nnd:e-read\-.
Make-up.— .\ compo-itor ■.vh.o-a du'y it i- to m.ake up comiioserl type
into j),i:.'e~.
Make-up Rule. - >ome'irne^ .^iiid a ' i.urnpb i- i: " rule, because it
push the tvne :don^ [•■ w u-'-d li\- ;iev.>;ia;>' r n:en in ni.ikinj up pa-e^
CLOSSARV 297
Mallet. -A udodfii head niounicd o;! a liaiulle. I'sed in conjunction
willi an iiiiciAcri'd planer t" plaiu' fc.rnis fjr witli a proof-jjlancr to beat off
pionf-:.
Margin.- Tlie amount of si)ace around the printed matter on a l)age.
Marginal Note. I'.xphmatnry matter placed in the margin of a [uige,
Ur-u;dl_\' he.-ide llie matter to uliich it refers.
Mass.- -Spoken of in rehition to groups or jiatches of type matter on a
page.
Matrix. — That [)art of a mold in which tlie face of type is cast.
Measure. The hngth to which a stick is set.
Melting-pot. — That part of a casting-machine in which the metal is
mehril.
Minion. -A name of a t_\|)e si/.e in use before llie advent of the point
s\'stem. Sc'\en-[)oint is tlie size nearest to what was minion.
Minuscule. -( )ne of the small letters de\-e!()})e(l during the period when
books were written.
Mitering-machine. — A niQchaniral device for obtaining straight, smooth
end.- oil leads, >liigs, rule, etc., so arranged that it will miter U) any angle.
Modern. - .V name gi\cn to a t\pe face that is characterized by straight
serif- and thin hair-lines, first cut b'\- Jiodoni in 1783.
Mold.- That part of a casting-machine in which the bodj- of the type is
ca^t .
Monotone. -.Ml in one tone, .A name gix'en to a t\'pe face in which
the N'arious elements arc all of ecjual width.
Monotype. -Literally, one t\pe or letter; sf)ccitically, a com{)o>ing-
mac hine thai ; asts anti comj)()ses indi\-idual t\j)e units into pages, read_\- for
printing.
Mortice. -The noun. Any cavit}' cut out so that something may be
inserted in it .
Mortise. -The \-erl). To make a cavitj- so that something may be
inserted in it.
Nick. --.\ de{)res-ion left in one side of the body of a type during the
proce.-s of ca-ting. So iliat the letters will be in the j)roper order for print-
ing, t\-[ie i,- .-et in the stick with the nick up.
Nippers. The grippers on a cylinder press are sometimes called nippers.
See '■' .riiiiier>.'"
Nonpareil. -Xame of a >\/.c of t\-j)e in use before the adoption of the
[)oint -\-.-tem. It was ju-t half the -i/.e <jf pica. It is therefore si,\-[)oint on
tile point swteni .
2',s i'Ki\'r].\(,
Numerals. -'T\w Ar.'iliic r,unH-ral- are i, _ s- ■! ■ "■ '-■!'■: ''!'-■ K"n\iri
IUlll:rraI~a'c 1,11. 111. ]\\ Weir.
Offcut. r-i:. rt M- :i":,~ <.;■ raprr rt'-. h !en oM-r afu-r :;;c "ri::i:.ai -;.'( k
Ka- i r, n i i:i (i'.'/.n i^i tl,c ^i/u riiii;;i\(i f^ r a j"!j.
Off Its Feet, ^ain ( f l\-pc w!,..;. it i- i.'a . landi;;:: i-erfcc th- u[)rii:ht .
Offset. \ -;::ia!_:v re-u';;!;:: fj-^ m carryi:.L; -<> t; v.' h ink <.n a -hect that
-'i!V.' I'i ii ak' en- V, l];e liMtt^.::: . i the rkeet ai)'i\-c it.
Offset Printing. — A plain ■-nni'ke pr-. e-.^. v,-kerein tk.e ink f.n-ni t'-e
f>>riii i> \'.y-i '':.'-._L ein a ruik^er ikanket inrtea'l i i he::.:: transferred direet!}-
tM tile -:ah ;,
Old-style. -A type faee. t kara- U-riz-d ! y (.Ikinue ^erif.^.
Optical Center. -Tiiat p-k.i (.:i a i>ri;:-.rl })a::e v.ik' li the e\-e reem-
naturali}' t'l -vek a~ ll;e een'tr. h i- -k.:ku}^ ak^i'.e tke ai lUa! (rnti-r id
l';e pa::e: 'i'y'.r.-j . apiiri i-drna' l-'v . ! ;,r: e rk k' ii- i i \]:v d;-tani e fr:ini ;!:e t-ji.
Ornament. -An\' ride, i) ^v-'^r. ^r e< -r;'. eiUi^ r:al de'd>.e i;-ed a~ an en;-
he!k- a: <r..\.
Outlook Envelope. -.\n i-n-..' .p^ tia: frMn; :k vd.i' ii l;a- Kreii prepared
a; d add-',--- < n tke eiiek ,ru!'e rra;.' '"v ~i-:J . dk.i- -a'.e- 1 i;r:e anal a\-' 'id- err^r.
Overhang.— -Vnx-tkinL: ti.at jir^ di.it- i-ey-nd ti.e r.;u:n l.'^dy d tke t\-pe
eir -!ai:.
Overlay. -Wdien prepa:d:n: a f- rin ■ f t}-pe 'a- pkite- ut printini: it i-
1 \di!ai(.'r it i- ( aked an ew-ka,;. . k' '" '- . ';,: un^ier ■ r ka' k : .f 1::e I' rn-. , it i-
Overrunnins;. -(k;---. in.: ■ i •■ ■- r''^ ^:- an 'i.e e; d id 'a.i.- ;:' e t- t:.r
Page. ( e.e .-kk ■•
Paging. ■■' k k.a
Paiette-knd'c. \
Panel. ■.. a kk:
Parchment. 1 ki
Pearl. \
GLOSSARY 299
Perforating. — Punchi:',,;; sni;ill Iiolcs or slits in a piccx- of paper so that
it will tear casil\' at sonn; (icsircd jilacc.
Perforating-rule.— A pit'cc of steel or brass rule, usually put into a type
form, so the.t tiu' j(il) nvAv be printed and i)erf(jrated at the same time
Photoengraving. — Any enuravinj; process in v.hieli plioto^'raphy plays
an imnortai:t part.
Photogravure.— An inta'dio prit^tins,' process. By the aid of pho-
toi,'rapiiy holes of different sizes ;ind dt-ptiis arc' etidied in the outside surface
of a cojiiXT cylinder, do breal-; uf) t'li; plioto.Lrrajdiic inia.ire so that it will
produce h.oles, it is neccssarx' idtlier to make ihe ne,LMti\e throu,t^h a screen
or lay a <,,'iain on t!ie cylinder tliat will resist the action of ilic elcliing-iluid.
Th.is kecjJS Tne surface of tl;e c}-Iin.der le\"el. Idie oyhnder rotates in a
fountain of inl;, tiie surijlus bein.:; scrayied from the surface by a "doctor,"
Iea\d:.%' the ink caily in the holes, ddie sliadows of the pictures have deep
holes whicli !ri\'e uji a lot of ink, wid.le the hi;-;lidi!dus have shallow hioles and
(d\-e but very little ip,k.
PhotoraechanicaL — Sadd of a process in which p!:oto,irraphy is an aid
or an auxiiiar\- to son:e mechanical process.
Pi. — Type matter tliat has fallen a^part an'' its various elements badly
mixed.
Pica. — Thie name f a t_\'f5e size. Und^er the point s}stem ;)ica became
tweh. e^{)oi:it. The name pica is still used. It is the unit of length for leads,
slugs, rules,, furniture, etc.
Picking (of Paper). — Prin.iers frcLjuently ha.ve trouble with enamelled
or coated jiapers.due to the fact tiiat t!ie ink is so tacky that it pidks the coat-
ing from tlie lace of the [ia!)er.
Picking " Sorts." — When a comj^ositor is setting a job and he finds that
icrtain ne^-ded iL-iters a.re Tr.'ssh;a; frorn tin- case, lie is -ometimes com[)elleti
to ::o around ti;c oKa:e jdc'dn^ "sorts'" fi'om oilier jolis in order to set his
cwn.
Piece-fraction — .\ fraction tliat h,as been made up of more than one
iik'ce. d"hem(X'l-u>cd iracliop; . 'ike J 4, >j'," a, etc., arc made in oi;e[)iece; but
unusual fraction.s. like i.'r.u or '-'•' , ,, are built up of pirces. called piece-
Piec -hand — .\ w^rk.man wh.o i- i>aid at a. specified ra.tc for the weak
d:at he ''oe^. lb- i^ n. t [laid by the wnk. His earnines dejiend enti'\'ly
■j'A ti'e \a)!nna ; f '.■.orf ilia! iu; produces.
Piece- ork. — In con-p .,k; ,n. j)icce-woik is that which is })aid for .it so
niucii pel- ti'.ousan'.l ems.
300 rKlXIlXG
Pigment. — Any solid puhstance tli;tt i.-; afitii-d to printins-ink to pive
it b<j(i>- and color.
Planer. -A Ido, k of hard vvood. one fare o: -hi-d: is level and sna)^,th.
Used nn tr.e fare ui t_\i)e inm^^ to ;';-:: 'a,-:::: ::M tie letters and make the
form i)!ane or le'.'el. "1 i,e i.'.vv iri a pron: ;'i::;er i^ s (i\ ered -.'dUi felt.
Planographic— .\ny jirintiivj ;'r. - .-.. /d. -r the ink :? taken from a plane
surface. .\d s-edi i^rn e~-es are based on tin- antaijonism of grease anr]
water. (See Lithe!_'rcij)h\ ,j
Plate.— .\n>- meta! surface so prepared that after beinc; inked it is
capable of \deldinj: imjjressions.
Platen. — ddiat part of a jf.l; printin_'-[>r'ss on which the make-ready,
t\-nit)an. an'i iruides are pla' ed. and on widel; the sh.eet takes th.e impression
from ttic tyf)e.
Point.— Th.e unit of the fioint -\--tenn It is one-t-.velfth of the .\n: rican
pica, an'l measures .cp^^4 indi t; i d:. d'ype sizes are nov,- based on thi= unit.
Point-line. — When the face< f t} ;;e :- ; lacci in sue]; po.-ition on the body
that \'ariou- si/es may be ju~d;a i by u^;n;r nn.ierial that i? some multiple
of tile point, it is said to be on p'antdine.
Point-set. — Said of a f-nt of t_\-pe v h.ose characters are all cast on body
widths that are some muitiple (d ti^e point.
Point System. — .\ system ' f ra-'in_- tyne bodies on some multiple of a
unit ea'led a poinc. One p-dnt i^ .- ; ;-a incin
Poster. — A printed rheet ur^ d for outdoor display ad'.'ertisint:, usually
pasted on iuklj.; u"ds at:' f^ :.' :■■ .\ o-. .-^;;Cet ]''•::'.'_■•: :^ a ^i^;^:c sheet ;^X42
ineiu- in >i/e; a f.vo-d:ee; p-:-' ' :- n...de by udnj t.v(i s;:ei's. onedndf of
tile de-;i:n beiu:: o;i ea' h -::< et. \''-.- larje t'OSters are made up of a com-
Poster-srick.— A kirtre, -.voo im .. anr rin.'-stivk. usv^d when settin?
Pressman. —nne ■.vho^■■ d ;';. ;* i- to T-^nare f' rnis fo: ; rintiuLt. This
Pressroom.-- \ r > ;ni :■■'::< :i prindn^ ;.■ doni-. dd.e ideal pres>room is
one that ;- ~ ■ ■ rr.n.t : •■.:.' '.■.:::•.■■ r 'u-'- .n.d ];umidi'>' ma\- l.-e i ontroiled.
Prin':n;:^-press. '•.-.; n.- ■ : ::-■ ',....--: fo m v.i.i^i: a -u. ' .-:-i;on of
'erd:ij toe ink 'o i. n- r or r.d.er mat ■:; o ! •. the at^niii ation (d nri ^~ure.
GLOSSARY 301
Process Work. — Work obtained by f)rintini^froni plates prepared by the
pIu)toeiii:r;uiii,i; [Jrocess. A lialttone process w'nen by \aric olored i)icturcs
may be obtained by the use of three- or four-eoior [)lates as originals.
Proof. — Any printed inipn-^ion of a job that has been made for the
purpoie of inspeetion and correetion.
Proof-paper. — Any papir used for pullint; ])ro()fs. Dry proof-paper is
specially made lor llie purpt)se. one side of it being liiglily glazed.
Proof-planer. — A jie,.-b of wood one face of whieh is perfectly plane and
covered with a layer of felt.
Proof-press. — Any piece of niechai;ism made especially for pulling proofs.
Proofreader. — One wiiose duty it is to read proofs and mark the errors.
Pull-out. — Anything pulled out from the form b_\- the suction of the
rollers.
Pull-out Folder. — A i)rinted ein iilar whose i)agcs have been folded over
and o\-er. The pages jnill out when opening the folder. Also called "cat-
step" folder.
Pulp. — Wood or other \-egetablc fiber from which paper is made.
Punctuation. — The sepiiration oi words in.to clauses and sentences by
the use of marks, each of which lias a deliniie use.
Quads. — H'ocks of t>pe metal, cast to (xiint sizes of body, and in mul-
ti;)les of tlie s<iuai-e of liie b(;ii}-. A one-em tjuad is just as wide as it is
thick; a two-em (juad is twice a,s 'I'.ide as it is thick; a three-em quad is
three times as wide as it is thick. Y-h. cjucals of \'arious sizes are illustrated
on page (\
Quoin. — A niechar cal dc\ ice so constructed that it ma\' be ex'^andcd,
thereb\- exerting pressure. Used by printers to lock up for 11s. See
I'-ig- 95-
Quoin-key. — A de\isL for ti::htening ciuoins.
Quotation. — Matter written by one author and made use of by auc her,
the kilter ''i\ing full credit to the former.
Quotation Furniture. --Metal furniture that has been cast in type
molds. Th;e bod>- of the furniture iui:- a smo:)th top, but it is hollow beneath,
the walls beinL; ^U:■talned by cross-rifjs. It is cast in lengths from four Ic
twent\- picas \'ar\'ing b\ four p'icas.
Quotation Marks !"",i.--A set of marks used to enclose quotations,
tnus indicating that the words so enclosed were written by someone other
liiau tile author.
,-yC2 l'RiX'JT\(;
Railroad Furniture. — .Mfi;il furniture wliosc two side wall.- are joined
through tiio centLT .vita a ^astainia^ welj.
Railroading.— \ terni u,-e'! to lirs.Tiin' tlie mar];in,u-o\-er of words at
the ends of su;rc>-iv e Huls.
Reducer.— A sah-tance put lata jiria.tina'ank to reduce it- consistency.
Register. — d'o i;,-t tia- \-arii)as par'- if diiTera-nt forms into sucli position
that v.:;c:i t!ie_.- are all [)rir.ted nn a slart e:aa printira; v.ill be in lis prope'-
place.
Reglet. — W'lien wooden furniture i- cr.t into "trip^ tliinner than two
pacas, it is called reulet. 'Ida' nirtst faaiiJiac tiiicknesses are six and t\'.a-l\^e
points
Reprint. — d'o paint aeaia, .\fter a io!) h;is heen j)r:nted once, each
-uhsequent laintina is a rcpiini.
Reproductive Processes. — A.rp.- [iro; ess of p'rintini: wliereby a number
of impressions ipa\- })e talaai from :. prep:. red sarfaic. t!a- surface bidnt;
inked ea^ii lira- iniorr i:a- impriS-ivai is taken.
Revise. -Tn farac-ire a ma-
.\fter tile pr<iof is ;c'.aa-d it i^ ka
,are not a!! made, an^l a second p
se-'on I ,'■;.'<• ; ata! .- . (iia
proof witii a proof I, f a corrected Jib.
; as t;a-_'.a-,' '■■:: a !f tko correctiiais
is no. .ssar\a that one i- known as the
Riding.— W'a I!
ridi:a-a
t)ari (a .a ;orr;i v/oras up o!
Roller Composition.- A oombia::: ioa 'd a!'
m;dted a:ai ca>; in na ijd- ■; roan i ;. > -an ia! (-lar o
factufc! i-:'- hi- owu ^v, rr! craida. "!::■■ ^a" ■
v,at!i tlu' siatson cf tia' >^^^'. a sofaa roiie: ! -aa '
sa,ni:r,er use.
IS said to !)€
' '!a.-r-e>. t
Ifacii raa:
Pu-ning Ik-ad. - I ka i
■a: i;ii;'' 1 a" i- ' >i..
aa^'c tarouaacait
f.LOSSARV
303
Saddle-stitched.— A j>amphlct iii wliirli all ihc lca\-e^ in~et each other,
and whlih i~ ^tilih.ed thrr.ii-h imm tlu" (t-iitCT \-> the h.a.(k, is said to l)e
saddlo-slitrlied.
Scoring. — .Mal^ini: a cvc-a-c in !;ea\y paiiei- ^lo(i^, so tliat it mav' be
toldcil \'>il!i()Ut hreakin:r.
Script. —A l\-i)e fare ii\ iniitation oi" haiMlw -itiii.tj;.
Serif.— A >i^iali proje-liou at the i-<'.<]< of letter-. See lig. 20.
Setwise. - -A t'rm ti-ed to dilYeixTitiate tiie ',',-idth of a letter from its
ijod\- tI/j\ Ih dv- ^h:e is i)(.d\".\-i:-e: widili is ~v'l-.\-i,-e.
Sheetwise. -AMirn a -h.eet has Ikc't pi'inled on one side from one form
and then haa"i;ed tip with a;iotI;er forir. , il is -aid to hu\x been jirinted shcet-
\'.i-r.
Shooting-stick. — A piece of iron or \'.-o!>d so slta{)ed on one end that
wlien jikicid a.'ai;i~t one ed_\- of ;i wo »!c;^ fji; .in and -truck v.dtli a mallet
t!ie puoin "in be dri\"en a^rain -t i' - iiiate and The f^rvni lockerl up. Alcehan-
ical on iri- !":a . e a ini' ,-t ■upoia.ned '■'■" < dc!i ',n ins f, ,r lock in;: u[) forms.
Side-head. --A sub'.ea'i ]")iaced at the t'lp of the text, but at the side
in-!i ad ■ f tile center.
Side-stick. — A lo:!:,'. taperine'. '.'"ed.Lre-shafJed piece of v.'ooden furniture.
i;-cd al in;.:d ie -'i tvj e in f .r:n- a: id 'Galley-, and lockefl in place with wooden
Signature. —Small Araddc numeral- printed, on i_he lir-t pa ire of each
f(n'm of pae'e- tnron'i'io'ct a :mo!.;. and mniiberedi con.-c\'uti\a-ly to show in
w'n;1 order thic section- are to be a--emb!ed. biacli ^ection i- al-o called a
Sinkage — blank ^pace placed^ at the beLdnrnmr of a cliapter in a book.
Size. -W'iien a job i- t ) be bronzcl it ' - ih'-t urinted wdth size, which i-a
-iicky ( omnound u-ed like j)'anter-' ink. and to '.'/hich the bronze ])ci-,'.Tler
Sized and Supercalendered. — I'e.per i- -aid to be ^ized anfl super-
calend c-c I ■.'.'ken ike -'.::v/s i- t'tit into ik,e bealer vdth all the other itiLjre^
diLM ~ li-od in n-:;.k':' j; i ke iJape", and afte^^^■al■d -; earned a;";d calendei'ed .
Skeletonizing. -Taid-cf a j k) apart and rebuiidiiiL^ it -o that its \-arion-
par: - nw\- ic- ;>:-':io,-d in oihesent cokn--.
Slip-slieeitng. -d'koi;;.: j)ie i-., ,,f Ju-a '.■}-. romzki jiaper between jirinted
shc-eis -! ikal ike [)di:;'nLr 0:1 one -keet \'.kll not olT-et on another.
Siining. --(•-:■•.- lin- in :-:ee^- 'y the akl of -n-el cuttinii-rule. Al^,
CLiliinL; -::crw apart a- l;;e\^ enieri:e from the prinlini:-pre-s, In" ihe use of
cutlinLr-v,kK-,d-.
304 rKi.\ii\(,
Slugs. — Pieces of lead, about ,'-inch liif,'h, usually six or twelve points
thick, used as spat iuu; material between lines of t\pe. The bar of metal
with the t_\-{)i' cast on it 1)\- the l.inot_\i)e or Interty])e is called a slug.
Small Caps.- Capital letters, usually made for book fonts, but of a
smaller si/e than the regular capitals. They are generall_\' made about the
same height of face as a lower-case m.
Small Pica. — 'I'he name of a t\;)e size under the old s\-stem. On the
point system small jiica became ele\(n j)oint.
Solid Matter. — Type matter that has been set without using leads
between the lines.
Sorts. — Type of various sizes and kinds held in reser\e for replenishing
cases.
Space-band. — .\ thin, comjxjund wedge, made of steel, and used on the
Linotyjie and Intcrtvpe for justifying tlie line of composed matrices.
Space-case. — .\ case specially arranged for the accommodation of quads
and spaces of various sizes.
Spacing. — Putting the proj)er amount of material between words, lines,
or groui)s.
Spotting-up. — Marking out and putting on patches on a make-ready
sheet.
Stereotype. — A plate cast in type metal from a jilaster-of-Paris or
papier-mache matri.x.
Stet. — .\ term used in f)roof reading. When written on a proof, stet
means, "do not remo\e the part marked out; let il stand."
Stick.— .\ comp()sing-stic:k is usually referred to as a "slick."
Sticker. — .\dvertising matter prinled on gummed jKiper.
Stone-hand. ~ .\ workman wliose sole duties consist of imposing and
locking u[) forms.
Stonework. Imposing and locking u() forms.
Straightedge. A long, llat, straight piece of steel, useful in lining up
pages in a lorni.
Straight Matter. - 'i'\pe (omixisitiori that does not contain disjiku'
lines.
Supercalendered." Sec' ".Si/cd and .-ujierudendered."
Swash Letters. - Letters that have ornamental i)rolongations or em
tiflli^-lnncnts. ( Sei.' i)aL'e S.-.')
GLOSSARY 305
Tack. — Adhesiveness possessed by a prtnting-ink, due to the use of a
stiff varnish.
Tail-piece. — An ornamental design used at the conclusion of a chapter
or a piece of printing.
Take. — When copy is cut up into sections and given to compositors to
be put into type, each section of copy is known as a take.
Text. — The straight body matter of a book is known as the te.xt.
Text Letter. — Text letter is the name gi\en to a type face whose gen-
eral characteristics are bold, heavy, body strokes with sharp, thin, elon-
gated serifs. Historically speaking, it should have been called (iothic.
This word is set in vLEXt.
Tie-up Material. — A general term, embracing everything used in the
tying-up of composed type— string, leads, slugs, corner braces, etc.
Tilde ('^). — Placed over the letter n to show that it has the sound
of ny, as in canon.
Tin. — A metallic element, used in type-metal to make it tough and in-
crease its resistance to wear.
Title. — .\ name given to a t>'pe face possessing modern characteristics.
Title-page. — Usually the first page of a book, and containing the title
of till' book, author's and publislier's names, etc.
Tumbled.— When a printed sheet is backed up by turning it from top
to bottom instead of from right to left, it is said to l)e tumbled. This should
be avoided, if possible.
Turned Letter. — A letter put in upside down to call attention to the fact
that another letter b.as been substituted for the right one. This is usually
done when the riglit letter is not a\-ailab!e.
Tympan. — The sheets of paper drawn tightly across the platen and
held in place by the tympan-bales. Sometimes called the packing.
Tympan-bales. — Bands of metal bent to conform to the shape of the
top and bottom edges of tlie platen, and hinged to the sides of it. They are
used to clamp the tympan to the platen.
Type-caster. — \ machine for casting type.
Type-gauge. — A strip of wood or metal, graduated in type sizes, and
used for measuring the number of lines contained in a piece of matter.
Type-metal. — .\n allov. ordinarily composed of live parts of lead, two
parts of aiitiiiKiny, and one jiart of tin.
3o6 PRINTING
Type-high. — In America, .918 inch high. It varies in other countries
from .916 to .923 inch high.
Typography. — The art of printing from type. More pjarticularly,
type setting, or the proper assembhng and grouping of type units in a piece
of type composition.
Typotect. — .\ typographical architect. One who plans a job and desig-
nates just how it is to be put together.
Underlay. — .\ spot-up sheet !)laced beneath a j)late or type page in an
endeavor to make it le\'el on the face.
Unit. — -V standard quantity or number ''■ .■ which other things are gauged.
The Monotype Unit is i;iS ol the set cm of the body.
The Point is the unit of the point system. It is 1/12 of the
.American pica.
The unit for paper is the weight of one ream of paper one inch
square, expressed in thousandths of a pound.
Varnish. — The \ehicle or medium used in printing-ink to bind the pig-
ment together.
Vellum. — Name gi\'cn to a paper, the finish of which is similar to the
finish on real \-ellum, which is a dressed animal skin from which the hair
has been remo\ed.
Vignette. — .\ halftone plate whose edges gradually fade away until
they become lost on the white surface of the paper.
Wash-up. — The act of washing up a press.
Watermark. — A niark left in paper (.luring its manufacture, and which is
distinctly seen when the paper is held to the light.
Wax-engraving. — .\ method of obtaining printing-plates by first en-
graving on a wax-coated j)late of copper, then building u]) the background
and making an electrotype from the plate.
Woodcut. — -A printing-plate of wood, on which an image has been left
in relief by cutting away the background.
Wood-engraving. — That branch of the art of preparing printing-plates
in which the plate is of hard wood. Jt is really the precursor of all print-
ing processes.
Wood Type. — T\-pe characters cut out on the end grain of wood, usually
1 i:trrv, and mostly of large size. Smaller sizes of type are usually of metal
and cast in molds.
GLOSSARY 307
Work and Turn. — Printinj:^ a full form on one side of a sheet and then
turning it over and working the same form on the other side.
Wove Paper. — Paper that is free from the watermark lines which
characterize a laid paper.
Wrong- Font. — Any letter in printed matter which is not of the same size
or face as the balance of the word in which it is found.
Zinc-engraving. — A printing-plate made of zinc, the background of
which has been etched away, leaving the design in relief.
INDEX
The numbers given are page numbers, not section numbers.
For additional list, see Glossary, pages 283-307
Abbreviated titles, 70
Abljreviation for pounds, 70
Abbreviations, 57
Ability required to set tables and other
intricate matter, 141
to analyze and plan work, 84
Absorptive power of paper, 253
Accidents on cylinder presses, 248
Accurate and uniform spacing, 16
Adapting ink to stock, 254
Adhering to one type family, 87
Adjustable gudgeons, 168
Adjusting platen by aid of the impression-
screws, 223
Adoption of the point system, s
Adverbs qualifying adjectives, 66
Advertising, 87
campaigns, 87
Aid to type study, pi as an, 81
Alabastine, use of, for embossing, 242
Algebra, genealogies, and pedigrees, i5l
Aligning rule with type, 105
Allowance, for spoilage. 280
for squeeze, 112, 170
for squeeze in tables, 146
of distance between lines when setting
tables, 144
of white space around cuts. 156
Allowing for movement, in blank-book
headings. 154
of register jobs. 168
Altering an author's style of writing, 50
Always hold stick in hand while spacing
lines, so
A.M. and P.M.. 71
Ambiguity resulting from omission of comma,
33
American Lead- and Rule-cutter, 199
Amount of impression. 226
of space around an initial. 99, 100
of space between words with sloping
letters, 17
of space between words with tall, straight
letters, 17
of water necessary to the production of
a pound of paper, 270
Ampersand. 71
origin of, 71
use of. 71
.Xnalysis of copy for letterhead. 116
.-Vnalyzing a job with a view to improving
it. 102
\ncient Roman stamps and coins, 74
Antiijucs. 79
.Vpostrophe, uses of 59
Appropriateness, 85, 90
Appro.ximation of material by measuring
it in inches, 7
Arrangement of type in cap case, i
in lower case, i
Arranging and assembling display type, 84
Arranging the tympan, 228
Artistic temperament, opportunities for men
of, 84
Ascenders of Cheltenham, 80
Assembling and arranging display type,
84
Assembling device, Linotype, 210
Auto-Mat Tabulator, 211
Averaging the number of words in a line,
36
B
Back, 181
Bad typography to mix old-style and
modern type, 79
Badly battered letter, patching a, 230
Balance, 85
Balancing of type groups, 85
Barber Low Slug Trimmer, 199
Bars, shifting, 183
Bastard lengths, alongside of initials, 113
of leads and slugs, 35
Bastard measure, cutting leads to, 114
Battering rule with bodkin, 172
Bearers. 167
do not bear off form-rollers, 167
roller-, 224
Beater, the, 264
Bed of platen press, 221
Bending leads and slugs into circular form,
159
Benton. L. B.. 80
Benzine for cleaning rollers, 246
for cleaning type, 246
Bewick Roman. 79
Black ink on white paper. 90
Black-ink troubles, how to overcome, 255
Black-letter, 73
Blank-book headings, 153
Block letter, 73
liodkin, battering rule with, 172
Bodoni. designer of modern type face, 77
quotation marks. 60
Bonds. 273
Book forms, proofs of. 26
Book pajjers. 271
Booklet cover. 127
Border units, how to make up, 113
cleaning of, 32
309
INDEX
Bordcrr; and ornaments, 98
Hn\viii„' a iiit-et. ;34
Hrackfts, usci of, 62
lira» rule, 104
Hraycr. or liand-roller, 23
Hrt-ak-line at tcjp of paee, 30
Hruw>tcr theory of color, 259
Hulk of straiL'ht matter set on machines, 50
liullen, Henry Lewis. 78
contribution to tlie study of type fates. 78
suhdivi-ion of type faces, 79
Burr on rule. 202. 203
Bu>ines< card. 126
Butted rule, IC7
c
Cabinets, dustproof. i
C'alculatin.i,' typewritten copy. 36
Calculations lor Monotyjie matter, 37
Calender, 271
Calenderini:-rr,achine. 271
California Job C ase. 1
Capital ¥.'< ami Ts. 79
Capital R's of variou:^ type faces, 8i
Capitalization. 67
Cancelled fiL-ure.-. 182
Carbon tetrachloride, 247
Care of cuttinij-tools. 206. 207
Ca>e. lay of. i
Casc~ in pairs, i
Cartint-'-machine. Monotype 212
Ca^tin:; off a t^-.ble, 147
in column-, i.:^
type. '-'aUL'c for. r-,o
type into pa,L'e~. 30
Castini; sort.-i on composin?-m:achines. 217,
21S
Cause of loss of time when lockin.L' uji jobs.
Chalk-mark as a .:;uide for rci-'isterinu'. 1C9
Chamfered or side-face rule. ic6
Chandler & Price tiordon Pre^s. 221
Chan'-dn.L' dimensions to jjoints. 37
Characters Used in Monotv])e rule work, 147
Chase. 1S2. 194
McGrea! combination, 194
top of, I S3
Chase-bar-, loose. 1S4
Cheltenham. 79
latkinL' old-style char::cteristic5. 79
Chemical wood-j.ulp. :o.:
Circle, determining- the exact distance
around, i -'... 100
bendin_' leads and .-lu-- to f.t. 159
lilacin:' a line a.round. 159. lOo
settin_' type in. i -^
(da.nv-l.ell type >-i platen pre-.-. 221
Cleaning- border urd.t.-. 52
rule-. 32
stone lefnre puilin;: ;jro(if, 23
t\pi', ;2
U-.v v,ith Ive. :.;;
Cleariace. -o'
Cloiin4,cnvr'. p,-. 2;o
whili; ■,■, i; !:dra-.viii.; from [iress, 2.;;
Cnate.l lape.-,-, .71
Collatin2-mark«, i'.;
Colon, ami (l.:-i: u-l-d toL-et!;er, ;;
and ouotati'iH n.ark- u-rd p.jcil . r. ;;
Col(jr-nii.\int'. 2S7
"Color Notation." 257
Colored ink on colored pjaper, 90
Colton. \\ . K.. on proportions, 96
Columns, ca.-tinj; off in, 143
Comma, uses of. ,^1-54
Conimas and periods inside of quotation
marks, 59
Com]. arisen of old-style and modern serifs,
of -erifs, 81
of t\pe faces. 82
Comi.le.x senteiices. 56
Comi'Osins,'-machines, 209
economy of. 209
Comiiosin^-room material cut to standard
len^-ths. 7
ComjiosinL'-rules. 15
in sets, i 5
made fr(jm brass rule. 15
Com])Osinu'-sticks. 13
Composition of i;rintin;:-ink, 252
C<.imp<isition rollers. 224
running dnwn of. 224
Compositor, skill re';uired. 84
Compound, adjecti\es, 65
nouns. 6,;
nouns of one or more syllables, 65
sentences. ;(j
Word, omi-sion of part of. 67
\V(jrds set in cajatals. 5.s
words without the hyid.en, 66
Condensed type, use of. ici
Consideration (jf stock and ink wl.en plan-
niuL.' job, 90
Consi-lency of varnish. 233
Constant, or multipIyin.L' factor. 98
Contractions. ". ,so
(.'ontrast. 8s. 87. 90
Copper or zinc instead of [.resslioard. 2-6
Cojjy rjrepared by proofreader before setting.
I 5^
Cord. savinL' for future Use. 30
Cork on --rii^pers. 224
I Cork to eject stock from cutouts, 243
I Corners, gaping, liow to li.x, 172
mitered, 107
! trouble-ome. 170
Corrected i/p'of. 49
(.'<.)rrectinL- a Jul... 29
on stone. 20
Counter. eml/'r--i:,:.--. 242
Ti^ver for a:i in\dtatiiin. 134
Covering jiower nf ink. 255
Crov.def! matter, oo
Curved line, h' ld;n_- ip. ;.ositii>n. i'':
Use of 2Ur!;:r.ed ;,aper for I.oldir.g in
l;..<sition. 150, I'O
Cut. 1,^1
( 'utout for enveli'i.e. 2vS. 259
for tally-, ap'., 100
('uts. running t>"i e around. 155
type m.itter ajainst, 1 "6
! Cuttin-' :ind :i2urin_' stock, 283
ittn
:trot\
bh
lea.
stard r.:
.1 ine.i-i:
'■C
Applx.
!.■, r
p.iltern fur runiji:i2 t\
brcctiii]
aroun.:
2. "50
..ut. 156
INDEX
311
Cuttin?;, printing, scorinc, nnd perforatin.i: at j
onf operation, 2 \s
stct'l rule. I'jS
to multiples of a iioiiit on a niherini;-
machine, 204
very small pieces of rule, 20^
Cuttin-;-ruIe, mounted in oM clectrotvpc
block, 24,5
stocl. 244
Cuttink'-tools, care of. 206, 207
for printers, 107
Cylinder prcs.ses, accidents on, 24S
1)
Dandy-roll, 270
Danu'cr of tvpe pulling' out on press, 16
Dash and colon used together, 55
Dasli as freiiuently used by advertising; men,
Daslu'uses of. ^4-^6
Dead line, iS,;
Dead-oil. 247
Deckle, 2f,b
ed,'o. 206
Dele mark, 45
Deleterious effect of electrotypes on red ink,
II I
of ink on rollers. 224
Delia Kobbia. 79
De,->i rnalinn on order-blank wliich way type
is to be set. 1 1(3
Designating' paper accordin.t; to a substance
number. 274
Deterniinin.i; amount of space to Till line. 17
amount of leads to jjaize. 41
exact distance around circle, 151,). 160
how many lines of any size type may l)e
^;otten into a ,ui\en space. ,^.-!
how much matter a certain jjiece of copy
will make. .,6
lay of a form. 178
m.ari,'ins. 177
mar.Ldns for paires of equal si/.e. 177
maru'ins for pa,'es of une(|ual A/.v. 177
number of ems in composed matter. ;8
number of inches of matter copy will
make. ,^7
value of composed ty;je. .59
wei.Lrht of type by measurement, .11
Devices, sal'ety. 2 j7
Dia^omd method of [iroportions. n i
Di.i,L.'rams showing in-ide and outride pa.ires
comimr together. 1S2
T)ic. emliossiii_'-, 242
Difference in iiiodern and old-style faces. 7*")
DiiYerentiatint; the comma fri;m the apos-
trophe, 47
Diu'cster. 264
Dirty ty[)e. 14
Discordant elements. 87
] )islnn4 of rule. I'lo
Disk, talkin:,'-mac"hinc, use of. for emboss-
ing-counter, 24j
Display type. 79
arrangement of. S4
Distribulini; disiilay type. ,34
Distributiiii;-bar. Linotype. 2n
Distribution, -.s
Diversity of opinioTi re-.'ardin,4 amount of
i]iipre~-ion. 226
di\4sioii of v.'ords. 6.^
1 )ivcrsity of opinion rc.:;arding punctuation,
so
use of hyi)hens in comp>ound words,
65
I )ivi(linf,' a word, 16
according to pronunciation, 65
of compound words, 64
of verbs in the i)ast tense, 64
of words, 6,5 65
Dollar mark, when and how to use, 71
Dominatin;; feature of a letter, 78
1 )o not sacrifice the appearance of spacing, 18
I )opcs, 256
Double ciuotations, s9, fio
Doublin;,' up leads, 11
rule, 106
Drai;,i;inf; of proof-paper over form, 23
Draw-sheet, 22,5
\'-shapefl slit in, 233
Drawing lines from errors to corrections on
proof, 47
Drier for printin.a-ink, 2,^,5
Driers, paste and licjuid, 2,^,.;
Dropijinfi or throwing type into cases, 35
Dry proof as a guide for skeletonizing, no
Drj' proof paper, 23
Drying of printing-ink, 253
the sheets, 236
T)rying-racks, use of, 237
Dummy, making a, to get lay of form, 179
I )uotone inks. 257
Dustproof cabinets, i
Each author has his own style of writing, 45
Karly tyjjes of composing-machines, 209
Ixclesiastical purposes, tyjie for, 91
Economy of composing-machines. 209
Edge, deckle, 266
Eilitions de Luxe, qo
Eight, lay of the. 1S7, 188
Eight-point figures self justifying to pica
wddths, 9
three-jjoint spaces of. i.^o
type self-spacing to pica measures. 15c
Electrotyp^e block, cut to shapie for making
cutouts. 24.T
cutting circle in. 161
Electrotype plate, inserting cut in, 157
Electrotyped job. use of rule in. 107
Electrotypes, deleterious effect on red ink,
III
to be nickel-plated, in
Electrotyi)ing job for two colors, no need
to skeletonize, in
when printing more than one at a time. 141
Elements, discordant. 87
of success in a job. 102
that give distinctive characteristics to
ty[)e. 82
Em of the body, the, 6
Ifm, picti. 6
Embo.-siiu'. 242
counter. 242
die. 242
explanation of term, 242
Emi]tvini: a stick, 18
En qu'arl. 7
Enamelled jiaper for halftones, 254
inability to get rcLrister on, 234
Enamelled jiapers, 271
312
IXDEX
Encasing of gear-wheels on printing-presses,
247
Envelope corners, 124, 12S, 129
locking up, 165
Envelope, cutout for, 237. 239
cutout, placing in jxisition, 239
sizes, 27S
Envelopes, 237
closing, 240
closing while withdrawing from press, 241
opening and closing, 240
Equal space each side of small words, 18
Exclamation mark, origin of, 61
uses of, 61
Expansion of paper, 254
Experiments to ascertain legibility, 80
Face-rule, how to use, 104
Fanning a pile of paper, 234
Fascination about typesetting, 84
Feeding a press, 234
Fenders. 223, 234
Fiber used in paper, 262
Figures, cancelled, 182
line-up of, 151
Figuring and cutting stock, 280
File, mitering with, 206
Filigree work on initial. loi
First step in setting a ruled blank, 143
Fish glue, use of, for embossing, 243
Fitting letters. 103
Five-em space, 7
Flat papers, 273
Flying a sheet, 234, 235
Fold, 181
P'olding, by machine. 193
hand- and machine-, 177
heavy paper, 194
of sheet to obtain hypotenuse oblong, 97
proofs into book form, 26
Folios, 32, 181
enclosed in brackets, 62
to go into margins, 185
Forms, containing rules, locking up, 165
imjiosing, 182
inserting, in press, 227
lay of, determining the. 178
locked uj) head down, 165
locked up head to the left, 1C5
locking up. 163
making a dummy to get lay of, 179
planing a, 1C6
riding of, 172. 173, 184
springiness or ''give'' in, 167
scjuaring, 172
testing, 167
various jjarts of, iSi
work-and-turn. 176. 181
Form-planer, 23
Form-rollers not borne off by bearers, 167
Four, lay of. 187. 188
J'our-em s[jacc, 7
Four-em wcjoden furniture, groove on, 172
not s(]uare, 172, 184
Fournier. inventor of point S3'stem. 4
I'rench folio, 23
folio for spotting up, 22S
chalk, use of, for embossing-die, 243
Frisket, use of, 2.11. 244
Use (jf, in printing a regiitcr job. ^46
I'uU body of letter occupied by initial, 101
Fundamental ijrincijjles of job composition,
Turniture, metal, 184
placing in form. 184
reversing of, to prevent riding of forms, 173
shrinking of, 225
wooden, 172, 184
(Jallcy-press, 2$
daping corners, how to fix, 172
C.auge for casting off type, 30
tymiian-, 231
Ciaugc-pins, 2,51
(ienealogies. algebra, and pedigrees, 161
(leneral classification of type faces, 73
jirinciiiles of locking up forms, 163
rules for layouts. 124
survey of the field of job composition, 84
"(jive'' or springiness in a form, 167
(ilass-encased pressroom. 254
Cjlass slab for mixing ink, 257
Glossary, 283-307
(iluing cardboard to roller-track. 168
Glycerine as an aid in withdrawing sheets
from yjress. 236
Golden oblong. 97, 98
ratio of Greek art. 94
Golding Jobber, 220
(jordon Press. 221
Gothic and text, use of together, 87
(iothic ty()e, 74
Cjoudy, tyi)e designer, 75
Grain of paper. 244. 270
(iraphic rejiresentation of proportions, 96
(Jray tone, 87
Greek art, golden ratio of, 94
(iress on optical center, 85
Gripper-edge, 181
(irijjper-gauge, 183
Griiipers, i8i, 223, 234
cork on. 224
skeleton. 223
(Irit beneath type. 23
Groove <m four-em wooden furniture, 172,
184
Grouping, 85, 91
of word " bonks" for letterhead, 120
GroU])ings for letterhead, 118, 119
Gu'k'eons. 167. 224
adju-table. 168
and roller:, not of same diameter, 168
Guide for re..,'isterin-;. chalk-mark as a, 169
Guides, 223, 231
holding in por^ition on tlraw-.-heet, 233
how to set, 231, 232
(|uad, 2,u
Cjulenberg's invention. 4
Iair-1
lair-s
lallt(
lah't(
ena
land
land
land
land
ni s, 76
[lace. 7
ne screen, 258
lies, 258
nelled pajier for, 2-.\
- and m.'ichine-fokling,
ut o\'erlay, 2 u
iKide i)aper, 270
oiler, .ir braver, 25
INDEX
3^3
Hand-set rule job, 142
ruled blanks, 143
table, 108
Hand-written books of the early scribes, 98
Hard ink, removal of, 247
Hard packing, 226
Harmony, 85, 87
Century Dictionary's definition of, 87
Hash, typographical, 80
Headings, near bottom of pages, 32
blank-book, 153
Heavy-faced type for iron and steel ads, go
Heavy paper, folding, 194
Heavy tone, 87
Holding curved line in position, 161
guides in position on draw-sheet, 232
proof-paper against roller on galley-press,
25
How different thicknesses of paper arc made,
266
much will it make? 36
printing-ink dries, 253, 254
type should be held in tlie hand while
distributing, 33
How to acquire speed as a typesetter. 15
approximate the number of words in
copy, 36
distinguish the letters b, d, q, and p,
^' 4 .
fill a certain space with a certain piece
of copy, 38
handle a planer, 166
make a layout for a letterhead, 120
make up border units, 113
obtain perfect joints in tables, 108
place proof-planer on form, 24
read,type in the stick, 4
remedy ink troubles, 255
set lines straight across, 151
stand at case, 19
tell a roller in good condition, 224
use a galley, ig
Humidity, action on rollers and ink, 254
pressroom, 254
Hyphen, uses of, 58
with a double stroke, 47
Hypotenuse oblong, 97,98, 278
not changed by folding, 97
Imposing the form, 182
Imposing-stone, placing pages on, 176
Imposition, 176
Impression, amount of, 226
trial the. 228
Improper division of words to conserve cijual
spacing, 104
to obtain uniform spacing, iS
Improper way to lock up a form, 163
Improperly punctuated sentence, 51
Improving a job, 102
by the use of colored ink and paper,
102
Inability to get register on enamelled pajn'r,
254
Incorrect method of feeding a press, 235
Indention of paragraphs, 71, 72
of poetr}', 72
Initial A, as part of the word, 100
standing alone. 100
Initial, amount of space around, yy
Initial and text in harmony, 99
in a different color, 99
lined up at the top, 100
occupying full body of letter, 101
when word is all caps, 99
with filigree work, loi
Initials, 99
bastard lengths alongside of, 113
mortised, 99
with plenty of white space on them, 100
without wdiite space on them, 100
Ink, deleterious effect of, on rollers, 224
hard, removal of, 247
soft, use of, 226
stiff, use of. 226
suited to the paper, 253
troubles, how to remedy, 2SS
Inserting cut in electrotype plate, 157
Inserting form in press, 227
Inserts, 177
Insetting, 193
Inter-relation of spaces of different sizes, 151
Interrogation mark, origin of, 60
uses of, 60, 61
Intertype, the, 218
Ionics, 79
Iron and steel ads, type for, 90
Iron quoins, 164
Irregularly shaped cut, justifying type to, rsS
running matter around, 156
Italic type, 75
Jenson, Nicolas, 74
Job composition, 84
Job, not in harmony with shape of the page,
136
same shape as type, loi
setting, 116
Jobs containing rules. 141
locking up, 170
Joints in tables, how to obtain perfect, loS
Jordan, or refining-engine, 264
Judging proof by the impression in tlie
paper, 23
Judicious ornamentation, 98
Justification by the use of point material,
112
Justifying a line, 16
on the Monotype. 214
one size of type with another, 9
type by the use of point-thick spaces,
9
type to irregularly shaped cut, 158
Justifying-scale, Monotype, 214
K
Kerned letters, 4
Kerosene, best material for washing rollers,
246
Keyboard, Linotype, 209
Monotype, 212
Key-form for registering, 241
Kind of twine for tying up type, 19
Knowledge required of a proofreader, 44
Label, 126
Labor-saving material, 7
3M
lXi)i:x
Laf)<)r-savinu' rule not to be cut, 107
Laid paper, 270
Lapijcd corner, 107, io8
Last line of a jarau'raijh, 17
Last pa;,'e of a chapter, 32
Latins. 7y
Lay of case, i
form, determining the. 178
forms. 1S7
the ei.^'ht. 187. i.SS
the four. 1S7, 18S
the si.xteen, H)2
the twelve, 1S8, 189
Layout for an outlook billhead. 125
for a statement for outlook envelope on
U!,rule.l .-totk. 122
for a -tatenn-nt nn ruled >toek, 122
.ayout man. « ;
-ayout-. L'eneral rules for. 124
-aw of levers. .S5. i_. i
\vs, unwritten, of typcjgrapr.y, 00
Leail-cutter. r.17- I'j'j
~-ead rule. 104
-eadeii matter, 10, ,yj
eiders I'O
L I hn^ ri ttcr \ 1 lie ett n
e I 1 cuttii (It) lie re I j
1 1 lai ti 1 1 iij
el cr
e 1 re I
I il il t\ I J
t la t\l r -3
en_th t J I r ' I 1 t
ei _th 1 t t rn ] r j er 1 \ 14
etter s h n < j tie 1 ill i 1 i ^^
Lette I c I 1 n 1> 3 01 co; J f ir 116
le er 1 ti 1 t lib
r U( II ^T 1 1 i II
1 t I m lie 1 1 \ t 1 r I o
1 \ 11 t lr\
1 eL u I I
m I r 1 3 1 ■" I I
I t n f 1 f n 1 et I 1
(tter riiterir- ^-,
m jrtiiin„ 20
ettcr I el 10 ic
t m ^ e H e t e I 1 len t IC4
e\er 1 \ I S^
tire
1 1 t I L i t\i c 1 r iiilhi (r\ o
ne r i t r i n i e 1 1 1 let r m -py,
e t n 1 r o
t e t I I
1 I r \ I I
1 It
I t
1 t
Locking two sectior,_s of a rule job in one
form, 170
u\> a form, 165
impr()]jer way, 163
jjroper wav', 164
uj) envelojje corners, 165
uj) forms. 163
containing rules. 165
general jirineii le-. 163
liead down. iC',
head to the left, ihs
so that pre~-r!,;'n can read printed
matter, ih-
jobs containing ruli'. 170
ietterlieads. 165. i'>'i
])erforatin-2-rule. 170
re.-i.-ter job^. it'8
r.oLkin_'-quoin-. I'Vi
i.n_.,type-. 4
Loo-e cha-e-bars. 1S4
i.\u for cleanin^' tyj/e, 247
M
Maer.inc- and hand-folding. 177
,Maehiiie-lini.-hed [japer-. 271
.Maci.ine-fold. 103
.Mau'azine. Linotype. 209
.Main item l(jr di.-i;lay. 00
Ma.'or and minor elements, 82
markin_' a .-lieet for. :z'j
patehin- a .-lu-et of. 229
placing in iiorvition. 22'j
^poiling, 220
Making a dummy to get la,}' of pages, 170
Lolumns eijual full width (if job. 144
coiumn> to some nnilti;i!e of the en. i.;o
I.a:;es a line long to avoid .-liort pages, ,;:
rea<!\', 227
o narr(jw measure. i,;S
lenu-ths of lead-, 113
U]i to the paper. 1S7
I Mallet. 2-,
Manu-cri-.t eopv. ici
I .Mar-'in-. 177
jterr
ett(
I 21
how to deli-rniine. v, h.en setting g
Marked pro- f, .'.S
Markin. a -I eet f' T n\al.::ig ready.
cop\- for biildfiiLe. ^5
11
adU^4 itab.
p;.-e-
-n dunimy. i
M.irk-. .
I i.ujaUailii,.
priH.fr
AP:rri::2
.?';'er:- wki
.Ma- .T.
'Upina. '..I
M.,-,-,
.•I
Ma--w.
;.::.!. s;
M.iteri.i
tr, ,;.; ;,-,, ,j-,,,
.Malri. e-
l.i;,- '",■■ .■
.Matri\ (
::-i-. .M'i:,'.:\-
.\ i ', ' t : ; ; L-
1 'I l.i'iT in ;" :
\'. <,r.-.-.
( "<,:■ i ■■. •!■'( ■
Mr.oiiai
01 the w.ad
Mea.„r;
,.■ t\ i e -.viti.
INDEX
315
Mechanical overlay, 231
wood-pulp, 263
Mediocre ability, 84
Menu, treatment of, 133
Metal furniture, 184
Metiiod of holding and tapping form-planer,
24
Miller Saw-Trimmer, 197
Millinery ads, type for, 90
Minor and major elements, 82
elements, 76
Mitchell Miterins-macliine. 200
Miter, explanation of term, 200
Mitered corners, 107
Mitering letters. 205
MiterinK-machine, 200
cuttin,^ to multiples of a point on, 204
Mitchell, 200
resetting knife on. 202
set of knife on, 201
trimming material on, 202
trimming to gauge on, 20,;, 204
type fitting on, 205
upright, descrij-jtion of, 200, 201
Mitering \vith a file, 206
Miters, inside and outside, willi chamfered
rule, 106
Mixing ink, 2i6
tints and shades, 257
Modern and old-style faces, difference in, 76
Modern type, 77
for newsi)apers. dictionaries, etc., 77
Mold-disk, Linotype. 210
Monotype, method of mounting illustra-
tions, 216
method of running type around cuts, iss
method of setting rule work, 147
rule, 104
rule job, 142
system a unit system, 10
the, 212
unit, 213
Mortised initials, 99
Mortised letters, 103
Mortising letter, 205
Mottling, 255
Aiotto card, 133
Mounting embossing-die. 2.;2
illustrations in machine-set composition,
215
Multio-Hexset Quadrats, Stephens's, 144
Multiiilying factor, or constant. 98
N
Xarrow measure, setting tj'pc in. i.to
Xeedi for skill in setting tabular niatier. i.ji
Xicknames. omission of period in. 5S
No change in the cap case since the days of
Jenson. 74
Xon-distribution, 216
Xonpareil. 4
Xuniber of divisions permissible, 65
o
Oblique or sloping serifs, 7Q
Oblongs. 97
Odd lengths of leads, making up. 113
OtTicc stationery, loi
Oil-cuiis. need for constant attention, 22
Oiled sheet for registering, 2.11
Oil-holes, care of, 225
Oiling the jiress, 225
(Jld-face, 76
Old-style, 75
and modern not to be used together, 87
faces, legibility of, 76
for dis[)lay work, 77
Omission of part of compound word, 67
of period after Roman numerals, 70
of period in nicknames, 58
of i)eriods from headings and display
lines, 70
of words in an extract, 58
One line longer than the rest, 16
Ol>ening and closing enveloi'cs, 240
Opening up of letters a and s to improve
legibility, 80
Opportunities for men of artistic tem-
perament, 84
Optical center, 83
Gress on, 85
Trezise on, 85
Optical illusion, 85
Order-blank, 116
a typical, 117
Order of procedure in proofreading, 50
of secjuence in printing process inks, 260
Ordering stock in even quires. 280
Origin of exclamation mark, 61
of interrogation mark, 60
of paper, 262
of the Roman alphabet, 74
Ornamentation, in harmony with balance
of job, 99
of early hand-written books, 98
shape of, 99
Ornaments and borders, 98
Other groups of type faces. 79
Outlook cnvcloiie. [danning for, 124
Oval serifs. 79
Overlay, hand-cut. 231
mechanical. 231
Overlaying, 230, 2,51
Overrunning type, 29
Pabst Oldstyle. 79
Packing. 22;
hard. 226
soft. 226
Pages, in reverse of the printed sheet, 179
making up, 30
of equal size, determining margins for,
of unequal size, determining margins for,
177
on stone not in regular sequence, 176
out of center, 186
that back each other, 176
Panel grouping, 91
Trezise on, 91
Paper, 262
coated, 271
cutting in more than one direction. 280
different thicknesses of, how made, 266
enamelled, 271
expansion of, 254
flat, 273
grain of, 244
hand-made, 270
ink suited to. 253
3i6
INDEX
19
Paper, laid, 270
machine-finished, 271
making up to the, 187
origin of, 262
picking of, 254
sized-and-supercalendered, 271
sizes of, 27?, 274
weights of, 274
wire side of, 236
Paper-cutter, a dangerous macliine
Pajier-making macliine. tlic, 266
Paragraph with side iieadiiig, 30
I'aragraphs, indention of, 71, 72
Parentheses, use of, 62
Parts of a form, 181
Paste drier, 253
Patching a badly battered letter, 230
a sheet of make-ready. 229
I'edigrees, algebra, and genealogies, iGi
Pencil sketches, 120
Per cent, 71
Percentages for oblongs, 97
Perfect joints in tables, how to obtain.
Perforating, 243
printing, scoring, and cutting at
operation, 245
Perforating-rule, 243
cutting rollers. 244
locking up jobs containing. 170
lower than type-high, 244
preventing from cutting rollers, 170
Period of old-style faces. 75
Period, uses of, 57. 58
with Roman numerals and A
figures, 57
Periods and commas injide of quot;
marks, 59
Pi, Si
as an aid to tyjie study, 8r
Pica, a standard size, 4
actual size of, 5
actual thickness of, 5
em, 6
size, lack of uniformity of, 5
Picking of paper, 254
I'icce-workers. 39
Pigments used in printing-ink 252
Placing a job on the stune. 23
a line around a circle. 159, 160
envelope cutout in position. 239
furniture in form, 1S4
make-ready in position, 229
of iiroofreadcrs' marks on proof. .;7
pages on the imposing sto;ie, 176
"Plane."' meaning of the word, 166
Pl.aner. form-. 2,j
how to handle. iCb
proof-. 23
Planing a form. 166
form after it is locked uji. iSC
Pl.'inning a job, 91
tilings lu ijc kepi in mind when, i
a ruled jol), 14 ^
for an mitlook envclupc. 124
Platen, adju.-ting by aid of imjiression-sc
definition of. 221
presses. 221
the. 222
PluL'L'ing (|ui.ins with a wad of paper, i
P.M. and A.M.. 71
Poco proof-i'res>, 27
icS
one
•al>ic
iti.n
pertorating at one
105, 106
}'oetry, indention of, 72
Point, actual thickness of, 5
Point system, 4
invention of, by Fournier, 4
Point-line, 9
Point-set, lo
Point-thick spaces, g, 113, 150
I'oints, press-, 194
Poorly balanced page, 136. 138
Position of letterhead on sheet, 121
Possessive case, 59, 70
I'otter proof-press, 27
I'ounds, abbreviation for, 70
Press, feeding a, 234
oiling the, 225
Pressboard on tympan, 22G
Presses, platen, 221
Press-points, 194
I'ress-proofs, 26
Pressroom, temperature and humidity, 234
up-to-date, glass-encased, 25.^
Presswork, 220
Preventing perforating-rule from cutting
the rollers. 170
Printed sheet i)ages in reverse of. 179
Printers' oblong. 97, 98
Printing a job in two sections to obtain
perfect joints. 109
a two-color register job by the aid of
a frisket. 246
cutting, scoring, ar
operation. 243
type above rule line:
Printing-ink. 252
composition of 252
dopes, 236
drier for, 233
duotone, 257
how it dries, 253
knowledge of chemistry required, 252
mixing, 256
Iiigments used in, 232
process, 259
tack of, 255
unwise to make additions to, 232
vehicle for carrying pigment in, 252
Printing-office style, 69
Probable origin of the serif, 77
I'roblem in proportion. 91
Process inks, 259
order of sequence in printing. 260
Process work, three-color. 259
Professional removal notices, 131
statement. 130
Proof-iiapcr, 23
Proof-])laner. 23
Proofreader, knowledge required of, 44
Proofreader's duty. 51
to suggest change, 45
marks. .J5
privileu'e. 51
Proofreading. 4.1.
requirenients for. 44
Proofs in colors. 24
Pro])er and imiirojier way of using rule witf
type. 105
lay of lengthwise forms. 194
spacing for leaded matter. 10
spacing for solid matter. 10
way to lock up a form. itV;
Projicrly punctuated sentence. 51
P.roiiortion, 85, 91. 94
INDEX
317
Proportion, diagonal method, 94
in relation to type faces, 76
Proportions, table of, 95
Proving book forms, 26
pages in pairs, 26
Publicity type, 79, 90
Pulling a proof, 23
a revise, 30
proof of cylinder form, i85
proofs when jobs are too large for proof-
press, 26
Punctuation, 50
marks, 51
Putting away leads and furniture. 35
Pyramid ornament, 99^
style of placing furniture in forms, 163
Quad "guides, 231
Quads, 7
Query, 51
Quire, number of sheets to, 274
Quoins, 164
iron, 164
locking;, 169
tightening, 167
wooden, 164
Quotation marks and colon used together, 37
and semicolon used together, 56
uses of, 59, 60
Quotations, double, 59, 5o
single, 59, 60
Rag stock for paper-making, 263
Ratio, 91
of three to five, 91
Reading type line for errors. 16
Ream, number of sheets to, 274
the, 274
Reclamation of soda-ash. 264
Red ink, deleterious ellect of electrotypes
on. III
Refining-engine, the, 264
Register on enamelled paper, inability to
.get, 254
Register jobs, allowance for moving when
setting, 112
allowing for movement of, 168
locking up, 168
Registering, 241
used ot oiled sheet, 241
use of pin in, 242
Reglet, use of, 183
Regular oblong, 97, 98
Relation between characters of same font
on Monotype, 21.";
of margins for pages out of center, 187
of type sizes, 90
of width to length, 94, 93
Relative strength of hand-made and machine-
made papers, 271
Relative weights of paper, 278
how to determine, 279
Removal notices, profesfional. 131
Removing hard ink from r jller? and press,
247
Removing rollers when pre— is left stand-
ing, 223
Requirements for proofreading, 44
Reset specimens in "The Inland Printer,"
12,1.
Resetting of a poorly balanced page, 137, 139
knife on mitering-machine, 202
Reversing furniture to prevent riding of
form, 173
Revise, pulling a, 30
Ribs on linotype slugs, 11
Riding of forms, 172, 173, 184
Ring drawn around a contraction, abbre-
viation, or an ampersand, 47
Rio Grande, 70
Rollers, 224
and gudgeons, not of same diameter, i58
composition of, 224
cut by perforaling-rule, 244
deleterious effect of ink on, 224
for ditlerent seasons, 224
in good conditions, how to tell, 224
marking of, 225
shrinking of, 224
sliding contact of, 168
Roller-bearers, 224
Roller-pins, wearing of, 168
Roller-stock keyed to gudgeons, 167
Roller-track, gluing cardboard to, 168
Roman type, 74
Rosin-oil, 233
Round serifs, 79
Rounding of type from soft packing, 227
Rouse or American Slug-cutter, 199
Rubbing rules on the stone, ^2
Rule, 104
burr on, 202, 203
dishing of, 199
doubling-up, 106
in a job part of the ornamentation, 104
job by four different methods, 142
job, slurring of, 242
job, two sections locked in one form, 170
Linotype, 104
Monotype, 104
Ruled blank, first step in setting, 143
blanks, hand-set, 143
job, planning a, 143
job, setting a, 143, 146
Rules aligned with type, 103
and type to align at bottom, 103
butted, 107
for spacing, 17
Running down of composition rollers, 224
matter around irregularly shaped cuts, 136
type around cuts, 153
type around cut, cutting pattern for, 136
S as an illustration of optical illusion, 83
Saddle-stitched. 176
Safety device for job press, Sylvester, 248
devices, 247
first, 223
Salient features of a job. selecting the, tot
Sandpaper as an aid in \dthdrawing sheets
from press, 236
Sans-serif, 73
Saving cord for future use, 30
Saviour with a u. 70
Saw-Trimmer, Miller. 157
Scoring, e.xplanation of term, 244
printing, cuttins, and perforating at one
operation, 24s
3i8
INDEX
Screen, halftone, 258
Script type, 75 _
Secret (if (ihtainiiiK tiood jiroofs, 24
Selectiii.i; the s:iHent features i)f a j(il), loi
Selettii)n of rule for a job, lo.)
Self-spacing table, siiecinieii of. 148
Sellini; composition o]i a s(|uare~incli basis. ,sy
Semicolon and (juolatioii marks used to-
gether, 56
Semicolon, uses of, 56
Sentence improperly iiunctuated, 51
I>roperly puncluatecl. 51
Separatin;^; letters wliile (Hstributing t3'pe, 55
Serif, 77
probable orif,'in of, 77
the dominalini,' feature of a letter, 78
Serifs, olibslyle and modern com]jared. 78
Serviceability of brass rule, 104
of lead rule, 104
''Set" of knife on miterin.u'-machine, 201
Scttinf; a blank-book headin;,', use of ruled
sheet in, 154
a job, 116
a job in two sections to obtain ]jerfect
joints, 109
a register job, 112
a ruled job, i.}5, 146
and registering ty[)e to horizontal lines, 154
more than one column in a single measure,
1.52
rule work. Monotype method, 1.^7
tables and other intricate matter, 141
tables to even multiples, 146
tyi>e,_i5 .
tyi)e in circles, 158
type in narrow measure, 149
Shades, mi.Nini;, 257
Shape harmony, loi
job lackini; in, is6
Shape of ornamental ion, 99
Shaving letter-, 10,5
Sheet, bowing a, 2,54
Hying a, 2,, ;, 2 i,^
Sheet wise. 17'). iSi
Shifting bars. 18^
Short '/■"I'l", TT.
Shrinking of furniture. 225
of rollers. 224
Side-face or clwnr.fered rule, loG
Sierra .Vevada, 70
Siu'iiatures. 19,;
Simplicity of modern composition, 99
Single measure, setting more than one
column in, i:;2
Single quotatioiK. 59, fio
Si.xteen, lay of the, 192
Size type to be used, i2r
Sized-and-supercalendered pajiers, 271
Sizes of envelofies, 279
of papers. 27,i, 274
01 ^pac:-. 7
Skeleton grippers. 22^
Skclrloni/inL;. 109 1 1 i
for two cohirs. i lo
no need to. when i(.b is to lie elect rot\]i<Ml.
I I [
^li'lin:,' contart of rollerh. iCS
--liding l\pe of platen pri'-s. .' _• i
--liliping of paper o\(t fai e of type on g.dley-
press. 25
"■lipsheetinu'. •:;7
>littint;, 2.i4
Sloping or oblique serifs, 79
Slug, Linotyi>c, 209
Slug-cutter, Rouse or American, 199
Slugs, tie-up, 186
Slurring, 242
of rule jobs, 242
Soaking type in lye-water. .52
Soda iirocess, 264
Sodium silicate, use of, for embossing, 243
Soft ink, use of, 226
Soft liacking, 226
Solid matter. 10. ^9
Soluble water-gla.ss, 2J 5
Sort, 8r
Sorting leads .and slugs, 35
Source of dirty quad-boxes, 18
Space, white, use of, yo
Space-bands, Linoty[)e, 210
Spaces alongside of tyjje, 18
of dilTerent sizes, inter-relation of, 151
point-thick, iij, 150
sizes of, 7
thickness of, 8
Spacing before colon, semicolon, interroga-
tion mark, and exclamation mark, 18
condensed type, 102
extended type, 102
job type, 102
letters. 102, 10.5
of lines, 10
of words when lines stand alone, 102
words in cajiitals, 102
words with sloping letters, 102
words with straiglit letters, 102
Specimen of Hodoni Alodern, 79
Caslon Old-style, 79
('heltei\ham, 80
Clearface, 80
I'Orum Title. 76
gothic ty]ie. 74
harmony and ajiiiropriatcness, 88
Kennerley, 7(1
old-style italic type, 7.5
old-style tyjie. 74
panel groujiing. 9,5
poorly balanced job, 8t)
poorly Ijalanced iiagc, 92
Scotch-face Roman, 77
script ty|)e, 75
self-spacing table, 148
text type, 7,s
well-balanced job, 86
well-balanced page. 92
Specimen showing use of three-point bevel
rule, 9,^
Specimens of Hodoni type, 75. 77
br.ass rule. 105
inharmonious groupings. 8g
statement headin.gs, 123
swash letters. 82
Spri.-imens. reset, in "'I'lic Inland Printer,"
124
Spelling out of numbers, 71
Spoilage, allowance for. 2S0
Spoiling job by jirinting on wrong side of
paper. 2S''>
make-ready. 2 2f')
proof by improper use of proof-jilaner. 24
Spotting U]i. 227
use of I'Vench folio. 228
Siiot-up, 227
Springiness or ''give." 112, i()7
TXDKX
319
S(]uarc effect, loj
ornament, 99
S<)u;iring the form. 172
S<iueeze. allowance for, 112. 146, 170
Standardizing i)r()])ortions. 96. 97
Slaleniont, iirofessional, 130
Stationery, olTice, loi
Steel cuttinK-rnle. .'44
rule, how to cut, njcS
Stephens's Multio-Hcxset Quadrats, 144
>-tet marie, 47
Still ink, use of. 226
Stock, adai)tin,L; ink to, 254
Straifiht matter. ,vS
Slrawhoanl ior cleaning rules. 3;
Stult, .'64
Style of the oft'ice. 44, 69
Substance numlx;r for_ paper. 274
Success, elements of, in a job, 102
Succession of the same word on more than
two lines, 70
Sulphite process, 264
Swash letters, 82
Sylvester safety device for job press, 24S
Symbols employed in proofreading, 46
System, lyiiotabular. 141
T
Table, castinj; of a, 147
liand-set, 108
of projtortions, 95
of rates per scjuare inch for computing
value of composed type, 40
of symbols employed in proofreadin;:, 46
showint; thickness of spaces. ,S
showini; wei.s-'hts of book p,ijx;rs. 277
showin,;; weights of flat papers, 276
Tabular matter, need for skill in setting, 141
work. Linotype, 211
Tack t)f ink, 255
'I'alking-niachine disk, use of. for emljossing-
counler. 243
Tally -card, cutout for, 160
Temi)erature. pressroom. 254
Testing a form, 167
Text and gothic, use of, together, 87
and initial in harmony. 99
from ecclesiastical sources. 7,5
letter as the main feature of job, 87
type, 73
type for ecclesiastical purposes, 91
Thickness of spaces, 8
Thick-sjiace, 7
Thin space before colon, semicolon, interro-
.gation mark, and exclamation mark. 18
Things to be kept in miiul when planning
a jol), loi
Three-color process work. 259
Three-em space, 7
Three-point rule a multiple of pica. 106
Three-point space of eight -pi>i:it, 9. 150
Throwing or dropi)ing ty[)c into case. .S5
Tie-up slugs. 186
Tightening (juoiris. 167
Tilting i)rool-planer. 24
Pints, mixing. 257
Titles, abbreviated, 70
To detect inequality of indention on proof, 50
determine charging rate per square inch. 40
imd co>l of cue xjuare mcti of any size
type. 40
Tone. 8i, 87
grav, 87
heavy, 87
uniformity of. throughout job, 87
Top of chase. 18,5
Treatment of a menu. 132
Tre/.ise on o|)tical center, 85
on panel grouping. 91
Trial im[)ression, the, 22S
Trim, i8i
Trimming m.'iterial on milering-machine, 202
to gauge on mitering-machine. 203. 204
'Troubles with black ink, how to overcome,
Troublesome corners. 170
material, 112
True art not based on mathematics, 94
Tumbling. 193
Turning one type face into another. 78
'Twelve, lay of the. x88, 1S9
Twisting i)lates into register. 168
Two-color job with type all in one form, 246
Two colors, skeletonizing for, 1 10
'Two-letter division, 63
Two-on, 194
'Tying up a job, 19, 21
Tympan, 223
arranging the, 228
hard, 226
soft, 226
the, 226
Tympan-bale, which one to open, 230
'Tymiian-gauge, 231
'Type adapted to i)aper. 75
and rules to align at bottom, 105
calculations, 36
distribution of, :ii
faces, 73
faces, general classification. 73
families, 80
family, adhering to one. 87
fitting on a mitering-machine, 205
for ecclesiastical purposes, 91
for narrow measures, loi
for wide measures, loi
groups, balancing of. 85
matter against cuts. 156
of maximum legibility. 80
olT its feet, 21
punching through i)aper when pulling
proof, 23
rounding of, from soft packing, 227
same shape as job. loi
size to be used, 121
sizes, new and old systems compared, 5, 6
sizes, relation of. 90
stuily, pi as an aid to. 81
systems, 6
to be set nick up. 15
Type-casting machines. 218
Type-high, 1G7
machines. 206
Tyijical order-blank. 117
'Typographical hash, »o
Typography, bad. to mix old-style ami
modern tyi)e, 79
Typotabular method of securing definite
number of iioints between lines, 143
'Typotabular rule job, 142
Typotabular squares. 141
'Tvpotabular svstcm. i.ii
Tyiiotect. 84
320
IXJJKX
V
Underlay, jj>s
UndcrliiiiriL: of uoriU in copy. 45
Uniform sjiai inu', 17
Uniformity of tone tlirouLihont jolj. 87
Unit, casting' type to. .)
Monotype, 213
Units. Iionler, how to make u[). in,
Unwritten laws of ty|)ot,'raphy. 90
Uprif^lit mitcrin^'-machine, (ieMTiiiti<m of, 200
201
Use of comma before conjuncti<>n. ; ;, ;.i
comma in amounts of five tiLjiire.-, 71
four fixtures, 71
condensed type. loi
figures for number>. 7 i
frisket, 241, 244
gummed paper for hohlinu' cur\ed lii.e
in position, 151J, 160
leads to make type lit space. ;S
period with Roman numeral- and
Aral)ic liuures. 57
pin in resist erinu', 242
rejilet. iSq
rule in electrotvped iob, 107
ruled sheet in settin- a bl
headln.;. 1 1 1
tliin paper when makim: up
II . .
two-em furniture whi'n t\-in.
job, 2,
wliitc sp.'icc, i)o
Uses of the a[)(istrop!ie, 59
brackets. ('12
caret, 47
colon, it). 57
comma. =;i ^4
dasli, 5 1 .^G
exclam.ation mark, Ctx
hyphen, ^S
interro},'ation marlc. Go. 61
parentheses, Ct:
period. ". ^S
quota! ion mark-, vj. ''>t
semicolon, ;(')
Usinu' rule with type, iir^ner at
wav,-. iQ^.
\'. the old lor;n of t!i.- eapital U
\anilercook proof-jire--. 2S
\'arious parts of a form, iSl
;-bo.,k
-tick,
bulky
\'arnish. 25,s
\'arnishes of ditTerent consistencies. 25,5
\ehicle for carrying pigment iu i)rinting-ijlk,
X'erify divisions of words. 50
X'ictoria I'ress. 168
\'iscosity, 25,^
\' sha[)ed slit in draw-sheet. 2s,i
W
Wad of ixiper for plu^gin;,' ([uoins, 170
Warped wooden furniture, 172, 174
Washing; rollers, kerosene best material for,
24 0
W asliin^' up, 246
\\'ashinf;ton hand-press, 27
Water on wooden furniture. 172
Watermark, 270
\\'a.\-en;rr.avin^' effect. loij
method of obtaining a ruled job, 146
rule job. 142
W'eariiiL; of roller-pins, 168
Weights of [lapor, 274
Well-lxdanced j.a.u'e, 1,55
W ell-jiroportioned i)ages, 97
Wettin,' tvpe [irior to distribution, 33
W hat size type shall 1 use ? 37
Which way type is to Ije set, designating.
Ill)
White paper, black ink on, ijo
White s])aee, 90
around cuts, allowance of, 156
use of, 90
Widtli to length, relation of. 94. 95
Wii)iiig around presses 249
Wire side of [)a|)er. 246
Wiring through tin- side, 176
Wooden furniture. 172. i.Sj
tour-em, not S(|\iare. 172, 1,84
warped. 172. 17.;
water on. 1 72
Wooden (|Uoins. in ;
Wood-pul|). chemicid, 264
tnechanie.d. 2IM
Words, divi-ion of. u ^ h^
of one syllable cannot be divide.!. C, .
Work ■aiid-t\irn form. 1711. 1 s 1
Workin- by the piece. 4S
Workinen of mediocre ability. 84
Writing-. 274
Wrong font. 81
Cor
i;ie
I'rii
by b|.: u \uoxiii ,v Co.. .\cw ^ >.rk
g by (ooio.i; J. JoHNsrox. .\c\v \'ork
iii R« I'ki.niim; Ibus!,, .\ew York
I M 1; M 1: 1 II' 11)1 -1 !!■ J' 1. ( ' i s , ]■- : -.
\c^\ \'..ik
University of California
SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY
305 De Neve Drive - Parking Lot 17 • Box 951388
LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA 90095-1388
Return this material to the library from which it was borrowed.
iyOi\i-REI\IEWABLE
DEC 1 6
2004
DUE 2 WKS FROM DATE RE;CEIVED
FEB
'005
"Vr
3 1158 00336 6852
■^i^A,
1 !
mmw